P U B L I C AT I O N NUMBER; 10515-0109^100

M AY 2 0 1 0
R e v. N

Ta c t i c a l R a d i o P r o d u c t s

A N / P R C - 11 7 F ( V ) ( C )
M A N PA C K RADIO

O P E R AT I O N M A N U A L

^ assuredcommunications'

The materia! contained herein Is subject to U.S. export approval.

No export or re-export is permitted without written approval from the U.S. Government.
 H A R R I S

LIMITED FIVE YEAR WARRANTY

HARRIS CORPORATION (RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION)
FROM HARRIS TO YOU - This warranty is extended to the original buyer and applies to all Harris Corporation, RF Communications
Division equipment purchased and employed for the service normally intended, except those products specifically excluded.

NOTE: Terms and conditions of the standard warranty may be superseded by the terms and conditions of your contract.

WHAT WE WILL DO - If your Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division equipment purchased from us fails in normal use because
of a defect in workmanship or materials within five years from the date of shipment, we will repair or replace (at our option) the equipment
or part without charge to you, at our authorized repair center or factory.

WHAT YOU MUST DO - You must notify us promptly of a defect within five years from date of shipment. Assuming that Harris concurs
that the complaint is valid, and is unable to correct the problem without having the equipment shipped to Harris:

• Customers with equipment purchased for use outside the United States must obtain a Retum Material Authorization (RMA)
Number for the return of the defective equipment or part to our factory in Rochester, NY, U.S.A., for repair or replacement.
You must prepay all transportation, insurance, duty and customs charges. We will pay for return to you of the repaired/
replaced equipment or part, C.I.F. destination: you must pay any duty, taxes or customs charges.
• Customers with equipment purchased for use in the United States must obtain an RMA number, properly pack, insure,
prepay the shipping charges and ship the defective equipment or part to our factory or to the Authorized Warranty Repair
Center indicated by us.

Harris Corporation Telephone: (585) 242-3561 Toll-free telephone number: (866) 264-8040
RF Communications Division Facsimile: 585-242-4483 https://premier.harris.com/rfcomm
Product Service http://www.harris.com
1680 University Avenue
Rochester, NY 14610, U.S.A.

Harris will repair or replace the defective equipment or part and pay for its return to you, provided the repair or replacement is due to a
cause covered by this warranty.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED - We regret that we cannot be responsible for:

• Defects or failures caused by buyer or user abuse or misuse.

• Defects or failures caused by unauthorized attempts to repair or alter the equipment in any way.

• Consequential damages incurred by a buyer or user from any cause whatsoever, including, but not limited to transportation,
non-Harris repair or service costs, downtime costs, costs for substituting equipment or loss of anticipated profits or revenue.
• The performance of the equipment when used in combination with equipment not purchased from Harris.

• H A R R I S M A K E S N O O T H E R W A R R A N T I E S B E Y O N D T H E E X P R E S S W A R R A N T Y A S C O N TA I N E D H E R E I N . A L L

E X P R E S S O R I M P L I E D WA R R A N T I E S O F F I T N E S S F O R A PA R T I C U L A R P U R P O S E O R M E R C H A N TA B I L I T Y A R E
EXCLUDED.

SERVICE WARRANTY - Any repair service performed by Harris under this limited warranty is warranted to be free from defects in material
or workmanship for sixty days from date of repair. All terms and exclusions of this limited warranty apply to the service warranty.

IMPORTANT - Customers who purchased equipment must obtain an RMA before shipping the defective equipment to us. Failure to obtain
an RMA before shipment may result in a delay in the repair/replacement and return of your equipment.

IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS - Concerning this warranty or equipment sales or services, please contact our Product Service
Department.
 P U B L I C AT I O N N U M B E R : 1 0 5 1 5 - 0 1 0 9 - 4 1 0 0
M AY 2 0 1 0
Rev.N

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
M A N PA C K R A D I O

O P E R AT I O N M A N U A L

The material contained herein is subject to U.S. export approval. No export or

re-export is permitted without written approvai from the U.S. Government.

Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such
information and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated
or distributed without the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, RF
Communications Division, 1680 University Avenue, Rochester, New York 14610-1887.

Copyright © 2010
By Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved

Firmware Version: 6.0.1.5 (10513-8001-19)

f fi R R i S '
HARRIS C O R P O R AT I O N RF C O M M U N I C AT I O N S DIVISION
1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 585-244-5830. Fax: 585-242-4755. http://www.harris.com
 Order radio accessories and anciliaries online with

eHarhs-RF ^ assuredcommunications'

U.S. Department of Defense customers can https://premier.harris.com/rfcommsales

order accessories and anciliaries online for Harris
radio products anytime, anywhere. Gain secure,
immediate access with your '.mil' email address.
Shipping Is available to any U.S. address only.

Easy-to-use features make ordering

online fast and simple:

✓ Search for products by keyword,

part number, or NSN

✓ View estimated lead times

✓ Place an order by credit card

✓ Create a quote
Sign up today to place orders at eHarris-RF!

I ) ) ) ) I M ) ) ) ) ) ) ) i I I I M i I I ) ) ) ) I M M I I ) M M I ) )
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

Page

CHAPTER 1 - EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL
ACRONYMS
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
OPTION VALIDATION MATRIX (OVM)
F E AT U R E S
C A PA B I L I T Y C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S
LOS Fixed Frequency PT
LOS Fixed Frequency CT
LOS HPW Data Messaging
C O M S E C O TA R a n d O TAT
SINCGARS Frequency Hopping
HAVEQUICK Frequency Hopping
D e d i c a t e d U H F S AT C O M
MIL-STD-188-181B, 5 kHz, and 25 kHz UHF SATCOM
H P W S AT C O M D a t a
D A M A U H F S AT C O M
D A M A R e v. A F e a t u r e s
Integrated Waveform (IW)
Summary of IW Capability
Overview of IW Use
S I C
Scan
Retransmit
Clone Mode
Beacon Mode
Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU) AM-7588A/RC-103(V)1, AN/VRC-103(V)1
Frequency Output
PTT Data Keying
CTI
Mute Data Audio in the Handset

CHAPTER 2 - SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

I T E M S I N C L U D E D W I T H T H E A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F. .
ANTENNA DESCRIPTIONS
SYSTEM SETUP PROCEDURES
I N S TA L L AT I O N O F R T F I N T O O P T I O N A L VA U ,
SYSTEM TEARDOWN PROCEDURES
STORAGE GUIDELINES
ACCESSORIES
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Paragraph

C H A P T E R 3 - O P E R AT I O N

INTRODUCTION
CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
A N / P R C - 11 7 F I N T E R FA C E N AV I G AT I O N
Fields
Scroll Fields
Numeric Fields
Alphanumeric Fields
Displays
Operational Displays
Menu Displays
Entry Displays
Information Displays
P R E PA R I N G T H E A N / P R C - 11 7 F F O R O P E R AT I O N
Power Up/Self-Test
Setting Battery Type
ANA/RC-103(V)1 VAU Power Up
Initial Checks
L O A D I N G E L E C T R O N I C F I L L D ATA
Loading SINCGARS FN Fill Data
Parts of a SINCGARS Loadset
AN/CYZ-10 DTD (Mode 2 and Mode 3)
AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer Device (DTD) (Mode 1)
MX-18290 Fill Device (Mode 1)
AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL)
Loading HAVEQUICK FN Fill Data
Common Fill Devices or AN/CYZ-10 using RDS Application Software
Loading COMSEC Fill Data
Common Fill Devices DS-102 Interface
AN/CYZ-10 DTD Fill Device (DS-101 Interface)
AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL) using DS-102
PA S S W O R D S E C U R I T Y A N D N E T L O C K O U T S
L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y O P E R AT I O N
PT LOS Operation
CT LOS Operation
LOS Operation using HPW
Operational Overrides
Display Override Indicators
D E D I C AT E D U H F S AT C O M O P E R AT I O N
Typical UHF SATCOM Operation
SATCOM 1818 Data Operation using KG-84 COMSEC and CPM ...
Dedicated UHF SATCOM Operation Using HPW
HPW SATCOM Displays
HPW SATCOM Over-the-Air Time Synchronization
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Page

C H A P T E R 3 - O P E R AT I O N - C O N T I N U E D

Operational Overrides
U H F D A M A S AT C O M M O D E O P E R AT I O N
DAMA UHF SATCOM Antenna Pointing
DAMA Version Setting
Initial Operation
25 kHz AC DAMA Operation
Place a Call in 25 kHz AC DAMA
Terminate Call, 25 kHz AC DAMA
Send an Out-Of-Service Request, 25 kHz AC DAMA
Return To Service, 25 kHz AC DAMA Operation
Paging (25 kHz AC DAMA Only)
Send an INFO Report (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)
Start Link Test (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)
Abort Link Test (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)
25 kHz DAMA Operation, DC Operation
Place a Call, 25 kHz DC DAMA
Disconnect from Call (25 kHz DC DAMA)
View Network Status Messages (All DAMA Modes)
Message Indicator Method
View Messages, Options Menu Method
5 kHz UHF DAMA Operation
Place a Call (5 kHz Circuit Service or Dedicated DASA Call) ..
Te a r d o w n S e r v i c e
Disconnect from Call (5 kHz Dedicated Call Only)
5 kHz Message Service Operation
Send a Data Message using 5 kHz DAMA Message Service ..
Receive a Data Message using 5 kHz DAMA Message Service
Logout from 5 kHz DAMA Channel
UHF DAMA SATCOM Options
Save
Net
Time of Day (TOD)
View
MESSAGES
NETJNFO
SERVICEJNFO
TERMINAL
Destination
Code
5KMSG Mode
I N T E G R AT E D WAV E F O R M O P E R AT I O N
U H F S AT C O M I n f o r m a t i o n
Additional Equipment Required
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Paragraph

C H A P T E R 3 - O P E R AT I O N - C O N T I N U E D

3.10.3 Preliminary Steps

3.10.4 General UHF S AT C O M Guidance
3.10.5 IW Operation Steps
3.10.6 IW Net Options
3.10.6.1 Adding IW Services
3.10.6.2 Changing Service Auto-Connect Settings
3.10.6.3 Output Power Settings
3.10.6.4 View Options
3.10.6.4.1 View MSG LOG
3.10.6.4.2 View TSK (Ordenwire) Key Location
3.10.6.4.3 View GPS
3.10.6.5 Changing COMSEC TEK Position
3.10.6.6 Overview of Advanced Options Settings
3.10.7 IW Troubleshooting
3.10.7.1 Radio Remains in ACQUIRING State
3.10.7.2 Radio Remains in RANGING State
3.10.7.3 Radio Remains in IDLE State
3.10.7.4 Radio Displays SATID MISMATCH Warning
3.10.7.5 Radio Disconnects from Service
3 . 11 STC O P E R AT I O N
3 . 1 1 . 1 S T C C o n fi g u r a t i o n s
3 . 11 . 1 . 1 Modem Rate
3 . 11 . 1 . 2 F r a m e C o n fi g u r a t i o n s
3 . 11 . 1 . 3 C o n fi g u r a t i o n F a c t o r s
3 . 11 . 1 . 4 C i r c u i t U s a g e
3 . 11 . 2 C o n t r o l l e r O p e r a t i o n
3 . 11 . 2 . 1 P r i m a r y C o n t r o l l e r M o d e
3 . 11 . 2 . 2 A l t e r n a t e C o n t r o l l e r M o d e
3.11.2.3 Limiting Access to Controller Mode
3 . 11 . 3 STC Communication
3 . 11 . 3 . 1 Voice Communication
3 . 11 . 3 . 2 Data Communication
3.11.3.3 Changing Controller Frames
3.12 SINCGARS FN O P E R AT I O N
3.12.1 MASTER/MEMBER Selection
3.12.2 Start Up Net Setup
3.12.3 Hot Start Net Opening
3.12.4 Cold Start Net Opening
3.12.4.1 MASTER Radio (Net Opening) Cold Start Operation.
3.12.4.2 MEMBER Radio (Net Opening) Operation
3.12.5 Updating SINCGARS FH Fill Data using ERF
3.12.5.1 Updating Master Station
3.12.5.2 Member Station Receive Operation
h^ARmS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

C H A P T E R 3 - O P E F t AT I O N - C O N T I N U E D

Updating Time Errors

Change NET ID in Master or Member Station
Cue Channel Setup
Adding a Member Station to the Net
Non-Net Member Station Operation for Cueing a SINCGARS FH Net ..
Master Station Operation to Respond to a Cueing Station
SINCGARS Data
SINCGARS Data Mode (SDM) and Enhanced Data Mode (EDM)
Ta c fi r e
RS-232
Packet
Selecting Data During Operations
Passive LNE
Operational Overrides
HAVEQUICK FH OPERATION
HAVEQUICK Operational Procedures
Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) TOD Programming Procedures
HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver Operation
C O M S E C O P E R AT I O N
Changing COMSEC TEK or Mode
D ATA O P E R AT I O N
COMSEC - NONE. PT DATA Operation
VINSON DATA Operation
KG-84 DATA Operation
AN DVT DATA Operation
FASCINATOR Operation
KYV-5 Operation
SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA)
OTAR, OTAT, AND OTHER NOD OPERATIONS IN THE AN/PRC-117F
TX AK VINSON, ANDVT, or KG-84
TX MK
RX AK
Cooperative RX AK OTAR
Noncooperative RX AK
RX MK
Cooperative RX MK OTAR and/or OTAT
Va r i a b l e G e n e r a t e
Variable Update
VINSON PT Override
SCAN MODE
TEST MODE (BUILT-IN TEST)
REMOTE CONTROL MODE
B E A C O N O P E R AT I O N
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Paragraph

C H A P T E R 3 - O P E R AT I O N - C O N T I N U E D

C L O N E M O D E O P E R AT I O N
OPTIONS DESCRIPTIONS
Copying a Net Preset
COMSEC Option, Changing COMSEC Type and TEK
POWER Option
R E T R A N S M I T O P E R AT I O N
Black Digital Retransmit Operation
Red Analog Retransmit Operation
Repeater Retransmission Operation
Hardware for Retransmission/Repeater Setup
Frequency Separation
Retransmit Settings
Leaving Retransmission Operation
TIME Option, Setting SINCGARS GTOD, HAVEQUICK, and HPWTOD
GPS Option
SAVE Option
Lockout (LOUT) Option (SINCGARS FN Only)
KDU OPTION SPECIFIC KEYS
Light [LT] Key Operation
SO Operation
Zeroize Operation
COMPUTER TELEPHONY INTERFACE (CTI) OPERATION
A N / P R C - 11 7 F I n t e r f a c e w i t h R F - 6 0 1 0
Hardware Connection
Transport Protocol
To n e s
CTI Operation Screens
O P E R AT I O N O F M U T E D ATA A U D I O I N T H E H A N D S E T

CHAPTER 4 - PROGRAMMING

A N / P R C - 11 7 F P R O G R A M M I N G
MENU TREES
N E T P R O G R A M M I N G C O N S I D E R AT I O N S
C O M M U N I C AT I O N S C H E C K
NORM PROGRAMMING SELECTION
LOS Fixed Frequency Net Preset Programming Procedures
FREQ
COMSEC
D ATA A / O C
S O
Digital Squelch
Analog Squelch
hfAimtS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

CHAPTER 4 - PROGRAMMING - CONTINUED

CTCSS Squelch
CDCSS Squelch
PWR
NAME
Dedicated UHF SATCOM Net Programming Procedures
FREQ
COMSEC
D ATA / V O C
Normal 1818 SATCOM DATAA/OC Programming
High Performance Waveform (HPW) DATAA/OC Programming
S O
PWR
NAME
STC Programming Procedures
Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) Programming Selection
Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) General Programming Procedures ...
To Copy a Hopset
Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) NET Preset Programming Procedures
HOPSET
COMSEC
D ATA / O C
PWR
NAME
CFG
SINCGARS FH Global Time of Day Programming
Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) Programming Selection
Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) General Programming Procedures ..
Single Word of Day (SWOD) Programming
MWOD Programming
FMT_FREQUENCIES
H AV E Q U I C K G U A R D R e c e i v e r
HAVEQUICK NET Preset Programming Procedures
HQ_NET NUM
COMSEC
D ATA A / O C
S O
PWR
NAME
U H F D A M A S AT C O M P R O G R A M M I N G
DAMA Net Presets Programming Procedures
CHANNEL
Channel Number
Transmit Capability
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Paragraph

CHAPTER 4 - PROGRAMMING - CONTINUED

4.6.1.1.3 Constant Key Port (25 kHz Only)

4.6.1.1.4 Login Type (5 kHz Only)
4 . 6 . 1 . 1 . 5 D e f a u l t C o n fi g
4.6.1.2 ADDR
4.6.1.2.1 BASE ADDRESS
4.6.1.2.2 GUARD_LIST
4.6.1.3 Orderwire Encryption
4 . 6 . 1 . 4 Tr a n s m i s s i o n S e c u r i t y ( T R A N S E C )
4.6.1.5 POWER....
4.6.1.6 NAME
4.6.2 DAMA PORT_CONFIG Preset Programming Procedures .
4.6.2.1 COMSEC
4.6.2.2 D ATA A / O I C E
4.6.2.3 CONFIG_CODE
4.6.2.4 NAME
4.6.3 DAMA Destination Preset Programming Procedures
4.6.3.1 5 KHZ
4.6.3.2 25K_AC
4.6.3.3 25K_DC
4.6.3.4 SEARCH
4.6.3.5 NAME
4.6.3.6 CLEAR
4.6.4 DAMA D E FA U LT S
4.6.4.1 OUT-OF-SERVICE
4.6.4.2 PA G E
4.6.4.3 LINK_TEST
4.6.4.4 CALL
4.6.4.5 5 KHZ_CIRCUIT
4.6.5 CODE, Information Request
4.6.6 SCO IMAGE (DAMA VERSION OPTION)
4.7 SCAN PROGRAMMING
4.7.1 SCAN LIST
4.7.2 SCAN PRIORITY
4.7.3 SCAN CONFIG
4.8 PORTS PROGRAMMING
4.8.1 REMOTE Port Programming
4 . 8 . 2 D ATA P o r t P r o g r a m m i n g
4.8.2.1 ASYNC Data Programming
4.8.2.2 GENERAL Data programming
4.8.3 Audio Levels
4.9 SECURITY AND NETWORK LOCKOUT PROGRAMMING
4.9.1 Creating or Changing a Password
4.9.2 Net Lock Lists
 AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Page

CHAPTER 4 - PROGRAMMING - CONTINUED

Enabling a Net Lock List

Disabling a Net Lock List
Viewing a Net Lock List
Security Level
CFIG PROGRAMMING
General AN/PRC-117F Settings
EXTERNAL DEVICES. VAU Configuration
Beacon Mode Preset Programming
FREQ ID Programming Option
MIL-STD 188-181B Frequency Code Programming
Custom Frequency Code Tables (Optional Feature)
INTEGRATED WAVEFORM (IW) PROGRAMMING
Pre-Programming Requirements
Net Programming
SATIDTABLE Programming
Port Configuration Programming
A N / P R C - 11 7 F A U D I O T O N E S
SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA)
EXCLUSION BAND
INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) FOR HPW
IP Theory of Operation
Setup Parameters
PPP Port Setup
HPW IP Displays
HPW IP Routes Setup
IP Network Setup (Only for HPW Nets)
CTI PROGRAMMING
CTI Enablement
CTI Programming for the SATCOM Net
POWER SETTING PROGRAMMING
Power Menu from the [OPT] Button
Power Menu from the [PGM] Button
P R O G R A M M I N G M U T E D A T A A U D I O I N T H E H A N D S E T.

CHAPTER 5 - PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
Troubleshooting Procedures
BIT Faults
Non-BIT Faults
FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE VERSIONS
B AT T E R I E S

i x
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Paragraph

CHAPTER 5 - PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

CONTINUED

Battery Life
Disposing of Batteries
Power Supplies and Battery Eliminators
Hold-Up Battery (HUB)

APPENDIX A

T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
C H ASSIS C ON N EC TOR PIN OU T D ATA
ACCESSORIES
RF-6760W Wireless Message Terminal (WMT)
Cable Assemblies - Audio and Data
10513-0780-A1
1 0 5 11 - 0 7 1 7 - 0 1
1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 7 - A 0 0 6
10570-3300-01
10012-0714-01
1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 5 - X X
1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 4 - 0 1 2
10513-0730-A2
10513-0740
10535-0707-A009
Cable Assemblies - DC Power
10570-0716-AXXX
10535-0708-A009
Cable Assemblies - RF
10369-7212
Mating Connectors
Intercom Set Interconnect Devices for Falcon II Radio Systems
VHF UHF Transportable Antennas
RF-289A VHF Low-Band Log-Periodic Antenna 30 to 90 MHz
Transportable
RF-290 (OE-254)
R F - 2 9 1 - AT 0 0 1
R F - 3 1 8 3 - AT 0 0 1
RF-3080-AT001 UHF SATCOM Antenna Set (240 to 400 MHz)
Other Accessories

X
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S - C o n t i n u e d

Page

APPENDIX B

J U L I A N D AT E C A L E N D A R
MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE FREQUENCIES AND CHANNELS, USA.
TRANSMIT POWER SETTINGS

APPENDIX C

GLOSSARY
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

LIST OF FIGURES

A N / P R C - 11 7 F F r o n t V i e w
25 kHz DAMA Frame Structure
5 kHz DAMA Frame Structure
IW Frame Structure
Retransmit Setup
Items Included with the AN/PRC-117F (Typical)
System Setup and Teardown
AN/PRC-117F Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Sample Volume Control Display
Pick List Field Navigation
Numeric Field Navigation
Alphanumeric Entry Field Navigation
Operational MODE Selection Menu Navigation
Menu Field Navigation
Single Entry Menu Navigation
Information Display
Setting Battery Type
COMSEC Load Menu
AN/PRC-117F Operating Modes
Sample Main Screen Showing a Locked Net
Typical Locked Net Display
LOS Fixed Frequency Mode Displays (Receive)
LOS Fixed Frequency Mode Displays (Transmit)
SATCOM Mode Displays
HPW SATCOM Operational Displays
H P W TO D M e n u Tr e e O v e r - t h e - A i r
5 kHz and 25 kHz DAMA Network State Main Operational Displays....
25 kHz DAMA Service State Main Operational Displays
5 kHz DAMA Service State Main Operational Displays
25 kHz UHF AC DAMA Operation CALL Menu
25 kHz UHF DAMA, DC Operations
5 kHz UHF DAMA Operation, Place a Call, Circuit or Dedicated (DASA)
5 kHz UHF DAMA Message Service Operation, Send a Message
UHF DAMA SATCOM Options
Enabling Primary Controller Mode
STC Primary Controller Mode Screen
Enabling Alternate Controller Mode
STC Alternate Controller Mode Screen
STC Operating Screens
SINCGARS - FH MODE Displays
SINCGARS CALL Menu
HAVEQUICK CALL TOD Sync Menu
HAVEQUICK Mode Displays
SCAN Mode Displays
AN/PRC-117F Options Menu Tree
h^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

LIST OF FIGURES - Continued

Black Digital Retransmission Operation

Red Analog Retransmission Operation
Repeater Operation
Retransmission/Repeater Hardware Setup
HAVEQUICK FN TOD Menu Tree
HPW TOD Menu Tree for User Entry
A N / P R C - 11 7 F K D U B u t t o n M e n u T r e e s
SINCGARS Net CTI Display
SATCOM Net CTI Display
C T I C a l l Te r m i n a t i o n
LOS Fixed Frequency Programming Menu Tree
SATCOM Programming Menu Tree
STC Programming Menu Tree
SINCGARS Programming Menu Tree
HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree
UHF DAMA SATCOM, Overall Programming Menu Tree
UHF DAMA SATCOM Net Preset Programming Menu Tree
UHF DAMA SATCOM Port Configuration Preset Programming Menu Tree
UHF DAMA SATCOM Destination Preset Programming Menu Tree
UHF DAMA SATCOM Default Programming Menu Tree
DAMA Version Switching
SCAN Programming Menu Tree
PORTS Programming Menu Tree
SECUR Programming Menu Tree
CFIG Programming Menu Tree
IW Programming Menu Tree
SA Programming Menu Tree
Exclusion Band Programming Menu Tree
Example Network Configuration
PPP Port Setup Programming Menu Tree
HPW IP Operational Displays
HPW IP Routes Programming Menu Tree
CTI Programming Menu Tree
CTI Programming Menu Tree for a SATCOM Net
TX Power Menu
VA U P o w e r M e n u
PGM Button Power Menu
Mute Data Audio Programming Menu
Replacing Hub

xiii
AN-PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

L I S T O F TA B L E S

Ta b l e

LOS Fixed Frequency Operation Frequency Band Selection ..

LOS Fix Frequency CT Operation Frequency Band Selections.
AN/PRC-117F LOS HPW Data Rates
COMSEC Mode OTAR/OTAT Capabilities
AN/PRC-117F Dedicated UHF SATCOM HPW Data Rates ...
IW Capacity Improvements (Per 25 kHz Channel)
Scan Modes
AN/PRC-117F Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
Battery Type Settings
Electronic Fill Types
Mode 2/3 Fill Compartment Positions
SKL Load Settings
Menu Restrictions with Security Activated
HPW Transfer Baud Rates
25 kHz DAMA Link Test Data Rates
Recommended IW Co-site Antenna Minimum Separation
IW Operation Steps
Adding IW Services
Changing IW Service Auto-Connect Settings
Changing Output Power Settings
View Options
View MSG LOG
View KEY LOCATION
View GPS
Changing COMSEC TEK Position
STC Terminology
STC Frame Configurations
Frame Configuration Guidelines
Baud Rates for SA Data Formats
O TA R / O TAT P r o c e s s
AN/PSN-11 PLGR Programming Options
LOS FIX Frequency Capabilities
CTCSS Frequencies and Designator Codes
CDCSS Codes
5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options
25 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options
SINCGARS Capabilities
HAVEQUICK Capabilities
DAMA SATCOM Service Configuration Parameters
DAMA TRANSEC Key Positions
Net Programming Steps
SATIDTABLE Programming Steps
Port Configuration Programming Steps
A u d i o To n e s
H P W Tr a n s f e r B a u d R a t e s
hfARRIS' AN-PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

L I S T O F TA B L E S - C o n t i n u e d

Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Yearly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
As-Needed Preventive Maintenance
Non-BIT Troubleshooting
AN/PRC-117F Specifications
F r o n t P a n e l J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L C o n n e c t o r
Front Panel J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL Connector, DS-102 Mode Interface,
Front Panel J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL Connector, DS-101 Mode Interface,
Front Panel J2 External GPS Connector
F r o n t P a n e l J 3 D ATA C o n n e c t o r
J4 Front Panel Keypad Display Unit (KDU) Connector
Front Panel J6 ACCESSORY Connector
Rear Panel J9 ACCESSORY Connector
R e a r P a n e l J 1 0 / J 11 B AT T E R Y C o n n e c t o r s
Mating Connectors
Intercom Cables
O t h e r A N / P R C - 11 7 F A c c e s s o r i e s
SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Regular Year
SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Leap Year, 2000, 2004, 2008
Satellite Channel Frequency Code List
Maritime Channels, USA
International Maritime Channels
NOAA Weather Radio Channels
Transmit Power Settings
DAMA Configuration Codes
DAMA System Information Request Codes
5 kHz DAMA Status Messages
25 kHz DAMA Status Messages
AN-PRC-117F(V)(C)
TA B L E O F C O N T E N T S

This page intentionally left blank.

 AN/PRC-117F(V(C)
hfARRIS' SAFETY SUMMARY

SAFETY SUMMARY

1. INTRODUCTION

All operators and maintenance personnel must observe the following safety precautions during operation and
maintenance of this equipment. Specific warnings and cautions are provided in the manual and at the end of this
Safety Summary. Warnings, Cautions, and Notes appear before various steps in the manual and will be used as
follows:

• WARNING Used when injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment is possible

• CAUTION Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment

N O T E Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis

2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

Basic safety precautions consider factors involved in protecting personnel from injury or death. Electrical,
mechanical. Thermal, electromagnetic radiation (EMR), material, or chemical hazards are the most common types
of hazards found in electronic equipment. The following are types of hazards that may exist:
T H E R M A L Bum hazards may exist in the equipment that could cause personal injuries and/or
serious equipment damage. Intemal surfaces of the equipment may be in excess of
65°C, the point at which personnel could be burned. Extreme caution should be used
when working with any hot assemblies (for example, power supply or power
amplifier assemblies). Physical injury or damage may result to personnel and/or
equipment as a result of a reflex action to a bum.

CHEMICAL Chemicals or materials used for servicing the equipment may present potential
hazards. Many chemical agents, such as cleaners and solvents, may be toxic,
volatile, or flammable. If used incorrectly, these agents can cause injury or death.

E M R Overexposure to electromagnetic radiation results from amplified radio frequencies

that may produce a health hazard.

3 . O P E R AT I O N A L A N D M A I N T E N A N C E S A F E T Y G U I D E L I N E S

Good safety discipline is critical to prevent injury to personnel. All other safety measures are useless if personnel
do not observe the safety precautions and do not follow safety disciplines. Once aware of a hazard, personnel should
ensure that all other personnel are aware of the hazard. The following basic safety disciplines are stressed:
a. Read a procedure entirely before performing it. Personnel must always perform each assigned task in a
s a f e m a n n e r.

b. Prior to applying equipment power after maintenance, personnel must ensure that all unsecured hand
tools and test equipment are disconnected from the serviced/maintained equipment and properly stored.

c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.

d. Personnel must react when someone is being electrically shocked. Perform the following steps:

1. Shut off power.

2. Call for help.

xvii
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SAFETY SUMMARY hfARRIS'
3. Administer first aid if qualified.

Under no circumstances should a person come directly in contact with the body unless the power has
been removed. When immediate removal of the power is not possible, personnel must use a non-con
ductive material to try to jolt or pry the body away from the point of shock.
e. Personnel should work with one hand whenever possible to prevent electrical current from passing
through vital organs of the body. In addition, personnel must never work alone. Someone must be
available in the immediate area to render emergency first aid, if necessary.
f. Lifting can cause injury. Items weighing more than 37 pounds must be lifted by two or more people.

g. Some electrolytic capacitors contain aluminum oxide or tantalum. If connected incorrectly, the
capacitor will explode when power is applied. Extreme care must be used when replacing and
connecting these capacitors. The capacitor terminals must always be connected using the correct
polarity: positive to positive and negative to negative.
The next section contains general safety precautions not directly related to specific procedures or equipment. These
precautions are oriented toward the maintenance technician. However, all personnel must understand and apply
these precautions during the many phases of operation and maintenance of the equipment. The following
precautions must be observed:

DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

Never work on electrical equipment unless another person familiar with the operation and hazards of the
equipment is near. When the maintenance technician is aided by operators, ensure that operators are aware
of the hazards.

GROUNDING

Always ensure that all equipment and assemblies are properly grounded when operating or servicing.
T U R N O F F P O W E R A N D G R O U N D C A PA C I T O R S

Whenever possible, power to equipment should be turned off before beginning work on the equipment. Be
sure to ground all capacitors that are potentially dangerous.

K E E P A W AY F R O M L I V E C I R C U I T S

Operators and maintainors must observe all safety regulations at all times. Do not change components or
make adjustments inside equipment with a high voltage supply on unless required by the procedure.

USE CARE HANDLING HEA VY EQUIPMENT

Never attempt to lift large assemblies or equipment without knowing their weight. Use enough personnel or
a mechanical lifting device to properly handle the item without causing personal injury.

HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Specific warnings and cautions are provided to ensure the safety and protection of personnel and equipment.
Be familiar with and strictly follow all warnings and cautions on the equipment and in technical manuals.

PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR

All personnel must wear protective eyewear when servicing or maintaining equipment. Protective eyewear
must be worn at all times when using tools.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
i^ARRtS' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

CHAPTER 1

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

All safety precautions necessary for the protection of personnel and equipment are cross-referenced in the following
list. The WARNING or CAUTION is referenced to the paragraph number where it is used in the manual, and a brief
subject phrase indicating the content is provided. Read these items in their entirety before performing the referenced
procedure.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 1.7.14- Using a Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) with firmware older than version 3.4
will not work and may damage the Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU).
• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - Do not charge, short circuit, incinerate, or mutilate the BA-5590/U Lithium
orHold-Up Battery (HUB).
• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - Do not overcharge, short circuit, incinerate, mutilate or attempt to drain lead
acid rechargeable batteries.
• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - Never expose battery to any amount of water at any time.
• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - If the battery becomes hot, a hissing sound is heard, and an irritating smell
occurs, clear the area until fumes have cleared. Refer to local directives for clean-up instructions.
• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - To avoid damage to hearing, check the handset volume before using the
handset.

• WARNING - Paragraph 2.3 - To prevent electrical shock and Radio Frequency (RF) bums, avoid making
RF power output connections or touching antenna while in transmit mode.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 2.3 - Tuming the adapter body of Very High Frequency (VHF) Blade Antenna can
damage RF antenna connector.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 2.3 - Power off AN/PRC-117F before connecting to J3 data.
• WARNING - Paragraph 3.4.2 - Exercise caution in order to avoid loss of control of the vehicle.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 3.4.2 - Thumbscrews on VAU must be firmly tightened.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 3.4.2 - Do not key the AN/PRC-117F until it has recognized the VAU.
• WARNING - Paragraph 3.7 - To avoid damage to hearing, check the handset volume before using the
handset.

• WARNING - Paragraph 3.7 - To prevent electrical shock and RF bums, avoid making RF power output
connections or touching antenna while in transmit mode.
• WARNING - Paragraph 3.7 - Extended transmit times and/or insufficient air circulation around the radio
may cause the surface temperature of the radio to become hot.
• WARNING - Paragraph 3.9.1 - To prevent electrical shock and RF bums, avoid contact with antenna in
Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) Ultra-High Frequency (UHF) Satellite Communications
(SATCOM) operation.
• WARNING - Paragraph 3.23.4 - To prevent electrical shock and RF bums, avoid contact with antennas in
retransmit mode operation.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ff\RRiS'
• CAUTION - Paragraph 3.23.4.4 - Damage to equipment may result if the retransmit cable is connected or
disconnected from an operating AN/PRC-117F.
• CAUTION - Paragraph 3.23.4.6 - Power off both radios before connecting or disconnecting the retransmit
cable to J3 DATA connector.

• CAUTION - Paragraph 4.10.2 - Do not bypass the VAU and transmit into the VAU.
• WARNING - Paragraph 4.13 - Some of the Situational Awareness (SA) settings can cause the radio to key
and transmit without operator intervention.
• WARNING - Paragraph 4.15.2 - Some of the High Performance Waveform (HPW) settings can cause the
radio to key and transmit without operator intervention.
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4 - Never expose batteries to any amount of water at any time.
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4.2 - Do not crush, puncture, disassemble, mutilate, short circuit, incinerate,
immerse in water, or expose lithium batteries to temperatures above 130° F (54° C).
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4.2 - Do not dispose of batteries in uncontrolled trash.
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4.2 - Do not activate the Complete Discharge Device (CDD) of a damaged
battery.
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4.2 - Battery discharging must be performed by properly trained personnel.
• WARNING - Paragraph 5.4.4 - Do not dispose of batteries in uncontrolled trash.

1.2 PURPOSE OF THIS MANUAL

This operation manual provides the user with information required to support operations and Level 1 and 11
Maintenance on the AN/PRC-117F(V)(C) Receiver/Transmitter (referred to throughout this manual by its common
name, AN/PRC-117F).

1.3 ACRONYMS

All acronyms used in this manual are defined in the Glossary. For information, refer to Appendix C.

1.4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

The AN/PRC-117F is an advanced multiband, multimission manpack radio providing reliable tactical
communications performance in a small, lightweight package that maximizes user mobility. See Figure 1-1.

The radio operates with any of the following battery types:

• BA-5390/U Lithium-Manganese Dioxide non-rechargeable

• BA-5590/U Lithium-Sulfur Dioxide non-rechargeable
• BB-590AJ Ni-Cd rechargeable
• BB-390A/U Ni-MH rechargeable
• BB-2590AJ Lithium-Ion rechargeable

The AN/PRC-117F frequency range is continuous from 30.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz, providing Amplitude
Modulation (AM) and Frequency Modulation (FM) and various data waveforms. The AN/PRC-117F provides Line
of Sight (LOS), Dedicated and DAMA SATCOM and Electronic Counter-Counter Measure (ECCM) Frequency
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Hopping (FH) operation - Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Enhanced SINCGARS
Improvement Program (ESIP) and HAVEQUICKI/II) and is compatible with all tactical VHP and UHF radios.

AUOe/BATA/FIU.
JS 1(RT-1796 (P)/PRC (C)

RECEV
I ER/
TRANSMITTER

CFFo^o oCT

USyoRV
7^) gs') (V
FALCON^ II

Figure 1-1. AN/PRC-117F Front View

1.5 OPTION VALIDATION MATRIX (OVM)

The AN/PRC-117F uses an OVM firmware control to activate specific features in the radio. To determine the
installed optional firmware features, refer to Paragraph 5.3. For the radio firmware level reflected in this instruction
manual, refer to the title page.

1.6 F E AT U R E S

The AN/PRC-117F has the following features. Features can be configured from the front panel Keypad Display Unit
(KDU) or the optional RF-6550M Radio Programming Application (RPA) or RF-6650M Communications Planning
Application (CPA).
• 30.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz continuous frequency coverage.
• VINSON, Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT), Fascinator, KYV-5, and KG-84C
embedded encryption.
• UHF SATCOM dedicated channel operation Military Standard (MIL-STD) 18IB for 5 kHz and 25 kHz
channels.

• UHF DAMA SATCOM: MIL-STD-188-182/183 for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA 183
Rev. -), user switchable with Rev. A.
• UHF DAMA SATCOM: MIL-STD-188-182A/183A for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA
183 Rev. A), user switchable with Rev. -.

• 10 DAMA Network (Net) Presets to allow operation in multiple DAMA nets with different terminal base
addresses.

• Supports Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction (MELP) and Linear Predictive Coding (LPC-10) digitized
voice in DAMA and Dedicated SATCOM operations. Radio autoselects between incoming MELP and LPC-
10 traffic and can be configured to transmit back in same mode.
• SATCOM Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) Ping Test to simplify SATCOM antenna pointing.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION h^ARRIS'
SATCOM Downlink Monitor on main display to alert the operator that the channel is in use.
Custom programmable DAMA SATCOM frequency table, in addition to standard US SATCOM table.
HPW mode for increased data performance over LOS channels, and dedicated 5 kHz and 25 kHz SATCOM
channels.

Optional Internet Protocol (IP) networking over SATCOM and LOS channels using HPW mode with Point-
to-Point Protocol (PPP) interface.
SINCGARS frequency hopping mode.

HAVEQUICK I/II frequency hopping mode. HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver to monitor a separate single
channel UHF-AM LOS frequency while hopping.
25 kHz, 8.33 kHz, and 12.5 kHz AM channel spacing.
Automatic whisper microphone mode (automatic lO-dB boost on low audio input signals).

100 programmable net presets containing frequencies and parameters required to communicate in normal
mode.

Removable and cable remotable KDU including Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with adjustable backlight
and contrast levels.

Removal of KDU containing a Crypto Ignition Key (CIK) serves to protect complete access to loaded
Communications Security (COMSEC) keys.
Built-in Test (BIT) for AN/PRC-II7F operational test, battery check, recall of firmware, and hardware
versions.

Support for interface to an external Portable Light Weight Global Positioning System (GPS) Receiver
(PLGR) or Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR) Global Positioning System unit, for HAVEQUICK
Time-of-Day (TOD) and position location display, or HPW TOD.
Simplex and half-duplex LOS fixed frequency operation.
Crossband and cross-mode retransmit operations.

Synchronous or asynchronous data operation from either J1 Audio Data Fill (ADF) or J3 Data Connectors.
Automatic and manual scan operation of both Cipher Text (CT) and Plain Text (PT) channels on either LOS
fixed frequency or dedicated UHF SATCOM channels.

Squelch modes of analog noise or 150 Hz tone and digital squelch for secure voice.
Transmit/Receive support for Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) standard Continuous Tone Coded
Squelch System (CTCSS) tone squelch frequencies. Tone frequencies are selectable. CTCSS Transmit
Priority feature allows transmission when channel is busy.
Transmit/Receive support for Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) standard Continuous Digital Coded
Squelch System (CDCSS). Digital codes are selectable. CDCSS Transmit Priority feature to allow transmit
when channel is busy.

Operator-replaceable HUB to maintain programmed information when the AN/PRC-117F is powered off.
Front panel radio cloning mode by cable connection.

Programmable Beacon operation in frequency band of 90.00000 MHz - 511.99999 MHz using AM or FM
with swept audio tone and adjustable power level.
I^ARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

• Optional 48 K and 64 K High Speed LOS DATA transmission using Trellis Code Modulation (TCM) and
KG-84 COMSEC.

• Operation with VAU AM-7588/ANA^RC-103(V)l provides 50 watts output power for FM, TCM
(optional), SINCGARS, and SATCOM. VAU operation provides 20 watts in AM and HAVEQUICK.
• SA to transmit/receive encrypted location information over fixed nets, dedicated SATCOM, HAVEQUICK,
or IP data. SA requires an external PLGR or commercial (National Marine Electronics Association
[NMEA]-0183-compliant) GPS receiver.
• Exclusion band feature that prevents operations on frequencies in non-SINCGARS modes (SINCGARS
uses lockout set).
• Power Amplifier (PA) Failsafe feature that provides automatic RF power cutback in the event of amplifier
overheating.
• Voice Priority Over Data (VPOD) setting that allows the operator to key the handset while the radio is
transmitting data and immediately switch over to voice mode.
• Simultaneous Receive Voice and Data setting, which ensures the operator can hear voice while the radio is
still receiving data (VINSON). Works in conjunction with VPOD.
• Battery voltage level display, programmable for specific battery types.
• Frequency Output function that allows external devices to monitor Tx and Rx frequencies, as well as Hop
Mode (if used).
• Push-to-Talk (PTT) Data Keying, which allows the user to control data transmission with devices that use
the PTT keyline on J3 connector.
• Computer Telephony Interface (CTI), which provides telephone operation over specific radio nets in
conjunction with the RF-6010 Tactical Network Access Hub.
• Satellite Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Capability (STC) is a satellite waveform that allows
either a 5 kHz or a 25 kHz SATCOM channel to be divided into as many as 11 voice circuits or into a high
speed data circuit and three voice circuits, thus removing the need to request additional dedicated SATCOM
channels. STC operates in the frequency range of 225 MHz to 511.99999 MHz.
• Integrated Waveform (IW) is a satellite waveform that allows up to 20 users (at 2400 bps) per 25 kHz UHF
dedicated SATCOM channel, using MIL-STD 188-181C and 188-1838. IW provides greater ease of use,
improved voice quality and better throughput than traditional DAMA communications.
• Mute Data Audio in the handset is a feature which prevents data transmissions from being sent to the
handset, thus reducing static noise in the handset.

1.7 C A PA B I L I T Y CHARACTERISTICS

The following paragraphs discuss the capabilities of the AN/PRC-117F.

1.7.1 LOS Fixed Frequency FT

The following are the AN/PRC-117F LOS fixed frequency PT operating capabilities and limitations:

• Frequency Bands:

- VHF Low Band - 30.00000 MHz to 89.99999 MHz

- VHF High Band - 90.00000 MHz to 224.99999 MHz

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ffARRgS'
UHF Band - 225.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz

• Modulation:

- F M - 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

- A M - 9 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

- T C M - 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

- H P W - 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

• Frequency Spacing - Frequencies can be programmed in 10 Hz increments.

• 8.33 kHz and 12.5 kHz AM Channel Spacing - AM mode supports 5 kHz channel operation in addition to
25 kHz AM spacing.
• Simplex Operation - LOS net with the same transmit and receive frequencies.
• Half-Duplex Operation - LOS net with different transmit and receive frequencies.
• PT - Transmitted voice or data is not encrypted.
• PT Squelch - Squelch used in PT voice, PT data, cue channel, and scan operations. The following squelch
settings are available in PT mode:
Squelch Off - No squelch, receiver remains open. Transmit signal will not open receivers on other
radios using tone squelch.
Tone Squelch - AN/PRC-117F unsquelches when it receives a 150 Hz tone. The AN/PRC-117F
can be configured to transmit 150 Hz squelch tone on AM LOS fixed frequency net presets to
support operation with radios using tone squelch in AM.
Noise Squelch - AN/PRC-117F unsquelches when RF or noise is greater than a set threshold level.
AN/PRC-117F will still transmit 150 Hz tone (to inter-operate with radios requiring tone squelch),
if configured.
• CTCSS - Supports transmit and receive of EIA standard squelch tone frequencies in PT mode to allow
interoperability with equipment that uses CTCSS.
• CDCSS - Supports transmit and receive of EIA standard digital squelch codes in PT mode to allow
interoperability with equipment that uses CDCSS.
NOTE

It is recommended that CTCSS, CDCSS, and AM tone

squelch be used only in nets with the same squelch settings.
Use of incompatible squelch types may result in the radio not
being able to receive radio calls.
The selection of certain parameters is restricted based on the frequency band and modulation type selected. AM is
not available in the VHF-Low band. Valid selections are listed in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1. LOS Fixed Frequency Operation Frequency Band Selection

Selection VHF-Low VHF-High VHF-High UHF UHF
FM AM FM AM FM

Squelch OFF X X X X X
Noise Squelch X X X X X
150 Hz To n e Squelch X X X X X
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Table 1-1. LOS Fixed Frequency Operation Frequency Band Seiection (Continued)
Seiection VHF-Low V H F - H i g h VHF-High
VHF-High VHF-High UHF UHF
FM A
AM FM AM FM

Transmit (XMT) AM X X X X X
Squelch (SQL) Tone
XMT FM SQL To n e X X X X X
CTCSS X X X

CDCSS X X X

Frequency Shift Key XXX

(FSK) FM Data
Amplitude Shift Key X X
(ASK) AM Data
Simplex X X X X X
Half Duplex X X X X X
1-10 W Peak Envelope X X**
Power (PEP)
1-10 W Average X
1-20 W PEP X X*

5 kHz Deviation XXX

6,5 kHz Deviation XXX

8 kHz Deviation X X X

25 kHz AM Spacing X X
12.5 kHz AM Spacing X X
8.33 kHz AM Spacing X X
* 20 watts available in LOS mode from 90 MHz to 399.99999 MHz.
*♦ 10 watts in 400.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz.
*** 4 watts in 400 to 511.99999 MHz.

1.7.2 LOS Fixed Frequency CT

The following are the AN/PRC-117F LOS fixed frequency CT operating capabilities and limitations:

• CIK - Key that enables the crypto algorithm. The KDU is the CIK when crypto variables are loaded.
Removal of the KDU disables use of loaded COMSEC fills. Removal of KDU only allows operation in PT
on last selected net preset.
• VINSON - 16 kbps data rate, 25 kHz channel COMSEC (KY-57/58) mode for secure voice and data.
• VINSON PT Override - Alerts an operator that a transmission from an AN/PRC-117F in PT mode is being
received. Digital Squelch "ON" disables PT override and no PT transmissions are heard.
• KG-84A/C Compatible - Enables interoperability with KG-84A and KG-84C. Supports secure HPW data
transmission in FM and TCM mode from 30.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz and AM mode from 90.00000
MHz to 511.99999 MHz. KG-84 mode can also be used with MELP voice in either 2400 bps dedicated
SATCOM or STC operations. Also available in all modes of UHF SATCOM.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

• Fascinator - Enables interoperability with Federal Standard (FED-STD) 1023 Type I Fascinator encryption.
Supports voice only using a 12 kbps data rate in FM on the VHF-High and UHF bands (90.000 MHz to
511.99999 MHz). Shares Traffic Encryption Keys (TEKs) loaded to the VINSON storage positions.
• KYV-5 - Uses keys from VINSON and allows Enhanced Data Mode (EDM) data rates to be selected.

NOTE

This feature is only available in the 30.000 to 89.975 MHz

frequency range. It is designed to inter-operate with
SINCGARS FH data rates.

• LOS HPW - High Performance Waveform mode for increased data throughput over LOS channels.
• Digital Squelch - The AN/PRC-117F unsquelches when CT signal is received. Prevents PT override
operation of VINSON or Fascinator COMSEC when enabled.
• TEKs - Electronically loaded 128-bit transmission encryption keys used to secure voice and data
communications.

• COMSEC Fill - TEKs, Transmission Security Keys (TSKs) and Key Encryption Keys (KEKs) can be filled
from the following devices:
AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer Device (DTD) using FILL (DS-101)
AN/CYZ-10 Automated Net Control Device (ANCD) using Revised Battlefield Electronic
System (RBECS) DTD Software (RDS) (DS-102); SINCGARS Loadsets only
KYK-13 Electronic Transfer Device (DS-102)
KYX-15 Net Control Device (DS-102)
- MX-18290 ECCM Fill Device (DS-102)

KOI-18 General Purpose Tape Reader (DS-102)

- PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL)

Table 1-2 lists the types of COMSEC available in each band.

Table 1-2. LOS Fix Frequency CT Operation Frequency Band Selections

Selection VINSON Fascinator KG-84 KYV-5
(Voice) (Voice) (Data) (Data)
VHF-Low (FM)
VHF-High (AM)
VHF-High (FM)
UHF (AM)
UHF (FM)
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.7.2.1 LOS HPW Data Messaging

HPW is an LOS modulation selection that uses KG-84 encryption in redundant mode 1 synchronization for
increased data rates over VHF/UHF radio links. Refer to Table 1 -3 for HPW data rates. Built-in Automatic Repeat
Request (ARQ) data modem reduces COMSEC overhead by providing black side ARQ processing with automatic
speed adjustment. A separate TSK and TOD synchronization (within ±30 seconds) are also required when using
HPW. HPW only supports data communications and is used in conjunction with Microsoft Outlook-based Harris
RF-6760W-HPW Wireless Messaging Terminal software. Refer to RF-6760W-HPW Manual (10515-0320-4200)
for additional information.

Ta b l e 1 - 3 . A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F L O S H P W D a t a R a t e s

LOS HPW Data Rates

CPM Modem Data Rate

Setting (kbps)
L o w 2 L 3 3

Medium 42.66

6^99

NOTE

Data rate automatically changes based upon channel

conditions.

1.7.3 COMSEC O TA R and O TAT

The AN/PRC-117F is capable of Over-The-Air Rekeying (OTAR) and Over-The-Air Transfer (OTAT). The
AN/PRC-117F supports cooperative and noncooperative receive rekey, transmit Manual Keying (MK) or Automatic
Keying (AK) rekey, Variable Generate (VG), and Variable Update (VU) from the menus available in the function
switch position of Receive Variable (RV). The AN/PRC-117F supports AK noncooperative receive rekey (OTAR)
in the [CT] and [TD) positions when the appropriate KEK is loaded.

To receive a TEK using AK, both the receiving AN/PRC-117F and the fill device attached to the transmitting
AN/PRC-117F must have the same KEK. For AK, the KEK must be loaded into the AN/PRC-117F by an external
fill device. Refer to Table 1 -4.

The following are AN/PRC-117F OTAR operating capabilities and limitations:

• KEK - Used in AK OTAR operations.

• Receive Variable - The AN/PRC-117F is capable of implementing receive variable operation using a
KYX-15 Net Control Device (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 DTD.
• Variable Generate - The AN/PRC-117F can support generation of COMSEC key variables using a
KYX-15 NCD or AN/CYZ-10 DTD.

• Cooperative Receive Rekey - Receiving AN/PRC-117F requires operator action to enable reception.
• Noncooperative Receive Rekey - (AK only) The received key overwrites the current key on the channel
automatically without operator action. The AN/PRC-117F must have KEK loaded.
• OTAT - An additional process of OTAR where a COMSEC key can be downloaded to a fill device after
reception in the AN/PRC-117F. DS-102 protocol fill device is used for OTAT.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION t^ARRiS'
Table 1-4. COMSEC Mode OTAR/OTAT Capabilities
RV Process OTAR OTAT

Radio Only Fill Device Only Both Fill Device and

Radio

VINSON AK

VINSON MK

ANDVT AK

ANDVT MK

KG-84 AK

KG-84 MK

1.7.4 SINCGARS Frequency Hopping

The AN/PRC-117F can operate in SINCGARS frequency hopping mode from 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz.
SINCGARS frequency hopping provides ECCM and operates in VINSON COMSEC mode using a TEK. A
AN/CYZ-10 DTD or MX-18290 ECCM Fill Device is required to load SINCGARS FH data to the AN/PRC-117F.
The AN/PRC-117F also supports SINCGARS Improvement Program (SIP)/Enhanced SINCGARS Improvement
Program (ESIP) features. Additionally, the AN/CYZ-IO must have the application software RDS or Consolidated
Single-Channel Radio Electronic Counter-Counter Measure Package (CSEP) to handle SINCGARS FH DATA.
Mode 2/3 requires Information Security (INFOSEC) Control Processor (ICP) 2.0 or later.

The following are AN/PRC-117F SINCGARS frequency hopping operating capabilities and limitations:

• Net Master/Member - The AN/PRC-117F can be placed in either a net master or net member mode. A
SINCGARS master station is responsible for establishing and maintaining a net of member stations. The
master station normally is the NCS.
• TSK - Used in SINCGARS operations to establish the pseudo-random hopping pattern of frequency
hopping of the SINCGARS net.
• Hopset - The set of frequencies on which a SINCGARS radio net hops. Any of the 2320 25 kHz channel
assignments between 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz.
• Lockout Set - A set of frequencies that are excluded during frequency hopping operations.
• Frequency Hopping Sync Time - The Global Time of Day (GTOD) used by SINCGARS to synchronize
SINCGARS frequency hopping communications. This is usually Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) from
a GPS receiver. An AN/PRC-117F set as the net master is responsible for maintaining accurate GTOD for
the net.

• Two-Digit Date - SINCGARS GTOD uses the last two digits of the Julian date as part of the sync time. This
is the joint US standard. Refer to Table B-1 and Table B-2.
• Local Fill - The procedure used to load SINCGARS TSK, hopset, and lockout set information from the front
panel with an ECCM fill device such as the AN/CYZ-IO or MX-18290. The AN/PRC-117F supports fill
mode I (which handles hopsets. Electronic Sets (ESETs) and TEKs separately), and fill modes 2 and 3
(which load all sections of the loadset automatically) (ICP 2.0).
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
tf\RRiS' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

• Electronic Remote Fill (ERF) - The procedure necessary to load hopset and lockout set information by
transmitting Over-The-Air (OTA). Receiving AN/PRC-117Fs are still required to have the SINCGARS
TSK loaded. When the master AN/PRC-117F sends an ERF, the following information is also transmitted:

Frequency hopping sync time (GTOD)

Hopset Identification (ID) (FOOO - F999)
• Cold Start Net Opening - Method used by the master AN/PRC-117F to initially open a net of member
radios by transmitting OTA hopset and GTOD data over the Manual Channel.
• Manual Channel - A separate LOS fixed frequency required to coordinate cold starts.
• Hot Start Net Opening - Passive method of entering a SINCGARS FH net by locally filling all necessary
FH data and obtaining accurate time from a GPS source. Member stations can instantly communicate with
the master station if set within ± four seconds of each other.

• LNE Mode - A receive function which permits a member SINCGARS radio to enter a SINCGARS net
when its GTOD clock has drifted away from the net GTOD by more than ± four seconds, but not more than
± one minute. This can be used when an AN/PRC-117F must join an existing net using hot start procedures.
The entering transceiver must be loaded with the proper TEK, TSK variable, hopset, and lockout set.
• Cue Channel - A predesignated LOS fixed frequency in the SINCGARS operational frequency range of
30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz that enables an AN/PRC-117F, not in a FH net, to contact the Net Control
Station (NCS) of a FH net. This mode can be enabled or disabled by the user. 150 Hz tone squelch operation,
on the cue channel frequency, activates the cueing signal in all SINCGARS radios monitoring the cue
frequency.

1 . 7 . 5 H AV E Q U I C K F r e q u e n c y H o p p i n g

The AN/PRC-117F is capable of HAVEQUICK frequency hopping in the UHF AM band of 225.000 MHz to
399.975 MHz. The following are AN/PRC-117F HAVEQUICK frequency hopping operating capabilities and
limitations:

• TOD - Allows for synchronization of all AN/PRC-117Fs in a HAVEQUICK net. UTC is required and is
best received from systems using GPS.
• WOD - Configures the frequency hopping pattem and rate. Word of Day (WODs) may vary in length from
one to six segments.
• MWOD - The Multiple Word of Day (MWOD) elements are entered into memory locations 1-31. The
MWOD is only valid on the date assigned to it.
• Operational Date - The TOD message includes the operational date. This information allows the
AN/PRC-117F to select the MWOD assigned to the current date.
• SWOD Mode - HAVEQUICK I frequency hopping mode that allows AN/PRC-117Fs with identical TOD,
WOD, and net number to synchronize and communicate. The date of 00/00/80 is used to set the
AN/PRC-117F to Single Word of Day (SWOD) mode.
• MWOD Mode - HAVEQUICK II frequency hopping mode that has the identical capabilities as the SWOD
mode, and provides for automatic multiple day operation. Up to 31 MWODs can be loaded. The
AN/PRC-117F uses the actual UTC date and time when in MWOD mode.

• FMT - HAVEQUICK training mode of operation that allows operation on a selectable set of five
HAVEQUICK 1 or 16 HAVEQUICK II training frequencies. Frequency Management Training (FMT)
frequencies must be in the operational range of225.00000 MHz to 399.975 MHz. FMT mode still requires
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION h^ARRIS'
a SWOD or MWOD. FMT frequencies remain in the radio after Zeroizing or [CLR]. Uses specific FMT
designated HAVEQUICK net numbers and TOD synchronization.
• Net Numbers - A five digit code that programs the entry point in the WOD frequency hopping pattern
allowing for multiple AN/PRC-117F net operations using a common WOD and TOD.
• Conference Capability - Fully supported through WOD programming.
• Guard Receiver - Gives a HAVEQUICK user the ability to monitor a VHF-HiAJHF AM frequency while
frequency hopping. Monitors a distress frequency or station needing TOD synchronization.

1.7.6 Dedicated UHF S AT C O M

The AN/PRC-117F operates in UHF SATCOM mode using MIL-STD-188-181B modulation, optional Harris HPW,
and optional HPW IP data. It supports encrypted voice and data communications using 25 kHz and 5 kHz satellite
channels.

1.7.6.1 MIL-STD-188-181B, 5 kHz, and 25 kHz UHF SATCOM

The AN/PRC-117F operates in UHF SATCOM mode using M1L-STD-188-181B modulation and optional Harris
HPW. It supports encrypted voice and data communications using 25 kHz and 5 kHz satellite channels.

The AN/PRC-117F in UHF SATCOM mode is compatible with VINSON KY-57 (25 kHz), ANDVT KY-99/99A,
and KG-84A/C cryptographic equipment.

• ANDVT, KY-99 compatible encryption used primarily on 5 kHz SATCOM channels providing 2400 bps
CT voice and secure data at rates of 300, 600, 1200 and 2400 bps. ANDVT referenced data option codes
provide backwards compatibility to 181A only AN/PRC-117Fs for 5 kHz channels. MELP or LPC-10
digital voice encoding with automatic detection and switching for compatible transmission and reception.
• KG-84 compatible encryption is used for data only encryption for data rates of up to 9600 bps for 5 kHz and
up to 56 kbps on 25 kHz channels.
• Autosensing ADF J1 and DATA J3 connectors - Senses voice or data operation to interface with most types
of tactical data terminal equipment and audio devices. Refer to Paragraph 3.15.
• Frequency Code - All UHF SATCOM channels have been indexed to a common Department of Defense
(DOD) satellite channel listing to ease programming of uplink and downlink frequencies. Operating
frequencies are selected by entering the three-digit frequency code. To manually enter non-standard uplink
and downlink frequencies, enter 999 as the frequency code. Refer to Table B-3 for a listing of current codes.
The RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M CPA allows programming of non-standard codes for non-US systems.
• Data Option Code - Depending on frequency code selected and COMSEC type programmed. Data rate and
applicable modulation is selectable by option code for ease of programming and operation. Refer to
Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 for currently available data option codes.
• Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM) - Modulation mode for data operation under KG-84. Allows
autobauding on receive end to select speed selected by the sending station when both stations have a net
preset set to CPM data option for the type of channel being used.
• Adjustable Power Output - Power output adjusts from +33 dBm (2 watts) to +43 dBm (20 watts) in 1 dB
steps to allow for proper output within authorized Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) levels.
• SATCOM RSSl Test - RSSl function is available under the call button in SATCOM net presets to test link
quality. Provides the operator with a relative score from 000 to 100 to aid in antenna pointing and
troubleshooting. A COMSEC mode providing 1200 or 2400 baud must be used to perform a RSSl test. This
is not available in retransmit.

1-12
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

• Downlink Monitor - A SATCOM Downlink Monitor on the lower right comer of the main display will show
BSY when the channel is in use.

1.7.6.2 HPW S AT C O M Data

HPW is a SATCOM modulation selection that uses KG-84 encryption in redundant mode 1 synchronization for
increased data rates over UHF satellite links. Refer to Table 1 -5 for HPW data rates. Built-in ARQ data modem
reduces COMSEC overhead by providing black side ARQ processing with automatic speed adjustment.

A separate Time of Day (TOD) synchronization within ±30 seconds is also required when using HPW. TOD will be
sent over a separate KG-84 voice net. The HPW TOD cannot be sent over the HPW net itself because the time is
used to encrypt and decrypt the message headers. Therefore, the TOD is sent over a non-HPW UHF SATCOM
channel. Since there must already be a KG-84 key loaded for HPW, the net needs to be a SATCOM KG-84 voice
net for transmission and reception of the TOD. After the TOD is received, the user can switch the radio into a data
HPW net.

HPW only supports data communications and is used in conjunction with Microsoft Outlook based Harris
RF-6760W-HPW Wireless Messaging Terminal software. Refer to RF-6760W-HPW Manual (10515-0320-4200)
for additional information.

Ta b l e 1 - 5 . A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F D e d i c a t e d U H F S A T C O M H P W D a t a R a t e s

Channel Type HPW using UHF HPW using

Follow On (UFO) Non-UFO Satellite
Satellite

25 kHz 56 kbps 42 kbps

37 kbps 21 kbps
18 kbps
5 kHz 8.5 kbps
4.2 kbps

1.7.7 DAMA UHF S AT C O M

The AN/PRC-117F provides 5 kHz and 25 kHz DAMA UHF SATCOM operation. See Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3
for frame format diagrams. The AN/PRC-117F has 10 DAMA net presets for satellite acquisition parameters and 10
DAMA port configuration presets containing parameters for encryption type, data rate, and data equipment type.
Fifty destination presets are used to configure the AN/PRC-117F to request services with other terminals in a DAMA
net.

DAMA SATCOM is designed to replace much of the present dedicated UHF SATCOM usage. Its primary purpose
is to increase loading of limited UHF SATCOM channel resources by assigning channels as demanded by terminal
users for their communication needs. DAMA allows several user nets to share a satellite channel at the same time.
Upon completion of communications, channel services are torn down and reassigned to others.

Access to the satellite resources is obtained through requests to a net channel controller. Users acquire the satellite
and log in with a channel controller computer system over an Engineering Order Wire (EOW) secured by a
Transmission Security (TRANSEC) Key (TSK). The channel controller manages user terminals in the system with
a five digit terminal base address. The addresses range from 00001 to 65535 with 00000 reserved for the channel
controller. The net controller keeps track of which terminals are authorized to access the satellite resources and
allocates the assignment of resources based on service type and precedence.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Requests for communication service are transmitted, reporting a configuration code that reflects a specific data
device, data rate, and encryption type, along with the destination terminal address. The channel controller assigns
service between similarly configured terminals if logged in at the same time. Upon completion of the service, the
users tear down the service to signal the channel controller that the channel is free for reallocation. Service
assignment is all based on precedence. High priority users have the ability to preempt or place requests of
lower-precedence users into queue service. DAMA users can expect service delays, but assured access is the primary
goal of the system.

Two user-switchable versions of DAMA are supported in the AN/PRC-117F. Refer to Paragraph 1.7.7.1 for an
explanation of the differences between DAMA Rev. - and DAMA Rev. A.

The following are AN/PRC-117F DAMA SATCOM operating capabilities and limitations:

• 25 kHz AC DAMA - Supports ANDVT 2.4 kbps and lower data rate nets of voice or data using a 1.3 second
duration frame format. In order to support the maximum number of nets and users, VINSON 16 kbps
encryption is only used in dedicated channel requests. Link testing and paging services are provided with
no detriment to channel capacity overhead.
• 5 kHz DAMA - Supports ANDVT 2.4 kbps and lower data rate nets of voice or data. Supports short data
messages of up to 900 per hour using message service. Frame format is about nine seconds long.
• DASA - Demand Assigned Single Access. A process that is only available from DAMA net operation by
requesting a dedicated channel for short communication durations. It is usually for data rates and/or message
rates not supported by the DAMA channel. The AN/PRC-117F is frequency agile and automatically
switches to the DASA channel upon service assignment. MIL-STD-188-181B rules apply for operation on
the DASA channel, and HPW operation is possible. DASA operation is mostly supported on 5 kHz DAMA
channels.

• Channel Controller - Ground control system that controls access to DAMA channels through
establishment of frame format and timing. A TSK is used to secure control signals over an EOW between
the controller and user terminals.

• Circuit Service - Regular DAMA service granted to a terminal base address or net address.
• Network Address - A prearranged group of Terminal Base Addresses (TBA) that regularly communicate
as a net.

• Message Service - An email-type service only in 5 kHz DAMA in which a data message is uploaded to
sender's terminal and packet-transmitted upon being granted service to the destination terminal. At the
destination terminal, the data message can be held until prompted for download or automatically sent to data
terminal equipment.
• DAMA Net Preset - Up to 10 DAMA net presets can be programmed into the AN/PRC-117F. These presets
contain all the programmed parameters required to become net connected to either the 5 kHz or 25 kHz
DAMA channels. Each can use a different TBA, but the AN/PRC-117F can only operate on one net preset
at a time.

• DAMA Port Configuration Preset - After the AN/PRC-117F becomes net connected, these presets
provide the configuration for the desired service in the DAMA net. These presets operate in either 5 kHz or
25 kHz without any reprogramming. The AN/PRC-117F can have up to 10 DAMA port configuration
presets.
• DAMA Destination Presets - The AN/PRC-117F allows up to 50 destination presets to be configured for
all the parameters needed to make calls to other terminals. Destination presets allow a name to be used in
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
i fi R R t S ' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

[CALL] menus for easy selection of desired party. These presets are also usable on 5 kHz or 25 kHz
channels without needing to be programmed.
• Configuration Code - A numerical code representing a specific data terminal type, encryption mode, and
data rate used in requesting service in the DAMA System. The configuration code tells the channel
controller the intended mode of operation and is used to coordinate service request to similarly configured
DAMA terminals. Refer to Table B-8 for configuration codes.
• Terminal Base Address - Five digit numerical code for each terminal in DAMA operation. AN/PRC-117F
uses destination presets to program all necessary parameters. Assigned TBAs are in the range of 00000 to
65534.

• Guard List - A list of addresses contained in a terminal that the user expects to receive services for. A net
address is usually placed here.
• MELP or LPC-10 - When activated, digital voice encoding using ANDVT encryption will automatically
detect and switch to the proper type for compatible transmission and reception.
1 . 7 . 7 . 1 D A M A R e v. A F e a t u r e s

Two versions of DAMA are supported in the AN/PRC-117F:

• UHF SATCOM DAMA: MIL-STD-188-182/183 for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA
Rev.-)
• UHF SATCOM DAMA: MIL-STD-188-182A/183A for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA
Rev. A), supported as an optional feature
MIL-STD-188-182A offers the following enhancements over DAMA Rev. -:

• Shorter throughput delay for voice communications (5 kHz DAMA only).

MIL-STD-188-183A offers the following enhancements over DAMA Rev. -:

• Increases the number of DAMA accesses available by implementing the use of "slave" channels. A slave
channel is a DAMA channel (5-kHz or 25-kHz) used only for operator communications and not for
reception or transmission of orderwire or system support messages. Channel timing is derived from
synchronization with the Channel Control Orderwire (CCOW) on the control channel. This effectively
increases DAMA channel count without requiring additional channel controller modems/radii^.
• Adds an extended frequency ID table.
• Supports interoperable communications among Rev - and Rev. A terminals (as long as a Rev. A controller
is used). This is valid only if using an ODD and EVEN net number to separate the two types of signals on
the same channel.

• Supports new and modified Rev. A orderwire messages.

• New link test data Return Channel Control Orderwire (RCCOW) which provides better
information about terminal behavior.

• Service teardown request (in slot disconnect RCCOW)

The AN/PRC-117F provides a KDU menu switch to easily change between Rev. - and Rev. A DAMA operation.
Refer to Paragraph 3.9.2 for a description of the DAMA switch operating procedure. Refer to Paragraph 4.6.6 for
the programming procedure.

1-15
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.3866 SECOND FRAME

PREVIOUS USER U S E R USER N E X T

FRAME SEGMENTA SEGMENT B SEGMENT 0 F R A M E

U S E R D ATA LOGIN
U S E R D ATA
TIME SLOT USER REQUESTS
TIME SLOT
FRAME SYNC
BIT ERROR
F R A M E F O R M AT
RATE (BER) TRANSMIT TIMING
USER ASSIGNMENTS
TEST OFFSET
MEASUREMENT

Figure 1-2. 25 kHz DAMA Frame Structure

8.96 SECOND FRAME

D U R AT I O N O F E A C H S E G M E N T VA R I E S F R O M F R A M E T O F R A M E

FOW ROW USER

PREVIOUS NEXT
SEGMENT SEGMENT C O M M U N I C AT I O N
FRAME FRAME
SEGMENT

FRAME SYNC LOGIN U S E R D ATA

FRAME F O R M AT USER REQUESTS TIME SLOTS
ROW ASSIGNMENTS RANGING (TIMING)
USER ASSIGNMENTS SERVICE PROTOCOLS
SERVICE PROTOCOLS

Figure 1-3. 5 kHz DAMA Frame Structure

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.7.8 Integrated Waveform (IW)

This manual provides information for Integrated Waveform (IW) operation and programming for the AN/PRC-117F.
This information supports radio firmware release 6.0.1.5, which features simplified IW Network (Net)
programming.

IW is a new UHF satellite waveform that provides several important improvements for tactical operations on both
25 kHz and 5 kHz satellite channels. These improvements include:

• IW significantly increases the number of user Nets that can simultaneously utilize a satellite. This will allow
many more missions to be given authorized satellite time.
• IW is much easier to program and use than Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA).
• IW improves voice clarity through the use of Mixed-Excitation Linear Predictive (MELP) signaling.
• IW increases the speed of data communications.

IW uses new TDMA waveforms to allow several user Nets to share the same satellite channel. By doing so, the
channel capacity is greatly improved and the benefits of satellite communications can be provided to many more
users than previously possible.

IW also delivers improved ease of use, voice quality, and data speed for the individual user, while allowing for
increased sharing of valuable satellite channels. Refer to Table 1 -6 for examples of these improvements.
Table 1-6. IW Capacity Improvements (Per 25 kHz Channel)
User Mission D A M A Dedicated Access

2400 bps MELP Voice 12- 15 User Nets 5 User Nets 1 User Net

Data Transfer Up to 48 kbps Up to 9.6 kbps Up to 56 kbps

NOTE

These are examples only, actual circuit performance depends

on factors such as burst rate, guard time, etc.

The AN/PRC-117F supports services using 5 kHz or 25 kHz satellite frequency pairs (uplink and downlink),
consisting of orderwires, ranging, and user communications. With IW, a channel may be divided into multiple time
segments of equal length called frames. A portion of time inside a frame is called a slot, and slots can have different
time lengths. A slot can be given its own configuration and used as a separate radio circuit for communication of
voice and data or for timing control. See Figure 1 -4 for an example IW frame structure.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.3866 SECOND FRAME

PREVIOUS UC0M1 initial PUFOW M A I N T. UC0M2 N E X T

F R A M E RANGING RANGING F R A M E

SYSTEM FORWARD
ORDERWIRE P L A N N E D U P D AT E
FORWARD
ORDERWIRE

Figure 1-4. IW Frame Structure

Additional information on the portions of an IW Frame is listed below:

• System Forward Order Wire (SFOW) - Defines the start of a frame, announces all services, and defines
the network's master channel.

• User 1 Communications (UCOMl) - Unique pre-assigned service activated and de-activated by the
c o n t r o l l e r.

• Initial Ranging - Used when a terminal first acquires a net. This signal has a large guard time. The terminal
does not require any previous ranging information.
• Planned Update Forward Order Wire (PUFOW) - Contains essentially the same info as SFOW. Used as
solution to SFOW contention problem. This issue can be caused due to satellite propagation delay, or for
other reasons. Monitoring the PUFOW mitigates this problem. The terminal configures itself automatically
to receive SFOWs, PUFOWs or both as required without user intervention.
• Maintenance Ranging - Used to maintain previously-established range. This service has a smaller guard
time since the range was previously established. The terminal uses the ranging epoch to periodically
determine its range from the satellite.
• User 2 Communications (UCOMl) - Separate pre-assigned service activated and de-activated by the
c o n t r o l l e r.

1.7.8.1 Summary of IW Capability

IW is defined by new MIL-STD-188-181C and 188-I83B. When properly programmed in the AN/PRC-117F, IW
supports the following capabilities:
• Use of 5 kHz or 25 kHz satellite channels.

• Use of Harris' ANA^RC-103(V) 1 50-Watt Power Amplifier (PA) or other Joint Interoperability Test
Command (JITC) tested PAs.
• Monitoring of the IW channel controller signal from the satellite, automatically acquiring the satellite, and
then automatically connecting to the voice or data Service defined in the Satellite Assignment Authorization
(SAA).
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
h^ARRIS' EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

• Inter-operates with older DAMA radios if the military has properly planned a Net for this, properly set up
the IW and DAMA satellite channel controllers, and provided the proper information on the SAA.
• Use of Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT), VINSON, or KG-84 encryption.

NOTE

IW also supports an encryption setting of NONE, with the

cipher switch in the Plain Text (FT) position. The NONE
setting should be used when external cryptographic
equipment is being employed, or during maintenance testing.
Actual On-Air IW/SATCOM should never be operated
without encryption.

1.7.8.2 Overview of IW Use

Wherever access to the military's IW channel controller signal from the satellite exists, the AN/PRC-117F (with
v6.0.1.5 or newer radio firmware) can be used in IW mode. IW introduces several new terms and names; two of the
most important are Satellite ID (SATID) and Service. These terms are defined below:

• SATID - the name for the satellite you will be connecting to.
• Service - a five digit number (12345) that identifies the voice or data network to be connected to on the
satellite.

The basic overview for using IW in the AN/PRC-117F is as follows:

a. Receive the SAA message.

b. Load Crypto keys and Satellite Orderwire (OW) keys based upon SAA.

c. Program the AN/PRC-117F IW NET parameters found in the SAA; this includes the SATID and
Service. For instructions, refer to Paragraph 4.11.

d. Connect the AN/PRC-117F's Satellite Communications (SATCOM) antenna and point it to the azimuth
and elevation corresponding to the SATID provided by the SAA. For instructions, refer to
Paragraph 3.10.3.
e. Set the AN/PRC-117F for IW Mode of operation. For instmctions, refer to Paragraph 3.10.5.

f. If everything has been set up properly, the AN/PRC-117F will automatically acquire the satellite and
connect to the Service. The user is now ready to perform IW voice or data operations over the satellite.

g. For troubleshooting tips, refer to Paragraph 3.10.7.

The AN/PRC-117F supports TDM A waveforms that are used in satellite communication networks, where the
AN/PRC-117F represents the terminal segment of the satellite network. Harris STC is a satellite waveform that
offers a capability similar to DAMA waveforms but is easier to set up, operate, and maintain than DAMA
waveforms and provides more than double the capacity of a DAMA waveform.

The AN/PRC-117F supports SATCOM as a single 5 kHz or 25 kHz satellite frequency pair (uplink and downlink).
With the STC waveform, a channel may be divided into multiple time slots of equal length called frames, where
each frame may be treated as an independent channel. A portion of time inside a frame is called a slot, and slots can
have different time lengths. A slot can be given its own configuration and used as a separate radio circuit for
communication of voice and data or for timing control.

1-19
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ifiRRtS'
A preset is one circuit configuration for a radio. A terminal is an AN/PRC-117F in STC mode for a specific circuit.
A controller is an AN/PRC-117F placed in controller mode for a specific circuit. The controller keeps all terminals
in a circuit correctly timed by sending timing control messages. A circuit used for timing control is called a time
hash.

The following STC operating capabilities and limitations exist with the AN/PRC-117F:

• Up to 11 voice circuits, compared to five voice circuits with a conventional DAMA waveform.
• Higher speed data transfer (16 kbps) than a DAMA waveform (9.6 kbps).
• Any AN/PRC-117F STC capable radio with a programmed STC preset can become the channel controller
of the network, which broadcasts time hash messages to keep the terminals in a network correctly timed on
the channel.

• Setup, operation, and maintenance is simple. Setup involves choosing a circuit and a configuration preset.
• Performance is as good or better than a dedicated 16 kbps Continuously Variable Slope Delta (CVSD) voice
circuit.

• STC operation only uses KG-84 encryption.

1.7.10 Scan

The AN/PRC-117F scans up to 10 LOS fixed frequency or dedicated SATCOM radio voice operation nets.

The AN/PRC-117F can scan the modes listed in Table 1 -7. The AN/PRC-117F cannot scan HAVEQUICK,
SINCGARS, DAMA, UHF SATCOM or IW nets. Digital squelch cannot be used. Scanning combinations of CT and
PT net is allowed by the PT override feature of the VINSON and/or FASCINATOR CT mode.

When the AN/PRC-117F is keyed in scan mode, it transmits on one of the following nets:
• The net currently paused on (if actively receiving traffic or still in the retum-to-scan hang time).
• The priority transmit net, if the AN/PRC-117F is actively scanning.
• The net currently being scanned if a priority transmit net is not selected.

The following are the AN/PRC-117F scan operating capabilities and limitations:

• Priority Transmit Channel - The net on which the AN/PRC-117F transmits if the PTT button is pressed
when the AN/PRC-117F is actively scanning.
• Hold Time - The length of time the AN/PRC-117F dwells on a net before returning to scan, even with a
signal present. Useful for monitoring multiple active nets by using a value long enough to determine
receiver of call. It also allows it to continue scanning automatically.
• Hang Time - The length of time the AN/PRC-117F dwells on a net after a signal ends before returning to
scan. Helpful if occupied with other tasks while monitoring the AN/PRC-117F. The radio does not add Hang
Time if Hold Time is reached.

• Priority Receive Channel - The AN/PRC-117F can scan a designated priority receive net. It samples the
priority receive net every other net. For example:
Ch. 4 = Priority receive net
0,1, 2, 3,..., 9 = AN/PRC-117F nets selected for scanning
- Scan sequence: 04142434445464748494041 4
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Manual Scanning - Pressing [CLR|, while the AN/PRC-117F is scanning, places AN/PRC-117F in a
manual scan mode where the AN/PRC-117F stays on one channel until the operator chooses to go to another
channel.

Ta b l e 1 - 7 . S c a n M o d e s

Mode Description
FM (PT, CT) Voice
25 kHz SATCOM (CT) Voice
AM (PT, CT) Voice
5 kHz SATCOM (CT) Voice

1 . 7 . 11 Retransmit

The AN/PRC-117F provides retransmit operations from 30 MHz to 511.99999 MHz, including cross-band and
cross-mode retransmissions.

See Figure 1-5. Retransmissions setup includes a pair of AN/PRC-117Fs connected with a retransmit cable. One
AN/PRC-117F receives traffic and transfers it to a second AN/PRC-117F, which retransmits it on a different
frequency.
The following are AN/PRC-117F retransmit modes:

• Black Digital Retransmit - This mode is used for retransmissions in end-to-end encryption. Radios A and
D are the outstations. Radios B and C are the retransmit radios. The outstation radios (A and D) operate in
CT mode and the retransmit radios (B and C) are in PT mode. When traffic is received by one of the
retransmit radios, it is not decrypted. It is demodulated, then passed to the transmit radio (still encrypted)
for retransmission. This is the preferred method of retransmission as retrans system radios need no
COMSEC keys and pass encrypted digitally interfaced data (encrypted voice) across the retrans cable.
• Red Analog Retransmit - Radios A and D pass traffic in CT through radios B and C which are in CT mode.
One retransmit radio (B or C) receives traffic, decrypts it, and sends it along the cable to the other retransmit
radio. That radio re-encrypts it and transmits it to the other outstation. Red analog systems can overcome
differences in COMSEC keys and/or COMSEC types.
NOTE

In Red Analog retransmissions, the retransmit

A N / P R C - 11 7 F s c o n t a i n C O M S E C v a r i a b l e s . T h e
AN/PRC-117Fs must be physically secured.

1-21
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

RETRANSMIT
CABLE
RADIO A RADIO B RADIO C RADIO D
OUTSIDE RETRANS RETRANS OUTSIDE

NOTE: TYPICALLY,THE OUTSIDE RADIOS (A AND D) ARE ACTUALLY

MULTIPLE RADIOS ON THE SAME NET, WITH ONLY ONE TRANSMITTING ATA TIME.

Figure 1-5. Retransmit Setup

1.7.12 Clone Mode

Clone mode allows for quick setup of additional AN/PRC-117Fs by transferring the configuration parameters of one
AN/PRC-117F to another by a data cable connection from the front panel J6 Accessory connector. Cloning reduces
errors in programming large numbers of AN/PRC-117Fs with many net presets. Clone mode does not transfer
COMSEC fills, FH data (SINCGARS and HAVEQUICK), or Terminal Base Addresses (TBAs) used in DAMA. The
first AN/PRC-117F in the process is set to transmit configuration parameters and the other AN/PRC-117F radios are
set to receive them. Refer to Paragraph 3.22 for operating information.

1.7.13 Beacon Mode

Beacon mode sets the AN/PRC-117F to a user adjustable power level transmit beacon to support AN/PRC-117F
direction-finding efforts. Output signal is modulated by an audio tone swept from 300 Hz to 3300 Hz. The
operational frequency range of the beacon mode is from 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz. Output signal is a swept
audio tone that can be either FM or AM and is presettable in configuration programming. The adjustable power level
of the beacon mode preset allows for longer periods of operation in beacon mode.
§f\RRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

1.7.14 Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU) AM-7588A^RC-103(V)1, ANA/RC-103(V)1

The R/T of the AN/PRC-117F can be installed in the optional AM-7588A^RC-103(V)1 VAU, giving a vehicular
powered mobile capability with increased power output. FM, TCM, and SATCOM power is adjustable up to 50
watts. AM operation with the VAU provides output power of 5 to 20 watts, adjustable in 2 dB steps. Additionally,
the user can configure the VAU output frequency ranges on the VAU output jacks to match the characteristics of all
types of vehicle mobile antenna systems.

Refer to ANA^RC-103(V)1 Vehicular Radio Communications System (VRCS) Manual (10515-0110-4200) for
information on installation and specific details on the function of the VAU. Many VAU programming items do not
appear in the AN/PRC-117F programming menus until the R/T is installed in the VAU.

A
l CAUTION I
Using an R/T with firmware older than version 3.4.0.4, will
not work and may damage the VAU. Refer to Paragraph 5.3.

1.7.15 Frequency Output

The AN/PRC-117F will output Rx and Tx frequency information, as well as Hop Mode status (if in use). This
permits external devices to decode and use this information to track the current radio state. The Frequency Output
feature is provided in fixed or hopping modes of operation and is always on except when the radio is attached to a
VAU. In this case, the Power Amplifier in the VAU will output the frequency information.

Outputs are RS485 data levels and are provided at the J6 Accessory connector. Refer to Table A-8 for pinout
information.

1.7.16 PTT Data Keying

Data transmission can be controlled from the keyline input on J3 DATA connector. This feature can be enabled or
disabled from the KDU or by American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) remote command.
Refer to Paragraph 4.8.2.2 for programming this feature from the KDU. Refer to Table A-6 for J3 connector pinout
information.

PTT Data Keying cannot be used if the Retransmit function is enabled. If both Data Keying and Retransmit features
are enabled at once, the Retransmit function takes precedence and PTT Data Keying will be disabled.

PTT Voice Keying from the handset (J1 Connector) will override the PTT Data Keying function if both are keyed
at the same time.

1.7.17 CTI

CTI is the capability to transmit telephony between distant stations. A station may be a telephone user or a radio
outstation. Calls are placed from a station to either one specific destination or broadcast to a complete network of
radios.

The RF-6010 Tactical Network Access Hub provides the ability to connect a radio net to a phone network. It can
also define radios in a network as phones. The AN/PRC-117F radio supports the RF-6010 Telephone Interface. The
AN/PRC-117F can be used for telephony communications from a phone user to a radio network.

1-23
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION §f\RRtS'
The following CTI operating capabilities and limitations are available with the AN/PRC-117F:

• Phone-to-Net (Radio is RX only) - This is the only telephony operation that is supported. It enables a
phone user to call into an existing SINCGARS or VINSON SATCOM radio net. In cases where the base
radio is configured so that telephony is unavailable (e.g., a data net is selected), the phone user will receive
an audible warning signal.
• SINCGARS - Phone-to-Radio Net Telephony using 16 K CVSD in VINSON or PT (Voice
Telephony only)
• Single Channel Wideband SATCOM - Phone-to-Radio Net Telephony using 16 K CVSD in
VINSON (Voice Telephony only)
• SATCOM-IP Data Transfer - IP data only

• LOS IP Data Transfer - IP data only

• Net-to-Phone (Radio does not support call initiation) - The user may not dial from a net radio to a phone

1.7.18 Mute Data Audio in the Handset

There are radio data transmissions that can be mistakenly treated as voice transmissions, so the receiving radio sends
them to the handset through the ADF port, resulting in noise heard in the handset. This feature mutes data
transmissions so they do not reach the handset. The feature is disabled by default in the AN/PRC-117F radio and
must be programmatically enabled on both the transmitting and receiving radios in order for the receiving radio to
prevent data transmissions from reaching the handset. This feature is limited to VINSON encryption only.

1-24
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

2 . 1 I T E M S I N C L U D E D W I T H T H E A N / P R C - 11 7 F

Figure 2-1 shows typical items included with the AN/PRC-117F. Some models may include additional items.

2.2 ANTENNA DESCRIPTIONS

The Very High Frequency (VHP) Blade Antenna is 39.4 inches (1 meter) when fully extended and is operational
over the entire 30.00000 MHz to 89.99999 MHz frequency range of the radio.

The VHF/Ultra High Frequency (UHF) Flex Antenna is 13.25 inches (33.65 cm) and is operational over the entire
90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz frequency range of the radio.

A Satellite Communications (SATCOM) antenna is required for satellite communications. These are available in a
variety of sizes. Contact Harris for information on available SATCOM antennas.
A N / P R C - 11 7 F ( V ) ( C ) HARiyiS^
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN X

F L E X I B L E
VHF BLADE V H F / U H F
KDU REMOTE ADAPTER
ANTENNA
CONTROL CABLE (A3140084-2)
(10012-0202)
(10511-0704-XXX)

R E M O T E D ATA " Y " C A B L E

ANTENNA BAG
(10513-0730)
(CW.503/PRC.25) Rn--1796(P)/PRC(C)
TRANSCEIVER

H-250/U HANDSET
(10075-1399)

O P E R AT I O N M A N U A L
(10515-0109-4100)

QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE WIRELESS
MESSAGING
(10515-0109-4000)
TERMINAL, HPW

Figure 2-1. Items Included with the AN/PRC-117F (Typical)

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

2.3 SYSTEM SETUP PROCEDURES

See Figure 1-1 and Figure 2-2. Perform the following procedure to set up the AN/PRC-117F:
a. Attach batteries and battery box to AN/PRC-117F. Refer to Paragraph 5.4 for information on battery
life, recharging batteries, and proper disposal of batteries.

A
l WARNINGI
Do not charge, short circuit, incinerate, or mutilate the
BA-5590/U Lithium Battery or Hold-Up Battery (HUB).
Otherwise, battery may vent or rupture, releasing toxic
material that may cause injury or death to personnel.

A WARNING
Never expose batteries to any amount of water at any time.
This could cause a fire or explosion, causing personal injury.

A
l WARNINGI
Do not overcharge, short circuit, incinerate, mutilate or
attempt to drain the BB-590/U Ni-Cd, BB-390AAJ Ni-MH, or
BB-2590/U Lithium-Ion (Li-ION) rechargeable batteries.
Charge batteries per manufacturer's instructions. Otherwise,
battery may vent or rupture, releasing toxic material that may
cause injury or death to personnel.

I A WARNING I
If any battery becomes hot, a hissing sound is heard, or an
irritating smell occurs, clear the area until the fumes have
cleared. The handling of leaking batteries and clean-up must
be performed per local unit safety directives. Get immediate
medical attention for any skin or respiratory irritation. Failure
to comply could cause personnel injury or death.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

NOTE

It is recommended that the batteries be replaced in pairs. New,

unconditioned BA-5590AJ lithium batteries may not be able
to deliver the current required to allow the AN/PRC-117F to
transmit in high power. To condition the lithium batteries after
they have been installed, set the AN/PRC-117F to two watts
power output and key the transmitter for 15 to 20 seconds. Set
the AN/PRC-117F to medium level output power, and key the
transmitter to 15 to 20 seconds again. The batteries should
now be conditioned and capable of supplying sufficient
current to allow the AN/PRC-117F to transmit at maximum

output power.

b. Connect H-250AJ handset to the radio J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector.

|AWARNING I
To avoid damage to hearing, check the handset volume before
using the handset.
To operate in the 30.00000 MHz - 89.99999 MHz frequency range, connect flexible adapter to the J5
VHF-LOW antenna connector. Connect the VHF Blade Antenna to the flexible adapter.

A
l WARNINGI
To prevent electrical shock and Radio Frequency (RF) bums,
avoid making RF power output connections or touching
antenna while in transmit mode.

CAUTION

Attach flexible adapter to AN/PRC-117F by tuming the collar

on the adapter. Tuming the adapter body or VHF Blade
Antenna can damage RF antenna connector on the transceiver
by breaking off the jack lugs of the nested Bayonet Neill-
Concelman (BNC) connector.

To operate between 90.00000 MHz - 511.99999 MHz, connect the VHF/UHF Flex Antenna to J8
VHF-HI/ UHF antenna connector. Antennas with coax transmission lines can be connected with BNC
plug or UF-349 connector-adapter to nested BNC jack. Be sure to observe operation frequency range of
the antenna.

To operate with an extemal Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver such as an AN/PSN-11 Portable
Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR), PLGR-II, or Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR), connect
the GPS interface cable connector to the J2 GPS connector. Harris cable part number
(12005-0730-A006) is required for PLGR interface. Set up PLGR for continuous operation, standard
interface, and one (1) pulse per second for Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Wait for Time Figure
of Merit (TFOM) of four or less before gaining time sync from the PLGR.

2-4
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

The AN/PRC-117F also supports commercially available National Marine Electronics Association
(NMEA)-compatible GPS receivers for functions such as Situational Awareness, that are not associated
with Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) or HAVEQUICK time
synchronization. The requirements are NMEA-0183 version 2.0 or higher. To operate with a NMEA-
0183 commercial GPS receiver, connect the GPS receiver to the manufacturer-supplied Personal
Computer (PC) interface cable. Attach the DB-9 connector of the PC cable to Harris adapter cable
(12005-0740-A006), and attach the other end of the Harris cable to J2 GPS connector.

If operating in SATCOM/Satellite TDMA Capability (STC)/Integrated Waveform (IW) mode (240 to

400 MHz), connect the RF-3080-AT001 UHF SATCOM Antenna Set (or equivalent SATCOM antenna)
to the AN/PRC-117F J8 VHF-HI / UHF antenna nested BNC connector.

To operate with an extemal Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device, connect with appropriate interface
cable to J1 ADF or J3 DATA connector. Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) data devices with
standard KY-57/99 six-pin data cable operate on the J1 Audio Data FILL (ADF) connector. KY-99A
type to J1 ADF interface cables cannot be used. Refer to Paragraph A.2 for information on chassis
connector pinouts.

I A CAUTION I
Power the AN/PRC-117F off before connecting or
disconnecting the DTE interface cable to J3 DATA connector
as damage to the equipment could result.

h. Perform the following procedure to remote the Keypad Display Unit (KDU) from the AN/PRC-117F
chassis:

1. Slide KDU lock to the left.

2 . R e m o v e K D U f r o m A N / P R C - 11 7 F c h a s s i s .

3. Connect KDU remote cable to the male connector on the left side of the KDU and to the
AN/PRC-117F chassis KDU cradle male connector. The KDU has a separate connector just for
the cable on the left side of the connector. Place the rubber dust cover, located near end of KDU
extension cable, on the jack in the rear of the KDU to protect it while the KDU is not installed on
the AN/PRC-117F body.

4. Power AN/PRC-117F to the ON position of [PT], [CT], or [TDJ depending on desired mode of
operation.
5. If the KDU displays WRONG CIK, this means that the KDU is different from the one used when
the Communications Security (COMSEC) keys were loaded. Obtain the proper KDU originally
used with the AN/PRC-117F, or Zero-All ([Z-ALL] switch position) the AN/PRC-117F to
reinitialize the KDU, and then load new COMSEC keys. KDUs are not transferable from radio to
radio once the AN/PRC-117F is loaded with COMSEC keys. If the AN/PRC-117F has the wrong
Crypto Ignition Key (CIK), it can only be operated in Plain Text (PT). The radio must be zeroized
and COMSEC reloaded to reinitialize the CIK.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

VHP BLADE VHF/UHF

ANTENNA FLEX ANTENNA

SLIDE KDU LOCK

LEFT TO
REMOVE KDU

FLEXIBLE

ADAPTER

COLLAR
H-250/U
H A N D S E T

K D U

REMOTE CONTROL
C A B L E

A N / P R C - 11 7 F
. CHASSIS

B AT T E R Y B AT T E R Y B O X

SIDE CLASPS

V E N T

(NOT ADJUSTABLE)

Figure 2-2. System Setup and Teardown

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

2 . 4 I N S TA L L AT I O N O F R U I N TO O P T I O N A L VA U

Refer to the ANA/RC-103(V)1 Vehicular Radio Communications Systems Manual (10515-0110-4200) for
information on installation of the Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) into the Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU).

2.5 SYSTEM TEARDOWN PROCEDURES

Teardown the AN/PRC-117F by reversing the steps described in Paragraph 2.3.

2.6 STORAGE GUIDELINES

Store the AN/PRC-117F with the function switch in the [CLRl position to increase the life of the HUB and ensure
that no COMSEC data is held in the AN/PRC-117F. Store the radio in a secure location, and use local Controlled
Cryptographic Item (CCI) procedures. Store batteries in a clean, cool (not exceeding +86° F/ +30° C), dry and
ventilated storage area.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

Refer to Paragraph A.3 for descriptions of the accessories.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
SYSTEM SETUP AND TEARDOWN

This page intentionally left blank.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

CHAPTER 3

O P E R AT I O N

3.1 INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the operational capabilities and procedures for each mode of the AN/PRC-117F. These
instructions assume the AN/PRC-117F has been programmed for operation. For information on interface navigation,
refer to Paragraph 3.3.

3.2 CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS

Figure 3-1 shows the AN/PRC-117F controls, indicators, and connectors. Table 3-1 describes the controls,
indicators, and connectors.

Figure 3-2 shows an example of the display when the [VOL] button is pressed. When the [VOL] button is pressed,
the display changes to indicate volume level. After the [VOL] button is released, the display reverts to displaying
the battery level.

NOTE

Earlier versions of the radio may contain a [NET ±] key

instead of the (PRE ±] key. The function is the same.

VHP LOW ANTENNA

CONNECTORJ5
3 0 M H Z TO 8 9 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H Z
A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L
CONNECTORJ1 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY(LCD)
VHP HI/UHP ANTENNA
CONNECTORJ8
9 0 . 0 0 0 0 M H Z t o 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H Z

EXTERNAL GPS D ATA / R E T R A N S M I T K E Y PA D D I S P L AY UNIT FUNCTION SWITCH ACCESSORYJ6

CONNECTORJ2 CONNECTORJ3 (KDU)

Figure 3-1. AN/PRC-117F Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

3-1
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-1. AN/PRC-117F Controls, Indicators, and Connectors

CIRCULAR ARROW Key - toggles operational display pages.

[CALL] Call - Initiates the following in each mode of operation:

Line-of-Sight (LOS) AM - Time of Day (TOD) sync
HAVEQUICK - TOD sync and Guard Receiver access
Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS),
Electronic Remote Fill (ERF), and Cold Start functions
Ultra-High Frequency (UHF) Dedicated Satellite Communications
(SATCOM) - SATCOM Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) test, and
High Performance Waveform (HPW) TOD sync
UHF Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) SATCOM - Network
service setup menus
Integrated Waveform (IW) - Allows user to connect, disconnect or view
available services.

[ LT ] Light - Accesses the KDU backlight control menus. Refer to

Paragraph 3.24.1 and see Figure 3-45.
IMODE] Mode - Changes the AN/PRC-117Fs operating mode. Refer to Paragraph 3.7
through Paragraph 3.23.4 and see Figure 3-12.
[SQl Squelch - Accesses the squelch menu for the current net preset. Refer to
Paragraph 3.24.2 and see Figure 3-45.
[ZERO] Zeroize - Accesses the AN/PRC-117F's zeroize menu. See Figure 3-45.
[OPT] Option - Accesses the AN/PRC-117Fs option menus. See Figure 3-38.
[FGM] Program - Accesses the AN/PRC-117F's programming menus. See
Figure 4-1.
[CLR] Clear - Returns a field to its previous value and activates the previous menu.
[ENT] Enter - Selects scroll field choices or locks in entry field data. Refer to
Paragraph 3.3.
[VOL±] Volume - Increases/decreases handset volume.

[PRE ±1 Presets - Scrolls through the net presets. Stops at the top and bottom of net
preset list.
Function Switch

[OFFl O f f - Tu m s A N / P R C - 11 7 F o f f .

IPT] Plain Text - Places the AN/PRC-117F in PT Mode.

[CT] Cipher Text - Places the AN/PRC-117F in CT Mode. Enables the

programmed Communications Security (COMSEC) mode.
[TD] Time Delay - Increases VINSON CT sync time to 800 ms. Otherwise,
functions the same as CT for any COMSEC mode.
[RV] Receive Variable -Transmits and receives crypto variables by Over-the-Air
Rekeying (OTAR) or Over-the-Air Transfer (OTAT).
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-1. AN/PRC-117F Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (Continued)

Control/Indicator/Connector Function

Load - Loads crypto variables and Frequency Hopping (FH) data. Places
Audio Data Fill (ADF) connector J1 into COMSEC fill operation using DS-
101 orDS-102 Fill Interface.

[Z-ALLl Zeroize all - Deletes all crypto variables and FH Transmission Security
(TRANSEC) keys.
Electrically disconnects the Hold-Up Battery (HUB) and turns radio off.
Clears all preset parameters and COMSEC from the AN/PRC-117F. During
extended storage, place the function switch to [CLRj.
A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L ( J l ) Used to connect extemal audio equipment, data terminals, or fill devices.
Also referred to as the ADF connector on the display and in AN/PRC-117F
programming menus.
GPS (J2) Used to connect extemal AN/PSN-11 Portable Lightweight GPS Receiver
(PLGR), or National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) -capable.
Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver.
D ATA ( J 3 ) Used to connect data, remote control devices, and retransmit cable.
VHF LOW (J5) Used to connect Very High Frequency (VHF) Blade Antenna for 30.00000
MHz to 89.99999 MHz operation.
ACCESSORY (J6) Used to connect cables for cloning operations, remote control, and firmware
upgrades.
VHF HI/UHF (J8) Used to connect VHF/UHF Flexible antenna or the SATCOM antenna for
90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz operation.
ACCESSORY (J9) Rear Panel Used to connect control cable for remote operations, cloning or control
interface to Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU).
Battery 1 connector (See Figure 5-1.)
Battery 2 connector (See Figure 5-1.)

B A T T E R Y

M E T E R

04*NET4 ^
LOS VOC OFF FM
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE

[VOL] BUTTON (WHEN

VOLUME PRESSED, BATTERY METER
M E T E R CHANGES TO
VOLUME METER)

04*NET4 ^
LOS VOC OFF FM
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE

Figure 3-2. Sample Volume Control Display

3-3
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3 . 3 A N / P R C - 11 7 F I N T E R FA C E N AV I G AT I O N

The following paragraphs describe basic AN/PRC-117F interface navigation using the KDU.

3.3.1 Fields

A field consists of one or more words, acronyms, or abbreviations that can be selected on the display. The contents
of an entry field can be modified by using the KDU keypad. Non-entry fields cannot be modified. The following
paragraphs describe how to navigate through the different kinds of fields utilized by the AN/PRC-117F.
3.3.1.1 Scroll Fields

See Figure 3-3. Scroll fields are a type of entry field that allow the operator to select an item from a list using the up
and down arrow keys. In general, a value is not entered into the AN/PRC-117F until [ENT] is pressed. If the user
presses [CLR], the value of the field remains unchanged.

A C T I VAT E I N L I S T ?
A C T I VAT E I N L I S T ?
NO
r t YES

NOTE: BOLDED TEXT IDENTIFIES CHARACTERS

T H A T A R E F L A S H I N G O N D I S P L A Y.

Figure 3-3. Pick List Field Navigation

3.3.1.2 Numeric Fields

See Figure 3-4. Numeric fields allow the operator to enter a numeric value. When selecting a numeric field, the
entire field flashes. Once a number is entered, the next digit to be updated flashes. This flashing digit is the cursor.

• As the operator enters numbers, the digits are updated and the cursor advances one position to the right.
• The operator can use the right/lefl arrow keys to move the cursor to the left or right.
• If the operator presses [CLR] while the cursor is not on the first digit, the digit the cursor is on is set to zero
and the cursor moves one digit to the left.
• If the operator presses [CLR] while the cursor is on the first digit, the original value of the field is reloaded
and the entire field flashes.

• If the operator presses [ENT] after modifying a field, the new value is entered into the AN/PRC-117F.
hfARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

RECEIVE FREQUENCY RECEIVE FREQUENCY

030.00000 MHZ 630.00000 MHZ

N O T E : T H E A N / P R C - 11 7 F W I L L N O T A L L O W E N T R Y O F F R E Q U E N C I E S
OUTSIDE OF ITS O P E R AT I O N A L FREQUENCY RANGE. ii7F-iooi

B O L D E D T E X T I D E N T I F I E S C H A R A C T E R S T H AT A R E F L A S H I N G O N
D I S P L A Y.

Figure 3-4. Numeric Field Navigation

3.3.1.3 Alphanumeric Fieids

See Figure 3-5. Alphanumeric fieids are used to enter alphanumeric strings such as net names, security, and
passwords. When selecting an alphanumeric field, the entire field flashes. Once a character is entered, only the next
character to be updated flashes. This flashing character is the cursor.

• Each numeric key on the keypad (except 0) is assigned up to three letters of the alphabet. For example, the
1 key is also assigned the letters A, B, and C. To enter a 1 in a field, press the 1 key once; to enter an A,
press the 1 key twice, etc.
• To advance the cursor to the next position, press another key.
• If two consecutive letters need to be entered from the same key, the right arrow key must be pressed to
advance the cursor.

• [CLR] backspaces one digit and then clears all digits to the right of the cursor.

See Figure 3-5. Perform the following procedure to enter the net name RED;

a. Access the NET TYPE/NAME/CHANGE NAME menu.

b. Press the 6 key four times to display the R.

c. Press the 2 key three times to display the E.
d. Press the right arrow key to advance the cursor one position to the right.
e. Press the 2 key two times to display the D.
f. If any letters are left over to the right of the D, press the right arrow key once, then press [CLR] to clear
all digits to the right of the D.

g. Press lENTl.

CHANGE NAME

Figure 3-5. Alphanumeric Entry Field Navigation

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.3.2 Displays

The following paragraphs describe how to navigate through the different kinds of displays utilized by the
A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

3.3.2.1 Operational Displays

Operational displays show the current radio state and allow the operator to select values for AN/PRC-117F
operation. Each operational mode, except for remote control and test, has one or more main operational displays
(Toggle by using [CIRCULAR ARROW) key).
These displays contain multiple fields that can be selected by the operator. Use the left and right arrow keys to scroll
through selectable fields.
To change operational modes, press the [MODE| key from a stable main operational display. See Figure 3-6.

O P E R AT I O N A L M O D E

Figure 3-6. Operational MODE Selection Menu Navigation

3.3.2.2 Menu Displays

See Figure 3-7. Menu displays are made up of menu fields and allow the operator to select a menu branch. When
menu fields are displayed, use the right/left arrow keys to make a selection. If the menu field is flashing, press [ENT]
to access the menu branch for that field. Press [CLR] to return the AN/PRC-117F to the previous display.

COMSEC COMSEC

GPS POWER GPS POWER

USE i ▶ TO SELECT ITEM USE 4 ▶ TO SELECT ITEM

N O T E : B O L D E D T E X T I D E N T I F I E S C H A R A C T E R S T H AT A R E F L A S H I N G O N
D I S P L A Y.

Figure 3-7. Menu Field Navigation

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.3.2.3 Entry Displays

Non-operational displays that contain only one entry field are entry displays. These displays are usually part of a
menu branch where [ENT] and [CLR] are used to move up and down that branch. See Figure 3-8.

• When the operator first enters one of these menus, the entry field will immediately be selected.
• If the operator modifies the field and then presses [ENTJ, the new value is entered into the AN/PRC-117F
and the next menu is automatically selected.
• If the operator does not modify the field and then presses [ENTJ, the next menu is selected.
• If the operator presses [CLR], any changes are ignored and the AN/PRC-117F returns to the previous
display.

RECEIVE FREQUENCY
030.00000 MHZ

Figure 3-8. Single Entry Menu Navigation

3.3.2.4 Information Displays

Information displays are displays that provide information, but do not contain any entry fields. See Figure 3-9.

V O LT: 2 8 . 0 V NOMINAL
NICAD-OTH NICAD-OTH

Figure 3-9. Information Display

3 . 4 P R E PA R I N G T H E A N / P R C - 11 7 F F O R O P E R AT I O N

The following paragraphs describe the actions needed to begin operating the AN/PRC-117F.

3 . 4 . 1 P o w e r U p / S e l f - Te s t

Pull the function switch and rotate to the [PT] position. This initializes the AN/PRC-117F software and performs a
Power-On Self-Test (POST). The AN/PRC-117F starts on the last selected operating mode. If this needs to be
changed, press the [MODE] button on the KDU to access the mode selection menu. The battery voltage is displayed
to show the charge status of the batteries.

3.4.1.1 Setting Battery Type

The AN/PRC-117F provides a battery voltage level indicator on the KDU display to monitor battery status. Since
each battery type provides a slightly different operating voltage range, the radio should be set for the particular type
in use. This optimizes the KDU battery display and provides a more accurate indication of battery status. With the
proper battery type selected, the meter will flash when battery is near depletion. By pressing the up/down arrow
keys, the battery type can be changed as shown in Figure 3-10. Refer to Table 3-2 for an explanation of each setting.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION tfARRIS'
NOTE

The Batteiy Type setting is only a status indicator and has no

effect on radio operation. The actual battery type and voltage
can be read from Test Mode (refer to Paragraph 3.19).

Any AN/PRC-117F being powered up after being cleared ([CLR] position of the function switch), initially indicates
WARNING BLACK DATA RESET (or NVRAM FAILURE on firmware versions before 3.6). This is a normal
indication. Press any key to continue.

NOTE

Switching the radio to [CLR] clears COMSEC and returns the

radio to default settings.

B A T T E R Y
M E T E R

B A T T E R Y
T Y P E PRESS UP OR DOWN
ARROW KEYS TO
SCROLL THROUGH
B AT T E R Y T Y P E S

04*NET4 ■_
LOS VOC OFF FM NOIS
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE SQL

Figure 3-10. Setting Battery Type

Table 3-2. Battery Type Settings

Setting Function Monitor Range

Generic battery range, also use with VAU or remote power 22 - 32 Volts
supply
N K L N i - C d ( B B - 5 9 0 ) , o r N i - M H ( B B - 3 9 0 ) 2 2 - 2 7 Vo l t s
Lithium non-rechargeable (BA-5590, BA-5390) 26 - 28 Volts
L i t h i u m - I o n r e c h a r g e a b l e ( B B - 2 5 9 0 ) 2 8 - 3 2 Vo l t s

3.4.2 ANA^RC-103(V)1 VAU Power Up

When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the VAU, the AN/PRC-117F indicates proper interface with the VAU upon
initial power up. VAU power up is controlled by the R/T function switch; there is no power switch on the VAU. The
KDU display indicates ALERT: EXTERNAL PA CONNECTED. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE. If this
message is not received, check installation of the Receiver-Transmitter (R/T) unit in the VAU before continuing
operation. Ensure the R/T is properly cabled to the VAU and has the suitable antenna for the desired mode of

3-8
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

operation. Refer to the ANA/^RC-103(V)1 Vehicular Radio Communications System (VRCS) Manual
(10515-0110-4200) on installation and operation of the optional VAU. Once R/T is installed in the VAU, operations
in this manual pertain to all programming and operation except for increased output power levels.

A
l WARNINGI
When operating the AN/PRC-117F(V)(C) as part of the
recommended vehicular system configuration, ensure that
proper caution and procedures are exercised in order to avoid
loss of control of the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in
personnel injury or death.

\A CAUTION I
The radio must be firmly tightened using the thumbscrews on
the VAU. This ensures good connection between the VAU and
the AN/PRC-117F. If the connection is loose, improper
operation between the AN/PRC-117F and VAU could occur,
causing damage to both units.

\A CAUTION I
Do not key the AN/PRC-117F until it has recognized the VAU
as damage could occur to both units. Refer to the
ANA^RC-103(V)1 VRCS Manual (10515-0110-4200) for
information on installation of the R/T into the VAU.

3.4.3 Initial Checks

To begin the diagnostic self-tests, press the IMODEJ button and select TEST. Refer to Paragraph 3.19 for details
on conducting these tests.

3 . 5 L O A D I N G E L E C T R O N i C F I L L D ATA

Operation in any of the embedded COMSEC modes in the AN/PRC-117F requires loading of COMSEC fills. Secure
communications is only possible between stations using the same COMSEC mode and key. Refer to Table 3-3.

NOTE

Common Fill Devices (CFD) include KYK-13, KOI-18,

KYX-15, or MX-18290 units.

NOTE

The instructions provided in this manual are supplied as an

overview only. For detailed instructions on the use of CFD,
Data Transfer Device (DTD), or AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key
Loader (SKL), refer to the instructions manual which came
with the specific Fill Device being used.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to load electronic fill data into the AN/PRC-117F:

a. Place the function switch in the [LD] position.

b. Once the AN/PRC-117F is set to the [LDl position, the radio is offline and the J1ADF port is configured
to interface with COMSEC fill devices. See Figure 3-11 for a diagram of the [LD] menu.

NOTE

Do not connect COMSEC fill devices to ADF connector J1

until the AN/PRC-117F Function Switch is placed in the [LD]
position. After finishing electronic fill loading, disconnect the
fill device before switching from the [LD] position. Failure to
do so causes the AN/PRC-117F to transmit in certain modes.

c. Refer to the specific paragraphs in this chapter for loading SINCGARS, HAVEQUICK, or other
C O M S E C fi l l s .

Table 3-3. Electronic Fill Types

Fill Type Quantity Purpose Fiil Device

VINSON Transmission En 25 Traffic Encryption CFD, DTD, or SKL

cryption Key (TEK) or
FASCINATOR (shared)
orKYV-5 (shared)
VINSON Key Encryption 1 Automatic Keying (AK) CFD, DTD, or SKL
Key (KEK) Over-the-Air Rekey (OTAR) /
Over-the-Air Transfer (OTAT)
V I N S O N Tr a n s f e r K E K 1 Black key unwrapping AN/CYZ-10 DTD only
(TRKEK)
Advanced Narrowband Dig 25 Transmission Encryption CFD, DTD, or SKL
i t a l V o i c e Te r m i n a l

(ANDVT) TEK
ANDVT KEK 1 A K O TA R / O TAT CFD, DTD, or SKL
ANDVT Transfer KEK 1 Black key unwrapping AN/CYZ-10 DTD only
(TRKEK)
KG-84 TEK 25 Transmission Encryption CFD, DTD, or SKL
KG-84 KEK 1 A K O TA R / O TAT CFD, DTD, or SKL
KG-84 TRKEK 1 Black key unwrapping AN/CYZ-10 DTD only
S AT C O M - D A M A - I W - E n - 25 Enciyption of non-communica CFD, DTD, or SKL
gineering Orderwire (EO W) tion control signals
Transmission Security Key
(TSK)orHPW TSK
(shared)
HAVEQUICK Single Word 1 HAVEQUICK I FH Manually enterable
of the Day (SWOD)
HAVEQUICK Multiple 31 HAVEQUICK II FH Manually enterable. Com
Words of the Day (MWOD) munications Planning Ap
plication (CPA), RPA,
CFD, DTD, or SKL
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-3. Electronic Fill Types (Continued)

Fill Type Quantity Purpose Fill Device

FMT_FREQS 16 Frequency Management Train Manually enterable, CPA,

ing (FMT) used with RPA, CFD, DTD, or SKL
HAVEQUICK
SINCGARS FH TSK 25 SINCGARS FH MX-18290, DTD, or SKL
(HOPSETS)
SINCGARS LOCKOUTS As required SINCGARS FH locked out fre MX-18290, DTD, or SKL
quencies.
SINCGARS LOADSET I SINCGARS AN/CYZ-IO or SKL
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

NOTE:

ofrS-P"^ SET AN/PRC-117F FUNCTION SWITCH TO LO, THEN

CONNECT FILL DEVICE TO J1 ADF CONNECTOR.

FILL DEVICE

, CYZ-IO (DS-101)
KYX-15 KYK-13
L CRYPTO TYPE
L CRYPTO TYPE L CRYPTO TYPE
hV
N
ISON L SELECT KEY TYPE L VINSON
i- SELECT KEY TYPE hV
N
IS
I-ON KEY TYPE
SELECT
. TEK . TEK
N U M B E R
##01-25 LKEYI L. KEY N U M B E R
. KEK ^ . KEK ^ ##01-25

,KG-84
K G - 8 4
L SELECT KEY TYPE
. TEK . T E K

LKEY NUMBER L KEY NUMBER

.KEK "-##01-25 .KEK "-##01-25
A N D V T , ANDVT
A N D V T
L SELECT KEY TYPE L SELECT KEY TYPE
L SELECT KEY TYPE
. TEK . TEK
. TEK
L KEY NUMBER L KEY NUMBER
L KEY NUMBER
_ KEK I- IIMK>1-25 Li ##01-25
. KEK ^ ##01-25
^^TRKEK
TRKEK
SATELLITE
, SATELLITE , S AT E L L I T E
L SELECT KEY TYPE L SELECT KEY TYPE L SELECT KEY TYPE
. TSK L TSK
L TSK
L KEY NUMBER L KEY NUMBER
L KEY NUMBER
L ##01 -
_ TRKEK , HAVEQUICK "- ##01-25 HAVEQUICK ##01-25
, H AV E Q U I C K L WOD L WOD

tWOD T R K E K

I SINCGARS

L SELECT KEY TYPE

. T S K
L K E Y N^ U M B E R
L. # # 0 1 - 2 5
. TRKEK

_ ENT
L FILL IN PROGRESS KOI-18

L SINCGARS LOADSET IS L CRYPTO TYPE

A U T O M AT I C A L LY L O A D E D . VINSON
L SELECT KEY TYPE
MX-18290
T E K
L CRYPTO TYPE
_ VINSON L KEY NUMBER
\ L SELECT KEY TYPE . K E K
. T E K tTRKEK
L KEYKN U M B E R . KG-84

.KEK ^ ' ##01 -25

6 - 8 4

. TEK
T
tEK K E K
T R K E K

. ANDVT
L KEY NUMBER
L SELECT KEY TYPE
.KEK "-##01-25 . TEK

A N D V T L KEYNN U M B E R
L SELECT KEY TYPE . KEK L. ##01 -25
. TEK .TRKEK
L KEY NUMBER SATELLITE

.KEK l-##01-25 L SELECT KEY TYPE

SINCGARS . TSK
L SELECT KEY TYPE L K E Y ^N U M B E R
. TSK L. # # 0 1 - 2 5
L KEYN
N U M B E R _ TRKEK

L. # # 0 1 -25
HAVEQUICK
. LOCKOUT

SATELLITE W
t OD T R K E K

L SELECT KEY TYPE

KEY NUMBER
L0#O1 -25
H AV E Q U I C K
L WOD

Figure 3-11. COMSEC Load Menu

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS' OPERATION

3.5.1 Loading SINCGARS FH Fill Data

A TRANSEC fill device of type AN/CYZ-10 DTD, MX-18290, or AN/PYQ-10 SKL can be used to load the FH
data into the AN/PRC-117F. The CYZ-10 requires user application software Revised Battlefield Electronic System
(RBECS) DTD Software (RDS) for SINCGARS FH fill data.

3.5.1.1 Parts of a SINCGARS Loadset

An Electronic Set (ESET) consists of sections in the following order:

a . O n e t o fi v e V I N S O N T E K s a n d o n e V I N S O N K E K .

b. Manual preset TSK (cold start portion of the Loadset).

c. Remaining one to six channels of ESET.
d. TOD information (Mode 3 only)
e. Frequency lockout sets.
The AN/PRC-117F supports modes 1,2, and 3 using Integrated COMSEC (ICOM). When using mode 1 fill, an
AN/CYZ-10 running RDS is used to load each section of the loadset manually via the RDS Airbome mode. When
using mode 2 fill, an AN/CYZ-10 RDS ICOM mode is used to load all the sections of the loadset automatically.
Mode 3 is similar, except the user can load an additional frame containing TOD information which is located
between the ESET and the frequency lockouts. Mode 3 fill can also load information identical to mode 2 if both
TOD and single channel information are not to be loaded.

3.5.1.2 AN/CYZ-10 DTD (Mode 2 and Mode 3)

When using modes 2 and 3, the user must be aware of the COMSEC slots used by the AN/PRC-117F during this
automated process. Refer to Table 3-4. Due to the fact that SINCGARS fill uses VINSON modes 2 and 3 COMSEC
data, TEKs 1 through 5 are loaded into VINSON compartments 21 through 25 on the AN/PRC-117F. The sixth
COMSEC data is the VINSON KEK. SINCGARS hopsets are stored in TSK locations 20 through 25 and the
coldstart ESET is loaded in location 19.

It is also assumed that the user did not load an ESET into a slot lower than 19. If an ESET was manually loaded into
a slot lower than 19, coldstart would use the ESET in the lowest numbered slot. This is not a problem as long as all
radios are loaded in the same manner.

When using an AN/CYZ-10 with the RDS application to perform a mode 2/3 fill, select CYZ-10 RDS instead of
CYZ-10 DS-101 on the AN/PRC-117F load menus. Perform the following procedure to load SINCGARS FH Fill
Data using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:

NOTE

Do not switch the mode switch or press any key on the

AN/PRC-117F during this process, since improper loading or
COMSEC alarm conditions may result.

NOTE

Progress rapidly through Step h and Step i or the AN/CYZ-10

will not receive a handshake fi-om the radio.

a. Rotate function switch on the AN/PRC-117F to [LD].

b . C o n n e c t fi l l d e v i c e t o J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N §f\RRtS'
c. At the AN/PRC-117F, select appropriate fill device of CYZ-10 RDS; press IENT|. The AN/PRC-117F
displays PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE.
d. Press [ENT] and the AN/PRC-117F displays FILL IN PROGRESS.

e . Tu r n A N / C Y Z - 1 0 D T D fi l l d e v i c e o n a n d c o n n e c t t o A N / P R C - 11 7 F J 1 A D F.

f. Start RDS application on the AN/CYZ-10; select RADIO and then SEND. If RDS or RADIO is not
initially seen on AN/CYZ-10, press the MAIN key or select APPL to access all installed user
application software, then select RADIO.

g. On DTD, select RADIO again and then ICOM for device type. AN/CYZ-10 displays CONNECT TO
RT AUD/FILL CONN vl^.

h. On DTD, press [ENTJ. AN/CYZ-10 displays SET FCTN SWITCH TO LD ON RT>F.

i. On DTD, press [ENTJ. AN/CYZ-10 displays DO YOU WANT TO INCLUDE TIME? Y/N. This is
the TOD information.

j. On DTD, select Y (for Mode 3) or N (for Mode 2). DTD displays PRESS LOAD ON RT. At this point,
do not press [ENTl or touch any key on the AN/PRC-117F until the Fill is done.

k. Observe that the AN/PRC-117F will display various key store messages, and the DTD will display the
portions of the hopset being loaded ending with ICOM TRANSFER SUCCESSFUL. Depending on
the number of items being stored, storage can take up to 50 seconds.

1. At this point do not touch any key on the AN/PRC-117F. Wait until FILL DONE - PRESS ANY KEY
is displayed.

m. After the DTD has finished, the AN/PRC-117F will continue displaying KEY STORE IN
PROGRESS. Depending on the number of items being stored, storage can take up to 50 seconds.

n. When FILL DONE - PRESS ANY KEY is displayed at the AN/PRC-117F, press any key. The loadset
fill has been completed.

o. When MORE FILL DATA? is displayed, select N.

p. Turn off the DTD and disconnect it from J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector.

q. Rotate the function switch from [LD] to the desired operating position of either [PT], [CT], or [TDj.
r. Check all SINCGARS FH net presets for programming with proper HOPSET compartment. Net
Identification (ID), and VINSON TEK.

If the operation is not successful, disconnect the AN/CYZ-10 from the AN/PRC-117F, clean the connectors, check
your cable and the AN/CYZ-10, and reboot the radio to start the procedure again.

Table 3-4. Mode 2/3 Fill Compartment Positions

VINSON SINCGARS
TEKs T S K E S E Ts
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
if\RRIS O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-4. Mode 2/3 Fill Compartment Positions (Continued)

VINSON SINCGARS
TEKs TSK E S E Ts

3.5.1.3 AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer Device (DTD) (Mode 1)

By using the RDS procedure to fill an airborne radio (AN/PRC-117F) with a DTD, the ESETs can be separately
loaded from the associated TEKs, as required by the AN/PRC-117F in Mode 1.

When using the RDS application on the AN/CYZ-10 to load individual loadset data, select MX-18290 instead of
CYZ-10 DS-101 on the AN/PRC-117F load menus. Perform the following procedure to load SINCGARS FH Fill
Data using AN/CYZ-10 DTD:

a . T u r n A N / C Y Z - 1 0 D T D fi l l d e v i c e o n .

b. Start RDS application on the AN/CYZ-10 DTD. If RDS or RADIO is not initially seen on AN/CYZ-10,
press the MAIN key or select APPL to access all installed user application software. Select RDS.
c. On DTD, select RADIQvI'.

d. Select SENDvl^.

e. Select SEND TO: RADIGvP, then Airborne (ABN) for device type.

f. Select YES to the KY-58 question.

g. At the Connect to KY-58 Fill Port prompt, press [ENTJ. Do not connect to radio yet.
h. At the Set KY-58 load switch to LD prompt, rotate function switch on AN/PRC-117F to [LDl, and then
press [ENTJ on the DTD.
i . C o n n e c t D T D fi l l d e v i c e t o J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L r a d i o c o n n e c t o r,

j. On the radio, select fill device of MX-18290; press (ENTl.

k. Select the desired CRYPTO TYPE as VINSON; press [ENT]. These selections prepare the Automated
Net Control Device (ANCD) to send only the VINSON TEKs and KEK in the loadset.

1. Select TEK as the KEY TYPE, and then select key compartment number 21. Press (ENTf

m. The radio display shows PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE. The DTD shows Set fill switch to POS:l,
press PTT to load. Press [ENTJ on the radio, and Fill in Progress is displayed.
n. When Transfer Successful is displayed on the DTD, the radio will display Fill done, press any key.
Press a key to continue.

o. At the MORE FILL DATA prompt, select YES, press [ENT].

p. Repeat Step 1 through Step o to load all the TEKs and KEK in the loadset. Press [ENT] after each load.
Select the next compartment number, 22, in the radio before loading the next TEK. TEKs in a loadset
are numbered from 1 to 5, and are typically loaded to compartments 21 through 25 in the AN/PRC-117F.
KEK is number 6 and loaded to its specific compartment in the AN/PRC-117F. Continue until all TEKs
are loaded up to compartment 25, and then the KEK will be prompted. Load the KEK in a similar
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION hfARRIS'
q. Press ENTER and continue through the LOADING and TRANSFER IN PROGRESS screens. No
operator intervention is required on the DTD and radio during these cycles. Be sure not to overwrite any
previously stored TEKs. Press the down arrow on DTD or press lENT]. The DTD will continue where
it left off in the VINSON TEK loading process.

r. On the DTD, select YES to ABN radio fill. This selection prepares the DTD to send only the ESETs in
the loadset.

s. On the radio, press ICLRl and select the desired CRYPTO TYPE of SINCGARS; press [ENTl.
t. Select TSK as the KEY TYPE, and key compartment position 20; press [ENTj.

u. The radio will display PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE. Wait until the DTD is ready to send data.
V. On the DTD, use [LD] to select SINCGARS TSK associated with the loadset. Continue in DTD menus
following screen prompts until it displays Press [LOAD] on R/T.
w. Press [ENT] key on KDU; FILL IN PROGRESS displays.

X. When FILL DONE displays, press any key on KDU.

y. At the MORE FILL DATA prompt, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat Step t and Step u to load
all the ESETs in the loadset. RDS loops through LOADING 'ESET NAME' and TRANSFER IN
PROGRESS screens. ESETs in a loadset are numbered from 1 to 6, and are loaded to compartments 20
through 25 in the AN/PRC-117F. Be sure not to overwrite any previously loaded ESETs. If loading
process times out due to operator lag, the DTD indicates a transfer error. Press a down arrow on the DTD
and answer YES to continue. The DTD will continue where it left off in the ESET loading process. No
operator intervention is required on the DTD and radio during these cycles. Select a different TSK
compartment number before loading the next ESET.
z. After loading the 6th ESET, the DTD may prompt to load lockout sets. If any lockout sets are contained
in the loadset, change KEY TYPE to LOCKOUT after all ESETs are loaded. Be sure to observe the
DTD to see if it contains a LOCKOUT after the last ESET (ESET #6). If LOCKOUT Set is not loaded,
communications with other SINCGARS compatible radios may not be possible.

aa. When all fill data is entered, the DTD indicates ICOM TRANSFER SUCCESSFUL. Follow screen
prompts and/or press ABORT to return to main menu in RDS Radio Menu.
ab. When the MORE FILL DATA prompt displays, select NO; press [ENTf

a c . Tu r n o ff D T D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

ad. Rotate function switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT], [CT[, or [TD]. This completes
COMSEC loading.

3.5.1.4 MX-18290 Fill Device (Mode 1)

Perform the following procedure to load SINCGARS FH data with the MX-18290 Electronic Counter-Counter
Measure (ECCM) Fill Device:

a. Rotate the AN/PRC-117F function switch to [LD].

b. Select MX-18290 as the appropriate FILL DEVICE, from the KDU display, using the up/down arrow
keys; press [ENTf
c. Select the desired CRYPTO TYPE as SINCGARS; press [ENTf
d. Select TSK as the KEY TYPE, then select the key compartment position number (01 - 25). Press
[ENTl.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
tf\RRiS' O P E R AT I O N

e. Ensure the MX-18290 BCCM fill device is off.

f. Connect fill device using a fill cable to the J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector.

g. Select TSK (HOPSET) to be loaded on the MX-18290 ECCM fill device and then turn on.
h. PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE displays; press [ENTJ.
i. FILL IN PROGRESS displays.

j. When FILL DONE, PRESS ANY KEY displays, press any key on the KDU.
k. At the prompt MORE FILL DATA, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat Step g through Step j.
Select a dififerent TSK position number on the AN/PRC-117F and the MX-18290 ECCM Fill Device.
1. When all fill data has been entered, select NO at prompt MORE FILL DATA.
m. Turn off fill device power and disconnect from the J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector.
n. Rotate function switch from [LD| to desired operating position of [PT], [CT], or [TD].
3.5.1.5 AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL)
The AN/PYQ-10 SKL can load an entire SINCGARS loadset to the 117F, or just the HOPSETS (ESETs). Keep in
mind that if only the HOPSETs are loaded, SINCGARS operation still requires a VINSON TEK which will have to
be loaded separately.

Before proceeding, ensure you are aware of where the HOPSETS are in the radio as well as the TEK to use when
programming SINCGARS Presets.
Perform the following procedure to load a SINCGARS loadset to the AN/PRC-117F:

a. Prepare the AN/PRC-117F by performing the following:

1. Power on the AN/PRC-117F and wait for full power up to complete.

2. Rotate Function Switch to LD.

3. Press Up arrow and select Fill Device Type of CYZ-10 RDS and press [ENT].

4. The AN/PRC-117F displays PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE.

5. Press [ENTJ. The AN/PRC-117F displays FILL IN PROGRESS.

NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F will wait in this state for the Fill Loading
to continue.

6 . C o n n e c t F I L L c a b l e t o J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

b. Prepare the SKL device by performing the following:

1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch User Application Software (UAS).

2. From SKL main menu, select the Eqs tab. An equipment listing is displayed on the SKL screen.
Select the equipment to be included in the load by:

• If loading a complete loadset, select an entire SINCGARS equipment item. SINCGARS

equipment may be listed as an RT-1523 based item, or as either Harris or 117F.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

• If loading only HOPSETS, expand the SINCGARS equipment item and highlight an
(H)opset fill location. Select HO to H6 and tap on the OK button.
NOTE

It is normally best to load all Hopset fill locations.

3. After selection is complete, use the SKL menus to:

• If loading a complete loadset, select File > Transmit > Load.

• If loading only HOPSETS, select File > Transmit > Load Selected Locations.

4. At the SINCGARS Mode screen, select ICOM Transfer. Check Include Time as required.

NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F will load successfully without selecting

the Include Time feature.

c. Connect the SKL device to J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector using appropriate Fill cable.

d. On the SKL, press on the Next button.

e. On the SKL, review the reminders on the Load ECU Wizard and press on the Send button.

f. On the SKL, the Status screen will display Press LOAD Button.

g. The AN/PRC-117F will automatically handshake with the SKL and begin the transfer. During this time
the following will be observed:

1. The AN/PRC-117F will display FILL IN PROGRESS.

2. The SKL will display Sending key locations, followed by Sending hopset locations, and then
Sending lockout locations.

3. The SKL will display Reload Equipment when fill is completed.

4. The AN/PRC-117F will then display KEY STORE IN PROGRESS. Wait for processing of data,
which will complete within approximately one minute.

h. When the loading of the loadset or hopset is complete, KEY STORE COMPLETE will be observed
o n t h e A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F.

3.5.2 Loading HAVEQUICK FH Fill Data

The following paragraphs provide information on loading HAVEQUICK data.

3.5.2.1 Common Fill Devices or AN/CYZ-10 using RDS Application Software

Perform the following procedure to electronically load HAVEQUICK FH data:

a. Rotate function switch to [LD].

b . C o n n e c t fi l l d e v i c e t o J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

c. Select appropriate common fill device (KYK-13, KOI-18, KYX-15, or MX-18290) from the KDU
display menu; press [ENTJ. If using AN/CYZ-10 and RDS, select KYK-13.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

d. Select the desired CRYPTO TYPE of HAVEQUICK; press [ENT].

e. Select WOD as the KEY TYPE; press [ENTl.

f. Turn fill device on and select key position on fill device. (If using KOI-18, have key tape ready to pull.)
If using DTD, use procedure for loading HAVEQUICK radio and continue to where DTD prompts to
initiate on radio.

1. Select SEND nI/.

2. Select SEND TO RADIO 4'.

3. Select HAVEQ >1/.

4. Select MWOD OPERATIONAL OR TRAINING >i/.

5. Select MWOD locations. Up to six can be selected.

g. PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE displays; press [ENTJ.

h. FILL IN PROGRESS displays. Pull key tape now if using KOI-18.

i. When FILL DONE, PRESS ANY KEY displays. Press any key.

j. At prompt MORE FILL DATA, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat Step d through Step j.
NOTE

Additional HAVEQUICK MWODs can be loaded as

electronic MWOD data is date coded with the day of the
month. Refer to Paragraph 4.5.5.1.2 to check the status of
loaded MWODs.

k. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the MORE FILL DATA prompt displays.

1. Turn off key fill device power and disconnect from the J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector,

m. Rotate function switch from |LD] to desired operating position of [PT], [CT], or [TDf

3.5.3 Loading COMSEC Fill Data

The AN/PRC-117F holds 25 keys for each COMSEC type. Numbering for each storage set is from 01 to 25.
Fascinator and KYV-5 COMSEC shares the same set of COMSEC TEKs as VINSON encryption loaded to the
VINSON storage position. SATELLITE storage position holds DAM A SATCOM EOW TSKs and/or HPW TSKs.
Do not confuse these TSKs with that of the SINCGARS TSKs, they are not interchangeable.

The AN/PRC-117F supports both DS-101 and DS-102 COMSEC key transfer protocols.

3.5.3.1 Common Fill Devices DS-102 Interface

Perform the following procedure to load COMSEC Fill data with common fill devices:

a. Rotate AN/PRC-117F function switch to [LD],

b. Connect fill device to J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector using a fill cable interface.

c. Select the appropriate common fill device and press [ENTf

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

NOTE

Do not select CYZ-10 DS-101.

• KYK-13 Key Transfer Device

• KYX-15 Net Controllers Device

• KOI-18 COMSEC Tape Reader

• AN/CYZ-10 with RDS (DS102)

• MX-18290 ECCM Fill Device

d. Select the desired CRYPTO TYPE and press [ENTJ.

• VINSON, FASCINATOR, or KYV-5 TEKs loaded here.

• ANDVT

• KG-84

• SATELLITE - Both DAMA EOW TSK and SATCOM HPW TSK loaded here. Do not confuse this
with TEKs needed for MS-181 SATCOM.

e. Select the appropriate KEY TYPE. If TEK or TSK is selected, select the key position number
(01 - 25) to store the loaded key. If a KEK is selected to be loaded, no key position is shown since only
one per COMSEC modes of VINSON, ANDVT, or KG-84 can be loaded.

f. PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE displays; Do not press [ENT| yet.

g. Turn fill device on and select key position on fill device. (If using KOI-18, have key tape ready to pull.)
h. PRESS ENTER TO INITIATE displays on KDU; press [ENT].

i. FILL IN PROGRESS displays. If using KOI-18, pull tape now.

j. When FILL DONE displays, press any key.

k. At prompt MORE FILL DATA, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat Step d through Step j. If
another COMSEC type is desired to be loaded at this point, press [CLR] to back up to COMSEC type
selection and reselect a different COMSEC type before repeating Step d through Step j.

1. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the MORE FILL DATA prompt displays.

m . Tu r n o ff fi l l d e v i c e a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

n. Rotate function switch from [LD| to desired operating position of [PTJ, [CT], or [TD].

o. Perform a secure communications using loaded Traffic Encryption Keys (TEKs) and TSKs to ensure
correct fills have been loaded.

3.5.3.2 AN/CYZ-10 DTD Fill Device (DS-101 Interface)

Use of the AN/CYZ-10 DTD varies due to differences in user application software. The RDS application operates
using procedures for common fill devices outlined in Paragraph 3.5.3.1, except use KYK-13 instead of CYZ-10 on
the AN/PRC-117F load menus. Use this fill procedure if fill program is set to DS-101.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure for loading the AN/PRC-117F with a DTD with FILL application set to DS-101
protocol:
a. Rotate AN/PRC-117F function switch to [LDJ.

b . C o n n e c t fi l l d e v i c e t o J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

c. Select appropriate fill device of CYZ-10 DS-101; press [ENT].

d. Select the desired CRYPTO TYPE; press [ENTf

• V I N S O N - b o t h V I N S O N a n d FA S C I N AT O R T E K s l o a d e d h e r e .

• ANDVT

• KG-84

• SATELLITE - Both DAMA EOW TSK and SATCOM High Performance Waveform (HPW) TSK
loaded here.

e. Select the KEY TYPE, then select the key compartment position number (01 - 25); Press [ENTJ. If a
KEK or TRKEK is selected to be loaded, no key position is shown as only one can be loaded for
VINSON, ANDVT, or KG-84.

f. INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE displays.

g. Ensure DTD FILL program is set to D101 (DS-101) protocol before beginning. Always select ISSUE
as transmit mode in the DTD loading process. If FILL transmit mode is used, it results in a BAD KEY
LOAD. If using a protocol other than DlOl, select the fill device from the AN/PRC-117F load menu
and follow the procedure in Paragraph 3.5.3.1. In the fill program, the interface protocol is always
displayed in the upper right comer of the main menu.
h. Tum AN/CYZ-10 DTD fill device on. Use DTD FILL program to initiate loading of required key.

i. Press SEND on the DTD.

j. Select SEND TO: DIRECT.

k. At CONNECT TO STATION: PRESS SEND, select SEND. The radio displays FILL IN
PROGRESS.

1. When FILL DONE displays, press any key on KDU.

m. At prompt MORE FILL DATA, select YES to enter more fill data. Repeat Step f through Step j. Use
DTD NEW menu item to back up for new key selection. If another COMSEC type is desired to be
loaded at this point, press [CLR] and reselect a different COMSEC type before repeating Step e through
Step 1.

n. When all fill data is entered, select NO when the MORE FILL DATA prompt displays.

o . Tu m o f f D T D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m t h e J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

p. Rotate function switch from [LD] to desired operating position of [PT], (CTJ, or [TD].

q. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs to ensure correct fills have been
loaded.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.5.3.3 AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader (SKL) using DS-102

Perform the following procedure to load COMSEC Fill data using the SKL:

NOTE

Do not use DS-101 protocol with the SKL. Use only DS-102
protocol.

a. Prepare the SKL device to send the required key(s) of the proper protocol. To do this:

1. Turn on SKL, Login, and launch OAS.

2. From Main Menu, select the Keys tab.

3. Select a key to load using the short title.

4. From the Key Load Select Keys menu, check the key(s) to load into the AN/PRC-117F.

NOTE

At least one key must be checked to proceed.

5. When all required keys have been checked, select OK.

6. From the SKL Main menu, select File > Transmit > Load Selected Keys.

7. The Key Load Settings menu is displayed. Using the drop-down list, select DS-102 Protocol.

NOTE

Do not use DS-101 protocol with the SKL. Use only DS-102
protocol.

8. Ensure other setting are set as listed in Table 3-5.

Table 3-5. SKL Load Settings

Key Load Settings Field Entry

Bus Address Not used

Activate Mode KYK-13

Baud Rate Not used

Send Wake Up Not used

Seconds Not used

Send Tag Not used

Mode Not used

9. After settings are made, select OK.

10. The Ready to Send Key screen displays.

b. Connect the SKL device to J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector using appropriate Fill cable.

c. Rotate AN/PRC-117F function switch to [LDl.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

d. On the SKL device, with the Ready to Send Key screen still displaying, select OK.

e. On the AN/PRC-117F, select CYZ-10 DS-102 and press [ENTJ.

f. On the AN/PRC-117F, select the required CRYPTO TYPE and press [ENT]. Valid choices are:

• VINSON

• S AT E L L I T E

• KG-84

• ANDVT

g. On the AN/PRC-117F, select the required KEY TYPE and press (ENTJ. Available choices include:

• TRKEK

h. On the AN/PRC-117F, if KEY TYPE of TEK was selected, then select the key compartment position
number (01 - 25) and press [ENTl.

i. On the AN/PRC-117F, INITIATE FILL AT FILL DEVICE will display.

j. On the SKL device, press [OK].

k. On the AN/PRC-117F, FILL IN PROGRESS will display, followed by FILL DONE.

1. On the SKL device, when the key has been loaded Operation Successful will display.

m. On the SKL device, press OK after the Operation Successful dialog is displayed.
n. On the AN/PRC-117F, MORE FILL DATA will display. If more keys are to be loaded, select YES and
repeat Step a through Step m as required. If key loading is completed, select NO.
o. On the AN/PRC-117F, rotate function switch from [LD] to desired operating position.

p. Disconnect the SKL device from the J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector on the AN/PRC-117F.
q. Perform a secure communications check using loaded TEKs and TSKs to ensure correct fills have been
loaded.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

LOS FIXED VHF- LOW

FREQUENCY
VHF - HIGH
UHF

NORMAL S AT C O M 25 kHz
5 kHz

- 25 kHz

■ 5 kHz

S T C ■ CONTROLLER MODE TYPE

CONTROLLER

CLONE
tPR
M
IARY
A LT E R N AT E
FREQUENCY HOPPING

SINCGARS

REMOTE - J6/9 AlC (BLACK REMOTE)

CONTROL H AV E Q U I C K
- J3 DATA (RED REMOTE)

> ENTER BEACON MODE?

BEACON

25 K AC

5 K A C
2 5 K D C

B A T T E R Y V E R S I O N S

H A R D W A R E

FIRMWARE

S E R I A L

NOTE:
(1) ONLY APPEARS AS AN OPTION WHEN THE [MODE]
KEY IS PRESSED FOR AN STC NET IN NORM.

Figure 3-12. AN/PRC-117F Operating Modes

3 . 6 PA S S W O R D S E C U R I T Y A N D N E T L O C K O U T S

Security settings are used in the AN/PRC-117F to prevent unauthorized changes to radio parameters. Refer to
Paragraph 4.9 for KDU programming information. The Password Security feature:
• Provides a means to lock out a selectable contiguous group of radio nets from unauthorized configuration
changes.
• Blocks access to PORTS system settings on locked nets.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

• Provides the NETO location to be used as a "scratchpad" net location. This means that NETO is always
available for configuration changes and cannot be locked out.
NOTE

DAMA security settings cannot be copied from the NETO net

location.

• Allows a user to copy a radio net's parameters from one net location to another 'unlocked" location. For
example, a locked net configured as "NET!" can be copied and saved as a new net called "NET51"
providing NET51 is an unlocked location.
The AN/PRC-117F security function is activated by entering a password consisting of 8 to 12 alphanumeric
characters. Once a radio is password protected, the programmer can define a range of radio nets that will restrict
changes to the configuration menus. By restricting access, the configuration menu selections listed in Table 3-6 are
blocked unless the correct password is entered.

When a net is locked out, the operator cannot use the < and > arrow keys to highlight and change parameters. A
locked net is indicated on the KDU main display by the "+" or "=" character between the net number and net name.
These characters replace the and characters used on unlocked nets. For example, if net 3 were locked, the
display would appear as shown in Figure 3-13.

Also, if an attempt is made to modify a locked net, the display will indicate that it is locked, as shown in Figure 3-14.

Table 3-6. Menu Restrictions with Security Activated

KDU Menu Restricted Parameters

OPT (Options) COMSEC

P O W E R
L O U T

LOS FIX FREQUENCY All Net Preset Programming

S AT C O M / S T C All Net Preset Programming
SINCGARS All Net Preset Programming
H AV E Q U I C K All Net Preset Programming
D A M A All Net Preset Programming
All Net Preset Programming

R VOL NORM VINSON TEKIO FT

03=FMCMD t>
LOS VOC VOC FM OFF
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE SQL

Figure 3-13. Sample Main Screen Showing a Locked Net

SELECT NET TO MODIFY

12 [ *LOCKED* ]

Figure 3-14. Typical Locked Net Display

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3 . 7 L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y O P E R AT I O N

A LOS fixed frequency net allows the user to receive and transmit voice and/or data using fixed receive and transmit
frequencies. Antenna type, antenna height, output power, terrain, and obstructions between AN/PRC-117Fs are all
factors in range of communications. A planning range of up to 5 miles/8 kilometers should be used in LOS operation,
however, antenna placement can increase range. See Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 for operational displays.

[AWARNING I
To avoid damage to hearing, check the handset volume before
using the handset.

A WARNING
To prevent electrical shock and Radio Frequency (RF) bums,
avoid making RF power output connections or touching
antenna while in transmit mode.

WARNING

Extended transmit times and/or insufficient air circulation

around the radio, as well as high ambient air temperatures,
may cause the surface temperature of the radio to become hot.
Allow the radio to cool before handling.

3.7.1 PT LOS Operation

Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117F in LOS fixed frequency PT mode:

NOTE

It is assumed that the AN/PRC-117F is already programmed

for the described mode of operation and proper antennas for
the band of operation have been installed. Refer to Chapter 4
for AN/PRC-117F programming.

a. Rotate function switch to IPT|. The function switch must be pulled out to tum it from [OFF] to the [FT)
position.
b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE], select NORMAL if the radio does not start in Normal mode,
and then press [ENTj.

c. Select desired LOS fixed frequency net preset by pressing the [PRE ±] switch.

d. Adjust [VOL ±] switch for adequate listening level.

e. Begin radio operations.

1. Press KDU [CIRCULAR ARROW] key to monitor status of the selected net preset. See
Figure 3-15.

2. Access menus under [OPT] key to make minor operations changes.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
hfARRIS' OPERATION

NOTE

Pressing the PGM key places the AN/PRC-117F in offline

programming mode. No communications are possible until
the AN/PRC-117F returns to standard operation.

3.7.2 CT LOS Operation

Perform the following procedure to operate the AN/PRC-117F in LOS fixed frequency CT mode:

a. Rotate function switch to [CT] or [TDJ. The function switch must be pulled out to turn it from [FT] to
[CT] position. This enables the programmed COMSEC mode and TEK. (Radio will default to VINSON
COMSEC and TEKOl if COMSEC mode and TEK have not been programmed.)

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODEl unless the radio is already in normal mode.

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select NORMAL; press [ENTj.

d. Select desired LOS fixed frequency net preset by pressing the [PRE ±] switch. Check display for proper
COMSEC mode and TEK number. NO KEY indicates the net preset is programmed for a TEK that has
not been loaded. Check keys in [OPT]>COMSEC, and reload COMSEC if necessary.

e. Adjust [VOL ±] key for adequate listening level in the handset.

f. Begin radio operations.

1. Radio defaults to VINSON and TEK 01 if no COMSEC mode has been programmed for a net
preset capable of VINSON operation when radio is placed in CT. If this TEK has already been
loaded, the radio uses it.

2. A PT override warning tone is heard when receiving any station operating in PT. (This will not
occur if digital squelch is being used.) Switch back to [PT] to communicate with this station.

3. Radio only allows CT transmission if there is a COMSEC key programmed and loaded to the
storage position. If no key is available. Handset Push-To-Talk (PTT) action produces display of
*****Y^ARNING***** NO TEK LOADED.

4. Fascinator COMSEC mode is only indicated by front panel display data rate indication of 12 kbps.
Keys from VINSON are used and COMSEC mode still displays as VINSON.

5. KYV-5 COMSEC mode also uses keys from VINSON and allows Enhanced Data Mode (EDM)
data rates to be selected. EDM data rates, RS-232 and packet, are displayed with an N next to the
data rates if frequency is below 87.975 MHz (LOS mode below 87.975 MHz emulates
SINCGARS SC operation).

6. SINCGARS Improvement Program (SIP)/Enhanced SINCGARS Improvement Program (ESIP)

data rates can be used if frequency is below 87.975 MHz. Refer to Paragraph 3.12.10.

7. When KG-84 is the selected COMSEC mode, radio can only be keyed by a properly interfaced
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) on J1 ADF or J3 DATA connectors. Pressing handset PTT
produces display of KEVLINE IGNORED.
8. Use [TDl position when communicating to a scanning AN/PRC-1I7F or retransmission system.
(TD only affects VINSON operation.)
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N
I^ARmS'
NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F returns to the last operating mode when

turned back ON. If a COMSEC mode and TEK have not been
programmed, the AN/PRC-II7F assigns VINSON COMSEC
(using TEK 1) by default when the radio switch is in [CT] or
[TDl operating position.

3.7.3 LOS Operation using HPW

HPW LOS is a data-only mode for communications over traditional LOS channels with greatly increased data
throughput. It combines features of both MIL-STD-188-181B and MIL-STD-188-184 to permit error free data
communications at high Over-The-Air (OTA) burst data rates. HPW may also support optional Internet Protocol (IP)
data (refer to Paragraph 4.15 for more information).

Refer to Harris Wireless Messaging Terminal Software RF-6760W-HPW Manual, (10515-0320-4200), concerning
operation of the AN/PRC-117F using HPW LOS. This paragraph assumes the network database has been
programmed.
Perform the following procedure to operate in HPW LOS mode:

a. Connect Personal Computer (PC) with properly configured RF-6760W-HPW Wireless Messaging
Terminal from its ASYNC COMM port jack to the AN/PRC-117F J3 DATA connector with
HPW-Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) data cable (10513-0710).

NOTE

Do not confuse the HPW-PPP cable with a standard RS-232

ASYNC data cable or remote control cable that may
physically look identical. These cable types do not function
with the radio when it is in the HPW LOS mode.

b. See Figure 3-15. Turn on the radio and set the function switch to [CT] and select a net preset that has
been configured for HPW LOS. It should contain the following programmed parameters:
• KG-84 COMSEC using REDUNDANT MODE 1 synchronization.

• KG-84 TEK loaded and programmed to HPW LOS net preset.

• HPW TRANSEC key loaded to and programmed to HPW net preset. It is recommended to use the
KG-84 TEK here if prescribed and coordinated by higher authority. Check local Standard
Operating Procedures (SOPs).
• HPW modulation selected and HPW baud rate set.

• HPW TOD set to ± 30 seconds of Universal Time Coordinated (UTC). This is manually set by the
operator, or set using GPS. Refer to Paragraph 3.23.5.
c. Turn on PC and allow operating system to fully boot. Start MS Outlook using Wireless Messaging
Terminal (WMT) Profile. Observe that the Dial-up Networking icon and Radio System icon appear in
the system tray of the desktop. If no Dial-Up Networking (DUN) icon appears, or a yellow asterisk is
seen on the Radio System icon, there is a problem with either the DUN setup, the cable connection, or
the HPW net preset settings. Click on event log icon in Outlook and look for status of IDLE in both the
event log and floating protocol status window. Windows NT systems do not display DUN icon but do
display the radio system icon.
hfARmS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

d. Assigned local address in the HPW data network is located at the top of the Outlook program window.
If incorrect, shutdown Outlook. Go to WMT settings and change to correct address. Apply settings and
reboot the computer to make the changes go into effect. Restart Outlook as described in Step c.
e. Send a message by clicking on Outlook New Mai! Message Toolbar icon or selecting New Mail
Message from file menu. Compose the message, select address of recipients, and select any attachment
to be included.

f. Use RF Properties on the File menu to set HPW Send Options for the message.
• Transmission Mode

ARQ - The Automatic Repeat ReQuest (ARQ) selection is the default normal operation
mode and allows for the starting code rate to be selected, if desired. Once transmission
begins, the code rate varies according to channel conditions as determined by how well the
receiving station gets the data. The default starting code rate will be medium.
Non-ARQ - Locks sending terminal into sending message at low code rate to help ensure
message reception under poor channel conditions. Code rate selection is not available if
Non-ARQ is selected. Used mainly to transmit messages to outstations operating under
signal security restrictions that do not want to transmit from their location.
• Code Rate - Selected for ARQ or AUTO operation

Low, 4-ary Phase Shift Keying (PSK)

Medium - 8-ary PSK, Default starting code rate
- High, 16-ary PSK

• Highest Priority - Channel Access - Places the message to be sent next, ahead of all others in the
Outbox and attempts to immediately access the channel if no other users have selected this priority.
• Compress Message - Message and attachment are compressed if selected. No additional
compression occurs on non-compressible attachments such as *.jpg or *.zip files. Compression
greatly improves throughput on message files that can be compressed.
Messages can also be sent using the Harris Enhanced Text Form. This form contains all the options
pertaining to the sending of messages in one place for ease of operation. Be sure to press SEND button
instead of EXIT or messages composed and ready to send will be lost.

g. Received messages are indicated of their incoming status by the HPW protocol status window. Upon
successful reception, go to the Inbox to read the received message. View and save attachments. Reply
or forward the message as necessary.
h. While messages are being transmitted or received, view detailed message status in applicable radio
outbox or radio inbox. Monitor Event Log to all system status messages.

i. Consult the RF-6760W-HPW Manual (10515-0320-4200) to assist in isolating problems.

3.7.4 Operational Overrides

Changes can be made while operating in a LOS fixed frequency net preset without reprogramming the
AN/PRC-117F. This includes operating frequency, squelch, transmitter power levels, COMSEC parameters, and
type of net. With an operating net preset displayed, press the right arrow key on the KDU to find items that can be
modified. Modifiable items will flash. Press the up/down arrow keys to change value of the flashing item.

Other items can be overridden by pressing the [OPTl key on the KDU. Changes to squelch can be modified by
pressing the (SQJ key on the KDU. Using display overrides and the option menus allow temporary changes to be
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N tfARRtS'
made to the currently selected net preset. To permanently save the changes as programmed values, select the SAVE
command from the [OPT] menu and save the net preset as a new preset. (Refer to Paragraph 3.23.7).

The AN/PRC-117F can be configured to save overrides automatically. If the AUTO SAVE function is set to ON
(default), all changes are saved automatically, and the SAVE command is absent from the [OPT] menu. For
programming instructions for the AUTO SAVE function, refer to Paragraph 4.10.1.

NOTE

Changing net type from LOS to SATCOM, and then back to

LOS, may invalidate frequency, squelch, and crypto settings.

3.7.4.1 Display Override Indicators

If the AUTO SAVE function is set to OFF, the operator can temporarily override programmed net parameters. These
changes are valid until the operator selects another programmed net preset. When the net is changed, the temporary
changes are lost. A display character will be shown to the left of the Net Name that indicates the preset status.
• Dash (-) indicates the net preset is unchanged, and password security is off.
• Asterisk (*) indicates the net preset is temporarily changed, and password security is off.
• Equal (=) indicates the net preset is unchanged, and password security is on.
• Plus (+) indicates the net preset is temporarily changed, and password security is on.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

B AT T E RY
DENOTES
TYPE
PLAIN TEXT OR
RECEIVE(R)\BATTERY O P E R AT I O N A L CIPHER TEXT
INDICATOR \ METER NET NAME MODE O P E R AT I O N

U N S AV E D
CHANGES
RECEIVE SIGNAL
STRENGTH METER
■0 4 ' N E T 4

OFF - NONE
NET TYPE
NOIS - NOISE
O N - D I G I TA L
TONE - 150 HZ
ADF CONNECTOR D ATA P O R T
TCS - CTCSS
M O D E MODE AM, FM, TOM or HPW DCS - CDCSS

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

(PRESS TO CHANGE DISPLAYS)

3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H Z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H Z

'R: 030.00000 LOS

' T: 0 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 16.0 .
FREQUENCY

3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H Z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H Z
D ATA R AT E
AM - 16 KBPS
FM - 12,16 KBPS, EDM, SDM
TOM - 48. 64 KBPS
HPW -1600, 2666, 8 K, 16 K,
21.3 K, 42.6 K, AUTO

Figure 3-15. LOS Fixed Frequency Mode Displays (Receive)

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

DENOTES
PLAIN TEXT
B AT T E RY O P E R AT I O N A L CIPHER TEXT
METER NET NAME MODE O P E R AT I O N
TRANSMIT (T)
I N D I C AT O R .

U N S AV E D \ \
CHANGES TRANSMIT POWER
(PASSWORD ofirr^r-,
■ 04+NET4 ^
OUT METER

NET NUMBER
LOS VOC OFF FM
TYPE . ADF D ATA MODE
NET TYPE
SQUELCH SETTING

A D F C O N N E C T O R D ATA P O R T M O D U L AT I O N M O D E
MODE MODE

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

(PRESS TO CHANGE DISPLAYS)

RECEIVE
FREQUENCY

• R: 030.00000 LOS U
TRANSMIT • T; 0 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 0
FREQUENCY FREQUENCY

D ATA R AT E

Figure 3-16. LOS Fixed Frequency Mode Displays (Transmit)

3 . 8 D E D I C AT E D U H F S AT C O M O P E R AT I O N

To operate in Dedicated UHF SATCOM mode, connect a medium or high gain SATCOM antenna to the J8
VHF-HI/UHF antenna connector with a coax cable. See Figure 3-1 for connector location.

Analyze terrain in planned areas of operation for satellite look angle access. Verify the SATCOM antenna is correctly
oriented using a magnetic compass to point the antenna on the proper horizontal azimuth to the satellite. Make an
approximate antenna vertical elevation adjustment. Pointing graphs and look angle calculation software are
available to assist in this task.

3.8.1 Typical UHF SATCOM Operation

Perform the following procedure for SATCOM operation:

a. Rotate function switch to [CT| or [TDJ (VINSON 25 kHz channel only). The AN/PRC-117F does not
allow PT non-secure voice operation in SATCOM. The radio defaults to Data only operation when [FT)
is selected.

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE].

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select NORMAL; press [ENTl.

d. Select the desired SATCOM net preset by pressing the [PRE ±[ key.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
tf\RRtS OPERATION

e. Adjust [VOL ±1 key for adequate listening level.

f. Begin radio operation.

Do not speak too quickly into handset after pressing PTT.

In 5 kHz SATCOM, wait two or three seconds before responding to a received transmission.
If communications become difficult, check the adjustment of the antenna.
A SATCOM Downlink Monitor on the lower right comer of the main display will show BSY
when the channel is in use.

Perform the following procedure to check SATCOM antenna pointing using the SATCOM RSSI Test:

a. Place the AN/PRC-117F into NORMAL mode/Dedicated SATCOM operation, and then press the
[CALL] button on the KDU.
b. Press [ENT] to initiate the SATCOM RSSI Test.

NOTE

Do NOT key the handset during this test.

c. Watch display for test completion. A relative signal strength score is displayed with a value from 000
to 100. Additional RSSI tests can be conducted by pressing [ENTj. Adjust pointing of the SATCOM
antenna to obtain a score better than 080. A repeated score of 000 indicates problems with SATCOM
net preset programming, antenna cable, antenna, or antenna pointing.
d. Press [CLR] to exit SATCOM RSSI Test. Retum to net preset for VINSON 16 k operation if using a 25
kHz channel.

3.8.2 SATCOM 181B Data Operation using KG-84 COMSEC and CPM

When using a SATCOM net preset with KG-84 COMSEC and Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM) modulation,
the transmitting station decides which CPM Data Option to use for transmission. The receiving end must also be
using a CPM data code of the same channel type (either the 5K group or the 25K group). See Table 4-4 and
Table 4-5.

Perform the following procedure to change the data option code for the currently selected SATCOM net preset:
a. Press [CIRCULAR ARROW] key to view the data option page of the SATCOM net preset. See
Figure 3-17 for SATCOM displays.
b. Use left/right arrow key to scroll to data option field. With the up/down arrow, select the required code.
Only the data option codes relating to the presently selected COMSEC mode and/or satellite channel
type can be selected.

c. See Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5. Use the [OPT] menu if COMSEC mode needs to be changed to achieve
required data option. Refer to Paragraph 3.23.2 to change the COMSEC mode and/or TEK.
d. Pay attention to the data rate while in receive. The data rate may change to a slower rate if the
transmitting party is unsuccessful. The user may want to select a new data rate for transmitting if this
happens.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

Perform the following procedure to send SATCOM DATA with CPM data option:

a. Ensure that the net communications plan has all outstations using the same CPM data option from the
table. A synchronous data transmission application is best.
b. The sending station selects the desired CPM data option to transmit the data message. Upon transmitting
the message, the receiving radio will automatically match speed of the sending station.
c. If transmission is unsuccessful, it may be necessary to reduce the CPM data rate and reattempt the data
transmission. If transmissions continue to be unsuccessful, troubleshoot the communications software
setup to determine the failure. Set all radios to the lowest speed in the group for ARQ reliability.

B AT T E RY NET CRYPTO ENCRYPTION KEY

METER NAME MODE TYPE TYPE AND NUMBER
R / T I N D I C AT O R
(R FOR RECEIVE)

N
IORN
V
^ISONTE
H
^K^O
'l
DENOTES PLAIN TEXT
C I P H E R T E X T O P E R AT I O N

NET NUMBER

0 6 - S AT ^ ■ SIGNAL STRENGTH
I SAT VOC DAT 181 DIG M E T E R
_—-7 TYPE ^ADF D ATA MODE SQL-r
D I G I TA L S Q U E L C H
NET TYPE
S E T T I N G

ADF CONNECTOR D ATA P O R T

MODE MODE 181 -MIL-STD181B
HPW - HIGH PERFORMANCE
WAV E F O R M

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

(PRESS TO CHANGE DISPLAYS)
DOWNLINK
FREQUENCY
NORM VINSON TEK01 CT

' R: 261.87500
7:295.47500

FREQUENCY ,
UPLINK
FREQUENCY

NET TYPE D ATA R AT E 001-249,999

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

(PRESS TO CHANGE DISPLAYS)

NORM VINSON TEK01

CHANNEL""
-25K CVSD fskO
T Y P E '132 none
OPT I N T E R LV
MS-181B
FORWARD ERROR
D ATA O P T I O N
CORRECTION
D ATA R AT E

(NOT IMPLEMENTED)

Figure 3-17. SATCOM Mode Displays

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
i^ARRIS' OPERATION

3.8.3 Dedicated UHF SATCOM Operation Using HPW

HPW SATCOM is a data-only mode for communication over SATCOM channels with greatly increased data
throughput. It combines features of both MIL-STD-188-181B and MIL-STD-188-184 to permit error free data
communications at high OTA burst data rates. HPW also supports Intemet Protocol (IP) data (refer to
Paragraph 4.15 for more information).
Refer to Harris Wireless Messaging Terminal Software RF-6760W-HPW Manual, (10515-0320-4200), concerning
operation of the AN/PRC-117F using HPW SATCOM. This paragraph assumes the network database has been
programmed.
Perform the following procedure to operate in HPW SATCOM mode:

a. Connect PC with properly configured RF-6760W-HPW Wireless Messaging Terminal from its ASYNC
COMM port jack to the AN/PRC-117F J3 DATA connector with HPW-PPP data cable (10513-0710-
AXXX).

NOTE

Do not confuse the HPW-PPP cable with a standard RS-232

ASYNC data cable or remote control cable that may look
identical. These cable types do not function with the radio
when it is in the HPW SATCOM mode.

b. Tum on the radio and set the function switch to [CT] and select a net preset that has been configured
for HPW SATCOM. It should contain the following programmed parameters:
• KG-84 COMSEC using REDUNDANT MODE 1 synchronization

• KG-84 TEK loaded and programmed to HPW dedicated SATCOM net preset

• HPW TRANSEC loaded to Satellite Storage position and programmed to HPW net preset. It is
recommended to use the KG-84 TEK here if prescribed and coordinated by higher authority. Check
local SOPs.

• HPW modulation selected and HPW baud rate set for type of Satellite and channel being used.

UHF Follow-On (UFO) Satellite - 25 kHz channel on UFO type satellite.

25 kHz channel on FLTSAT satellite.

5 kHz channel on either UFO or FLTSAT satellite.

• HPW TOD set to ± 30 seconds of UTC. Refer to Paragraph 3.8.3.2 to set Over-the-Air TOD from
another radio. This can also be manually set by the operator, or set using GPS; refer to
Paragraph 3.23.5.
c. Tum on PC and allow operating system to fully boot. Start MS Outlook using WMT Profile. Observe
that the Dial-up Networking icon and Radio System icon appear in the system tray of the desktop. If no
DUN icon appears, or a yellow asterisk is seen on the Radio System icon, there is a problem with either
the DUN setup, the cable connection, or the HPW net settings. Click on event log icon in Outlook and
look for status of IDLE in both the event log and floating protocol status window. Windows NT systems
do not display DUN icon but do display the radio system icon.
d. Assigned local address in the HPW data network is located at the top of the Outlook program window.
If incorrect, shutdown Outlook. Go to WMT settings and change to correct address. Apply settings and
reboot the computer to make the changes go into effect. Restart Outlook as described in Step c.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N i^ARRiS'
e. Send a message by clicking on Outlook New Mail Message Toolbar icon or selecting New Mail
Message from file menu. Compose the message, select address of recipients, and select any attachment
to be included.

f. Use RF Properties on the File menu to set HPW Send Options for the message.
• Transmission Mode

ARQ - This selection is the default normal operation mode and allows for the starting code
rate to be selected, if desired. Once transmission begins, the code rate varies according to
channel conditions as determined by how well the receiving station gets the data. The default
starting code rate will be medium.
Non-ARQ - Locks sending terminal into sending message at low code rate to help ensure
message reception under poor channel conditions. Code rate selection is not available if
Non-ARQ is selected. Used mainly to transmit messages to outstations operating under
signal security restrictions that do not want to transmit from their location.
• Code Rate - Selected for ARQ operation

Low, 4-ary PSK

Medium - 8-ary PSK, Default starting code rate
- High, 16-ary PSK

• Highest Priority - Channel Access - Places the message to be sent next, ahead of all others in the
Outbox and attempts to immediately access the channel if no other users have selected this priority.
• Compress Message - Message and attachment are compressed if selected. No additional
compression occurs on non-compressible attachments such as *.jpg or *.zip files. Compression
greatly improves throughput on message files that can be compressed.
Messages can also be sent using the Harris Enhanced Text Form. This form contains all the options
pertaining to the sending of messages in one place for ease of operation. Be sure to press SEND button
instead of EXIT or messages composed and ready to send will be lost.

g. Received messages are indicated of their incoming status by the HPW protocol status window. Upon
successful reception, go to the Inbox to read the received message. View and save attachments. Reply
or forward the message as necessary.
h. While messages are being transmitted or received, view detailed message status in applicable radio
outbox or radio inbox. Monitor Event Log to all system status messages.
i. Consult the RF-6760W-HPW Manual (10515-0320-4200) to assist in isolating problems.

3-36
ifARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.8.3.1 HPW SATCOM Displays

See Figure 3-18 for sample HPW displays. Definitions of display fields are described in the following paragraphs.

Channel access states consist of the following:

• IDLE - data is not being sent or transmitted.

• WAITING - the radio is waiting for channel access.
• SENDING - the radio is sending data.
• SENDING (waiting) - the radio is ready to send data, but is waiting for channel access.
• RECEIVING - the radio is receiving data.
• CALLING - the radio is attempting to connect with another radio.

HPW actual transfer rates are based on channel conditions. Typical shift points are shown in Table 3-7.

Kilobytes transmitted and received are defined as the following:

• T - is the number of kilobytes transmitted since going on-net.
• R - is the number of kilobytes received since going on-net.

Message Originator and Destination meanings consist of the following:

• GRIG - is the origin HPW address of the most recent message.
• DEST - is the destination HPW address of the most recent message.

Ta b l e 3 - 7 . H P W T r a n s f e r B a u d R a t e s

UFO 25 kHz 5 kHz

L O W 1 8 k 21 k 4.3 k

M E D 37 k 43 k 8.5 k

H I G H 56 k —
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

KG-84 TEK01 CT

0 1 - S AT S I M U F O

S AT OFF D AT HPW OFF

TYPE ADF D ATA MODE SQL

H P W S AT C O M S C R E E N 1
CIRCULAR ARROW
B U T T O N

KG-84 TEK01 CT

R: 240.20000 SAT OBI

T: 2 9 4 . 2 0 0 0 0 UFO 999
FREQUENCY

HPW SA TCOM SCREEN 2

CHANNEL ACCESS
S TAT E >

B AT ■: > . KG-64 TEK01 CT K BYTES RECEIVED

HPW Ndle 0 BI
LOW 1:00001 R:00010^
T R A N S F E R R AT E H P W D E S T I N AT I O N
MESSAGEX^ ORIG:00001 DEST:10000—
ADDRESS

H P W S AT C O M S C R E E N 3 HPW ORIGIN
KBYTES
TRANSMITTED ADDRESS

Figure 3-18. HPW SATCOM Operational Displays

3.8.3.2 HPW SATCOM Over-the-Air Time Synchronization

HPW TOD must be time synchronized within one minute of each other. Use ZULU time with accuracy of ± 30
seconds. If probes are received with varying five-digit addresses, check TOD first, and then check the TSK.

See Figure 3-19. Perform the following procedure to set TOD for HPW SATCOM operation by Over-the-Air
synchronization from another radio.

Perform the following procedure to receive a TOD from another AN/PRC-117F:

a. From a KG-84 SATCOM voice net preset that can communicate with the sending station, press
(CALL).

b. Select HPWTOD with the left/right KDU arrows.

c. At the HPW TOD SYNC prompt, select RECEIVE; press [ENTf Wait for the transmitting station to
send TOD sync. The radio accepts and loads the first TOD it receives.

d. Communicate with sending station to let them know if the TOD was successfully received.

e. Switch to the HPW SATCOM net preset and perform communications check with WMT data.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to send the TOD to another station:

a. From a KG-84 SATCOM voice net preset that can communicate with the station needing the TOD sync,
press (CALL). The radio must be in CT mode.
b. Select HPWTOD with the left/right KDU arrows.

c. At the HPW TOD SYNC prompt, select TRANSMIT; press IENT|.

d. Check with receiving station to ensure they have properly received the TOD sync. If not, resend.

e. Switch to the HPW SATCOM net preset and perform communications check with WMT data.

HPW TOD SYNC

WAITING FOR
RECEPTION

SUCCESSFUL RECEIVE
21/03/9812:34:56

PRESS ENT

TRANSMIT

TRANSMITTING...

SUCCESSFUL TOD

. . . T R A N S M I T. . .

PRESS ENT

Figure 3-19. HPW TOD Menu Tree Dver-the-AIr

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N §f\RRiS'
3.8.4 Operational Overrides

Changes can be made while operating in Dedicated UHF SATCOM without reprogramming the AN/PRC-117F,
including channel number, frequency, squelch, power levels, COMSEC parameters, and type of net. Press the right
arrow key on the KDU while operating on a current net preset display to find items that can be modified. Modifiable
items begin to flash. Press the up/down arrow keys or numeral keys to change value of the flashing item. Other items
can be overridden by pressing the lOPT] key on the KDU. Changes to squelch can be directly accessed by pressing
the [SQ] key on the KDU. Using display overrides and the options menu allows continued operation on the presently
selected net preset. During ongoing communications, entering back into programming mode takes the
AN/PRC-117F offline. No communications are possible until AN/PRC-117F is returned to normal mode.

CAUTION

Changing net type from LOS to SAT, and then back to LOS
will invalidate frequency, bandwidth, squelch, and crypto
settings.

NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F is configured by default to automatically

save overrides. All changes are saved automatically. For
programming instructions for the AUTO SAVE function,
refer to Paragraph 4.10.1. When the AUTO SAVE function is
set to OFF, the operator can temporarily override
programmed net parameters. An asterisk (*) appears to the left
of the net name on the LCD, indicating a net preset parameter
was temporarily changed. These changes are valid until the
operator selects another programmed net preset. When the net
is changed, the temporary changes are lost. To permanently
save the changes as programmed values, select the SAVE
command from the lOPT] menu and save the net preset as a
new preset. (Refer to Paragraph 3.23.7.)

3 . 9 U H F D A M A S AT C O M M O D E O P E R AT I O N

See Figure 3-20 through Figure 3-22. UHF DAMA SATCOM is a separate mode of operation in the AN/PRC-117F.
DAMA operation is available on 5 kHz and 25 kHz UHF SATCOM channels that have been converted to DAMA
control. 25 kHz DAMA is operated in either Automatic Control (AC) or Distributed Control (DC). DAMA operation
requires network planning and authorization to access channels. Access authorization contains specific operating
parameters that must be adhered to such as home channel, addressing, precedence, COMSEC type, and data rates.
The AN/PRC-117F uses the following types of DAMA presets to manage operating parameters. These presets allow
for quick configuration changes to any type of operation desired.

• DAMA Net Presets, 10 each, 00 - 09

• DAMA Port Configuration Presets, 10 each, 00 - 09

• DAMA Destination Presets, 50 each, 00 - 49
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

B AT T E RY O P E R AT I N G ENCRYPTION
METER MODE TYPE

CRYPTO SWITCH
SETTING
NET NAME DAMA ANDVT TEK01 CT'

^0-DAMANETO

NET NUMBER CONNECTED 25 kHz -AC

S TAT U S M E S S A G E
NETWORK
SHORTCUT
DAMA SCREEN 1

ACQUIRING, RANGING.
LOGGING IN, CONNECTED,
CONFIGURE. ERROR 25 kHz -AC,
DISABLED 25 kHz -DC, or
5 kHz

CIRCULAR
ARROWS
BUTTON

ORDERWIRE
RECEIVE /TRANSMIT
ENCRYPTION
INDICATOR

CHANNEL
NUMBER
R: 263.725 OW:CT

T; 2 9 7 . 3 2 5
R E C E I V E FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
DAMA SCREEN 2

T R A N S M I T
FREQUENCY
FULL, EMCON,
SILENT

TO DAMA SERVICE
S TAT E D I S P L AY S
25 kHz DAMA
5 kHz DAMA

Figure 3-20. 5 kHz and 25 kHz DAMA Network State Main Operational Displays
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

FROM NETWORK
CIRCULAR ARROWS S TAT E D I S P L AY S
BUTTON COMSEC MODE

TRAFFIC ENCRYPTION
KEY (TEK)
P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N
PRESET NAME CRYPTO SWITCH
DAMA ANDVT TEKOI CT-
SETTING
4-DAMACFG4
P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N
ACTIVE 1120min.
PRESET NUMBER SERVICE TIME REM/\lING
DAMA SCREEN 3
S E R V I C E S TAT E :
\ SEC, MIN.
ACTIVE, QUEUED.
DEDICATED, IDLE,
\ HRS, D AY
TIME REMAINING
PENDING, OFFLINE
BEFORE DISCONNECTION
DISABLED, ERROR
(OR BLANK IF INDEFINITE)

D E S T I N AT I O N
ADDRESS B A T ■: D A M A A N D V T T E K O I (
2 5 k H z A C D I S P L AY
TO: 12345 RX ONLY O
SYNC
SYNCH
DAMA SCREEN 4
VOC, DATA, OFF

DA/, VOC, DATA, OFF

S TAT U S M E S S A G E
CIRCUIT NUMBER SHORTCUT
R B AT C DAMA ANDVT TEKOI (
2 5 k H z D C D I S P L AY
• CR: 12345 RX /TX O

D ATA 2400 SYNC-^

D ATA R AT E V SYNCH
P O R T S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N
DAMA SCREEN 4

B A S E B A N D B I T R AT E

F R A M E F O R M AT

C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O D E

O P E R AT I N G ■ ACTIVE F:25£
S TAT E
.CONNECTED MELf
I NETWORK

DAMA SCREEN 5

VOICE MODE
LPC OR MELP
TO DAMA NETWORK
S TAT E D I S P L AY S

Figure 3-21. 25 kHz DAMA Service State Main Operationai Displays

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

FROM DAMA NETWORK

S TAT E D I S P L AY S

CIRCULAR "
ARROWS BUTTON D A M A A N D V T T E K 0 1 ^
5 kHz DAMA D I S P L AY
4 -DAMACFG4

ACTIVE
SERVICE INCOMING/OUTGOING
M E S S A G E I N D I C AT O R
DAMA SCREEN 3

R T I N D I C AT O R ,
CKT, MSG

SOURCE OR S TAT U S M E S S A G E
DAMA ANDVT TEK01 CI I
D E S T I N AT I O N . S H O R T C U T 5 kHz DAMA D I S P L AY
ADDRESS TO: 12345

.VOC 2400.
PORT S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N
D ATA R AT E

V O C , D ATA , O F F DAMA SCREEN 4

B A S E B A N D
BIT R AT E
D / V, V O C , D ATA , O F F
COMSEC TRAFFIC ENCRYPTION
^ MODE
KEYCTEK)
- CRYPTO SWITCH
DAMA ANDVT TEKO".
SETTING
P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O N
I 4-DAMACFG4 5 kHz/25 kHz DASA
PRESET NAME
D E D I C AT E D 11 2 0 m i n
P O R T C O N F I G U R AT I O™ SERVICE TIME REM"'NING ■SEC, MIN.
PRESET NUMBER HRS, DAY
DAMA SCREEN 5

S E R V I C E S TAT E :
ACTIVE, DEDICATED, IDLE, TIME REMAINING
PENDING, PREEMPTED, OFFLINE BEFORE DISCONNECTION
ERROR, DISABLED, UPLOADING, (OR BLANK IF INDEFINITE)
DOWNLOADING
DAMA ANDVT TEK01 CT

5 kHz/25 kHz DASA

DAMA SCREEN 6
IN HPW, THIS IS RATE
(5 kHz, 25 kHz, UFO)
181 OR HPW

R. B AT BT-DAMA ANDVT TEK01 CT

SBPSK 0 BC
5 k H z D A S A D I S P L AY
010 NONE 2400
O P T I N T E R LV R AT E F E C
OFF
'(ONLYSHOWNFOR181B)
DAMA SCREEN 7

F R A M E F O R M AT

O P E R AT I N G C O N F I G U R AT I O N C O D E

S TAT E —
ACTIVE F:25C^

■J O N N E C T E D MELF>.
N E T W O R K

DAMA SCREEN 8

VOICE MODE
LPC OR MELP
TO DAMA NETWORK
S TAT E D I S P L AY S

Figure 3-22. 5 kHz DAMA Service State Main Operational Displays

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.9.1 DAMA UHF SATCOM Antenna Pointing

Verify that the SATCOM antenna is correctly oriented using a compass to point it on the proper azimuth as
determined from pointing slide rule graphs or software applications. Make an approximate adjustment in the
elevation angle as needed.

A WARNING
To prevent electrical shock and RF bums, avoid contact with
antenna in DAMA UHF SATCOM operation. AN/PRC-117F
transmits automatically in response to forward orderwire and
channel control orderwire commands from channel controller.

3.9.2 DAMA Version Setting

Two versions of DAMA are supported in the AN/PRC-117F:

• MIL-STD-188-182/183 for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA Rev.-)

• MIL-STD-188-182A/183A for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA Rev. A), supported as an
optional feature.
NOTE

AN/PRC-117F units are normally shipped with firmware set

for DAMA Rev.-. The radio should be set for DAMA Rev. A
only if operationally required.

To determine if the AN/PRC-117F is equipped with DAMA Rev. A and the version switching feature, perform the
following procedure:

a. Press the [MODE] button.

b. Use the lefl/right arrow keys to select TEST.

c. Select VERSIONS.

d. Select OVM.

e . S e l e c t F E AT U R E S .

f. Press or ▼ to scroll through the installed features list. The list will include Switchable Rev.- / Rev.
A DAMA if it is equipped.

To determine which version of DAMA is currently active in the radio, perform the following procedure:

a. Rotate function switch to [CT].

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE].

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select DAMA; press [ENTj.

d. Press the [OFTJ key, and then press [CIRCULAR ARROW] key.

e. Use the left/right arrow keys to select VIEW, and then TERMINAL.

f. The DAMA version will be shown on the KDU screen.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

Refer to Paragraph 4.6.6 for the programming procedure describing Rev.- and Rev. A DAMA switching.

3.9.3 Initial Operation

Calls can be either normal DAMA circuit service calls or Demand Assigned Single Access (DASA) dedicated calls.
Precedence and duration are transmitted with the call request to be verified by the channel controller before granting
the service assignment. See Figure 3-23.

Perform the following procedure for initial operation:

a. Rotate function switch to [CTj.

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODEl.

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select DAMA; press [ENT).

d. Select the desired DAMA net preset by pressing the left/right arrow keys on the KDU to scroll to the
net preset number and use the KDU numeral keys to enter the desired net preset number.

NOTE

In DAMA mode, the [PRE ±1 key on the KDU is disabled to

prevent inadvertent changing of the net preset while in a net
connected state.

e. Press [CIRCULAR ARROW] key to confirm that the proper DAMA Port Configuration preset is
seiected for the intended DAMA service request. If a different DAMA Port Configuration preset is
desired, use the left/right arrow keys on the KDU to scroll to the preset number. Enter the required preset
number and press [ENT].

f. Begin radio operation. View main screen for network status changes in the listed order:
1. ACQUIRING

2. RANGING (active ranging method only)

3. LOGGING IN (5 kHz only)

4. CONNECTED

NOTE

Network status displayed may not be visible due to other

temporary messages that are being displayed on the screen.

g. Network status of CONNECTED indicates the terminal is ready to request or receive services in the
DAMA network. If terminal does not become connected and message "NET ERROR: UNABLE TO
REACQUIRE DOWNLINK" is shown by radio, check antenna pointing, loading, and programming
assignment of the proper EOW TSK and Terminal Base Address (TBA). ERROR network status
indicates that no DAMA EOW TSK has been loaded and programmed to the DAMA net preset.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

SELECT REQUEST TYPE

PLACE A CALL
■ SELECT A DESTINATION

L DAMADEST 00 - 49
, PRECEDENCE (1) (7)

FLASH OVERRIDE

EMERGENCY ACTION

DURATION (2) (7)

L # # # #

OUT OF SERVICE

hPR
ImE
CEDENCE1
ROUTINE 7
()

tFLASHOVERR
D
IE
EMERGENCY ACTION

REASON CODE (3)

D U R AT I O N M I N ( 2 )
L # # # »

P A G E

L ADDRESS TO PAGE (00001 • 65535)

L v. m m

S TA RT LINK TEST

L LINK TEST RATE (7)

L 9.6 K

ABORT LINK TEST (5) 1. DO NOT USE HIGHER PRECEDENCE THAN AUTHORIZED.

2. USE 0000 FOR INDEFINITE.

RETURN TO SERVICE

3. REASON CODES ARE USER DEVELOPED.

> SEND STATUS REPORT (6)
4. O N LY WHEN A CALL IS IN PROGRESS.

DISCONNECT FROM CALL (4) 5 . O N LY W H E N L I N K T E S T I S I N P R O G R E S S .

6. NOT AVA I L A B L E WITH DAMA R E V. -.

I TERMINATE ALL (4) (6)
7. D A M A D E FA U LT S CAN BE USED TO REDUCE
> INFO REPORT SCROLLING.

Figure 3-23. 25 kHz UHF AC DAMA Operation CALL Menu

h^ARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.9.4 25 kHz AC DAMA Operation

25 kHz DAMA is usually operated in AC mode. The channel controller determines the frame format of the channel
and the AN/PRC-117F operates accordingly. The operator can choose to make two party point- to-point calls or
conference calls for voice and data service (if allowed by satellite access authorization).

3.9.4.1 Place a Call in 25 kHz AC DAMA

Calls can be made from one to five terminal or network addresses. A network address is a predetermined grouping
of terminals that are operated together as a network. Determine the following before making call request:

• Type of Service
Use the proper DAMA Port Configuration Preset for the service needed from the service state display screen
(see Figure 3-21) before placing the call. Upon changing the Port Configuration Preset with a connected
terminal, the AN/PRC-117F sends a Status Report B Retum Channel Control Orderwire (RCCOW) to the
channel controller for notification of the new configuration. For DASA Dedicated calls in 25 kHz AC
DAMA, a Port Configuration Preset with a configuration code must be used to signify DASA. Refer to
current configuration codes in Table B-8.
• Station(s) to be Called
DAMA Destination Presets are used in call menus to select station(s) to be called. TBAs associated with
this destination preset are shown on line below the DAMA Destination Preset name.
• Precedence of the Call

Use the proper precedence for the importance of the required service. Using a higher precedence than
authorized results in the call being denied. Not all terminals have access to every precedence level. Check
with organization DAMA planners and authorization documents. At certain times, the channel controller
can place precedence restrictions. The AN/PRC-117F does not allow a call to be placed below this
precedence level during these times.
• Duration of the Call

Request enough time to complete the required communications; service is automatically terminated at the
end of this time period.
See Figure 3-23. Perform the following procedure to PLACE A CALL using 25 kHz AC DAMA:

a. Press the [CALL] key to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE.

b. Select PLACE A CALL and press [ENTj.

c. Select the destination to be called. Use the left/right arrow keys to select the DAMA Destination Preset
Number field and then enter the preset number that is desired. An altemate means is to select the
destination name field and scroll through the DAMA Destination Presets names with the up/down arrow
keys. Press [ENTj when proper destination preset number or name is in view. The TBAs associated with
this destination preset are shown at bottom of the display.

d. At next display screen, choose a precedence for the CALL and press [ENTj:
• ROUTINE

• I M M E D I AT E

• PRIORITY

• FLASH

• FLASH OVERRIDE
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N
I^ARRIS'
• EMERGENCY ACTION (25 kHz DAMA only)

NOTE

When the channel controller places restrictions on the system,

a minimum precedence is required to place a call on the
DAMA channel. Do not exceed the terminal's maximum
authorized precedence, as the system will reject the call
request.

e. Enter the required CALL DURATION in number of seconds, minutes, hours, or days or input 0000 for
indefinite. Use the left/right arrow keys to select between either the unit digits field or the units. Press
[ENT] when correct time and units are selected.
f. The display returns to the main operational display. Service state changes to PENDING Wait for the
AN/PRC-117F to send the request to the channel controller.

g. Observe the following service states:

• PENDING - AN/PRC-117F terminal is negotiating the sending of the call request and action on it
from the channel controller. Wait until it becomes active or a system message is sent concerning
the request.
• ACTIVE - Service request has been granted, the normal indication to commence operation with
the requested service.
• QUEUED - Service request is being held and is granted when channel resources are free. Wait
until the service is finally granted or terminate the call and try again at a later time.
• DEDICATED - Indicates that DASA operation has been granted. Operation in DASA is ruled by
MIL-STD-188-181 covering 5 kHz and 25 kHz dedicated UHF SATCOM.
• IDLE - The AN/PRC-117F is not active or setting up a service.

3 . 9 . 4 . 2 Te r m i n a t e C a l l , 2 5 k H z A C D A M A

Upon completion of a call, a user should terminate the timed or indefinite call so that channel resources go back to
control of the channel controller for reassignment to other terminal users in the network.

Perform the following procedure to terminate a call:

a. Press (CALL).

b. From SELECT REQUEST TYPE display, select DISCONNECT FROM CALL or TERMINATE
ALL with the up/down arrow keys and press [ENTJ.

c. The DISCONNECT FROM CALL or TERMINATE ALL request is sent to the channel controller.
The channel controller tears down the service and the service state of the terminal returns to any of the
following service states: IDLE, PENDINQ or QUEUED depending on any other ongoing requests.
3.9.4.3 Send an Out-Of-Servlce Request, 25 kHz AC DAMA

In 25 kHz AC DAMA, out-of-service requests are sent to the channel controller instead of logging out as in 5 kHz
DAMA. In these requests, the duration for being out of service, precedence, and reason code is transmitted. If any
other station attempts to call a terminal during the out of service period, the channel controller ean report the reason
code and time to be out of service to that user.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to send an out-of-service request:

a. Press the [CALL] key to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

b. Select OUT OF SERVICE and press [ENTJ.

c. Select precedence for out-of-service request and press [ENTJ.

d. Enter two-digit numerical out of service code, 00 - 99. These codes are devised by users as needed.

e. Enter in DURATION for the out of service period; use 0000 if it is to be indefinite. Press [ENTl.

f. The out-of-service request is sent to the channel controller. Watch the display for acknowledgement
from channel controller.

3.9.4.4 Return To Service, 25 kHz AC DAM A Operation

To return to service, a status report B RCCOW is sent to the channel controller for notification that the operator has
returned by choosing the menu item RETURN TO SERVICE. It is not necessary to use this menu item when
turning the AN/PRC-117F back on after a period of time in which it was powered off. The RCCOW sent to the
channel controller in becoming connected again is notification of your return to service.

Perform the following procedure to return to service:

a. Press the [CALL] key to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

b. Select RETURN TO SERVICE and press [ENTJ.

c. A status report B RCCOW is sent to the channel controller.

3.9.4.5 Paging (25 kHz AC DAMA Only)

In 25 kHz UHF AC DAMA, an AN/PRC-117F terminal user can page up to three other terminals. Paging is only
available in 25 kHz AC DAMA. Procedures on how paged stations respond to pages are the responsibility of using
organization network planners. See Figure 3-23.
Perform the following procedure to page:

a. Press the [CALL| key to bring up service request screen of SELECT REQUEST TYPE.

b. Select PAGE and press [ENTJ.

c. Use KDU number keys to type in the first address to page; press [ENT] to accept it.

d. Repeat Step c for the second and third addresses. If no more addresses need to be paged, use 00000 and
press (ENT].

e. The AN/PRC-117F sends the page request to the channel controller. Paged stations should respond as
unit procedure directs.

3.9.4.6 Send an INFO Report (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)

To alleviate problems in 25 kHz AC DAMA operation, the channel controller has the capability to request
information from the terminal operator by sending an information request code to the terminal user to get a response
based on code. The terminal user must respond to the request with a information report code in order to continue
operation in DAMA.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N ifARRtS'
Perform the following procedure to send an info report code at any other time:

a. Press [CALL] to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

b. Select INFO REPORT from menu; press [ENTj.

c. Enter the desired information report response code to send to the channel controller and press [ENTJ.
The AN/PRC-117F sends the code to the channel controller. (When no answer exists, send a 00000 to
cancel the request.)

3.9.4.7 Start Link Test (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)

See Figure 3-23. To determine suitability for voice and data operations using more robust frame formats that support
higher burst data rates, the 25 kHz DAMA has capability for link testing built into its frame format. Link testing
does not reduce channel overhead allotted to supporting communications. Slower data rate link test rates require
more time to complete. Refer to Table 3-8.

Perform the following procedure to conduct a link test:

a. Press the [CALL] key to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE dispiay.

b. Select START LINK TEST; press [ENT].

c. Select desired LINK TEST RATE; press [ENT].

d. A link test request is then sent to the channel controller. When the link test slot becomes available the
channel controller commands the AN/PRC-117F to begin the link test.
e. Upon completion of the link test, the AN/PRC-117F displays the results in number of bit errors and
missed acquisitions during the test. Results are automatically recorded by the channel controller and
used in determining data burst rates. Terminals that show good results in link tests are assigned frame
formats supporting more robust burst data rates.

Table 3-8. 25 kHz DAMA Link Test Data Rates

L i n k Te s t D a t a R a t e Time Required to Complete

9.6 kbps 6-7 minutes

19.2 kbps 2 minutes

32 kbps 1 minute

3.9.4.8 Abort Link Test (25 kHz AC or DC DAMA)

See Figure 3-23. Perform the following procedure to abort the link test to use the AN/PRC-117F for another purpose:

a. Press the [CALL] key to bring up the SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

b. Select ABORT LINK TEST; and press [ENT].

c. The radio aborts the link test process and the link test terminates.

3-50
HfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.9.5 25 kHz DAMA Operation, DC Operation

25 kHz DC DAMA operation is less commonly used, and is instituted to give capability to legacy DAMA equipment
still in use. DC DAMA is not true DAMA, but a form of time division multiplexing that requires users to coordinate
time of communications. See Figure 3-24. DC operation is not selectable by the AN/PRC-117F operator. The
terminal operates in 25 kHz DC DAMA accordingly upon becoming net connected to a channel running DC DAMA.

3.9.5.1 Place a Call, 25 kHz DC DAMA

DC operation uses circuit numbers that give the user a dedicated time slot of a predetermined data rate. Destination
terminal(s) have to be on the circuit at the same time to receive any transmitted messages. Using the proper port
configuration preset is also a responsibility of the terminal user.
Perform the following procedure to place a call:

a. Rotate function switch to (CTl.

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE].

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select DAMA; press [ENTj.

d. Select the desired DAMA net preset by pressing the left/right arrow keys on the KDU to scroll to the
net preset number and use the KDU numeral keys to enter the desired net preset number.

NOTE

In DAMA mode, the [PRE ±[ key on the KDU is disabled to

prevent inadvertent changing of the net preset while in a net
connected state.

e. Begin radio operation. View main screen for network status of CONNECTED.

f. Press the [CALL] key to bring up the SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

g. Choose PLACE A CALL and press [ENT].

h. Select DAMA destination preset to be called and press [ENT]. The DC circuit number associated with
this preset is shown on the lower line of the display.

NOTE

In 25 kHz DC DAMA, a destination preset is not a true

destination terminal as in 25 kHz AC or 5 kHz DAMA. It
provides a connection to a DC circuit number giving a defined
static data rate.

i. The radio display reverts back to service state display with a service state of PENDING as the radio
validates the requested circuit. If successful, the service state changes to ACTIVE. At this point
operations can commence as allowed by the Transmit (TX) capability.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

NOTES:

SELECT REQUEST TYPE 1. ONLY [F A CALL IS IN PROGRESS.

2. ONLY IF LINK TEST IS IN PROGRESS.

PLACE A CALL

L SELECT DESTINATION
L m DAMADEST 00-49

DISCONNECT FROM CALL (1)

S TA RT LINK TEST

L LINK TEST RATE

O
tO
.K 19.2 K

ABORT LINK TEST (2)

Figure 3-24. 25 kHz UHF DAMA, DC Operations

3.9.5.2 Disconnect from Call (25 kHz DC DAMA)

Upon finishing a call, it is standard procedure to terminate the call. Perform the following procedure to terminate a
call;

a. From a service state display indicating ACTIVE, press (CALL).

b. From SELECT REQUEST TYPE display, select DISCONNECT FROM CALL with the up/down
arrow keys. Press (ENTj.
c. The service state returns to IDLE.

3.9.6 View Network Status Messages (All DAMA Modes)

The AN/PRC-117F displays operational status messages that pop up on the display for a brief period and then are
placed in a message database while DAMA operation continues. These messages are very important in determining
status in operation while using DAMA. Refer to Table B-10 and Table B-11 for a listing of the messages and their
explanation. There are two methods to view messages while operating in UHF DAMA SATCOM: message indicator
method and options menu method.

3.9.6.1 Message Indicator Method

Perform the following procedure for the message indicator method:

a. Press the left/right arrow keys to scroll over to the envelope icon on the operational display and press
[ENTl.
b. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll through the message database.
c. Press ICLRl to return back to operational screens.
hfARmS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.9.6.2 View Messages, Options Menu Method

Refer to Paragraph 3.9.10.4 to view DAMA messages.

NOTE

Termination of operations on a current DAMA net will occur

if a preset is changed, the radio is powered off, or the operator
enters programming mode. When operation on a current
DAMA Net is terminated, all the DAMA status messages are
erased. Some pop-up messages require operator intervention
to continue.

3.9.7 5 kHz UHF DAMA Operation

In 5 kHz DAMA, calls can be made to a single terminal address for a Point To Point (PTP) capability or to a subnet
address giving network capability. The nine second frame length format creates long delays for voice users. 5 kHz
DAMA operation was designed for and is more suited for DATA operations.

Upon entry into DAMA mode using a properly configured DAMA net preset, the AN/PRC-117F automatically
acquires, ranges, and logs in with the channel controller. Network status shows CONNECTED if successful. If the
EOW TSK is not loaded, the AN/PRC-117F indicates a network status of ERROR indicting it cannot acquire the
satellite, or if the wrong TSK is being used, tries to acquire indefinitely.

DASA call requests are placed with precedence of the call and the desired duration. Service request can be granted,
placed in queue, or denied. Calls made with a precedence higher than authorized are denied.

5 kHz DAMA has two basic modes of operation: circuit or message service. The AN/PRC-117F is placed in each
mode by toggling the display screens. The mode of operation must be selected prior to operation in that mode. If a
message service message is received while in circuit mode, the AN/PRC-117F has to be switched to message mode
to download the message.

• Circuit Service - Provides half-duplex encrypted voice or data service to a single destination or to a network
of terminals grouped under a sub-network address.
• Message Service - A specialized data mode that provides for the packet transmission and reception of data
messages of up to 14 k bytes in size. This requires an external data device to input the message to the
A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

3.9.7.1 Place a Call (5 kHz Circuit Service or Dedicated DASA Call)

See Figure 3-25. Requesting circuit service or dedicated calls are essentially the same. Dedicated service gives a
channel that is not hindered by the long 5 kHz DAMA frame format delay. Not all users have authorized use of
dedicated service. Dedicated service is used to support data rates and message lengths not adequately supported by
circuit service. The AN/PRC-117F must be operating in the circuit mode. Consider all the following items before
placing a call:
• Type of Service
Use the proper DAMA Port Configuration Preset for the service needed. Select this preset from the Service
state display screen before placing the call.
• Station(s) to be Called
DAMA Destination Presets are used in call menus to select station(s) to be called. TBAs associated with
this destination preset are displayed on line below the DAMA Destination Preset name.

3-53
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N §f\RRtS'
• Precedence of the Call

Using a higher precedence than authorized results in the call being denied. Not all terminals have access to
every precedence level. Check with organization DAMA planners and satellite access authorization
documents.

• Duration of the Call (DASA only)

Request enough time to complete the required communications. Service is automatically terminated at the
end of this time period. Additionally, when making DASA calls, select either 5 kHz or 25 kHz channels.
Perform the following procedure to PLACE A CALL using 5 kHz DAMA:

a. Rotate function switch to [CTj.

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE].

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select DAMA; press [ENTf.

d. Select the desired DAMA net by pressing the left/right arrow keys on the KDU to scroll to the net preset
number. Use the KDU numeral keys to enter the desired net preset number.
e. Press (CIRCULAR ARROW] key to view that the proper DAMA Port Configuration preset is
selected for the intended DAMA service request. If a different DAMA Port Configuration preset is
desired, use the left/right arrow keys on the I^U to scroll to the preset number, 0-9. Enter the required
preset number and press [ENTj.
f. Begin radio operation. View main screen for Network Status of CONNECTED.

g. Use the [CIRCULAR ARROW] key to check service state screen for 5 kHz CKT mode. If in MSG
mode, use the left/right arrow keys to scroll to mode and change to CKT mode.
h. Press the [CALL] key to bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE.

i. Select PLACE A CALL and press [ENT].

j. Select the destination to be called by using the lefl/right arrow keys to select either the DAMA
Destination Preset number 00-49 for numeric entry of the destination or the Destination Preset Name
for scrolling using the up/down arrow keys. The five digit terminal addresses associated with this
destination preset shows at the bottom line of the display.

k. At next display screen, choose one of the following for the precedence of the CALL; press [ENT]:
• ROUTINE

• I M M E D I AT E

• PRIORITY

• FLASH

• FLASH OVERRIDE

1. At DASA REQUEST? prompt, select YES for dedicated service and NO for regular DAMA circuit

m. Enter the required DASA call DURATION in numerical units of seconds, minutes, hours, or days. Use
0000 if an indefinite time period is desired. Press [ENT] when proper time and units are selected. Time
is not entered for normal DAMA calls.

3-54
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

n. For DASA dedicated calls, an additional choice of CHANNEL TYPE is requested in the call request.
Select 5 kHz or 25 kHz. This menu option is not shown when making a normal DAMA circuit service
call.

o. The display returns to the main operational display. Service state changes to PENDING Wait for the
radio to send the request to the channel controller.

p. Observe the service state display for the following indications:

• PENDING - Radio terminal is negotiating the sending of the call request and action on it from the
channel controller. Wait until it becomes active or a system message is sent concerning the request.
• ACTIVE - The normal indication to commence operation with the requested service. Indicates
service request has been granted.
• PREEMPTED - An active service has been preempted by a higher priority service. Try calling
again.
• DEDICATED - Indicates that DASA operation has been granted. Operation in DASA is ruled by
MIL-STD-188-181 covering 5 kHz and 25 kHz dedicated UHF SATCOM. Use the appropriate
DAMA Port Configuration preset needed for the DASA service.
• IDLE - The radio is not active or setting up a service.

SELECT REQUEST TYPE

U PLACE A CALL
SELECT A D E S T I N AT I O N

L ff » DAMADEST 00 - 49
PRECEDENCE (1)
L ROUTINE

1. FLASH OVERRIDE

I N F O R M AT I O N T Y P E ( 5 )
L VOICE

DASA REQUEST

. DURATION MIN (2)

NOTESil. DO NOT USE HIGHER PRECEDENCE THAN AUTHORIZED.
L # # # #
2. USE 0000 FOR INDEFINITE.

■CHANNEL TYPE (3) 3 . T Y P E O F C H A N N E L F O R D A S A R E Q U E S T.

L 5 kHz
4. O N LY WHEN ASK DASA CALL IS IN
PROGRESS.

5. O N LY WHEN ANDVT COMSEC IS USED.

I TEARDOWN SERVICE (6)
6. O N LY WHEN ASK DAMA CALL IS IN
LOGOUT <8)
PROGRESS.

7. O N LY WHEN LOGGED O F F.
> SEND STATUS REPORT (3)
8. O N LY WHEN LOGGED IN.
DISCONNECT FROM CALL (4)
9. NOT AVA I L A B L E WITH DAMA R E V. •.
LOGIN (7)

Figure 3-25. 5 kHz UHF DAMA Operation, Place a Call, Circuit or Dedicated (DASA)
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N §f\RRiS'
3.9.7.2 Te a r d o w n Service

Circuit service and dedicated service are torn down upon completion of the communications, if time is still
remaining or if indefinite time period (0000) has been selected.
Perform the following procedure for service teardown:

a. At end of using a DAMA service, press the [CALLl key on KDU.

b. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll to TEARDOWN SERVICE; press [ENT] to begin teardown.
c. Use the up/down arrow keys to select the desired service to teardown. Press [CIRCULAR ARROWl
key to view the second screen of the service state.
d. Press lENTl to teardown this service.

3.9.7.3 Disconnect from Call (5 kHz Dedicated Call Only)

Perform the following procedure to terminate a dedicated call:

a. At the end of using DASA dedicated service, press the [CALL] key on KDU.
b. Use the up/down arrow keys to scroll to DISCONNECT FROM CALL.

c. Press [ENTl to disconnect from the call.

d. Service state goes to IDLE after reacquiring the network home channel.

NOTE

Users in a subnet must DISCONNECT FROM CALL to

leave the DASA channel earlier than the requested DASA
time period.

3.9.8 5 kHz Message Service Operation

See Figure 3-26. 5 kHz message mode is a specialized service for sending data messages less than 14 kbytes in size.
Data messages greater than 14 kbytes must be sent using circuit or dedicated service or cut into smaller sections for
transmission to use message service. In this mode, the AN/PRC-117F is uploaded with the message to be sent and
then the call for service is made automatically by the AN/PRC-117F.

Up to five outgoing messages and three incoming can be held, but are still handled one at a time by the
AN/PRC-117F, at any given time. Incoming messages, if not downloaded to a data device, can be lost if another
message is sent to the AN/PRC-117F before this occurs. Higher precedence messages are sent ahead of lower
precedence messages waiting in queue. Higher precedence messages in the incoming message buffer automatically
get downloaded first. Receiving additional messages with a full receive message buffer results in loss of the oldest
message, if messages in the buffer have the same precedence.

Upon being granted service to the destination terminal, the AN/PRC-117F automatically sends the data under
direction from the channel controller. An acknowledgement is sent back to the sender when the receiving terminal
has received the message. The acknowledgement is not an indication that the terminal user has read the message
only that the message made it to the terminal.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

SELECT REQUEST TYPE

- SEND A MESSAGE

L SELECT A DESTINATION
L ff « DAMADEST 00-49
LPRECEDENCE (1, 2) 1. DO NOT USE HIGHER PRECEDENCE THAN AUTHORIZED.
- ROUTINE
2 . U P L O A D M E S S A G E T O R A D I O A T T H I S P O I N T.
- PRIORITY
3. MESSAGE IS AUTOMATICALLY SENT TO DATA DEVICE IF 5 K
- I M M E D I AT E
M E S S A G E M O D E I S S E T T O A U T O M AT I C R E L E A S E . T H E D O W N L O A D
- FLASH

^ FLASH OVERRIDE M E S S A G E P R O M P T O N LY A P P E A R S I F U S I N G M A N U A L R E L E A S E .

4. ONLY WHEN A SERVICE IS IN PROGRESS.

- LOGOUT (5)
5 . O N LY W H E N L O G G E D I N .
- DOWNLOAD MESSAGE (3)
6 . O N LY W H E N L O G G E D O U T.
SEND STATUS REPORT (7)
7. NOT AVAILABLE WITH DAMA REV. -.
» TEARDOWN SERVICE (4)
- LOGIN (6)

Figure 3-26. 5 kHz UHF DAMA Message Service Operation, Send a Message

3.9.8.1 Send a Data Message using 5 kHz DAMA Message Service

DATA messages less than 14 kbytes can be uploaded to the AN/PRC-117F and packet sent to the destination address.
The terminal prompts when to upload the message to the AN/PRC-117F.

Perform the following procedure to send a message:

a. Ensure the DATA device is connected to the J1 ADF connector or J3 DATA connector and is ready for
operation with a message to be transmitted.
b. Select a DAMA Port Configuration Preset that properly interfaces the data device to the radio using
KG-84C encryption.

c. Press [CIRCULAR ARROW] key to move display screens to service state screen to place radio in
MSG mode. If radio is in CKT mode, use the left/right arrow keys to scroll to MODE and change to
MSG mode with the up/down arrow keys, and press [ENTj.

d. Press the [CALL] key to bring up display for SELECT REQUEST TYPE.

e. Select SEND A MESSAGE; press [ENT].

f. Select DAMA DESTINATION preset that the message is sent to and press [ENT]. TBAs associated
with this preset are shown across the bottom line of this display.

g. The next display is SELECT PRECEDENCE. This display shows the precedence last used to call the
selected destination, press [ENT] to keep it or scroll and select an altemate message precedence.

h. After a brief configuring screen, the terminal prompts user to ENTER MESSAGE to the radio. At this
time, send the message on the Data device to upload it into the radio. PRESS CLR TO ABORT.
i. When uploading is complete, the service state indicates IDLE with a message status of one (1) for
outgoing. After a message is transmitted by the radio, the outgoing message indicator number is
decreased.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N tfARmS'
3.9.8.2 Receive a Data Message using 5 kHz DAMA Message Service

Depending on operation of the particular data device, the AN/PRC-117F can be programmed to either automatically
download a received message from the AN/PRC-117F buffer to the data device or it occurs manually after the user
has data device ready to accept the message from the AN/PRC-117F. Refer to Paragraph 3.9.10.7 on setting the 5K
MSG/MODE settings. When using manual message release, be sure to download messages so additional messages
can be received without losing important data.

When using 5 kHz Message Service, the AN/PRC-117F is operated with a network state of CONNECTED and a
service state of IDLE. When a message sender initiates the sending of a data message to a terminal, the channel
controller looks for the presence of the destination terminal and sets up a service between the two terminals. Upon
successful transmission, the AN/PRC-117F will indicate that it is holding a message for downloading in its message
buffer. If the 5K MSG Mode is set to AUTO instead of MANUAL, it sends it immediately to the interfaced output
data device.

Perform the following procedure to download a message using 5 kHz Message Service with Manual Message mode:

a. Verify there is a buffered message in the radio and that the radio is in MSG mode.

b. Connect the data device to the J1 ADF Connector or J3 DATA connector, as applicable, and be sure it
is ready to receive the message.

c. Press the [CALL] key and bring up SELECT REQUEST TYPE display.

d. Select DOWNLOAD MESSAGE; press lENTJ.

e. The service state changes to DOWNLOAD and the message is sent to the data device. When complete,
the service state changes back to IDLE.

f. Check the data device for proper reception of the message. The incoming message number is
decremented.

3.9.9 Logout from 5 kHz DAMA Channel

Leaving the 5 kHz DAMA channel requires the terminal to logout with the channel controller. This is also required
when shutting the AN/PRC-117F off for any reason like changing the batteries, adjusting the antenna, entering
programming, or exiting DAMA mode.

NOTE

If the AN/PRC-117F does go off the net without logging out,

it is automatically logged out by the channel controller after
missing 200 Return Orderwires (ROWs) (approximately 30
minutes). Until this happens, the channel controller still
considers the terminal to be logged in. If the terminal attempts
to log in a second time, the channel controller may reject the
second log in attempt. If this happens, go into Net Preset
programming (refer to Paragraph 4.6.1.1.4) and change login
type to PREASSIGNED and the terminal becomes
CONNECTED again. Return setting to OVER-THE-AIR
after the next logout.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
ff\RRIS' OPERATION

Perform the following procedure to logout from a 5 kHz DAMA Net:

a. Press the [CALLl key to bring up the SELECT REQUEST TYPE display screen.

b. Use the up/down arrow keys to select LOGOUT; press [ENT].

c. The service state and network state switches to DISABLED after the channel controller acknowledges
the logout request.

d. The radio can now be switched to another DAMA net preset or turned off.

3.9.10 UHF DAMA SATCOM Options

See Figure 3-27. DAMA UHF SATCOM operation has the following DAMA specific options available by pressing
the [OFTJ key on the KDU. DAMA options are listed on two different display pages. Use [CIRCULAR ARROW]
key to toggle between the two displays at any time while in the Options menu.
3.9.10.1 Save

Any changes to DAMA Net Presets or DAMA Port Configuration Presets can be saved using the SAVE function.
If SAVE does not appear in the option menu, then AUTOSAVE is set to ON in the CFIG programming menu. Refer
to Paragraph 4.10.1 for Configuration (CFIG) programming. Any changes made to the DAMA mode presets are
automatically saved. If changes are made without notifying network members, loss of communications could occur.
If SAVE appears in the Options menu, use SAVE to make changes to Net and Port Configuration presets.

Select the type of preset to be saved by either NET or PORT_CONFIG The preset number and name appears. The
preset can be saved as it is by pressing [ENT] on the shown preset number and preset name. The SAVE option can
also be used to clone presets to another unused preset number and name. This can save time in making additional
presets needing slight parameter changes.
3.9.10.2 Net

NET option accesses the Guard List and Transmit Capability Options. Make changes to TBAs in the guard list by
adding, deleting, and saving. Use REVIEW to check entries in the Guard List. TX OPTS controls the
AN/PRC-117Fs transmit capability of FULL, EMCON, or SILENT (5 kHz only), as well as the Constant Key Port
options.
3.9.10.3 Time of Day (TOD)

DAMA TOD is not used with active ranging. TOD can be ignored when using active ranging.

3.9.10.4 View

To view messages and additional information on the network or service states, select VIEW to access message
submenu or either MESSAGES, NETJNFO, SERVICEJNFO, or TERMINAL.

3.9.10.4.1 MESSAGES

To view all system messages that have been received in DAMA operation, use the up/down arrow keys to scroll
through the list of messages. A maximum of 100 messages can be held. Messages are stored in sequential order as
they occur and are deleted upon selection and operation in another DAMA net. Refer to Table B-10 and Table B-11
for a listing of the messages and their explanation.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.9.10.4.2 NET INFO

Network info while operating in 25 kHz DAMA, shows the maximum authorized precedence, the frame format
being used, minimum acceptable precedence, and the channel mode. In 5 kHz DAMA, the demarcation address,
channel restrictions, and link quality can be checked.

SAME AS NORMAL MODE OPTIONS

DAMA SPECIFIC OPTIONS

DESTINATION 5K MSG MODE

Figure 3-27. UHF DAMA SATCOM Options

3.9.10.4.3 SERVICEJNFO

Information about current DAMA services can be viewed at SERVICE_INFO. Use this to view the slot number set
in the DAMA frame format.

3.9.10.4.4 TERMINAL

This shows the TEA and the DAMA revision used (Rev. - or Rev. A).

3.9.10.5 Destination

DAMA destination presets can be quickly modified or added from this menu. Refer to Paragraph 4.6.3.

3.9.10.6 Code

DAMA Port Configurations Presets must be crossed-referenced to a standard DAMA Network configuration code
to properly report the intended mode of operation to the DAMA channel controller. When overriding any portion on
the port configuration presets, such as encryption type and data rate, use the appropriate configuration code for the
change. This also includes switching between voice and data operation. Refer to Table B-8 for a listing of DAMA
configuration codes.

3.9.10.7 5 K MSG Mode

To match the capabilities of the attached data device, select AUTOMATIC or MANUAL message release when
operating in 5 kHz Message Mode. Any device that must have its software or hardware configured to enable
message reception must use a setting of MANUAL. The AN/PRC-117F holds the message until the operator has the
device ready and then can prompt the AN/PRC-117F to download the message.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
IfiRRtS' OPERATION

3 . 1 0 I N T E G R AT E D WAV E F O R M O P E R AT I O N

This section covers typical IW Net operations via the radio front panel. These steps are intended to provide general
assistance in the operations of a single IW Net.

3 . 1 0 . 1 U H F S AT C O M I n f o r m a t i o n

Communications satellites are in orbit 22,300 miles in space and appear stationary to users on the ground. The
coverage area of a satellite signal is called the footprint. All stations on a given satellite channel must be within the
same footprint. Lower antenna take-off angles are the most challenging, as the satellite is located farther away,
therefore, more susceptible to interference or being blocked by terrain.

3.10.2 Additional Equipment Required

In addition to the AN/PRC-117F, the following additional equipment is generally required for UHF SATCOM
communications:

• UHF S AT C O M Antenna

• Magnetic compass
• Required length of antenna coax cable
• Compatible RF, Bayonet Neill-Concelman (BNC), or N-type (male or female) connectors
• Known satellite azimuth and angle or, a satellite calculating device/tool.

3.10.3 Preliminary Steps

Prior to initiating UHF SATCOM communications, the following steps should be performed:

a. Analyze terrain in the intended antenna pointing direction, ensuring clearance of obstructions to Line
of Sight (LOS) requirement (hills, vehicles, buildings, etc.).

b. Connect Antenna RF coaxial line to AN/PRC-117F J8 antenna port and to the SATCOM antenna.

c. Adjust antenna according to calculated azimuth and angle for the channel/satellite in use.

d. Services designated for data communications require appropriate data cable connection from PC to
radio J3 DATA port. Use (10513-0730-A1/2) cable for synchronous (sync) / asynchronous (async) data
or (10513-0710-A006) cable for Asynchronous Data Transfer (ADT)/Adaptive Radio Data Protocol
(ARDP) data.

3 . 1 0 . 4 G e n e r a l U H F S AT C O M G u i d a n c e

The following items are provided as general guidance for UHF SATCOM communications:

• To minimize line loss, use only required cable length. For runs longer than 100 feet, use low-loss 400/600
cable. Typical small diameter coaxial cable associated with most tactical SATCOM antennas should not be
over 25 feet.

• Use a DIRECTIONAL SATCOM antenna when possible. If equipped, use the associated gain extensions
elements and align them with the main radiating antenna blades.
• Maintain maximum distance possible from other RF sources or antennas.
• Do not place SATCOM antennas one behind the other, and use maximum lateral separation possible or a
minimum of 30 ft. between SATCOM antennas. Refer to Table 3-9 for additional detail.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N tf/iRms'
Table 3-9. Recommended IW Co-site Antenna Minimum Separation
Power Output Setting Recommended Antenna Separation
20W 50 feet (-15 meters)
15 W 40 feet (~12 meters)
low 30 feet (~ 9 meters)
8 W 15 feet (~ 4.5 meters)

• Inspect your antenna daily for damage, and correct azimuth and angle, and use sandbag or other weighted
item to prevent tipping.
• For long term base station operations, tape over RF connectors to prevent entiy of moisture.

3.10.5 IW Operation Steps

Refer to Table 3-10 for typical IW Operation steps. The actual number of IW services and service types will vary.
IW access will be based on the users IW Satellite Authorization Request (SAR) and subsequent SAA message. Refer
to SAA message for actual service(s) and IW access parameters.

NOTE

Before beginning IW Operations, ensure ANDVT, KG-84,

and VINSON COMSEC key types are loaded in all radios and
set to respective compartment TEKOl. Also ensure that
TSKOl is loaded in the SATELLITE key area. Once loaded,
the IW Service automatically sets radio COMSEC type, data
rate and other voice/data mode configurations.

NOTE

Operation instructions are based off of IW Net Programming

steps previously accomplished in Paragraph 4.1!.

Table 3-10. IW Operation Steps

Procedure Information

a. Power on the AN/PRC-117F and rotate the

AN/PRC-117F function switch to CT. The
radio will go through its self-test routine.
b. When the main menu is displayed, press the
[3/MODEl button. The OPERATIONAL
MODE screen is displayed.

3-62
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-10. IW Operation Steps (Continued)

c. Using the up/down arrow keys, select IW The IW NET and PORTCFGS NAMEs and SERVICE
and press [ENTj. NUMBERS displayed are examples. Refer to actual IW
NET PGM parameters for actual names and service
numbers.

A N D V T TEKOl CT

O P E R AT I O N A L MODE
I W

ACQUIRING indicates acquisition of the SATID on

d. ACQUIRING Status Main Page. one of 10 pre-determined frequencies.

If radio remains in ACQUIRING, verify:

R VOLHKD IW ANDVT TEKOl CT • S AT a n t e n n a R F c o n n e c t i o n a n d o r i e n t a t i o n

OO-IWNETO O i • TSK Keying Material (KEYMAT) and radio

ACQUIRING 4 SEC U 0 7 storage position, via SAA message
NETWORK T I M E R S AT '

• IW TSK TSEC settings via IW NET PGM or TSK

order-wire sequence
e. RANGING in Progress. RANGING occurs before going IDLE.

Brief periods of Ranging will also occur on regular

intervals after the SERVICE CONNECTION is
R V0LMB3 IW ANDVT TEKOl CT established.

OO-IWNETO
The time to Range is a factor of number of SERVICES
RANGING U07 available on a SATID, regardless of how many
NETWORK SERVICE S AT SERVICES have been programmed.

f. IDLE Status Main Page. IDLE is displayed when SATID downlink is acquired,
but is not connected to a SERVICE.

If AUTO-CONNECT was NOT programmed for a

R VOL^KD IW ANDVT TEKOl CT particular SERVICE, the display will remain in IDLE
and SERVICE # will remain blank .
OO-IWNETO
I D L E U 0 7 Refer to Step a [Changing to Another Service] below
NETWORK SERVICE S AT for manual SERVICE connection, using the [ l/Callj
button.

3-63
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N h^ARRIS
Table 3-10. IW Operation Steps (Continued)
g. CONNECTED Status Main Page. If AUTO-CONNECT option was programmed for a
SERVICE during IW PGM, the radio will automatically
attempt a connection to that designated SERVICE #.
T VOLBBC IW ANDVT TEKOl CT When in a CONNECTED state, you are ready to
OO-IWNETO communicate via Push-to-Talk (PTT) handset for voice
or to Transmit (TX)/Receive (RX) DATA.
CONNECTED 12345 U07
NETWORK SERVICE S AT

h. CONNECTED Status Alternate Page. NOTE: Use circular arrow button to change between
Operational pages.

T VOLl ANDVT TEKOl CT

OO-IWNETO
F U L L v o c D/V 2400
TXCAP A D F D ATA R AT E

Changing to Another Service

a. Press the KDU [1/CALL| button, to access

the CALL Menu. Proceed as outlined
b e l o w.

b. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select Use the up/down arrow buttons to view the SERVICES
C O N N E C T. that are available for use. Only those SERVICES
programmed and announced by the IW Controller will
be displayed.

ANDVT TEKOl CT

CONNECT D I S C O N N E C T

USE AV TO SELECT ITEM

3-64
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-10. IW Operation Steps (Continued)

c. Using the up/down arrow buttons, select the
desired SERVICE and press [ENTj.

SERVICE 1

When using ANDVT, MELP is displayed on Voice or

VOL^MDIW ANDVT TEKOl CT Data Nets, but is not a factor when using data
communications.
SERVICE: 12345
CIR ANDVT MELP 2400
Only Services programmed in the IW net and that are
USE AT for NEXT service being announced by the IW Controller will be seen.

SERVICE 2

VOLBMniW ANDVT TEKOl CT

SERVICE: 24680
CIR ANDVT MELP 2400
USE at for next service

3.10.6 IW Net Options

The [W Options Menu [7/OPT| allows the user to perform different radio operations and view IW waveform
specific information, while continuing to operate on an IW Net. Once an option change is completed, press the
(CLR) button to exit the Options menus.

N O T E

The Option parameter guidance below covers the most

common IW parameters. Refer to Paragraph 3.10.6.6 for an
overview of advanced settings. Contact Harris for detailed
instructions for other options not discussed in this publication.

3.10.6.1 Adding IW Services

The following instructions cover adding an IW Service (refer to Table 3-11).

Table 3-11. Adding IW Services

Procedure Information

a. From the IW Operational screen, press

[7/OPT].

3-65
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N h^ARRIS'
Table 3-11. Adding IW Services (Continued)

b. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

NET and press lENTj.
C O M S E C D AT / V O C
NOTE: SAVE will also display in the
NET TIME POWER VIEW
upper-left portion of the IW Options Menu
if Autosave Override is set to NO. USE TO SELECT ITEM

SERVICES TX_OPTS
c. Using the left/right arrow button, select
SERVICES and press [ENT]. PCFG

USE O TO SELECT ITEM

d. Using the up/down arrow button, scroll

S e r v i c e s u n t i l t h e fi r s t a v a i l a b l e S e r v i c e AUTOCONN SRV NUM
number '00000' is seen. N 00000
AT TO VIEWTO EDIT

AUTOCONN SRV NUM

N 00000
e. Press the right arrow button to select AT TO VIEWTO EDIT
available '00000' Service. The SRV NUM
will blink when selected.
N O T E : T h e fi r s t S E R V I C E n u m b e r e n t e r e d d e f a u l t s t o
V for AUTOCONN, but any SERVICE number can be
set to Auto-Connect if desired. Auto-Connect is

optional. User can still manually connect to

programmed SERVICES via the [l/CALLj button.

Type in required new Service Number and AUTOCONN SRV NUM

press |ENT] once.
N 35790
AT TO VIEWTO EDIT

If additional Service Numbers need to be

added, repeat Step d through Step f. NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 3.10.6.2 for instructions on

When all required Service Numbers have changing Service Auto-Connect Settings.
been added, proceed to Step h.

3-66
HfARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-11. Adding IW Services (Continued)

h. Press ICLR] or |ENT1 to save the
SERVICE(S) entered.
SERVICES U P D AT E
SUCCESSFUL
AV TO VIEW TO EDIT

i. Press [CLR] repeatedly until the IW

Operational screen is reached. B AT B B D IW ANDVT TEKOICT

01-IWNETl OHBO
ACQUIRING 04 SEC U04
NETWORK TIMER S AT
/

3.10.6.2 Changing Service Auto-Connect Settings

The following instructions cover modifying the Service Auto-Connect choice (refer to Table 3-12).

Table 3-12. Changing IW Service Auto-Connect Settings

Procedure Information

a. From the IW Network Operational screen,

press |7/0PT|.

b. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

NET and press jENT].
C O M S E C D AT / V O C
NOTE: SAVE will also display in the
NET TIME POWER VIEW
upper-left portion of the IW Options Menu
if Autosave Override is set to NO. USE TO SELECT ITEM

c. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

SERVICES and press [ENT|.
SERVICES TX_OPTS
PCFG

USE TO SELECT ITEM

3-67
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION h^ARRIS

Table 3-12. Changing IW Service Auto-Connect Settings (Continued)

d. Using the up/down arrow buttons, scroll
through the Services currently assigned to
t h e N E T.
AUTOCONN SRV NUM
When the Service is displayed which you N 24680
want to set for Auto-Connect, press the left
a r r o w b u t t o n t o s e l e c t A U TO C O N N . AT TO VIEWTO EDIT

e. Using the up/down arrow buttons, select Y

or N as required and press [ENT].
AUTOCONN SRV NUM
NOTE: Only One Service per IW Net can Y 24680
be configured to Auto-Connect. ENTER TO S AV E CHANGES

Use the up/down arrow buttons to review

all Services before exiting.
g. When AUTOCONN settings are correct,
press (ENT) or [CLR] to save.
h. The SERVICES U P D AT E
SUCCESSFUL screen will display.
SERVICES U P D AT E

SUCCESSFUL
AV TO VIEW TO EDIT

Press |CLR| repeatedly until the IW

Operational screen is reached. B AT H E U IW ANDVT TEKOICT

0 1 - I W N E T l O i
ACQUIRING 04 SEC U 0 4
NETWORK T I M E R S A T

3.10.6.3 Output Power Settings

The following instructions cover setting the Output Power Settings (refer to Table 3-13).

Table 3-13. Changing Output Power Settings

Procedure Information

a. From the IW Network Operational screen,

press [7/OPT|.

3-68
HARRiS® A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F (OVP E)R A( TCI O N)

Table 3-13. Changing Output Power Settings (Continued)

C O M S E C D AT / V O C
NET TIME POWER VIEW
b. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select
POWER and press [ENT|. USE TO SELECT ITEM

NOTE: SAVE will also display in the upper-left portion

of the IW Options Menu if Autosave Override is set to
NO.

c. If not operating with a VAU, use the

up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the
available TX POWER LEVEL settings.
When the required power level is visible, T X POWER LEVEL
press (ENTl and proceed to Step f. If 20 WAT T S
operating with a VAU, continue with IWNETO
Step d.

d. If operating with an attached VAU, press

jENT] to bypass TX POWER LEVEL,
then press (ENT) again to access the VAU
POWER LEVEL settings. VA U POWER LEVEL
50 WAT T S
IWNETO

e. Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll

through the available VAU POWER
LEVEL settings. When the required power
level is visible, press [ENTf
Press |CLR1 repeatedly until the IW
Operational screen is reached.

3.10.6.4 View Options

Use the following instructions to view the message log, term addr, key location, or Global Positioning System (GPS)
settings (refer to Table 3-14).

Table 3-14. View Options

Procedure Information

a. From the IW Network Operational screen,

press [7/OPTl.

3-69
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-14. View Options (Continued)

b. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select C O M S E C D AT / V O C

VIEW and press |ENT].
NET TIME POWER VIEW
DSE TO SELECT ITEM

3.10.6.4.1 View MSG LOG

From the VIEW Menu, to view the Message (MSG) Log, proceed as follows (refer to Table 3-15).

Ta b l e 3-15. View MSG LOG

Procedure Information

a. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

MSG LOG and press |ENT1.

MSG LOG TERM ADDR

KEY L O C AT I O N GPS
USE TO SELECT ITEM

b. Press the [ENT] / [CLR] keys to display

newer or older messages, respectively.
13:08:00 ANDVT TEKOl CT'
NOTE: The MSG LOG allows the user to 024 MAINT RANGING
view the last 100 messages. These
messages consist of an event log containing BURST OK
1W status and connection information, with MESSAGE 10 OF 10
t h e m o s t c u r r e n t s h o w n fi r s t .

c. When done, press [CLR] repeatedly until

the IW Operational screen is reached.

3.10.6.4.2 View TSK (Orderwire) Key Location

A CAUTION
The IW controller alternates its two TSK positions at regular
intervals. Refer to unit Standard Operating Procedure (SOP)
or special instructions for TSK (orderwire) effective dates.

From the VIEW Menu, to view the TSK (Orderwire) Key Location, proceed as follows (refer to Table 3-16).

3-70
i fi R R i S AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Ta b l e 3 - 1 6 . V i e w K E Y L O C A T I O N

Procedure Information

a. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

KEY LOCATION and press IENT|.
MSG LOG TERM ADDR
KEY L O C AT I O N GPS
USE TO SELECT ITEM

b . T h e K E Y L O C A T I O N i d e n t i fi e s t h e KEY L O C AT I O N
Orderwire key position currently being 0
used by the IW Controller.

NOTE: IW Controllers use positions 0,1 or N O T E : T h e r a d i o d e f a u l t u s e s T S K O l i n a l l f o u r

2,3 depending on satellite footprint and positions (0,1,2,3). Once your IW Controller's current
their primary or alternate controller status.
position is known:
The IW Controller will alternate to the other

position at the designated Order-wire roll

over time period (for example: from 0 to 1, (1) If more than one Orderwire time period is required,
from 2 to 3, or in reverse depending on roll load next time period Orderwire TSK into radio satellite
over timing). TSK02 fill position, and

(2) Refer to IW PGM Paragraph 4.11, Step w through

Step y to modify TSEC parameters.
c. When done, press |CLR] repeatedly until
the IW Operational screen is reached.

3.10.6.4.3 View GPS

From the VIEW Menu, to view GPS, proceed as follows (refer to Table 3-17).

N O T E

Ensure authorized GPS device (Precision Lightweight GPS

Receiver [PLGR] / Defense Advanced Global Receiver
[DAGR]) using cable (12005-0730-A006) or (National
Marine Electronics Association [NMEA] -183) using cable
(12005-0740-A006) are connected to radio J2 GPS Port.

3-71
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Ta b l e 3-17. View GPS

Procedure Information

a. Use left/right arrow keys to select GPS and

press 1ENT|. f CONTINUOUS
MGRS/1 19440E
F0M:2 2 3 11 2 N
TF0M:2 01/03/10 SUM 12:05:59

b. Use circular arrow button to view

additional GPS information.

3.10.6.5 Changing COMSEC TEK Position

The following instructions cover modifying the COMSEC Mode (refer to Table 3-18).

N O T E

Before proceeding, ensure additional Encryption Keys are

loaded in appropriate COMSEC TYPE and desired
compartment number via COMSEC Load (LD) Process.

Table 3-18. Changing COMSEC TEK Position

Procedure Information

a . From the IW Network Operational screen,

press |7/OPT|.

b. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

COMSEC and press lENTb
C O M S E C D AT / V O C
NOTE: SAVE will also display in the
NET TIME POWER VIEW
upper-left portion of the IW Options Menu
if Autosave Override is set to NO. USE TO SELECT ITEM

c . Review CRYPTO MODE settings. Press NOTE: Radio display will show the current CRYPTO
lENTl. MODE for the IW Service you are operating on. Either

NOTE: Setting is determined by Service ANDVT, KG-84, VINSON will display.

Number and should not be changed.
d. Current Net ENCRYPTION KEY will be

flashing.
ENCRYPTION KEY
TEK 01
IWCFGO

e.
Type in new ENCRYPTION KEY NOTE: Ensure new Encryption Key is loaded in
Compartment (for example, TEK02). appropriate COMSEC TYPE and matching
compartment number via COMSEC LD Process.

3-72
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.10.6.6 Overview of Advanced Options Settings

The settings listed below are not typically changed. Information on these settings is provided below.

• DATA^OC - This menu contains advanced data parameters. Individual sub-menu items vary based upon
COMSEC used in the Service.

• TIME - This menu allows manual user entry for GPS SYNC for HPW TIME-OF-DAY.

NOTE

HPW is only used on a Single Access IW Service. Refer to

SAA message for details.

• VIEW > TERM ADDR - This menu is Read-Only. The unique nine-digit number is used by the IW
Controller to identify each IW terminal.

3.10.7 IW Troubleshooting

The following section provides suggestions for troubleshooting actions to take in certain situations. Following each
situation, suggested actions are provided to correct the problem.

3.10.7.1 Radio Remains in ACQUIRING State

If the radio remains in an ACQUIRING state, check/perform the following:

a. Verify RF cable and SATCOM antenna connections are good.

b. Verify the correct antenna to satellite orientation (azimuth/angle).

c. Verify the correct SATID is visible on the display and matches the previously programmed SATID from
SAA message.
• [PGM/81 > IW > NETS > SATID XXX.

d. Verify the that the LOADED TSK matches the IW controller satellite key position:
• Verify appropriate IW Orderwire TSK is LOADED in satellite TSK compartment 01.

• [FGM/S] > IW > NETS > TSEC > ENCRYPTED ORDERWIRE ENABLED
> KEY LOC 0 is set to TSK 01 > or KEY LOC 1 is set to TSK 01 > or KEY LOC 2 is set to TSK
01>or KEY LOC 3 is set to TSK 01.

3.10.7.2 Radio Remains in RANGING State

If the radio remains in a RANGING state, check/perform the following:

a. Verify RF cable/antenna/orientation.

3.10.7.3 Radio Remains in IDLE State

If the radio remains in an IDLE state, check/perform the following:

a. Verify that the SERVICE number is in the [l/Call] Menu SERVICE list:
• [1/CaIIl > SERVICES [verify SERVICE is available]?

(1). YES > SERVICE XXXXX > select CONNECT.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

(2). NO > [OPT/71 > NETS > SERVICES > add a SRV NUM > AUTOCONN Y.

3.10.7.4 Radio Displays SATID MISMATCH Warning

If the radio displays a SATID MISMATCH warning, check/perform the following:

NOTE

SATID MISMATCH is a warning, but the satellite can still be

used.

a. Verify correct SATID is programmed (based upon SAA message):

• [PGM/8] > IW > NETS > SATID XXX.

b. Refer to SAA message to verify if a custom downlink frequency is required.

NOTE

If custom downlink frequency is programmed and used, a

SATID MISMATCH warning will flash but will not affect IW
connection.

3.10.7.5 Radio Disconnects from Service

If the radio unexpectedly disconnects from Service, check/perform the following:

a. Normally, the KDU display Receive Signal Strength meter/bar is solid when Connected to a Service. If
the meter is seen blinking, you may be experiencing interference. If the System Forward Order Wire
(SPG W) or Pre-planned Update Order Wire (PUFOW) signals stop for two minutes, the IW Service will
be disconnected.

b. Check radio placement distances (refer to Table 3-9) for local interference.

A WARNING
Once the SFOW or PUFOW signals are reestablished, and
multiple service were programmed, the radio will Auto-
Connect to the service selected for Auto-Connect.

3 . 11 STC O P E R AT I O N

Satellite TDMA Capability (STC) is a satellite waveform that uses a TDMA approach to sharing a SATCOM
channel. Refer to Paragraph 1.7.9 for a capability description of STC. Table 3-19 provides the terminology used with
STC and the corresponding definitions.

STC uses time multiplexing of a satellite channel. The channel is time sliced into equal-sized frames that are
continually repeated. Within each frame, a predetermined number of slots of differing time length are used as
separate circuits. The circuits are used for voice, data, and timing control. The size of a circuit is dependent on the
number of bits that need to be transmitted and the input/output baud rate of the modem used to transmit the bits.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

Table 3-19. STC Terminology

Te r m Meaning
Channel A SATCOM 5 kHz or 25 kHz satellite frequency pair (uplink
and downlink).
Frame A channel may be divided into multiple time slots of equal
length. A frame is one time slot and may be treated as an
independent channel.
Slot/Circuit A portion of time inside a frame. Each slot may have different
time lengths, may be given its own configuration, and may be
used as a separate radio circuit.
STC Configuration Predefined circuit parameters; includes frame number and
s l o t / c i r c u i t n u m b e r.

Te r m i n a l An AN/PRC-117F in STC mode for a specific circuit.

Controller In STC mode, an AN/PRC-117F may be placed in controller
mode for a specific circuit. The radio keeps all terminals in a
circuit correctly timed by sending timing control messages.
Time Hash A circuit used for timing control by the STC Controller.

3 . 11 . 1 S T C C o n fi g u r a t i o n s

Ease of use is a key feature of STC. The following paragraphs provide guidance for configuring STC.

3 . 11 . 1 . 1 M o d e m R a t e

The modem rate determines the number of circuits that can be created in a channel; a higher modem rate can support
more circuits.

3.11.1.2 Frame Configurations

Predefined frame configurations represent most anticipated voice and data circuit configurations. Refer to
Table 3-20 for a list of STC Frame Configurations, all of which use KG-84 encryption.

NOTE

All Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction (MELP) voice slots

are 2400 bps.

Refer to Table 3-21 as a guideline for choosing a frame configuration based on channel conditions.

Table 3-20. STC Frame Configurations

Frame S AT C O M
Description Channel Type
Ty p e
Seven MELP voice circuits with a 32 K modem 25 kHz

Five MELP voice circuits with a 19.2 K modem 25 kHz

Three MELP voice circuits and one 16 K data circuit with 25 kHz
a 32 K modem

Four MELP voice circuits and one 2.4 K data circuit with 25 kHz
a 19.2 K modem

3-75
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Table 3-20. STC Frame Configurations (Continued)

Frame S AT C O M
Description Channel Type
Type
11 MELP voice circuits with a 56 K modem 25 kHz

Three MELP Voice slots - 9.6 K Narrowband (NB) CPM 5 kHz

Modem

Two MELP Voice slots and one 2.4 K Data slot (9.6 K NB 5 kHz
CPM Modem)
Two MELP Voice slots (6 K NB CPM Modem) 5 kHz

One MELP Voice slot and one 2.4 K Data slot (6 K NB 5 kHz
CPM Modem)

Table 3-21. Frame Configuration Guidelines

Channel
Voice Only Vo i c e a n d D a t a
Condition

Good Frame 5(11 voice) Not Applicable

Frame 1 (7 voice) Frame 3 (3 voice, 1 data @ 16 K)
Frame 2 (5 voice) Frame 4 (4 voice, 1 data @ 2.4 K)
Good Frame 6 (3 voice) Frame 7 (1 voice, 1 data @ 2.4 K)
Frame 8 (2 voice) Frame 9 (1 voice, 1 data @ 2.4 K)

3.11.1.3 Configuration Factors

The proper configuration of a SATCOM channel is based on two main factors:

• Whether data is needed

• Expected channel quality conditions (i.e., will the channel be noisy)

3.11.1.4 Circuit Usage

The following factors concerning circuit usage should be considered when you configure your STC circuits:

• STC is a separate net type in the AN/PRC-117F. You can program a net preset to be an STC net with its
own configuration. It is recommended that you program every STC circuit as a separate net preset.
• Consider what crypto keys to use for each STC circuit. The use of multiple TEK key positions is also
available for each circuit.

• If the frame configuration is changed during a mission, all radio terminals that respond to the STC
Controller will automatically switch their frame configuration to match that of the controller. Each radio
will switch to circuit one of the new frame, so make circuit one a voice circuit.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3 . 11 . 2 C o n t r o l l e r O p e r a t i o n

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.3 for programming the STC net type. After all the radios have been programmed with the net
presets, choose one radio to act as the controller. The controller should be on constant power, since it will service
the channel for a number of days. Turning the controller off to change batteries will bring the channel down. The
controller radio does not need COMSEC keys loaded and can be operated in FT mode, since the time hacks it sends
do not contain data.

3.11.2.1 Primary Controller Mode

See Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29 for STC primary controller operation screens. Perform the follow procedure to
enable a radio for primary controller mode:

a. Move the radio to the STC net preset with the same frame configuration that you want supported by the
controller. ,
b. Ensure the radio reports the link is Down (DN). The link will report UP if another controller is already
active.

c. Press the [MODE] button on the KDU.

d. Scroll to the STC CONTROLLER menu choice; press [ENTJ.

e. If STC CONTROLLER is not a menu option, then check the following possible causes.

1. The security mode is enabled.

2. The radio has an incorrect firmware version.

3. You did not move the radio to a STC net prior to pressing the [MODE] button.

f. Enter a controller mode type of PRIMARY; press [ENT].

To exit the STC Controller mode, press the [MODE] button and select a different mode (e.g., NORMAL).

R VOL C NORM KG-84 TEK10 CT

04-STCNET04 O Ml
STC VOC OFF 1A/1 DN
TYPE ADF D ATA FR/SL LINK

O P E R AT I O N A L M O D E

STC CONTROLLER

CONTROLLER MODE TYPE

P R I M A RY

F-0109-4100-0120

Figure 3-28. Enabling Primary Controller Mode

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

T B AT ■: N O R M K G - a 4

STC CONTROLLER

T: 243.0000 1
FREQUENCY FRAM

F-0109-4100-0130

Figure 3-29. STC Primary Controller Mode Screen

3 . 11 . 2 . 2 A l t e r n a t e C o n t r o l l e r M o d e

Another radio may be set up as an alternate controller. The alternate controller radio monitors the channel for the
loss of the primary controller's signal. If the primary controller goes down, the alternate controller automatically
becomes the primary controller. The procedure for placing a radio in this mode is the same as described in
Paragraph 3.11.2.1 for configuring a primary controller, except that a controller mode type of ALTERNATE is
selected in lieu of PRIMARY. See Figure 3-30 and Figure 3-31 for alternate controller operation screens.

R VOL C NORM KG-84 TEK10 CT

04-STCNET04 O HI
STC VOC OFF 1A/1 DN
TYPE ADF D ATA FR/SL LINK

O P E R AT I O N A L M O D E

STC CONTROLLER

CONTROLLER MODE TYPE

A LT E R N AT E

F-0109-4100-0140

Figure 3-30. Enabling Alternate Controller Mode

* A LT E R N AT E S T C *

CONTROLLER MODE *

Wait or press mode to exit

F-0109-4100-0150

Figure 3-31. STC Alternate Controller Mode Screen

I^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

3.11.2.3 Limiting Access to Controlier Mode

Paragraph 3.6 and Paragraph 4.9 describe the operation and programming of the security mode and net lockouts.
The AN/PRC-117F has a security feature which will prevent the user from changing most programmed parameters
when the security feature is enabled. This enabled feature will prevent the user from entering the STC Controller
mode. To enter the STC Controller mode when the security feature is enabled, the user must disable the security
mode by entering the correct password or by clearing the radio. The presets not in the lock range can still be altered,
but the security mode will be enabled, so the user cannot switch to the STC primary or alternate controller modes.

3 . 11 . 3 S T C C o m m u n i c a t i o n

The STC waveform supports both digital voice and data communication.

3 . 11 . 3 . 1 Vo i c e C o m m u n i c a t i o n

Voice communication in STC mode involves selecting the net preset that has the configuration of the STC Controller
and one of the voice circuits and keying the handset. To switch voice circuits, change to a different net programmed
with a voice circuit for that satellite frame. See Figure 3-32 for the STC Operating Screens and for the status of the
STC Controller. In the lower right comer, if the status is UP, you can communicate; if the status is DN, the radio will
not transmit. The STC Operating Screens display the frame configuration number (1 - 9) and the circuit on the frame
that the radio is using VI - Vll or DAT. If the controller is changed to a different frame configuration number, the
radio terminal will automatically switch to that frame configuration number and move to the first voice circuit of
that frame (VI).

The user is reminded of two items when using STC voice circuits:

• There is a delay between transmitting and receiving STC radios, as there is when using dedicated SATCOM
channels. The use of TDMA slightly increases the average delay because of the possibility of waiting for
the next frame before transmitting.
• There is some buffering in the radio to ensure there is enough data in each frame. This means the radio may
be transmitting for one frame (approximately 1.5 seconds) after you release the PTT on the handset. If the
user attempts to quickly rekey the radio before it is finished transmitting the previous message, the radio
will indicate KEYLINE IGNORED, requiring the user to release the PTT and rekey the handset in order
to continue voice communication.

3 . 11 . 3 . 2 D a t a C o m m u n i c a t i o n

Use of data circuits in STC mode requires an application that uses a synchronous interface. To set up a radio to use
an STC data circuit, choose a predefined net preset for data as described in Paragraph 3.11.1.2. Connect a data cable
to the J3 port of the radio at one end and to a sync card in the PC at the other end. Harris applications that work with
STC data circuits are the RF-3700H Harris Universal Image Transmission Software (HUITS) application and the
RF-6760W WMT application. The version of WMT that works with HPW will not work with a STC circuit because
it uses an asynchronous PPP interface.

3.11.3.3 Changing Controlier Frames

If the frame configuration is changed during a mission, all radio terminals that respond to the STC Controller will
automatically switch their frame configuration to match that of the controller. Each radio will switch to circuit one
of the new frame.

Perform the following procedure to switch the frame configuration on a STC Controller:

a. Press the [MODEl button on the KDU, select NORMAL, and press [ENTl.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N §f\Rms'
b. Move to any net preset that uses the new frame you have chosen. If there is no preset for the desired
frame, create a new preset as described in Paragraph 4.5.3.
c. Ensure the SIC Controller status is DN. See Figure 3-32.

d. Enable the controller mode on the new frame by enabling the controller mode as described in
Paragraph 3.11.2.1.

R VOL ■: STC KG-84 TEK10 STC KG-84

04-STCNET04 ^ R: 263.72500 STC o M.

STC VOC OFF _1/V1 T: 297.32500 16.0 11 5

FREQUENCY

FRAME CIRCUIT I LINK STATUS

F-0109-410{M)160

Figure 3-32. STC Operating Screens

3 . 1 2 S I N C G A R S F H O P E R AT I O N

SINCGARS FH operates in the VHF-LOW frequency range (30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz). A SINCGARS FH net
uses a MASTER SINCGARS radio as the Net Control Station (NCS) to maintain TOD synchronization and control
SINCGARS FH net operational procedures. See Figure 3-33 for displays. Refer to Paragraph 4.5.4 for SINCGARS
FH programming procedures. All AN/PRC-117Fs need to have the same VINSON TEK and SINCGARS TSK
programmed to the SINCGARS net preset.

3.12.1 MASTER/MEMBER Selection

For each SINCGARS net preset, an AN/PRC-117F must be designated as a MASTER or MEMBER AN/PRC-117F.
There should be only one MASTER radio controlling a net. However, any AN/PRC-117F originally configured as
a MEMBER can be reconfigured as a MASTER radio. A MASTER radio can be reconfigured to be a MEMBER
radio. Transmitting ERFs can only be done with an AN/PRC-117F programmed as a MASTER radio. An
AN/PRC-117F designated as MASTER is responsible for maintaining accurate SINCGARS Global Time-of-Day
(GTOD) and operational control of the AN/PRC-117F net.

3.12.2 Start Up Net Setup

A SINCGARS net can be started using a Hot Start or Cold Start procedure.

3.12.3 Hot Start Net Opening

A Hot Start requires setting the time of net opening and ensuring that all net members receive the correct loadset and
sync time. The operators participating in a Hot Start net opening set radio time manually from the [OPT] > TIME
menu to within ± 4 seconds of each other. At (or after) the prescribed time for net opening, each net operator enters
the secure FH net. The Hot Start net opening procedure is completed once all members have entered the net.

If all stations have TRANSEC fill devices (either MX-18290 or AN/CYZ-10) and ZULU GPS time, Hotstart
procedures can be used to establish SINCGARS FH nets and enter them without assistance from Master station.
ffARRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to Hotstart:

a. Load complete SINCGARS FH data and COMSEC TEK fill to all net radios.

b. Press [OPTl > TIME > GTOD, and press [ENT].

c. Enter the GTOD in Julian days, ZULU hours, minutes and seconds format. Use the left or right arrow
keys to move between the time units. Set minute figure to next upcoming whole minute value, and press
[ENTJ when time source reaches this point. All net radios must be within ± four seconds of each other.
Refer to Table B-1 and Table B-2 to determine Julian date calendar.

d. Attempt communications using SINCGARS FH net preset to Master station or Member stations.

e. If no communications are heard or established, use passive the Late Net Entry (LNE) function to gain
GTOD synchronization with the net. Refer to Paragraph 3.12.11.

If Hotstart and LNE procedures fail, conduct Cue procedures (refer to Paragraph 3.12.8) to contact Master station.

3.12.4 Cold Start Net Opening

An LOS fixed frequency net preset should be programmed on each AN/PRC-117F as a startup net. The start up net
is used to coordinate a cold start by the MASTER radio. All MEMBER radios should be set to this net preset and
follow directions from the Master Station. This start-up net frequency can be used to instruct member radios of the
proper time to switch to SINCGARS net and receive ERF. The start-up net is not required if all stations are
assembled into a local area. See Figure 3-34.

To coordinate a cold start, the MASTER radio places a call on the start-up net. The MASTER radio instructs member
radios to switch to the SINCGARS net and perform a Cold Start ERF. This transmits the HOPSET data and GTOD
to the member radios. A LOS fixed frequency (also called the manual channel) in the SINCGARS FH operational
range is used to transmit the ERF. This can be prearranged or given by the net master at net opening. This frequency
assignment is referred to as the Manual Channel in standard SINCGARS procedures.

3.12.4.1 MASTER Radio (Net Opening) Cold Start Operation

A cold start net opening is best performed with all net AN/PRC-117Fs assembled together in a local area. If this
cannot be accomplished, procedures for coordinating actions over the start-up net should be developed to permit
smooth operation under direction of the Net Control Station.

Perform the following procedure to Cold Start as a MASTER radio:

a. Set the SINCGARS GTOD in the MASTER radio to ZULU time from an accurate time source such as
a GPS that is currently locked in to the GPS satellite system. Refer to Paragraph 3.23.5.

b. Set the MASTER radio to the start-up net. Coordinate for all member radios the time and place to be on
the start-up net. This step is not necessary if all net radios are gathered to a confined local area with all
stations within conversation range.

c. Press PTT switch on the handset. the net members to prepare for a Cold Start Net Opening by
going to designated SINCGARS FH net preset and waiting for the ERF transmission. Ensure net
members know the frequency for the Cold Start ERF and not to transmit again until the NCS contacts
them for a communications check on the SINCGARS FH net preset.

d. Select the designated SINCGARS net preset. Press [CALL], select COLD_START; press [ENTJ.

e. At the COLD START ERF prompt, select TRANSMIT; press [ENTj.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N h^ARRIS'
f. Enter the frequency (Manual Channel) given to the net MEMBER radios on which the Cold Start ERF
is transmitted. The MASTER and the MEMBER radios must all be tuned to the same LOS fixed
frequency. Press [ENT] to set the ERF frequency. Two way communications is possible on this
frequency as a LOS fixed frequency assignment using FT or CT.

g. At SELECT SET prompt, select the desired HOPSET or LOCKSET number. Only the loaded
HOPSET or locksets is scrollable using the up/down arrow keys. When data to send is selected, press
[ENTJ.

h. The prompt TRANSMITTING is displayed, indicating the FH data is being transmitted to the net
members. When the transmission is complete, TRANSMITTED is displayed, then the SELECT SET
prompt displays. If another set of data is to be transmitted, repeat Step f through Step h.
i. When all required FH data has been sent, press [CLR] until the main screen is displayed.

3.12.4.2 MEMBER Radio (Net Opening) Operation

Perform the following procedure to Cold Start as a MEMBER radio;

a. Select designated start-up LOS fixed frequency net preset (manual channel frequency). Wait for call
from Master station.

b. When instructed, switch to the SINCGARS FH net preset.

c. Press [CALL], select COLD_START, then press [ENT].

d. At the COLD START ERF prompt, enter the frequency (Manual Channel) given by Master station or
predetermined into the MEMBER radio when prompted. MEMBER radios must be tuned to the
appropriate LOS fixed frequency (manual channel frequency) on which the Master transmits the Cold
Start ERF.

e. Press [ENT] to accept the frequency entry. The prompt WAITING FOR RECEPTION displays. Wait
at this point, and observe the radio display for reception of the Cold Start ERF. Two-way
communications over this frequency is possible. Monitor the handset in case the coldstart ERF is not
received. Do not transmit unless contacted by the Master station.

f. Perform the following procedure if a HOPSET is received:

1. HOPSET RX OK STORE AS HOPSET ## displays. Select a hopset compartment number of

01 - 25. Enter desired HOPSET number, then press [ENT] to store the data.

2. HOPSET STORE OK PRESS ANY KEY displays. Press [ENT] to continue.

3. At the prompt ASSIGN HOPSET TO NET, select the desired net preset. Only the presently
programmed SINCGARS net presets are selectable here by using the up/down arrows on the
KDU. Press [ENT] after selecting the proper SINCGARS net preset. If it is not desired at this point
to assign the HOPSET to a SINCGAR net preset, press [CLR].

4. The prompt WAITING FOR RECEP'I ION displays again. If another HOPSET is sent by the
Master station, repeat Step f. If another LOCKSET is sent by the Master station, proceed to Step g.

g. Perform the following procedure if a LOCKSET is received:

1. LOCKSET RX OK PRESS ANY KEY TO STORE displays. Press any key to store the data.

2. The prompt WAITING FOR RECEPTION displays again. If another LOCKSET is sent by the
Master station, repeat Step g. If another HOPSET is sent by the Master station, repeat Step f.

3-82
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

h. If FH data is not received, wait for communications check from the Master station. Notify the Master
station that data was not received. Repeat Step f and Step g.

i. When all data is received, press [CLR] until the main operating menu displays. Check SINCGARS
operational displays for GTOD sync time and Net ID.

B AT T E RY DENOTES PLAIN TEXT

METER
R / T I N D I C AT O R C I P H E R T E X T O P E R AT I O N

(R FOR RECEIVE)

. RECEIVE SIGNAL
NET NUMBER STRENGTH METER
05-SINCGARS I
VOC VOC SNCGRS MEMBR I
A D F D ATA H O P T Y P E C U E | DENOTES MEMBER
OR MASTER RADIO
C O N F I G U R AT I O N
ADF CONNECTOR
MODE
D ATA P O RT FREQUENCY I N D I C AT E S P R E S E N C E
MODE HOPPING MODE O F C U E I N G S TAT I O N

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

(GTOD)
D AY I S J U L I A N
ZULU TIME

•17d 11 : 2 2 : 3 3 HOPn
- F294 .30.00000

HOPSET>^UE FREOUENCY
F000-F999

D E N O T E S L AT E N E T E N T R Y

30.00000 MHz - 87.975 MHz C A PA B I L I T Y I S O N O R O F F

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

1 7 d 11 : 2 2 : 3 3
Hopi;^
F294 20 16.0 OFF
HOPSET C M P T R AT E L N E

. HOPSET COMPARTMENT (# 1 - 25)

Figure 3-33. SINCGARS - FH MODE Displays

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N tfARRiS'
3.12.5 Updating SINCGARS FH Fill Data using ERF

To update the FH data during operation, the Master station loads the new FH fill data, informs the Member stations
of the ERF update over the SINCGARS FH net preset, then transmits the fill data to Member stations. It should be
determined beforehand when the update is to become effective to allow operators time to reprogram AN/PRC-117Fs
with the updated FH data. If the update is to become immediately effective, the Master station must program a
second SINCGARS net preset that is using the updated FH fill data to use immediately for communications checks
after the updated ERF. In the Member stations, users have the option to immediately assign the received updated FH
data to the net presently in use, or to any other of the programmed SINCGARS nets for future use.

3.12.5.1 Updating Master Station

Perform the following procedure to update SINCGARS FH fill data:

a. Contact the net Member stations over the presently used SINCGARS FH net preset. Instruct Member
stations to standby for FH Fill data update. Tell them where to store the data and when to use it.

b. Press [CALL], select ERF, and press [ENT).

c. At NORMAL ERF prompt, select TRANSMIT, and press [ENT].

d. At SELECT SET prompt, select the desired HOPSET or LOCKSET using the up/down arrows, and
press [ENT].
e. While the data is being transmitted, the TRANSMITTING ... prompt displays.

f. When the transmission is complete, the prompt TRANSMITTED displays momentarily, then
SELECT SET displays again. If more data is to be sent, repeat Step d and Step e until finished.

g. When the last data has been sent, press [CLR] until the main operating menu is displayed.
h. If update is effective immediately, switch radio to SINCGARS FH preset using the new SINCGARS
FH data and conduct communications check with net members. Return to the old SINCGARS FH net
preset for any Member stations that do not respond. Resend the updated ERF to any Member stations
still needing the update.

3.12.5.2 Member Station Receive Operation

Perform the following procedure to update SINCGARS FH data OTA by ERF:

a. Upon instructions from the NCS to get ready to receive updated ERF, press [CALL], select ERF, and
press [ENT].
b. The prompt WAITING FOR RECEPTION ... displays.

c. Perform the following procedure if a HOPSET is received:

1. HOPSET RX OK STORE AS HOPSET ## displays.

2. Enter desired HOPSET number 01 - 25, then press [ENT] to store the data. Choose a vacant
HOPSET compartment if update is not immediately effective for operation.

3. HOPSET STORE OK PRESS ANY KEY displays. Press [ENT] to continue.

3-84
h^ARRES' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

4. At the prompt ASSIGN HOPSET TO NET, select the desired SINCGARS net preset with the
up/down arrow keys. Press (ENTJ. Do not store to the presently used net preset unless the Master
station has directed to do so. Press [CLRl if you do not desire to assign the received FH data to a
net preset at this time.

5. WAITING FOR RECEPTION displays again. If another HOPSET is received, repeat Step c. If
another LOCKSET is received, proceed to Step d.

d. Perform the following procedure if a LOCKSET is received:

1. LOCKSET RX OK PRESS ANY KEY TO STORE displays. Press any key to store data.

2. WAITING FOR RECEPTION displays again. If another LOCKSET is received, repeat Step d.
If another HOPSET is received, repeat Step c.

e. When the last HOPSET or LOCKSET is received and stored, press [CLR] until the operating menu
displays.
f. Wait for further instructions from the Master station.

3.12.6 Updating Time Errors

If a master station started a net by using a coldstart with a significant time error, the net can still be contacted by non-
net Member stations through Cueing. Refer to Paragraph 3.12.9.1. To correct the time error, the master station must
have everyone in the net prepare a new coldstart by reinitializing their time manually, then performing a coldstart.
This type of situation can be avoided by using hotstarts and accurate UTC time by all stations. Refer to
Paragraph 3.12.3.

3.12.7 Change NET ID In Master or Member Station

With a common hopset, TSK, and GTOD, changing nets is done by changing the NET ID. Refer to
Paragraph 4.5.4.1.1 on programming a NET ID change. Only the last two digits of the NET ID can be changed on
some versions of AN/PRC-117F.

3.12.8 Cue Channel Setup

The Cue channel is a LOS fixed frequency assignment in the 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz frequency range that
allows the user to signal the NCS to establish the AN/PRC-117F as a member of a SINCGARS FH net. Access to
Cue channel is through the [CALL] button. AN/PRC-117Fs must have the cue frequency activated and entered to
use Cue. Only the Master station can respond to cueing stations and transmit a cold start ERF to add them to the
already established SINCGARS FH net.

3.12.9 Adding a Member Station to the Net

The following paragraphs describe procedures to add an LNE Member station. This Member station requires the
proper TSK and COMSEC TEK loaded to gain access to the SINCGARS FH net.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N t^ARRtS'
3.12.9.1 Non-Net Member Station Operation for Cueing a SINCGARS FH Net

Perform the following procedure to join a net:

a. At the non-net Member station, press [CALL], select CUE, then press [ENT]. The radio switches to
the net frequency programmed for Cue operations using a net preset called CUE CHANNEL.
Additionally, any radio capable of 150 Hz tone squelch transmission on the cue frequency can signal an
AN/PRC-117F that is operating in SINCGARS and monitoring the cue frequency.

b. Rotate the function switch to [FT] and key the handset for four to five seconds. Repeat this every 15
seconds until Master station responds. Return to [CT| after each attempt, as the Master station responds
in CT on Cue channel.

c. Wait for instructions from the Master station.

d. When the Master station indicates to do so, switch to the appropriate SINCGARS FH net and perform
a Cold Start Net Opening. Ensure the Master station provides the cold start frequency (manual channel)
Refer to Paragraph 3.12.4.

3.12.9.2 Master Station Operation to Respond to a Cueing Station

Perform the following procedure to add a Member station to an existing SINCGARS net:

a. In SINCGARS FH mode, a CUE prompt displays at the lower right comer of the LCD and an audio
tone is heard. This indicates a transmission has been made from a radio that is not a member of the
SINCGARS FH net.

b. Press [CALL], select CUE, and press [ENTj. The radio switches to the CUE CHANNEL net preset.
Call the station that initiated the Cue from CT mode. It may take going to PT to make contact with this
station. Operation on the Cue channel is in LOS fixed frequency mode, not hopping mode.
c. Direct the requesting operator to the appropriate SINCGARS FH net preset after coordinating the cold
start frequency, press ICLR] to leave Cue channel. Press [CALL] and select COLD START. Initiate a
Cold Start Net Opening procedure. Refer to Paragraph 3.12.4.

3-86
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

COLD S TA RT

, NORMAL ERF COLD START ERF (1)

00-CUECHANNEL •RECEIVE

WAITING FOR
LOS VOC VOC FM ~ RECEPTION ENTER FREQUENCY (2)
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE XX.XXXXX MHz

LPRESSCLRTOEXT
I L, WAITING FOR
I RECEPTION
_ HOPSET RX OK
STORE AS HOPSET: # # (01-25) I HOPSET RX OK

STORE AS HOPSET: ## (01-25)

HOPSET STORE OK
R: 030.00000 LOS 0 PRESS ANY KEY ■ HOPSET STORE OK
7:030.00000 16.0 PRESS ANY KEY
ASSIGN HOPSET TO N E T:
FREQUENCY ##(3) • ASSIGN HOPSET TO NET: ^
# # (3) ▼
i WA I T I N G F O R
CUEING S TAT I O N -
RECEPTION (4) . WAITING FOR
G O TO P T, K E Y H A N D S E T F O R RECEPTION (4)
6 S E C , WA I T F O R A N S W E R
-TRANSMIT (1) -TRANSMIT (1)

CUE MONITORING S TAT I O N -

L SELECT SET ^ L . ENTER FREQUENCY (2)
##[F (01-25) 30.00000 MHz
CONDUCT VOICE CHECK

FOR CUEING S TAT I O N

L transmitting... SELECT SET ^
# # [F ###] (01-25) ^
SELECT NET TOD ^
##(3) ^
(1) TRANSMIT ERF OR COLDSTART ERF ONLY POSSIBLE WITH MASTER RADIO. ^ TRANSMITTtNG...
(2) MANUAL CHANNEL FREQUENCY 30.000 MHZ - 87.975 MHZ. —
I SELECTSET
# # [F ###] (01-25)
(3) ONLY SINCGARS NET PRESETS ARE SCROLLABLE.
(5)
(4) PRESS CLR IF NO MORE HOPSETS ARE TO BE RECEIVED.

(5) PRESS CLR IF NO MORE HOPSETS ARE TO BE TRANSMITTED.

Figure 3-34. SINCGARS CALL Menu

3.12.10 SINCGARS Data

The AN/PRC-117F supports SINCGARS Improvement Program (SIP) and Enhanced SINCGARS Improvement
Program (ESIP) data features as described in the following paragraphs.
3.12.10.1 SINCGARS Data Mode (SDM) and Enhanced Data Mode (EDM)

The AN/PRC-117F supports both SDM and EDM data types. Additionally, the radio is capable of transmitting and
receiving voice while in SDM or EDM. EDM and SDM data is sent at 16 kbps over-the-air regardless of the data
rate chosen. On the AN/PRC-117F, EDM is shown with an N next to the data rates.

NOTE

SDM and EDM data modes can also be used in LOS fixed
frequency operation in the 30 - 87.975 MHZ frequency range
to emulate SINCGARS SC operation.
AN/PRC-117F(V){C)
O P E R AT I O N I^ARRtS'
EDM uses Reed Solomon encoded Forward Error Correction (PEC) to add extra codes for transmission of the data
rates that are lower than 16 kbps. At the EDM rates of 1200N, 2400N, 4800N, or 9600N, or when using RS-232, the
data is sent out of the data port. KYV-5 COMSEC must be selected in order for the EDM data rates to appear.

SDM repeats the data bits on data rates that are less than 16 kbps. The radio performs a majority vote on the repeated
bits to obtain error correction. At the SDM data rates of600,1200,2400,4800, or when using Tactical Fire Direction
(Tacfire), no error correction is performed on the data. VINSON COMSEC must be selected in order for the SDM
data rates to appear.

3 . 1 2 . 1 0 . 2 T a c fi r e

For Tacfire, use standard devices such as the AN/PSC-2 on Jl. The KDU menu must be set TACFIRE.

3.12.10.3 RS-232

In this mode, the radio connects to a PC terminal using Xmodem, IK-Xmodem, Ymodem, or Kermit at 1200,2400,
4800, or 9600 baud. Once a cable (such as Harris 10513-0730 Remote/Data Cable using the 25-pin connector) is
connected between the PC Communications port and radio connector J3, a carriage return will cause the radio to
autobaud itself to the data rate of the terminal . Successful autobaud is indicated with a CONNECTED TO RADIO
AT XXXX message. RS-232 is an EDM mode and therefore uses FEC and KYV-5 encryption. Only asynchronous
data is transported.

3.12.10.4 Packet

Packet is an X.21 data mode for use with the Personal Computer Improved Data Modem (PCIDM) router cards. The
Harris part number for the cable that is used with these cards is (10513-0780-Al). For more information on these
cards, visit: www.pcidm.com.

The AN/PRC-117F is also compatible with the ITT INC. For application support of this configuration, please
contact Harris.

3.12.10.5 Selecting Data During Operations

The EDM and SDM data types and rates, including Tacfire and RS-232, can be selected from the menu OPTIONS
> COMSEC > DATA. Data can also be changed on the main status screen.

3 . 1 2 . 11 P a s s i v e L N E

If no communications on the SINCGARS FH net have been heard, it is possible that GTOD in the AN/PRC-117F is
not within ± four seconds needed to remain in sync with the net. If it still is within ± one minute, the passive LNE
function can resync the Member station GTOD back with the Master station and/or net. This can also be used in
conjunction with Hot Start procedures if an accurate time setting within ± four seconds cannot be obtained.
Perform the following procedure for passive LNE:

a. From the SINCGARS net preset operational display, press ICIRCULAR ARROWl key to view the
status of the LNE function. It is normally OFF. Use the left/right arrows to select the LNE field. Press
the up/down arrows to select ON and press [ENT].

b. Do not attempt to transmit. Wait for the reception of communications from any station on the
SINCGARS FH net. When the radio reestablishes time with the net, the LNE display indicator
automatically switches to OFF when GTOD synchronizes with the net.
c. Attempt a communications check with any station in the net. If no communication is possible, conduct
Cue operations to contact the Master station.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS OPERATION

3.12.12 Operational Overrides

Changes can be made while operating in SINCGARS FH mode without reprogramming the AN/PRC-117F,
including power levels, COMSEC setup, LNE function, Hopset compartment, and type of net. Press the right arrow
key on the KDU, on a current operating net preset display, to find items that can be modified. Modifiable items begin
to flash. Press the up/down arrow keys to change value of the flashing item. Press [ENT] to set selection. Other items
can be overridden by pressing the [OPTl key on the KDU to access the options menu items. Using display overrides
and the options menu allows continued operation on the presently selected net preset. During ongoing
communications, entering back into programming mode takes the AN/PRC-117F offline. No communications are
possible until the AN/PRC-117F is returned to normal operation and important communications could be missed.

NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F is configured by default to automatically

save overrides. All changes are saved automatically. For
programming instructions for the AUTO SAVE function,
refer to Paragraph 4.10.1. When the AUTO SAVE function is
set to OFF, the operator can temporarily override
programmed net parameters. An asterisk (*) appears to the left
of the net name on the LCD, indicating the net preset
parameter was temporarily changed. These changes are valid
until the operator selects another programmed net preset.
When the net is changed, the temporary changes are lost. To
permanently save the changes as programmed values, select
the SAVE command from the lOPT] menu and save the net
preset as a new preset. (Refer to Paragraph 3.23.7.)

3 . 1 3 H AV E Q U I C K F H O P E R AT I O N

HAVEQUICK operates in the 225 MHz to 399.975 MHz band (UHF AM). HAVEQUICK operations require: Word-
of-Day (WOD), HAVEQUICK TOD, and HAVEQUICK net number. The AN/PRC-117F does not maintain its TOD
sync when it is powered off. The TOD can be entered from GPS sync, user manual input, or received from another
station over a LOS fixed frequency channel in the range of 225 MHz to 399.975 MHz UHF-AM.

3.13.1 HAVEQUICK Operational Procedures

Operation on a HAVEQUICK net requires a WOD and a TOD. See Figure 3-36 for displays. A separate LOS fixed
frequency LOS AM net preset in the frequency range of225 MHz to 399.975 MHz is needed to transmit and receive
TOD sync requests. A UHF-AM LOS fixed frequency net preset should be programmed for this purpose. See
Figure 3-35 for HAVEQUICK TOD Call menu. A GPS interface to the AN/PRC-117F can also be used to provide
accurate TOD. Refer to Paragraph 3.23.5 for setting HAVEQUICK TOD under the Options menu.

The operational display shows ERR in the lower right hand comer of the screen if TOD is not initialized or if WOD
data is missing. This is a common condition and usually clears after initialization with the proper TOD. When the
AN/PRC-117F has the incorrect TOD, it cannot find the MWOD data that may be programmed for a different Day
of Month (DOM). If the correct TOD is acquired and the MWOD is still not found, check if the MWOD for the
DOM is loaded. Also, if a Training MWOD is not used in conjunction with an FMT Net Number, the radio will
report MWOD Not Found, and display ERR.

3-89
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N h^ARRMS'
Perform the following procedure to operate in HAVEQUICK mode:

a. Rotate the function switch to (PT|, [CT], or [TDf position.

b. After radio initializing, press [MODE].

c. At the OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select NORMAL and press [ENTj.

d. Acquire HAVEQUICK TOD from GPS, another HAVEQUICK station, or Time Signal Station (TSS)
using a UHF AM net preset. Refer to Paragraph 3.13.2.
e. Press the [PRE ±] button to scroll to the desired HAVEQUICK net preset.

f. Begin HAVEQUICK operation.

TOD is lost whenever the radio is powered ofFby user or loses power for any reason. TOD has to
be reestablished to get back into the HAVEQUICK net.
Radio needs to reacquire TOD in about four hours, or sooner, if communications become
degraded.
HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver can be used for stations not active in hopping net preset as a means
to contact the FH net and gain TOD synchronization.
All FH stations using GPS TOD sync helps ensure good communications.
ERR on HAVEQUICK display is caused by TOD not being initialized, SWOD or MWODs not
loaded, and/or the DOM of radio can't find the correct MWOD. ERR can also be caused by
missing FMT frequencies.
Troubleshoot problems by checking for common TEK if in CT mode, TOD synchronization, same
HAVEQUICK net preset parameters, and for WOD loading errors.
NOTE

Once HAVEQUICK operation is established, the TOD must

be synced at least every four hours. Degradation of channel
quality is an indication to resync TOD. TOD syncs can be sent
and received over the HAVEQUICK net using the [CALL]
button. If the TOD has slipped considerably, this could be
impossible and procedures in Paragraph 3.13.2 or
Paragraph 3.23.5 must be followed to re-establish correct
TOD.

3.13.2 Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) TOD Programming Procedures

A station that has obtained HAVEQUICK TOD from an accurate source such as a GPS, TSS or another station can
transmit it's TOD on to another station that needs the time.

NOTE

The AN/PRC-117F does not use an inactive non-hopping state

on its HAVEQUICK preset. The radio requires an LOS UHF
AM preset for TOD.
i^ARRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to send the TOD to a station:

a. From a fixed frequency UHF-AM net preset in the operating range of 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz,
and communicating with the station needing the TOD sync, press [CALL]. The radio can be in either
FT or CT mode.

b. Select HAVEQUICK with the left/right KDU arrows.

c. At the HAVEQUICK TOD INIT prompt, select TRANSMIT; press [ENT].

d. Check with receiving station to ensure they have properly received the TOD sync. If not, resend.

e. Have receiving station go to the HAVEQUICK net preset and perform communications check. Use
procedures to return to the UHF-AM net preset if communications is not possible to troubleshoot
d i f fi c u l t i e s .

Perform the following procedure to receive a TOD from another AN/PRC-117F, other HAVEQUICK radio or TSS:

a. From a fixed frequency UHF-AM net preset in the operating range of225.000 to 399.975 MHz, press
[CALL].

b. Select HAVEQUICK with the left/right KDU arrows.

c. At the HAVEQUICK TOD INIT prompt, select RECEIVE; press [ENT]. Wait for the transmitting
station to send TOD sync. The radio accepts and loads the first TOD it receives.

d. Communicate with sending station to let them know if the TOD was successfully received.

e. Press the [PRE ±] button to scroll to the desired HAVEQUICK net preset.

f. Begin radio operations. Perform communications check with station originally sending the TOD sync.
Use procedures to retum to the UHF-AM net preset if communication is not possible to troubleshoot
d i f fi c u l t i e s .

3.13.3 HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver Operation

While operating on any HAVEQUICK net preset, transmissions on the preprogrammed HAVEQUICK guard
frequency can be detected while frequency hopping. A double beep signal is heard in the handset and a KDU visual
display is seen to denote the presence of any communications on the guard frequency. The user can access the
HAVEQUICK guard receiver through the [CALL] key. The guard frequency could be used as a method of gaining
TOD synchronization with stations already in HAVEQUICK frequency hopping operation. See Figure 3-35 and
Figure 3-36.
Perform the following procedure to access the HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver:

a. Upon indication of HAVEQUICK guard receiver operation, press the [CALL] key on the KDU.

b. Use left or right arrow key to select GRDFRQ and press [ENT].

c. The guard receiver channel display becomes active, listen or place a call on the guard frequency to make
contact with any station using the guard frequency.

d. If the station using the guard frequency needs a TOD sync transmission, press [CALL] to reaccess TOD
menu to transmit the HAVEQUICK TOD to that station. Press [CLR] to back out of this menu when
complete.
e. Press [CLR] key once whi]e at the guard receiver display to retum back to HAVEQUICK net preset.
H AV E Q U I C K TOO SYNC

00-GUARDRCVR

, WAITING FOR LOS VOC VOC AM

RECEPTION TYPE ADF D ATA MODE

SUCCESSFUL RECEIVE

21/03«8 12:34:56

R: 243.00000 LOS U
T: 2 4 3 . 0 0 0 0 0 16.0
FREQUENCY
PRESS CLR

TRANSMITTING...

SUCCESSFUL TOD

. . . T R A N S M I T. . .

H AV E Q U I C K TOD INIT

, WAITING FOR
RECEPTION

SUCCESSFUL RECEIVE

21/03/38 12:34:56

PRESS CLR

TRANSMITTING...

SUCCESSFUL TOD

. . . T R A N S M I T. . .

Figure 3-35. HAVEQUICK CALL TOD Sync Menu

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

B A T T E R Y
DENOTES PLAIN TEXT
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT M E T E R NET NAME
C I P H E R T E X T O P E R AT I O N
I N D I C ATO R ^

NET NUMBER
R
• BA^a:jNORM'
. 0 6 - H AV E Q U I C K
RECEIVE SIGNAL
STRENGTH METER

HVQUIK OFF
HOP TYPE. SQL ERRI SQUELCH
I N D I C AT O R
ADF CONNECTOR-
MODE
D ATA P O RT FH MODE ERROR -TOD NOT INITIALIZED,
M O D E MISSING WOD, OR MISSING
FMT FREQUENCIES
GRD • GUARD RECEIVER

CIRCULAR ARROW BUTTON

H AV E Q U I C K
TOD

11 : 2 2 : 3 3
HOPt^
•A 00.000
H AV E Q U I C K HQ NET NUM

NET
I N D I C AT O R
H AV E Q U I C K D AY O F M O N T H

00 - HQ I SWOD MODE
01 - 31 - HQ II MWOD MODE 117F-133D

Figure 3-36. HAVEQUICK Mode Displays

3 . 1 4 C O M S E C O P E R AT I O N

To operate in a COMSEC mode, rotate the function switch to [CT] or |TD1 position. TD is used in SATCOM,
Retransmit, or SCAN operation to overcome delay factors by increasing VINSON CT sync time. If a COMSEC key
has not been programmed, the AN/PRC-117F imposes a COMSEC mode, normally VINSON, on the net preset
using TEKOl. If this key has not been loaded, the AN/PRC-117F does not permit non-secure transmissions and does
not transmit.

3.14.1 Changing COMSEC TEK or Mode

COMSEC TEKs can be changed in the [OPT] menu under COMSEC. Refer to Paragraph 3.23.2. The
AN/PRC-117F must be in CT or TD to access COMSEC options.

3.15 D ATA O P E R AT I O N

Data devices can be connected to the radio through the J1 ADF connector or the J3 DATA connector. Commercial-
Off-The-Shelf (COTS) data devices with standard KY-57/99 interface cable can be easily used on the J1 ADF
connector. Most devices can also be used on the J3 DATA connector if the proper interface cable is obtained.
Consider operational techniques of users and data devices interface cabling availability in these areas:

• Voice only - Handset on J1 ADF

• Combination of Voice and DATA, voice contact first and then data message is passed.

Both on J1 ADF connector, one method at a time by connecting and disconnecting devices
Voice on J1 ADF connector with handset, data operation using cable to J3 DATA connector
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N h^ARRIS'
• DATA only

J1 ADF connector

J3 DATA connector

Data operation of the AN/PRC-117F varies depending on the COMSEC mode being used and the connector used
for the data device. Each connector has the ability to sense the connection of a data device and operates according
to definite rules determined by the COMSEC mode being used.

3.15.1 COMSEC - NONE, PI DATA Operation

For FT data operation, connection of other crypto devices, or line equipment to the AN/PRC-117F, select COMSEC
- NONE in COMSEC programming and place the function switch to IPTl position. When there are no data devices
on either port, the AN/PRC-117F configures both J1 ADF connector and J3 DATA connector for voice. If a data
device is connected to both jacks, the J1 ADF connector takes priority and makes J3 DATA connector inoperable.
If Voice Priority Over Data (VPOD) is enabled, the AN/PRC-117F can operate with a handset attached to J1 ADF
connector for voice, and a data device attached to J3 DATA connector for data operation. Each can key the
AN/PRC-117F when required, but not at the same time. Refer to Paragraph 4.10.1 for VPOD setup.

3.15.2 VINSON DATA Operation

Under VINSON COMSEC operation, the AN/PRC-117F must be programmed for the connector that is used for data
operation. The default in programming is AUTO ON ADF PORT meaning the J1 ADF connector is configured for
DATA operation and the J3 DATA Connector is turned off when a data cable is connected to J1.

Operations requiring switching between voice and data in the same contact period require connection and
disconnection of devices from the J1 ADF connector if only a J1 ADF data interface cable is available. The net
preset, for this type of operation, uses AUTO ON ADF PORT.
If using a handset on J1 ADF connector and a data device on the J3 DATA connector, it requires a net preset
specifically for voice operation set to AUTO ON ADF PORT and another net preset for data operation on the J3
DATA connector set to AUTO ON DATA PORT. The handset and data device can then be left connected to the
AN/PRC-117F. Operation in voice or data is accomplished by switching between these two adjacent net presets.
Switching to a second net preset becomes unnecessary if the VPOD feature is enabled on the radio. Refer to
Paragraph 4.10.1 for VPOD setup.

3.15.3 KG-84 DATA Operation

KG-84 is a data COMSEC mode (except for SATCOM and STC where it also supports voice). When in KG-84 data
mode, the handset PTT is ignored by the AN/PRC-117F. Depending on which connector the data device is initially
attached to, the AN/PRC-117F configures that port for data operation and turns off the other connector. Dedicated
UHF SATCOM HPW data operation can only be performed using the J3 DATA connector.

3.15.4 ANDVT DATA Operation

ANDVT COMSEC is used only in UHF SATCOM operations. When there are no data devices connected to either
port, the AN/PRC-117F configures the J1 ADF connector and J3 DATA connector for voice. The AN/PRC-117F can
be simply operated from one preset for voice or data on either connector. Upon connection of a data device to either
connector it takes priority and configures the connector for data operation. When a data device is attached to J3
DATA connector and a handset is connected to the J1 ADF connector, either device can key the AN/PRC-117F, but
not simultaneously. When one port is being keyed, a key on the other port is ignored. Data operation will occur at
the programmed rate (300,600,1200, or 2400 bps). Voice will operate at 2400 bps regardless of the data rate setting.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
i^ARRiS' O P E R AT I O N

3.15.5 FASCINATOR Operation

FASCINATOR encryption does not support digital data operation. The J1 ADF connector and the J3 DATA
connector are configured for voice operation at 12 kbps CVSD.

3.15.6 KYV-5 Operation

KYV-5 COMSEC allows selection of EDM data rates as described in Paragraph 3.12.10. COMSEC is configured
from the Options menu.

3.16 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA)

Situational Awareness is the ability to provide remote sites with information about a radio's geographical position.
The remote sites may be other radios or sophisticated applications running on PCs. The AN/PRC-117F will only
transmit SA reports in CT mode to ensure the integrity of sensitive position data. SA can be used over the frequency
range shown in each of the following modes:
• LOS, 25 kHz SATCOM, 5 kHz SATCOM, LPC, MELP, CVSD voice - 30.000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz
• SINCGARS frequency hopping - 30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz
• HAVEQUICK frequency hopping - 225.00 MHz to 399.975 MHz

• Internet Protocol (IP)

SA can be operated using a PLGR or a commercial GPS unit that supports NMEA-I83 (V2.0 or higher). Refer to
Paragraph 3.23.6 for information on GPS usage with the AN/PRC-117F.

When SA is activated, position data is transmitted along with voice transmissions or other user-designated criteria.
In addition to transmitting over the air, the radio can be configured to send SA data through the J3 connector EDM,
RS-232, or PPP port. Refer to Paragraph 4.13 for SA programming information.
The following points should be considered when using SA:

• SA reports are sent out the J3 PPP port as User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets, with a user-selectable
destination IP address. Default IP address is 255.255.255.255, which broadcasts to all radios in the net.
• The UDP packet can be configured for standard SINCGARS format per MIL-STD-188-220A (X.21) or
enhanced HARRIS format. The HARRIS format provides all the capabilities of the SINCGARS format and
data is sent to a separate destination port. HARRIS packets are used when interfacing the AN/PRC-117F to
a specific application requiring this format - such as Command and Control Personal Computer (C2PC).
• The SINCGARS UDP packet is sent to port 1646. The HARRIS UDP packet is sent to port lOOI I.
• When in 16 kbps VINSON with infotype set to AUTO ON ADF, SA reports will be sent out J3 EDM data
port at 9600 bps async, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit.
• The AN/PRC-117F requires a Combat ID (CID). The default setting is the radio serial number, however,
this can be changed by the user. The CID is used as an identifier in the SA data packet.
• SA allows the user to specify the destination IP address for the SA packet.
• When SA Receive is set for ON, received SA is handled according to Table 3-22.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N hfARRtS'
The radio can be configured to transmit SA data under the following conditions:

• OFF - No SA data is transmitted.

• AUTO - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs (i.e. every time the handset is keyed). Not
applicable with IP operation.
• PER (Periodic) - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs, or the user-programmed time
period (1-1440 minute range) if no other transmission occurs. Default setting is two minutes.
• MOVE - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs, or when the radio moves a specified
distance from the last SA transmission. Setting is user programmable from 100 to 1000 meters, or 300 to
1000 meters if radio is installed in a Vehicular Adapter Unit (default settings are 100 meters and 300 meters,
respectively). The radio will also transmit SA data when crossing Military Grid Reference System (MORS)
boundaries.

• PER & MOVE - Combination of both PER and MOVE. Transmission is based on a time period and a
specified distance.
Ta b l e 3 - 2 2 . B a u d R a t e s f o r S A D a t a F o r m a t s

Receive Waveform SA Data Port SA Baud Rate at J3 Cable

Voice (Handset) 600-4800

1200 - 9600

RS-232 Same as RS-232 rate

UDP Packet MIL-STD-188-220A(X.21) 10513-0710

1200 - 9600

RS-232 Same as RS-232 rate

3.17 OTAR, OTAT, AND OTHER NOD OPERATIONS IN THE AN/PRC-117F

OTAR and OTAT allow COMSEC variables to be transmitted by the NCS and received by any net member radio.
The AN/PRC-117F supports full OTAR operations, Saville Advanced Remote Keying (SARK), as well as other Net
Control Device (NCD) controlled operations. These operations require the KYX-15 NCD or AN/CYZ-10 DTD in
KYX-15 mode.Table 3-23 shows the process of either Automatic Keying (AK) or Manual Keying (MK).

The AN/PRC-117F supports the following operations:

• Transmit Automatic Rekey (TX AK) - Paragraph 3.17.1

• Transmit Manual Rekey (TX MK) - Paragraph 3.17.2
• Receive Automatic Rekey (RX AK) - Paragraph 3.17.3
• Receive Manual Rekey (RX MK) - Paragraph 3.17.4
• Variable Generate (VG) - Paragraph 3.17.5
• Variable Update (VU) - Paragraph 3.17.6
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Ta b l e 3 - 2 3 . O T A R / O T A T P r o c e s s

>tep AK or MK Sending Station AK or MK Receiving Station

1. Load TEK to unused key position.

2. Call all stations and tell them to If using cooperative, users switch to
prepare for OTAR or OTAT. [RV]. If using non-cooperative, users
do nothing. AK only.
T. Switch to IRVJ. Do not transmit until process is
completed.
4. Connect NCD and use to send either If using cooperative, AN/PRC-117F
an AK or MK. will ask user where to store the new
key. If using non-cooperative, new key
overwrites current key.
Perform variable update on KEK,
and make sure communications is
possible with all stations using new
key.

3.17.1 TX AK VINSON, ANDVT, or KG-84

AK rekeying operations require the receiving AN/PRC-117F be loaded with the same KEK used to send the rekey
from the NCD or DTD. The KEK must be distributed and loaded prior to using AK operations. After each AK OTAR
operation, the KEK loaded in the receiving AN/PRC-117F is updated automatically by the rekey process. The
sending operator must then update the KEK in their DTD or NCD after confirmation of successful OTAR at the
receiving radios. For variable update, refer to Paragraph 3.17.6.

Perform the following procedure for TX AK mode:

a. Determine TEK that is to be transmitted by AK OTAR. Load this TEK into an unused position in the
AN/PRC-117F to be available for communications checks with receiving stations of the OTAR.

b. Notify receiving stations to prepare for AK OTAR. Direct them to use cooperative or noncooperative
method, refer to Paragraph 3.17.3.1 and Paragraph 3.17.3.2. Instruct them not to transmit again until
they hear a communications check.
c. Rotate the function switch to [RVJ.

d. Select TRANSMIT AK mode; press [ENTJ.

e. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR TX AK displays.

f. If in VINSON or ANDVT mode, CONNECT NCD AND INITIATE AK displays.

g. If in KG-84 mode, START TX CONNECT NCD AND INITIATE AK displays. Transmit data traffic.
h. Connect KYX-15 (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 (DTD) fill device now.

i. On the fill device, select AK mode and the necessary keys, the TEK to be transmitted, and the KEK
used by the receiving stations.

3-97
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

j. Initiate the AK from the fill device:

KYX-15 - Select TEK storage position and set to ON. Set storage position of the KEK to ON.
Turn on device to AK and press initiate button to begin key transfer. The indicator light flashes if
successful. Switch storage position selectors for both the TEK and KEK back to OFF.
AN/CYZ-10 using RDS - Use RADIO portion, COMSEC menu, and select AK. Menu asks for
TEK to send and KEK to use. Select, as appropriate, to initiate AK process.

AN/CYZ-10 using FILL - Use setup menu for CFD protocol of KYX-15. Use [CLR] to return to
FILL main menu. Use NET menu to select AK. Menu asks for TEK to send and KEK to use.
Select, as appropriate, to initiate AK process.
k. TX AK IN PROGRESS displays, followed by TX AK DONE PRESS ANY KEY.

1. Press any key to return to the rekey/NCD operations menu.

m . Tu r n o ff D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

n. Return to CT operation.

0. Perform a net communications check.

p. If OTAR was successful, update KEK in NCD using the procedure described in Paragraph 3.17.6.

3.17.2 TX MK

MK process does not require use of KEK except for the KG-84 mode.

Perform the following procedure for TX MK mode:

a. Determine TEK that is to be transmitted by MK OTAR. Load this TEK in the AN/PRC-117F to have
available for communications checks with receiving stations of the OTAR.

b. Notify receiving stations to prepare for MK OTAR. Direct them to use the cooperative method; refer to
Paragraph 3.17.3.1. Instruct them not to transmit again until they hear a communications check.
c. Rotate the function switch to [RVj.

d. Select TRANSMIT MK mode; press [ENT].

e. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR TX MK displays.

f. If in VINSON or ANDVT mode, CONNECT NCD AND INITIATE MK displays.

g. If in KG-84 mode, START TX CONNECT NCD AND INITIATE MK displays. Transmit data
t r a f fi c .

h. Connect the KYX-15 (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 DTD fill device now.

i. On the fill device, select MK mode.

j. Initiate the MK from the fill device.

KYX-15 - Select TEK storage position and set to ON. Turn on device to MK and press initiate
button to transfer key by MK. The indicator light flashes if successful. Switch storage position
selector for the TEK OFF when finished.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS' O P E R AT I O N

AN/CYZ-10 using RDS - Use RADIO portion, COMSEC menu and select MK. Menu asks for
TEK to send. Select as appropriate to initiate MK process.
- AN/CYZ-10 using FILL - Use setup menu for CFD protocol of KYX-15. Use [CLR] to back out
to FILL main menu. Use NET menu to select MK. Menu asks for TEK to send. Select as
appropriate to initiate MK process.
k. TX MK IN PROGRESS displays, followed by TX MK DONE PRESS ANY KEY.

1. Press any key to return to the rekey/NCD operations menu.

m . Tu r n o ff D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

n. Return to CT operation.

o. Perform a net communications check.

3.17.3 RXAK

The AN/PRC-117F supports cooperative and noncooperative RX AK mode. AK rekeying mode requires receiving
AN/PRC-117F to have the same KEK as being used by transmitting NCD or DTD stations. OTAT can only be
performed using the cooperative procedure.

Use cooperative method to send TEKs to outstations as a routine update to already established nets, or to add
capability to operate in additional nets.

NOTE

It is not recommended to use noncooperative OTAR as a

method to update COMSEC in a multiple station net, as the
possibility of not all stations receiving the update results in the
net being mixed with stations using two different keys. Use of
noncooperative OTAR should be limited to stations with
untrained operators and as a means of corrective action for
stations not able to change keys at the end of scheduled crypto
periods.
3.17.3.1 Cooperative RX AK OTAR

The AK OTAR process requires receiving an AN/PRC-117F to have the correct KEK that the sending station is
using, and loaded for the COMSEC mode being rekeyed.

Perform the following procedure for cooperative RX AK OTAR mode:

a. Upon receiving notification that NCS transmits an AK OTAR, acknowledge instructions and do not
transmit again until procedure has completed and the NCS makes another communications check.

b. Rotate function switch to [RV].

c. Select RECEIVE AK mode; press [ENTl.

d. Select desired KEY STORAGE DEVICE. Refer to Table 1-4 for OTAR capabilities.

e. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR RX AK displays followed by WAIT TO RECEIVE AK.

f. Wait for sending station to transmit AK OTAR.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

g. RX AK IN PROGRESS displays, followed by RX AK OK.

h. Select the desired TEK location (01 - 25) if key storage device is radio.
i. If external key fill device is key storage device, display shows INITIATE TRANSFER AT FILL
DEVICE. Load key to fill device using procedure appropriate to your specific fill device.
KYK-13 - Select key storage position, turn on device, and press initiate button to transfer key
from radio to fill device. The indicator light flashes if successful.
KYX-15 - Select key storage position and set to ON, turn on device to LD and press initiate button
to transfer key from radio to fill device. The indicator light flashes if successful. Switch storage
position selector back to OFF when finished.
AN/CYZ-10 using RDS - Use RADIO portion to receive key from a CFD procedure. Save key as
TEK and name key as required using alphanumeric entry on DTD keypad.
- AN/C YZ-10 using FILL - Use setup to use CFD protocol of either KYK-13 or KYX-15. Use RC V
menu to receive TEK from radio. Enter in appropriate COMSEC key management information as
asked for. DS-101 interface protocol does not work.

j. KEY STORE IN PROGRESS displays, followed by KEY STORE OK, if successful. If unsuccessful,
coordinate with sending station to repeat the process. If OTAT had been successfully accomplished
(Step i), use that key to fill radio instead of having the OTAR retransmitted.
k. If the KEK is updated during the RX AK, the KEK update count displays.

1. Press any key to retum to the rekey/NCD operations menu.

m . Tu r n o f f D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J I A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

n. Retum to CT operation.

3.17.3.2 Noncooperative RX AK

The AK OTAR process requires the receiving AN/PRC-117F to have the correct KEK that the sending station is
using, and loaded for the COMSEC mode being rekeyed.

Perform the following procedure for noncooperative RX AK mode:

a. Upon notification from the NCS that a MK OTAR is to be transmitted, acknowledge instructions. Do
not transmit again until the process is complete and the NCS makes a communications check.

b. Wait to receive the AK. Monitor the upper right comer of the KDU to observe the status of the RX AK.

c. If the radio is in VINSON or ANDVT mode, beeps in the handset provide status of the RX AK. Four
short beeps indicate a successful AK. One short beep, then one long beep indicates a failed AK
operation.

d. If the AK is received successfully, the new key overwrites the selected TEK.

e. If the KEK is updated during the RX AK, the KEK update count is indicated.

f. Wait for communications check from sending station. The sending station makes the first check on the
new TEK. If the OTAR process was unsuccessful, the communications check is made on the old key
and the process needs to be reattempted.

3-100
h^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.17.4 RXMK

The AN/PRC-117F supports both a cooperative and a noncooperative RX MK mode in ANDVT and KG-84
COMSEC Modes. VINSON mode does not support non cooperative RX MK OTAR. KG-84 still requires use of a
KEK.

NOTE

A more failsafe method is to use OTAT, where the key can also
be stored in the fill device. If the receiving radio does not
receive the key or a failure occurs in the key store, a backup
will exist in the fill device to load into a radio that does not
have the key.

3.17.4.1 Cooperative RX MK OTAR and/or OTAT

Perform the following procedure for cooperative RX MK OTAR and/or OTAT mode:

a. Upon notification from the NCS that a AK OTAR is to be transmitted in CT mode using the present
TEK, acknowledge instructions. Do not transmit again until the process is complete and the NCS makes
a communications. Determine what TEK is sent and when it is put into use.

b. Rotate function switch to IRV].

c. Select RECEIVE MK mode, press lENT].

d. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR RX MK displays, followed by WAIT TO RECEIVE MK.

e. Select desired KEY STORAGE DEVICE. Refer to Table I -5 for OTAR and OTAT capabilities.

f. Wait for sending station to transmit MK OTAR.

g. RX MK IN PROGRESS displays, followed by RX MK OK.

h. Select the desired TEK location (01 - 25) if key storage device is the radio.

i. If key storage device selected is external key fill device, the display shows INITIATE TRANSFER
AT FILL DEVICE. Load key to fill device using procedure appropriate to your specific fill device of
either CFDs, DTD using RDS or DTD using FILL set to CFD emulation.
KYK-13 - Select key storage position, turn on device and press initiate button to transfer key from
radio to fill device. The indicator light flashes if successful.
KYX-15 - Select key storage position and set to ON, turn device to LD and press initiate button
to transfer key from radio to fill device. The indicator light flashes if successful. Switch storage
position selector back to OFF when finished.
AN/CYZ-10 using RDS - Use RADIO portion of RDS to receive key from a CFD. Save key as
TEK and name key as required using alphanumeric entry on DTD keypad.
AN/CYZ-10 using FILL - Use setup for CFD protocol of either KYK-13 or KYX-15. Use RCV
menu to receive TEK from radio. Enter in appropriate COMSEC key management information as
requested, or ignore if unknown. DS-101 interface protocol cannot be used.
j. KEY STORE IN PROGRESS displays, followed by KEY STORE OK if successful. If unsuccessful,
coordinate with sending station to repeat process. If OTAT had been successfully accomplished (Step i),
use that key instead to fill radio instead of having the OTAR retransmitted.

3-101
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION tfARRtS'
k. Press any key to return to the rekey/NCD operations menu.

I. If the KEK is updated during the RX MK (KG-84 only), the K£K update count is indicated,

m . Tu r n o ff D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r,

n. Return to CT operation, and wait for communications check.

3 . 1 7 . 5 Va r i a b l e G e n e r a t e

Perform the following procedure for variable generate mode:

a. Rotate flmction switch to [RV].

b. Select VARIABLE GENERATE mode; press [ENT].

c. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR VG displays, followed by INITIATE VG - PRESS ANY KEY
WHEN DONE.

d. Connect the KYX-15 (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 (DTD) fill device.

e. On the fill device, select VG mode as applicable.
f. Initiate the VG from the fill device. Monitor the fill device for the status of the variable generate
operation.
KYX-15 - Select key storage position and set to ON, turn device to VG and press initiate button
to generate key. The indicator light flashes if successful. Switch storage position selector back to
O F F.

AN/CYZ-10 using RDS - Use RADIO portion, COMSEC menu and select VG to generate a TEK.
Save key as TEK and name key as required using alphanumeric entry on DTD keypad. Skip tag
info if information is unavailable.

AN/CYZ-10 using FILL - Use setup to use CFD protocol of KYX-15. Use [CLR] to back out to
FILL main menu. Use NET menu to generate TEK. Enter the appropriate COMSEC key
management information as requested, or ignore if unknown.
g. Press any key to return to the rekey NCD operations menu.
h . Tu r n o f f D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

i. Return to CT operation.

3.17.6 Variable Update

After AK OTAR operation has been verified at the receiving AN/PRC-117F, the KEK used by the net controller must
be updated in the fill device to continue operations with outstations that had their KEK automatically updated.

Perform the following procedure for variable update mode:

a. Rotate function switch to [RV].

b. Select VARIABLE UPDATE; press [ENTJ.

c. WAIT - CONFIGURING FOR VU displays, followed by INITIATE VU - PRESS ANY KEY

WHEN DONE.

d. Connect the KYX-15 (NCD) or AN/CYZ-10 (DTD) fill device.

3-102
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS' OPERATION

e. On the fill device, select VU mode and the key storage location of the desired key variable. AN/CYZ-10
DTD using FILL program must be set to KYX-15 protocol to use the VU mode under the FILL program.
On AN/CYZ-10 DTD using RDS application, go to the radio program, COMSEC menu, and follow
menu instructions for VU menu item.

f. Initiate the VU from the fill device. Monitor the fill device for the status of the variable update
operation.

g. Press any key to return to the rekey/NCD operations menu.

h . Tu r n o f f D T D o r N C D a n d d i s c o n n e c t i t f r o m J 1 A U D I O / D ATA / F I L L c o n n e c t o r.

i. Return to CT operation.

3.17.7 VINSON PT Override

Plain Text (PT) transmissions can be received while operating in VINSON, KYV-5, and FASCINATOR COMSEC
mode. The AN/PRC-117F unsquelches when a PT signal is received. A steady beep tone (approximately once per
second) is heard in the receiving AN/PRC-117F handset, indicating reception of PT. Go to IPT| position on the
function switch to communicate with the PT station. Using Digital Squelch prevents PT override. An analog squelch
setting should be used if VINSON PT override is desired. PT can also be used to troubleshoot communications in
cases where there is a key mismatch (squelch breaks, but no voice or tones are heard).

3.18 SCAN MODE

In SCAN mode, the AN/PRC-117F searches up to ten nets for a signal. The user can program and edit the list of nets
scanned. All LOS fixed frequency and dedicated SATCOM nets voice operation can be scanned. Data, FH, DAMA,
and IW nets cannot be scanned. Monitoring of guard frequencies can be accomplished by using SCAN.

SCAN mode functions in [PTJ, [CT], or [TDj; however, if any net is CT, SCAN must be in CT or TD. When a signal
is detected, the AN/PRC-117F stops scanning and dwells on the net for the duration of the programmed hold time.
The default hang time is three seconds after the signal is lost. The AN/PRC-117F continues automatic scan to the
next net. Refer to Paragraph 4.7.3.

For better performance for scanning reception of stations operating in CT mode, have these outstations use TD
cipher mode setting and initiate calls with slightly longer first call transmissions. Responding to PT station with the
AN/PRC-117F scanning in CT requires the operator to switch the function switch to [PT] prior to return
transmission.

Pushing the PTT key while the AN/PRC-117F is scanning causes the AN/PRC-117F to transmit on the priority
transmit net. Pushing the PTT key while the AN/PRC-117F is stopped on a net causes the AN/PRC-117F to transmit
on that net. Refer to Paragraph 4.7.2.

Perform the following procedure to enter automatic scan mode:

a. Rotate function switch to [PT] or [CT].

b. Press [MODE].

c. Use the up/down arrow keys to select SCAN; press [ENT] to initiate automatic scan mode.

d. If the radio is keyed when a signal is received within the user-configurable hold time (0-99 seconds),
the radio transmits on the receiving net. After the transmission, the radio remains in receive for a user-
configurable period of time (hang-time). These values can be configured to meet user requirements.

3-103
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

e. Press [CLR] to enter manual scanning. Select the desired channel with the (PRE ±1 button on KDU.
Only channels in the scan list are available. Manual scanning can be used to temporarily leave automatic
scanning to conduct operations with an outstation without concern to signals on any other scan list
channel.

f. Press [CLR] again to retum to automatic scanning.

NOTE

Pressing [CIRCULAR ARROW] key toggles between the

operational displays when in manual scanning. See
Figure 3-37.

RECEIVE/TRANSMIT DENOTES PLAIN

I N D I C AT O R T E X T O P E R AT I O N

SCANNING

PRESS CLR FOR MANUAL SCAN DENOTES PLAIN TEXT

C I P H E R T E X T O P E R AT I O N

R B AT ■; SCAN PT|
SIGNAL
•02-UHF2 0 H3-T METER

NET
LOS I VOC VOC FM NOIs],
NUMBER TYPE I ADF DATA MOD SQL I SQUELCH
TYPE

CIRCULAR ARROW
BUTTON

R: 229.75000 LOS 0
T: 2 2 9 . 7 5 0 0 0
FREQUENCY

Figure 3-37. SCAN Mode Displays

3-104
hfARmS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.19 TEST MODE (BUILT-IN TEST)

Press [MODE| to select TEST MODE. Use the up/down arrow keys to select TEST; press (ENT|. Perform the
following procedure:
a. To initiate Built-in Test (BIT), select TEST; press [ENTJ. If the radio displays a suspected assembly,
refer to Paragraph 5.2.1. Perform BIT whenever using an AN/PRC-117F for the first time or after any
type of unusual malfunction occurs.
b. For an indication of the main battery and the HUB charge level, select BATTERY and press [ENT].
For more information on batteries, refer to Paragraph 5.4. Manpack data operations involving long
transmissions requires the monitoring of battery voltage to prevent depletion of power. Avoid long data
transmission with main battery level below 24.0 VDC.

c. To determine the radio's hardware and firmware version, installed options, and radio serial number,
select VERSIONS and press [ENTJ. Choose HARDWARE or FIRMWARE and use the up/down
arrows to scroll through the lists of internal sub-components. The [CIRCULAR ARROW] key can be
pressed under firmware to also show the corresponding part number. OVM gives the Options Validation
Matrix (OVM) Version numlser. SERIAL shows the serial number of the AN/PRC-117F.

d. To determine total elapsed power-on time and transmit time in hours and minutes, select ETI and press
[ENTj. ETI information can be used to gather data on operating qualities of different types of batteries
or VAU time.

3.20 REMOTE CONTROL MODE

The AN/PRC-117F can be controlled by an optional remote control device such as a PC. The remote port of either
J3 DATA, J6 ACCESSORY, or J9 ACCESSORY must be configured to communicate with the remote control
device. Communications programs capable of programming an asynchronous interface can be used. Refer to
Paragraph 4.8.1.

Perform the following procedure to enable remote control mode:

a. Press [MODE] on the KDU.

b. Use the up/down arrow keys to select REMOTE CONTROL, and then press [ENT].

During remote contro] operation, the fotlowing operations are allowed from the KDU:
• Vo l u m e c o n t r o l

• Deactivation of the remote control mode

• KDU backlight control via the [LT] key

• Display alternate operational displays using O key

Perform the following procedure to deactivate remote control operation:

a. Press [MODE] on the KDU.

b. Scroll to OFF and press [ENT].

3-105
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N tfARRtS'
3 . 2 1 B E A C O N O P E R AT I O N

Placing the AN/PRC-117F in BEACON mode makes it transmit continuously on the selected frequency with an
unencrypted modulating signal of a swept audio tone of 300 Hz to 3300 Hz. Operational range for BEACON mode
is 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz with adjustable output power of up to 10 or 20 watts depending on the portion
of operational band and modulation type used. Frequency, modulation and power level can be preset prior to actual
use. Refer to Paragraph 4.10.3. Perform the following procedure to place the AN/PRC-117F in beacon mode:

a. Ensure antenna is installed for the desired beacon operational frequency. Rotate function switch to
either [PT|, ICT|, or [TDJ.

b. After the radio initializes, press [MODE].

c. At OPERATIONAL MODE prompt, select BEACON; press (ENTJ.

d. At ENTER BEACON MODE display, select YES to enter BEACON mode. Selecting NO brings radio
back to operational mode menu.

e. Set the desired frequency within the range of 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz and modulation type
of AM or FM by using the right or left arrow keys on the KDU. Press [ENT] to set new values.

f. Monitor battery condition as continuous transmit significantly reduces battery life.

g. To leave BEACON mode, press [MODEl and select NORMAL mode or turn radio off. Upon next
power up, the radio starts in normal mode.

3 . 2 2 C L O N E M O D E O P E R AT I O N

Clone Mode allows the programmed parameters from a source AN/PRC-117F to be transferred to one or more target
AN/PRC-117F radios. Cloning is possible by cable connection from the front panel J6 ACCESSORY connector
with a blue-dot cloning cable (Harris part number 12013-0720). When cloning is complete, always perform
communications checks to verify correct settings. See Figure 3-12 for the Clone operating mode.

Two types of cloning can be performed: SYSTEM or DAMA. The SYSTEM setting will clone all possible
parameters including DAMA. The DAMA setting will clone only DAMA parameters.

NOTE

When cloning from an AN/PRC-117F with firmware version

4.1 or later to an AN/PRC-117F with version 4.0 or earlier, the
SYSTEM setting will not clone DAMA parameters.

The following limitations to the cloning process should be noted:

• COMSEC and FH data fills are not transferred using Clone Mode.
• An AN/PRC-117F cloned with DAMA presets must manually be set to its assigned TBA.
• The source radio's SINCGARS radio type of MASTER setting is not cloned. If SINCGARS net presets are
cloned, ensure only one master station exists in any net.
• Cloning does not transfer SINCGARS GTOD, HPW TOD, or HAVEQUICK TOD. These items must
always be locally filled to each AN/PRC-117F.
• Cloning is restricted to AN/PRC-117F firmware version 2.3.1.7 or higher.

3-106
hfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to clone a target AN/PRC-117F from a fiilly programmed source AN/PRC-117F
using a cable connection:

NOTE

Do not connect the cloning cable until instructed in the

procedure.

NOTE

Cloning between different AN/PRC-117F firmware versions

is not possible below firmware version 2.3.1.7. Also, if a net
in the source radio includes a parameter that was not available
in an older version target radio, the parameter will not be
cloned to the older radio. It is recommended to use same
version firmware for all radios in a net. Contact Harris for
software upgrade information (refer to Paragraph 5.3).

a. Program the source radio with all necessary net presets. Zeroize the target radio.

b. Place each radio's function switch to [FTl position.

c. Press the [MODE] key and select CLONE mode on each radio.

d. Select RECEIVE on the target radio to be cloned. Display indicates INITIATE CLONE AT
SOURCE.

e. Connect both radios with cloning cable (12013-0720) using the J6 ACCESSORY connectors.

f. Select TRANSMIT on the programmed source radio, and press [ENTj.

g. Use the up/down arrow keys to select either SYSTEM cloning or DAMA cloning.
h. Press [ENTj on the source radio to send black parameters to the target radio. The source radio indicates
TRANSMITTING.

i. Upon successful cloning operation, turn off each radio. Disconnect the clone cable.

j. Power on the newly cloned radio. Load any COMSEC or FH data necessary and perform
communications checks. If using DAMA mode, change the TBAs on the cloned radio to its own in all
DAMA net presets. If using SINCGARS Nets, ensure the Member/Master relationship is maintained.

3.23 OPTIONS DESCRIPTIONS

During operation in standard modes, pressing the [OPT] key accesses the Options menu to allow programming
changes to the currently used net preset. The Options menu contains items that may require changing during
operation. Accessing [OPT] menu keeps the AN/PRC-117F online and able to still function in operating nets.
Available options are dependent on the type of net preset currently in use. Figure 3-38 shows the AN/PRC-117F
options menu tree. The following paragraphs describe the AN/PRC-117F options menus. For a description of menu
trees, refer to Paragraph 4.2.

3-107
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Figure 3-38. AN/PRC-117F Options Menu Tree

3.23.1 Copying a Net Preset

To copy an existing net preset to another net location, perform the following procedure:

a. Use the [PRE ±] key on the KDU and go to the net that is to be copied.

b. Press the [OPT] key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SAVE, and press [ENTl.
c. Under SAVE AS NET ID:, enter the two-digit net number where the parameters are to be saved, and
press [ENT].

NOTE

If the Net Locking feature is enabled and the selected number

is within the locked net range, then *LOCKED* will appear
on the screen. To continue, either assign a different (unlocked)
net number, or disable the net lock as described in
Paragraph 4.9.2.2.

d. Enter a net name for the new net or keep the default name, and press [ENT[.

e. When asked "SAVE NET?", use the up/down arrow keys to select YES, and press [ENTJ. The new net
will be saved with the same preset parameters as the copied net.

f. Press [CLR[ to exit out of menus.

3.23.2 COMSEC Option, Changing COMSEC Type and TEK

Perform the following procedure to configure COMSEC options:

a. Place the radio in CT mode and press the [OPTl key. The function switch must be in [CT] (or [TD]) to
select COMSEC mode in the Options menu. This prevents operators from thinking they have selected
a COMSEC mode while they are still in PT.

b. Use the left/right arrow keys to select COMSEC; press [ENT].

c. Select the Crypto Mode desired.

d. Select the COMSEC Encryption Key to be used by entering the TEK storage position number 01 - 25.

e. Depending on the Crypto Mode chosen previously, there may be more menu choices. Complete the
menus as required and press [ENT].

3-108
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
ffARRIS' OPERATION

3.23.3 POWER Option

The transmit power for the current net preset is a programmable configuration parameter. Refer to Paragraph 4.17
for the programming menus for this option. The power level setting applies when devices are externally attached to
the AN/PRC-117F (VAU Power) and when external devices are not attached (TX Power). If the AN/PRC-117F radio
is connected to an external device and the bypass setting is disabled, then the menu displayed will be for external
devices (VAU Power). If the radio is not connected to an external device or the bypass setting is enabled, then the
menu displayed will be for non-external devices (TX Power). Users will not be able to modify the power setting if
security is enabled.

3 . 2 3 . 4 R E T R A N S M I T O P E R AT I O N

A retransmission or repeater station receives a signal transmitted on one frequency and retransmits that signal on
another frequency, enabling communication over a greater range than is possible using individual AN/PRC-117Fs.
A retransmission or repeater station for extending communication range can be set up using two AN/PRC-117Fs.

Two types of AN/PRC-117F operations are available using the retransmit setup:

• Black Digital operation

• Red Analog operation

Both types of operation use the same equipment and setup. The only difference in operation is how the
retransmission/repeater station is used by other radios.

A
l WARNINGI
To prevent electrical shock and RF bums, avoid contact with
antennas in retransmit mode operation as each AN/PRC-117F
in the system transmits automatically in response to incoming
calls on the opposite AN/PRC-117F.

3.23.4.1 Black Digital Retransmit Operation

Figure 3-39 shows Black Digital retransmit operation. The retrans station consists of two radios connected by a
retrans cable. Here the retrans station uses frequency F1 on one radio to transmit and receive with one group of
radios. It uses frequency F2 to transmit and receive with a second group of radios. The retransmission operation can
be summarized as follows:

• Signals received on F1 are retransmitted on F2.

• Signals received on F2 are retransmitted on F1.

F1 and F2 can be any LOS fixed frequency, dedicated SATCOM channel, SINCGARS FH or HAVEQUICK net
preset. The most common operation and preferred method is to operate the retrans site in black digital retrans mode.
In this mode, all stations except the two retrans site AN/PRC-117Fs operate in CT with same COMSEC mode and
key. The retrans site AN/PRC-117Fs are operated in PT and just pass the encrypted digital signal through the retrans
cable.

3-109
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

R E T R A N S S TAT I O N

L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y 3 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 M H Z L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y 3 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 M H Z
D E D I C AT E D S AT C O M D E D I C AT E D S AT C O M
SINCGARS FH SINCGARS FH
H AV E Q U I C K F H H AV E Q U I C K F H

RETRANS RADIOS BOTH A N / P R C - 11 7 F S U S I N G F 1 M O D E

A R E A N / P R C . 11 7 F (RXTTX) COMMUNICATE THROUGH
R E T R A N S M I S S I O N S TAT I O N
W I T H A N / P R C - 11 7 F S U S I N G F 2
MODE (RX/TX).

E L E VAT I O N

F1 F1 F2 F2

' OUTSIDE RADIOS ARE EITHER AN/PRC-IITFs OR ANY

ill CT

O T H E R R A D I O C A PA B L E O F T H E S E L E C T E D M O D E .

Figure 3-39. Black Digital Retransmission Operation

3.23.4.2 Red Analog Retransmit Operation

Figure 3-39 shows Red analog retransmit operation. The retrans station consists of two radios connected by a retrans
cable. Here the retrans station uses frequency F1 on one radio to transmit and receive with one group of radios. It
uses frequency F2 to transmit and receive with a second group of radios. The retransmission operation can be
summarized as follows:

• Signals received on F1 are retransmitted on F2.

• Signals received on F2 are retransmitted on F1.
• Digital Squelch is used to disable PT override (if necessary).

F1 and F2 can be any LOS fixed frequency, dedicated SATCOM channel, SINCGARS FH or HAVEQUICK net
preset. In Red Analog operation, all stations operate in CT mode, but each net has its own COMSEC key and
operating type. All AN/PRC-117Fs are operated in CT and must be secured.

3 - 11 0
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

R E T R A N S S TAT I O N

L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y 3 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 M H Z L O S F I X E D F R E Q U E N C Y 3 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 M H Z
D E D I C AT E D S AT C O M D E D I C AT E D S AT C O M
SINCGARS FN SINCGARS FH
H AV E Q U I C K F H H AV E Q U I C K F H

RETRANS RADIOS BOTH A N / P R C - 11 7 F S U S I N G F 1 M O D E

A R E A N / P R C - 11 7 F (RX/TX) COMMUNICATETHROUGH
R E T R A N S M I S S I O N S TAT I O N
W I T H A N / P R C - 11 7 F S U S I N G F 2
MODE (RX/TX).

E L E VAT I O N

k
F1 F1 F2 F2

* O U T S I D E R A D I O S A R E E I T H E R A N / P R C - 11 7 F S O R A N Y
III C T

OTHER RADIO CAPABLE OF THE SELECTED MODE.

Figure 3-40. Red Analog Retransmission Operation

3.23.4.3 Repeater Retransmission Operation

Repeater operation is used when a net wants to gain extended range. All outside radios that use the repeater station
for retransmission operate half-duplex nets, where the same frequency serves for both transmitting and receiving.
The repeater station uses simplex operation using separate transmit and receive frequencies.

Figure 3-41 shows repeater operation. Here, the repeater receives on frequency F1 and transmits on frequency F2.
With this setup, all outside AN/PRC-117Fs transmit on F1 and receive on F2. Using this arrangement, all units must
communicate with each other through the repeater.

3 - 111
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

R E P E AT E R S TAT I O N

A L L A N / P R C - 11 7 F S C O M M U N I C AT E
T H R O U G H T H E R E P E AT E R

A L L A N / P R C - 11 7 F s :

TX-F1
R C V- F 2

* *
* •

E L E VAT I O N

DD
* O U T S I D E R A D I O S A R E E I T H E R A N / P R C - 11 7 F S O R A N Y
ED
O T H E R R A D I O C A PA B L E O F T H E S E L E C T E D M O D E .

Figure 3-41. Repeater Operation

3.23.4.4 Hardware for Retransmission/Repeater Setup

The following equipment is used for retransmission/repeater operation:

• Two AN/PRC-117Fs with antenna and battery pack

• Retransmit cable (10511 -0717-01)

Figure 3-42 shows the retransmission/repeater hardware configuration. For optimum performance, the
retransmission site should be elevated above the level of the outstations. Connect the retransmit cable to the J3
DATA connector on each AN/PRC-117F. Separate the AN/PRC-117F units by fully extending the retransmit cable
to prevent receiver desensitization and RF interference between units.

\A CAUTION I
Damage to equipment may result if the retransmit cable is
connected or disconnected from an operating AN/PRC-117F.
E n s u r e t h a t A N / P R C - 11 7 F s o n e a c h e n d o f r e t r a n s m i s s i o n
cable are tumed off.

NOTE

For best retransmission performance, ensure the retransmit

cable is unrolled and in contact with the ground along its full
length.

3 - 11 2
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.23.4.5 Frequency Separation

Considerations for simplex operation:

• Frequencies F1 and F2 must not be within 20% of each other.

• Frequencies F1 and F2 must not be harmonics of each other.

RECOMMENDED FREQUENCY
S E PA R AT I O N I S 2 0 % M I N I M U M
(NOT HARMONICALLY RELATED)

R E C O M M E N D E D S E PA R AT I O N
D I S TA N C E :
FULL CABLE LENGTH (50 FT.)

D ATA C O N N E C T O R D ATA C O N N E C T O R

V RETRANSMIT
( 1 0 5 1 1 - 0 7 1 7CABLE
-01) ^J 117F-111B
Figure 3-42. Retransmission/Repeater Hardware Setup

3.23.4.6 Retransmit Settings

Determine whether Black Digital or Red Analog operation is required. Perform the following procedure to configure
t h e A N / P R C - 11 7 F :

a. Program the retransmit radios with the net preset information. Squelch should be used in each of the
retrans radios to prevent a falsing condition where one radio is locked in transmit condition.
b. Press [CLRl to go to the normal mode operational display.

c. For Black Digital operation, press [OPTl key on KDU, select RETRANS, and press [ENTJ. Select
ON; press IENT| to configure radio for retransmit operation. For Red Analog operation, skip this step.
d. Turn radio switch to lOFFJ.

A CAUTION
Power off both radios before connecting or disconnecting the
retransmit cable to J3 DATA connector ports. Equipment
damage could result if cable is connected to powered on
radios.

3 - 11 3
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N t^ARRIS'
e . A t t a c h t h e r e t r a n s m i t c a b l e t o t h e J 3 D ATA c o n n e c t o r o n b o t h r a d i o s .

f. Turn on each AN/PRC-117F to [PTJ position for black digital operation. Turn on each AN/PRC-117F
to [CT] position for red analog operation.

g. Begin retransmission operations. If one radio locks into continuous transmit, check for presence of
interfering signals on the receiving radio and/or check squelch settings to determine if squelch falsing
condition exists.

3.23.4.7 Leaving Retransmission Operation

To leave retransmission operation, perform the following procedure:

a. For black distal operation, press [OPT| key on KDU, select RETRANS and OFF. For red analog
operation, skip this step.
b. Turn each radio to the [OFF] position.

Disconnect retransmission cable at both radios before turning either radio back on.

3.23.5 TIME Option, Setting SINCGARS GTOD, HAVEQUICK, and HPW TOD

The following operations require MODE 3 fills. Time synchronization is an important part of the frequency hopping
modes and the HPW (LOS and SATCOM) mode.

SINCGARS

Master Station Operation - Requires operator to set as close to ZULU UTC time as possible and
use proper Julian date. Refer to Table B-1 and Table B-2 for Julian date conversion calendars.
Member Station Operation - If operator can set time to either ± four seconds for a hot start
capability or to ± one minute for LNE. Cueing and/or cold start procedures must be used if
accurate time cannot be obtained. Cueing is needed to contact the master station. Refer to
Paragraph 3.12.9.1 for procedure on how to cue a SINCGARS radio net.
Cold Starts - All member stations need to give basic ZULU Julian initialization of their GTOD
prior to receiving a cold start from the net master by setting their clocks to within 100 days of the
net master GTOD.

H AV E Q U I C K
All stations are required to get accurate ZULU UTC time either from GPS sync or transmitted
from another station who has received it from a GPS source. HAVEQUICK time can be started in
an emergency and sent to other stations, but normal operation is always from accurate ZULU
time.

HAVEQUICK I requires that the date remain at 00/00/80 along with the correct ZULU UTC time.
HAVEQUICK II requires the complete ZULU UTC time and date. Other radios are placed in
HAVEQUICK II mode by use of certain digits in HQ Net Number and/or MWOD segments. This
may be true for these systems, but what should be realized is that the AN/PRC-117F would always
be programmed to the same HAVEQUICK data elements as the other systems.
HPW (LOS and SATCOM)

Requires a ±30 second time sync between stations for proper operation. Use ZULU time as many
SATCOM operations are conducted across time zones.

3 - 11 4
h^ARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to enter the GTOD for SINCGARS FH:

a. Select a SINCGARS FH net and press [OPT].

b. Select TIME, select GTOD, and press [ENTj.

c. Enter the GTOD in Julian days, ZULU hours, minutes and seconds format from an accurate time source.
Use the left or right arrow keys to move between the time units. Set minute figure to next upcoming
whole minute value, press [ENTj when time source reaches this point. Refer to Table B-1 and Table B-2
to determine Julian date calendar.

See Figure 3-43. Perform the following procedure to enter TOD for HAVEQUICK:

NOTE

Manual entry of HAVEQUICK TOD should only be used on

nets operating in emergency mode with one station designated
as the Master station. The Master station then transmits TOD
to all other net members. TOD synchronization error tolerance
cannot be overcome by having individual stations manually
entering TOD in HAVEQUICK operation. Reception of TOD
from an accurate source or GPS are the best methods.

a. Press [OPT].

b. Seject TIME, seject HAVEQUICK, and press [ENT].

c. Use USER_ENTRY to enter the DATE and TOD. Enter ZULU calendar date and time from an accurate
time source for HAVEQUICK II with MWODs. For HAVEQUICK I using a SWOD, set date as
00/00/80 but still use ZULU hours, minutes, and seconds. Use left or right arrow keys to move between
the time units. Set minute figure to next upcoming whole minute value, and press ]ENT] when time
source reaches this point.

NOTE

To enable SWOD HAVEQUICK I operating mode, select

00/00/80 as the TOD date. For MWOD HAVEQUICK II, use
the current ZULU date and time.

d. If a AN/PSN-11 PLGR GPS is connected and operating with a 2D or 3D position fix, select
GPS_SYNC to allow the HAVEQUICK TOD to automatically sync with the GPS. At HAVEQUICK
MODE, select HQ-II or HQ-I as needed. An NMEA commercial GPS can also be used, but is not as
accurate as a PLGR. The interface cable used to connect the PLGR is (Harris part number 12005-0730).
The PLGR must use Standard (STD) interface with the Precise Positioning Service (PPS) setting on
UTC. A Time Figure of Merit (TFOM) of four or less is required on the PLGR. If the GPS and cable
connection to J2 is not properly setup, the display shows GPS NOT RESPONDING Check the GPS
device and cable if this occurs.

See Figure 3-44. Perform the following procedure to enter TOD for HPW operation by manual user entry or a GPS
device on LOS and SATCOM nets. Refer to Paragraph 3.8.3.2 to set TOD for HPW SATCOM operation by over-
the-air synchronization from another radio.

3 - 11 5
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

NOTE

HPW operation requires ail stations to be within one minute of

each other. Use ZULU time with accuracy of ± 30 seconds.

a. Press IGFTJ.

Select TIME, select HPW, and press [ENTj. The user has two options: user entry or GPS. A PLGR,
DAGR, or an NMEA-0183 compatible receiver (Garmin® or equivalent) can be used if GPS is selected.
Under USER ENTRY, enter ZULU calendar date and time from an accurate time source such as a
PLGR. Time counts can also be received over voice net presets. Use a left or right arrow key to move
between the time units. Set minute figure to next upcoming whole minute value, and press [ENT] when
time source reaches this point. The second count commences after [ENTJ is pressed. All stations in a
HPW network must be using a TOD within one minute of each other to operate properly. Indications of
inaccurate HPW TOD are varying probe addresses of five digits that do not exist in the HPW network
database. Check HPW TOD and HPW TSK if this problem exists.

NOTE

If GPS SYNC is selected, ERROR INVALID PARAMETER

will be displayed.

USER ENTRY

TIME OF D AY SYNCHRONIZING HQ TOD:

00 / 00 / 00 00 : 00 ; 00

DO MM YY HH MM SS

SYNCHRONIZING HQ TOD W/
00/00/80 -SWOD MODE
GPS:
Z U L U D AT E - M W O D M O D E CHECK GPS /VND
04 / 07 / 01 12 : 34 : 56
INTERFACE CABLE

ERROR: GPS NOT

RESPONDING

Figure 3-43. HAVEQUICK FN TOD Menu Tree

3 - 11 6
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

U S E R E N T RY

H P W / N W K T I M E O F D AY

00/00/0000 00:00:00

DD/MM/YYYY HHMMSS

Figure 3-44. HPW TOD Menu Tree for User Entry

3.23.6 GPS Option

Externally interfaced AN/PSN-11 PLGR or Rockwell-Collins PLGR-Il displays information on the AN/PRC-117F
according to how the GPS unit has been initially programmed to display data. Refer to Table 3-24 for PLGR GPS
programming options that can be displayed on the AN/PRC-117F, For more information on PLGR programming
and other GPS specific items, refer to the PLGR technical manual.

The AN/TPRC-117F also supports commercially available NMEA-compatible GPS receivers for functions such as
Situational Awareness, that are not associated with SINCGARS or HAVEQUICK time synchronization. The
requirements are NMEA-0183 version 2.0 or higher.
To view GPS heading, velocity, altitude, and positional data press [OPTJ, select GPS, then press (ENTl. Press
[CIRCULAR ARROW] key to toggle back and forth between the navigation page display and the position
coordinate display page.

NOTE

GPS data is available only when a PLGR (or NMEA GPS) is

connected to the front panel J2 GPS connector. PLGR should
be set to STD interface.

To operate with a NMEA-0183 commercial GPS receiver, connect the GPS receiver to the manufacturer-supplied
"PC" interface cable. Attach the DB-9 connector of the PC cable to Harris adapter cable (12005-0740-A006), and
attach the other end of the Harris cable to J2 GPS connector.

3 - 11 7
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

Table 3-24. AN/PSN-11 PLGR Programming Options

AN/PSN-11 PLGR Programmed Option AN/PRC-117F Compatible Setting
Operating Mode CONT
F I X
AV G
T I M E O N LY
S TA N D B Y
2D TRAINING
3D TRAINING
REHEARSAL TRAINING

Coordinate Systems MGRS-Old

MGRS-New
UTM/UPS
L L / D M
LL/DMS
B N G
I T M G
NZMG
RT90
USERl
USER2
USER3

Metric
English
Nautical

Heading North Reference Magnetic

True
Grid

3 . 2 3 . 7 S AV E O p t i o n

The SAVE option allows the operator to save temporary overrides. The AN/PRC-117F also has a save capability to
clone net presets.

NOTE

Saving temporarily overridden parameters without

coordinating those changes with the other net members can
compromise AN/PRC-117F performance. Ensure all net
members are advised of all permanent parameter changes.

Parameters are programmed and permanently stored in the AN/PRC-117F until they are zeroized. Temporary
overrides are modified programmed nets from an operational display.

Use the SAVE option when the AUTO SAVE function is set to OFF. For AUTO SAVE programming instructions
under CFIG programming menu, refer to Paragraph 4.10.1.

If the AUTO SAVE function is set to OFF, the operator can temporarily override programmed nets. The
AN/PRC-117F places a * to the left of the net name on the LCD, indicating the net parameter was temporarily
changed. These changes are valid until the operator selects another net, losing the temporary changes. To save the

3 - 11 8
/ M y

I^ARiUS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
OPERATION

changes, the operator must press [OPT|, select SAVE, and press [ENT]. Then select ENTER NEW NAME, enter
a name, and press IENT|. Select YES to save the net.

If the AUTO SAVE function is set to ON, all parameter changes are saved automatically.

3.23.7.1 Lockout (LOUT) Option (SINCGARS FH Only)

LOUT only appears in the [OPT] menu while operating on a SINCGARS FH net preset. LOUT is used to determine
what SINCGARS FH lockout sets has been loaded into the AN/PRC-117F. All SINCGARS AN/PRC-117Fs need
to have the identical lockout sets loaded or no SINCGARS FH communication is possible.

3.24 KDU OPTION SPECIFIC KEYS

The following paragraphs describe the option specific keys on the KDU.

3.24.1 Light [LT] Key Operation

See Figure 3-45. Perform the following procedure to configure the KDU backlighting intensity and contrast:

a. Press the [LTl key.

b. For momentary backlighting, select MOMENTARY. For continuous backlighting, select ON. To
disable backlighting, select OFF. Continuous setting of ON is only available when R/T is installed in
optional VAU or the CONST. LIGHT OPTION is set to ON in CFIG > GENERAL programming.
c. Use the left/right arrow keys to adjust the backlight intensity and contrast; press [ENTj.

3.24.2 SQ Operation

See Figure 3-45. To configure squelch, press the [SQl key.

The AN/PRC-117F provides digital, analog tone, and analog noise squelch. Digital squelch requires the digital
waveform (data or cipher text) to open squelch. Analog tone squelch requires a 150 Hz tone to open squelch. Tone
Squelch is the main type of squelch used in 30.00000 MHz - 89.99999 MHz band VHF-LOW band FM for most
types of military radios. Tone squelch in the 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz band for FM and especially AM is
not common with other types of radios. Do not use tone squelch above 90 MHz unless absolutely sure all radios in
any planned radio net support tone operation.

Analog squelch can be set to TONE, NOISE, CTCSS, CDCSS, or OFF in FM mode. In AM mode, squelch can
be set to OFF, TONE, or NOISE with twenty levels of squelch sensitivity of LOW, LOW-MED, MED, MED-
HIGH, and HIGH (in the squelch bar). Squelch menus are not available when in SINCGARS FH and KG-84
operations. Analog Squelch menus are not available in SATCOM, although Digital Squelch is an option in CT mode.

CTCSS and CDCSS are available in PT mode. CTCSS supports transmit and receive of EIA standard squelch tone
frequencies to allow interoperability with equipment that uses CTCSS. CDCSS supports transmit and receive of EIA
standard digital codes to allow interoperability with other equipment that uses CDCSS.

3.24.3 Zeroize Operation

Black Data consisting of AN/PRC-117F programming parameters and other mode programming can be quickly
zeroized by pressing the [ZERO] key on the KDU. See Figure 3-45. Zeroizing is used to remove all net presets and
return the AN/PRC-117F to default settings. The [ZERO] key does not zeroize COMSEC and FH TRANSEC fills.
[Z-ALL] and [CLR] on the function switch are used to zeroize this data.

3 - 11 9
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

Perform the following procedure to zeroize the AN/PRC-117F of BLACK DATA:

a. Press [ZERO].

b. Select YES; press [ENTj.

c. Place the radio function switch to [OFF].

D I G I TA L S Q U E L C H ZEROIZE BLACK
LIGHT O P E R AT I O N D ATA ? ( 7 )

M O M E N TA R Y
O
t N(5)
OFF

L ANALOG SQUELCH TYPE

• SQUELCH LEVEL (7)

LIGHT INTENSITY (3)

CONTRAST (4)
CTCSS

C
tTCSSTXTONE
LJIEFER TO TABLE 4-2

RX SQUELCH TYPE
. C T C S S

k CTCSS RX TONE
I. REFER TO TABLE 4-2
. NOISE

. OFF

CDCSS

C
tDCSSTXTONE
L R E F E R TO TA B L E 4 - 3

RX SQUELCH TYPE

OtFF N O I S E

C D C S S

L CDCSS RX TONE
P R E F E R T O TA B L E 4 - 3

(1) ON SELECTION ONLY IF ENABLED IN CFIG PROGRAMMING OR RT IS INSTALLED [N VAU.

(2) DEFAULT VALUE.
(3) INTENSITY MAX: 13
(4) CONTRAST MAX: 7
( 5 ) D I G I TA L S Q U E L C H O N LY AVA I L A B L E I N C T M O D E .
(6) AM ONLY, ADJUSTABLE FROM LOW, LOW-MED, MED, MED-HIGH, HIGH.
( 7 ) B L A C K D ATA I S N E T P R E S E T S A N D O T H E R M O D E P R O G R A M M I N G C O N F I G U R AT I O N S . D O E S
NOT ZEROIZE COMSEC OR FH TRANSEC.

Figure 3-45. AN/PRC-117F KDU Button Menu Trees

3-120
i fi R R t S ' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

3.25 COMPUTER TELEPHONY INTERFACE (CTI) OPERATION

The AN/PRC-117F capabilities of the CTI feature are described in Paragraph 1.7.17. This paragraph describes the
main operation of CTI for the AN/PRC-117F.

3 . 2 5 . 1 A N / P R C - 11 7 F I n t e r f a c e w i t h R F - 6 0 1 0

The following components enable the AN/PRC-117F to interface with the RF-6010 Tactical Network Access Hub
and provide the CTI feature.

3.25.1.1 Hardware Connection

A hardware cable, part number (10513-0710-AXXX), connects the AN/PRC-117F with the RF-6010, where xxx
indicates length (e.g., A006 would represent a six-foot cable).

3.25.1.2 T ransport Protocol

Communication over the hardware connection between the AN/PRC-117F and the RF-6010 is handled by PPP,
which is used to carry the IP traffic between the devices. The PPP connection for the AN/PRC-117F is made at the
J3 port of the radio. This means the data passing in and out of J3 is decrypted (i.e.. Red data). Red data passes through
the Voice/Data Processor (VDP) of the AN/PRC-117F and may be sent encrypted over the air as Black data. The
radio will use the existing voice protocols when transmitting over the air.

3.25.2 To n e s

The AN/PRC-117F only receives telephony transmissions; initiation of telephony operations is not featured. Since
the radio cannot initiate telephone calls, it will not emit any tones. When receiving a call, the radio will not produce
any tones. When performing telephony, the basestation radio connected to the RF-6010 will not operate with a
handset. If the PTT on the handset is activated during telephony reception, the radio will produce a KEYLINE
IGNORED message and produce a tone in the handset. This will only happen if there is a call in progress.

3.25.3 CTI Operation Screens

This paragraph displays CTI operation screens and menus for the AN/PRC-117F. Figure 3-46 displays the main
KDU screen when the CTI feature exists for a SINCGARS waveform.

Figure 3-47 displays the main KDU screen when the AN/PRC-117F operates in a SATCOM net.

NOTE

CTI will function over a regular SATCOM net. It is not

designed to run over an STC net.

Figure 3-48 displays the CTI call termination menu. Use this menu when a CTI call is initiated while the AN/PRC-
117F is operating with a SINCGARS waveform and the user desires to terminate the call and return to the
SINCGARS screen.

R B AT M N O R M VINSON TEK09CT R B AT M ^ NORM VINSON TEK09 CT R B AT W NORM VINSON TEK09 CT

0 4 - N E T 0 4 lldl0:23:45 HOPOBC lldl0:23:45 HOPOMH

D AT OFF SNCGRS MEMBR F123 54.92500 OFF F123 02 9.6N
ADF D ATA HOP TYPE HOPSET CUE FREQUENCY LNE

0109-4100-0170

Figure 3-46. SINCGARS Net CTI Display

3-121
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
O P E R AT I O N

R BAlM NORM VINSON TEK09CT _NORM VINSON TEK09 CT R BAtW NORM VINSON TEK09CT
04-NET04 OM~ R:263.72500 S ATi * _ 25K CVSD MZ
S AT D AT OFF 181 OFF T: 2 9 7 , 3 2 5 0 0 16.0 123 F S K
TYPE ADF D ATA MODE SQL
132 NONE 16.0

0109^100-0180

Figure 3-47. SATCOM Net CTI Display

T E L E P H O N Y
CONNECTED

- T E R M I N AT E T E L C A L L

• T E L C A L L T E R M I N AT E D

F-0109^4100-0200

Figure 3-48. CTI Call Termination

3 . 2 6 O P E R AT I O N O F M U T E D ATA A U D I O I N T H E H A N D S E T

There may be radio data transmissions that are mistakenly treated as voice transmissions, so the receiving radio
sends them to the handset through the ADF port, resulting in noise heard in the handset. This feature is disabled by
default in the AN/PRC-117F radio and must be programmatically enabled on both the transmitting and receiving
radios in order for the receiving radio to prevent data transmissions from reaching the handset. The capability of the
mute data audio transmissions feature is described in Paragraph 1.7.18.

Refer to Paragraph 4.18 for programmatically enabling this feature in the radio. The transmitting radio determines
if the feature is enabled. If it is, all data packet transmissions in VINSON modes only are started with a marker
indicating the feature is enabled. In the receiving radio, the VDP checks the beginning of a data stream for the marker
indicating this feature is enabled. If the marker exists, then the data is not considered as voice data, so the data packet
is routed to the data port without passing the packet to the handset. Voice transmissions will not have the marker and
will be routed to the handset.

3-122
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 4

PROGRAMMING

4.1 A N / P R C - 11 7 F PROGRAMMING

Programming prepares the AN/PRC-117F for operation. The following paragraphs provide programming
information for the AN/PRC-117F. Refer to Paragraph 4.2 for description of the menu trees.

4.2 MENU TREES

Menu trees are provided throughout this chapter to guide the user through all Keypad Display Unit (KDU)
programming functions. The following points are menu tree guidelines.
• Items shown as circles are KDU keys (for example: PGM in the circle represents the Program key).
• Pressing the [PGM] key gives access to the programming menus. The AN/PRC-117F will not transmit or
receive while in programming mode.
• Items connected by a horizontal line represent menu fields in a menu display. NORM, DAMA, SCAN,
PORTS, SECUR, CFIQ and IW fields appear on the menu display after pressing the [PGM] key.
• Vertical lines beneath a menu field represent a menu branch.
• Under ACTIVATE IN LIST?, YES and NO represent a scroll field, where the up/down arrow keys scroll
between the scroll field choices. See Figure 4-1.
Net Presets 00 - 09 are set default to YES and are normally accessible with the [PRE ±] key.
Net Presets 10 - 99 are set default to NO and are not immediately displayed by the [PRE ±] key.
• Under RECEIVE FREQUENCY, ###.##### MHz represents a numeric field, where only numbers can be
entered into the field from the KDU keys. See Figure 4-1.
• Under CHANGE NAME, XXXXXXXXXXXX represents a 12 character alphanumeric field, where both
letters and numbers can be entered into the field. See Figure 4-1.

4 . 3 N E T P R O G R A M M I N G C O N S I D E R AT I O N S

AN/PRC-117Fs must be programmed before communicating in a AN/PRC-117F net. Net presets have the following
characteristics:

• Up to 100 normal mode net presets and 10 Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) net presets can be
programmed into each AN/PRC-117F.
• DAMA mode additionally has 10 port configuration presets and 50 destination presets to facilitate ease of
operation in DAMA mode without having to re-enter programming mode to make configuration changes.
• Scan mode operation requires normal mode net presets of Line Of Sight (LOS) fixed frequency and/or
Dedicated Satellite Communications (SATCOM). Frequency Hopping (FH) Electronic Counter-Counter
Measure (ECCM) Hopping and DAMA modes presets are not compatible with Scan operations and cannot
be used.

• Integrated Waveform (I W) provides increased ease of use and operation when compared to DAMA. IW can
use VINSON, Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT), or KG-84 encryption. IW can
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING §f\RRtS'
support up to 20 voice circuits (2400 bps). Up to 10IW Net presets and 10IW port configurations can be
programmed within the IW mode of operation.
• Satellite Communications Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) Capability (STC) mode allows either a
5 kHz or a 25 kHz SATCOM channel to be divided into as many as 11 voice circuits or into a high speed
data circuit and three voice circuits.

• Net preset names consist of up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

NOTE

Spaces are not allowed. The default name for each normal
mode net is NET##, where ## represents a number from 0 to
99. Default DAMA net name is DAMANET#, where #
represents a number 0 to 9. Net preset names cannot be
repeated.
• Each net preset may be enabled or disabled during programming at the ACTIVATE IN LIST? prompt. This
allows for net presets to be programmed and set aside for later use and not seen. Nets not activated can be
called up by entering the net preset number for them.
- Net Presets 00 - 09 - ACTIVATE IN LIST? are by default set to YES
- Net Presets 10 - 99 - ACTIVATE IN LIST? are by default set to NO

• In program mode, pressing [PRE ±] returns the AN/PRC-117F to the last operational mode display used.
Press [PRE ±[ to quickly leave programming mode. The [PRE ±] key is not active in DAMA mode.
• Net presets for asynchronous data operation requires data port configuration programming to properly
interface an asynchronous data device.
• Net presets for voice operation ignore programming parameters such as SYNC/ASYNC selection and data
rate. The AN/PRC-117F uses these programming parameters when it senses data operation by connection
of a data cable to J1 ADF or J3 DATA connector.

• Programming net presets should be accomplished in the sequential order of Frequency, Communications
Security (COMSEC), DataA^oice, and Squelch. Many configuration choices are dependent upon previously
selected settings. Menu tree diagrams represent full function of each mode with actual programming
dependent on frequency and COMSEC selection.

4.4 C O M M U N I C AT [ O N S CHECK

After the AN/PRC-117F is programmed, a communications check with other radios should be performed on each
net preset programmed. This ensures the AN/PRC-117F is programmed correctly and is ready for operation.

4.5 NORM PROGRAMMING SELECTION

Perform the following procedure to program normal mode nets:

a. Press [PGM].

b. Select NORM.

c. Select NET. The KDU displays SELECT NET TO MODIFY. Use the number keys on the KDU to
select desired net preset number. Press [ENT[ to continue.
if\RRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

If ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to YES, that net preset is accessible using the [PRE ±1 key in normal operation. If
ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to NO, then the net preset can only be called up by entering the net preset channel
number. Net presets can be programmed and held in reserve until needed.

The type of net preset must be selected before the net preset can be programmed. There are four types of normal
mode nets:

• LOS Fixed Frequency Net Preset - Paragraph 4.5.1

• Dedicated Ultra High Frequency (UHF) SATCOM Net Preset - Paragraph 4.5.2

MIL-STD-188-181B, 25 kHz channels, and 5 kHz channels

High Performance Waveform (HPW) SATCOM data

• STC - Paragraph 4.5.3
• Frequency Hopping Net Presets (two types):

- Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) - Paragraph 4.5.4

- HAVEQUICK - Paragraph 4.5.5

4.5.1 LOS Fixed Frequency Net Preset Programming Procedures

A LOS fixed frequency net allows the user to receive and transmit voice and/or data using fixed receive and transmit
frequencies and modulation aspects of Amplitude Modulation (AM), Frequency Modulation (FM), Trellis Code
Modulation (TCM), and HPW. See Figure 4-1 and refer to Table 4-1.

Perform the following procedure to program a LOS fixed frequency net:

a. Scroll the NET TYPE to LOS FIX FREQUENCY.

b. Press [ENTJ. The LOS FIXED FREQUENCY programming menu now appears.

Table 4-1 shows all the possible types of LOS fixed frequency net presets that can be programmed into the
AN/PRC-117F. This table shows the interrelationship between frequency range, modulation, and COMSEC mode.
Data transmission rates are achieved by selecting the appropriate COMSEC mode and modulation which supports
the desired rate.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-1. LOS FIX Frequency Capabilities

Band of MOD COMSEC D ATA Data Rates
Operation VOICE SYNC orASYNC

VHF-LOW FM P T- N O N E VOICE Not Applicable (N/A)

30.0000-89.99999 MHz ™ P T- N O N E D A T A Enhanced Data Mode

(EDM)&SINCGARS
1 - 10 Watts Data Mode (SDM), 12
or 16 kbps
TCM P T- N O N E D A T A 48 kbps or 64 kbps
F M VINSON VOICE 16 kbps
F M VINSON D A T A 16 kbps, SDM
F M K Y V- 5 D ATA 16 kbps, EDM
F M KG-84C DATA only 16 kbps
T C M KG-84C DATA only 48 kbps or 64 kbps
H P W KG-84C DATA only 1600,2666, 8000,
16 k, 21.3 k, 42.6 k,
64 kbps, AUTO
VHF-HIGH AM/FM P T- N O N E VOICE nZ^
90.0 — 224.99999 MHz
"fm P T- N O N E D A T A 12 kbps or 16 kbps,
1 - 20 Watts SDM
FM / TCM "am PT-NONE D A T A 16 kbps
1-10 Watts T C M P T- N O N E D A T A 48 kbps or 64 kbps
A M
A M / F M VINSON VOICE 16 kbps
"am VINSON D A T A 16 kbps
"fm VINSON D A T A 16 kbps, SDM
FM only FASCINATOR VOICE only 12 kbps
A M / F M KG-84C DATA only 16 kbps
T C M KG-84C DATA only 48 kbps or 64 kbps
H P W KG-84C DATA only 1600,2666, 8000,
(Redundant 16 k, 21.3 k, 42.6 k,
Mode 1) 64 kbps, AUTO
 AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-1. LOS FIX Frequency Capabilities (Continued)

Band of MOD COMSEC DATA Data Rates
Operation VOICE SYNCorASYNC

U H F AM/FM P T- N O N E VOICE
225 — 511.99999 MHz
P T- N O N E D A T A 12 kbps or 16 kbps,
1 - 20 Watts SDM

FM/TCM PT-NONE D A T A 16 kbps

225 — 399.99999 MHz
P T- N O N E D A T A 48 kbps or 64 kbps
1 -10 Watts
A M / F M V I N S O N V O I C E 16 kbps
AM/FM /TCM
400 — 511.99999 MHz V I N S O N D A T A 16 kbps
(AM average power VINSON D A T A 16 kbps, SDM
maximum is 4 Watts)
FM only FA S C I N AT O R VOICE only 12 kbps
AM/FM KG-84C DATA only 16 kbps
KG-84C DATA only 48 kbps or 64 kbps
KG-84C DATA only 1600,2666, 8000,
(Redundant 16 k, 21.3 k, 42.6 k,
Mode 1) 64 kbps, AUTO

Enter the RECEIVE and TRANSMIT frequencies. The transmit frequency will default to the entered receive
frequency. The AN/PRC-117F does not accept frequencies outside its operational range of 30.00000 MHz to
511.99999 MHz. Half-duplex operation using separate transmit and receive frequencies is allowed, but antenna
selection becomes a planning factor in widely separated selections. For radio frequency emission control, and
silence radio operations with transmit capability inhibited, RECEIVE ONLY would be set to YES; otherwise select
NO for full transmit and receive capability.
4.5.1.2 COMSEC

Select the desired COMSEC type for secure operations, then select the desired Traffic Encryption Key (TEK) (01 -
25). The Cipher Text (CT) position of the function switch enables the programmed COMSEC mode. VINSON and
TEK 01 is selected by default if the AN/PRC-117F is placed in CT mode without programming a COMSEC mode
or selecting a TEK number. For ANALOG DATA, select YES when using devices that contain their own modem
to transmit and receive data as an analog signal. Choose NO for normal voice and digitally interfaced data operation.
The following are the available COMSEC choices:
• NONE - Select to configure the AN/PRC-117F for Plain Text (PT) data. NONE must also be used in
conjunction with the function switch set to IPT|. Use NONE for deliberate PT data operations and/or
interface of external COMSEC devices and other line signals not requiring encryption. Any time the
function switch is returned to [CT], the COMSEC setting NONE is overridden and VINSON and TEK 01
is used.

• VINSON - Use for voice or data across the entire operational range of 30.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz.
This is the usual selection for most CT LOS fixed frequency voice nets. Data rate for VINSON is 16 kbps
only. Compatible with other embedded or standalone KY-57 VINSON or KY-99A devices. VINSON is
required when using SDM from 30.000 MHz to 87.985 MHz.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING I^ARRtS'
KYV-5 - Required for EDM data rates. Allows VINSON compatible voice (30.000 MHz to 87.985 MHz
only).
FASCINATOR - Use for voice operation in Frequency Modulation (FM) mode over the range 90.00000
MHz - 511.99999 MHz. It uses COMSEC TEKs loaded to VINSON COMSEC key storage positions. This
does not appear in the COMSEC mode menu if frequency is set to a value less than 90 MHz. When using
FASCINATOR encryption, the operational display will still show VINSON, but the Continuously Variable
Slope Delta (CVSD) rate will be 12.0 kbps. Used normally to communicate with other radios that use FED-
STD-1023 type of encryption.
KG-84 - Use for data operation with FM, TCM, HPW, or HPW Internet Protocol (IP) across the range of
30.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz, and AM in the range of 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz. KG-84 is
also used with either Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction (MELP) voice when 2400 bps Dedicated
SATCOM is selected, or with STC operations. After selecting this mode, program the KG-84 TEK number
(01 - 25) to be used. Set the transmission synchronization mode to match the operating characteristics of the
distant end KG-84. Synchronization mismatches will result in no communications. After selection of KG-84
in COMSEC menu, squelch programming will not be available for the net preset. These are the four (4)
KG-84 transmission synchronization modes:
REDUNDANT MODE 1 (HPW sync mode)
- REDUNDANT* MODE 2

- NON-REDUNDANT MODE 3

- NON-REDUNDANT* MODE 4

ANDVT - Not available in LOS fixed frequency mode and is only used in dedicated and DAMA UHF
SATCOM, operating at a maximum data rate of2400 bps.

4-6
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

. RECEIVE L. CRYPTO MODE I VOICE MODE (12) D I G I TA L S Q U E L C H ( 2 ) L.. CHANGE

FREQUENCY N A M E
30 MHz -
5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 MHz
tCLEAR
M O D E M
tON O F
O F F
F

-tx power level

, M O D U L AT I O N
LANALOG
. T R A N S M I T _ 1 watt
SQUELCH TYPE
F R E Q U E N C Y L. ENCRYPTION KEY AM(1) _ 1 . 3 W AT T S
30 MHz - ^
^ AM CHANNEL SPACING .TONE
T
tEK01•25 _ 1 . 6 W AT T S
5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 MHz 1. 25 kHz
ANALOG D ATA . NOISE _ 2 WAT T S
12.5 kHz
I RECEIVE O N LY 7 . CTCSS . 2 . 5 WAT T S
tNO Y E S
Li 8.33 kHz
_ 3 WAT T S

C
tTCSSTXTONE
> FM
■.REFER TO TABLE 4-2
. F M D E V I AT I O N . 4 WAT T S
RX SQUELCH TYPE
. ENCRYPTION KEY L 5, 6.5, or 8 kHz L CTCSS
. 5 WATTS (8)
LTEK 01 - 25 . SYNC /ASYNC S E L E C Tr L CTCSS RX TONE _ 6.3 WATTS (8)
. S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N L ASYNC or SYNC P R E F E R TO TA B L E 4 - 2 _ 8 WAT T S ( 8 )
L REDUNDANT - BAUD RATE (6) ■ NOISE _ 1 0 WAT T S ( 8 )
(MODE 1) L OFF . 1 3 WAT T S ( 3 )
Lhpwtransec TCM (13)
KEY ID 01 -25 . F M D E V I AT I O N
C D C S S _ 16 WATTS (3)
Im 5, 6.5, or 8 kHz _ 20 WATTS (3)

C
tTCSSTXTONE
. REDUNDANr
(MODE 2) I - R E F E R TO TA B L E 4 - 3
. SYNC /ASYNC SELECT
. NON-REDUNDANT b ASYNC or SYNC FIX SQUELCH TYPE i VA U POWER LEVEL

(MODE 3) . BAUD R AT E - 5 WAT T S

.
L NON-REDUNDANT*
(MODE 4)
KPWTRANSEC KEY ID
1. 48.0K or 64.0 K
I HPW (6) EOF N O I S E

C D C S S

t CDCSS RX TONE
-
8

13
WAT T S

WAT T S

LTSKOI -25 B
t AUDRATE(6)
ENABLE TCPIP Prefer to table 4-3
- 20 WAT T S

- 32 WATTS (9)
FA S C I N AT O R ( 1 ) L NO - 5 0 WAT T S ( 9 )
- ENCRYPTION KEY

LTEK 01 - 25 WIRELESS IP ADDRESS

L. XXXJOO(.XXX.XXX
. ANALOG D ATA
SUBNET MASK

tNO
Y E S
I. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
G AT E WAY ADDRESS
K Y V- 5 ( 5 ) . ( 6 ) L. xxx.xxxxxx.xxx
. NCR KEY
' DATAA/OICE (6)
L.TEKOI-05
_ A N A L O G D ATA
AUTO ON D ATA PORT

tNO
Y E S
AUTO ON ADF PORT (6)
L MODULATION
L MODULATION
. AM
. AM |_ AM CHANNEL SPACING
^ AM CHANNEL SPACING
( 1 ) O N LY AVA I L A B L E F O R V H F - H I G H F M A N D U H F F M .

( 2 ) O N LY F U N C T I O N S I N C O M S E C M O D E ( C T O R T D ) .
E25kHz 12.5 kHz E25kHz 12.5
8.33
kHz
kHz

( 3 ) F R O M 9 0 M H z T O 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z F M O N LY.
8.33 kHz L SYNC / ASYNC SELECT
(4) DATA: 12K. 16K ON FM, 48K, 64K ON TCM. SYNC / ASYNC SELECT L ASYNC or SYNC
( 5 ) AVA I L A B L E F O R V H F - L O F M . L ASYNC or SYNC
( 6 ) I T E M AVA I L A B I L I T Y D E P E N D E N T O N FA C T O R S S U C H A S
FM D E V I AT I O N
F R E Q U E N C Y, M O D U L AT I O N , A N D C R Y P T O .
FM D E V I AT I O N L 5, 6.5, or 8 kHz
(7) REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.17.2. L 5, 6.5, or 8 kHz
(8) 90-419.99999 MHz AM AND 30-511.99999 MHz FM.
(9) 30-511.99999 MHz FM ONLY.
(10) LOS HPW POWER: SAME POWER AS 90-511.99999 MHz FM.
( 11 ) U N AVA I L A B L E I F H P W M O D U L AT I O N C H O S E N .
(12) ONLY AVAILABLE IN COMSEC NONE.
(13) ONLY AVAILABLE IN COMSEC NONE AND KG-84.

Figure 4-1. LOS Fixed Frequency Programming Menu Tree

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING tfiRRtS'
4.5.1.3 D ATA A ^ O C

If a VINSON COMSEC mode is selected, a LOS frequency net can be configured for either AUTO ON ADF PORT
(J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL connector) or AUTO ON DATA PORT (J3 DATA/RETRANSMIT Connector),
depending on which front panel connector is used to attach the data cable. If data and voice operations are expected
on a given LOS fixed frequency net preset, it is advised to make separate net presets for voice and data operation,
and then switch between them with the [PRE ±) button. If the Voice Priority Over Data (VPOD) option is to be used,
AUTO ON DATA PORT must be selected and then both voice and data can be operated on the same preset.

Select the desired modulation type of AM or FM. AM is not available in Very High Frequency (VHF)-Low band of
30.00000 MHz to 89.99999 MHz. AM modulation can be selected from three channel bandwiihs: the normal 25
kHz, narrow bandwidth 8.33 kHz, or 12.5 kHz.

If FM modulation is selected, the operator is prompted to select a FM DEVIATION of either 5.0 kHz, 6.5 kHz, or
8.0 kHz.

NOTE

8.0 kHz is the default FM deviation setting, and is adequate in

most cases. Some handheld transceivers using 12.5 kHz
channel spacing and/or narrow bandwidth would require
using 5.0 kHz deviation to operate within channel limits. Use
6.5 kHz deviation for compatibility in nets using 5 kHz and 8
kHz deviation, or with communications to SINCGARS SC.

NOTE

VHF-HI Band operation (118 -150 MHz) in AM for Air

Traffic Control (ATC) operations in Europe or for aircraft
home-based from the European union may use 8.33 kHz
bandwidth and channel spacing. If frequency assignments do
not end in 00,25, 50 or 75, the assignments are channels and
not actual frequencies. Consult ATC authorities on exact
frequencies to be used in these situations. Additionally, in
these situations, the channel spacing should be set to 8.33 kHz
under the DATAA/bice menu.

If Fascinator COMSEC was previously selected, VOICE will be the only selection along with FM modulation and
FM D E V I AT I O N .

If KG-84 COMSEC is selected, the only programming choice will be for DATA operation with modulation options
of either AM, FM, or optional TCM or HPW. AM or FM allows for data operation at 12 kbps or 16 kbps rate plus
the EDM data rates. TCM selection provides high speed LOS data operation at 48 kbps or 64 kbps rates. HPW allows
operation at the various rates listed in Table 4-1.
If NONE is selected under COMSEC, a LOS fixed frequency net can only be configured for the combination setting
of DATA OR VOICE with operation determined by the type of cable connected to J1 ADF or J3 DATA.

If data operation is intended, select SYNC or ASYNC for the data port configuration. Refer to Paragraph 4.8.2. By
selecting SYNC, the AN/PRC-117F defaults to DATA INVERT= NONE, TX DATA CLOCK SOURCE =
INTERNAL ON CTS, USE CTS-IN = NO. If data device is asynchronous, data port configuration will need to
match the specific parameters of the device. This type of device must also have its data rate match the port speed.
i^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.1.4 SQ

The AN/PRC-117F provides digital, analog tone, and analog noise squelch. In addition. Continuous Tone Coded
Squelch System (CTCSS), and Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System (CDCSS), are available squelch choices
in FM channels only.

4.5.1.4.1 Digital Squelch

See Figure 4-1. Digital squelch only functions in Cipher Text (CT) or Time Delay (TD) voice modes. Digital squelch
can be set to either ON or OFF. Using digital squelch inhibits the PT override feature of VINSON and
FASCINATOR COMSEC. Therefore, digital squelch must be turned OFF to handle traffic from stations operating
in PT that have a lost or incorrect COMSEC TEK.

4.5.1.4.2 Analog Squelch

If digital squelch is set to OFF, then analog squelch programming options become available. The user can select
OFF, TONE or NOISE from the analog squelch menu. AM channels have the additional parameter for analog
squelch level of LOW, LOW-MED, MED, MED-HIGH, or HIGH (squelch bar) when using noise squelch. Use
the lowest setting possible to ensure weak signals do not become blocked. The 150 Hz tone used in standard tone
squelch is not transmitted if CTCSS is ON.

NOTE

TONE squelch is a normal selection for most FM LOS radios

operating below 90 MHz. Use of TONE squelch above 90
MHz in radio nets with radios other than AN/PRC-117F is not
recommended. Use NOISE squelch if questions of squelch
compatibility exist. All radios on a net must be set for the same
squelch type to ensure successful communications.

4.5.1.4.3 CTCSS Squelch

Transmit and receive support for CTCSS can be programmed by selecting CTCSS in the ANALOG SQUELCH
TYPE menu. The Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) designation for the CTCSS tone is then selected from the
menu. Refer to Table 4-2 for the selectable designator codes and their associated squelch tone frequencies. CTCSS
allows for user entry of a 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz tone. The AN/PRC-117F will transmit/receive the selected tone as
part of its overall signal to break the squelch in equipment using CTCSS type squelch. CTCSS tones may be used
in either PT or CT mode. The 150 Hz tone used in standard tone squelch is not transmitted if CTCSS is ON.

4.5.1.4.4 CDCSS Squelch

Transmit and receive support for CDCSS can be programmed by selecting CDCSS in the ANALOG SQUELCH
TYPE menu. The EIA code for the squelch data is then selected from the menu. The radio will transmit/receive the
programmed code as part of its overall signal to break squelch in other equipment using CDCSS type squelch.
CDCSS tones may be used in either PT or CT mode. The 150 Hz tone used in standard tone squelch is not transmitted
if CDCSS is ON. Refer to Table 4-3 for the list of CDCSS codes used with the AN/PRC-117F.

Different squelch frequencies or codes can be used for transmit and receive, if desired. However, the squelch type
must be the same for all stations in a net to be able to communicate.

4-9
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-2. CTCSS Frequencies and Designator Codes

FREQ (Hz) Designator FREQ (Hz)
EIA Motorola

Ta b l e 4 - 3 . C D C S S C o d e s

EIA Codes
IfiRRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.1.5 PWR

The AN/PRC-117F's transmit power can be set in 1 dBm increments for the following:

• 10 watts Peak Envelope Power (PEP) and average FM from 30.00000 MHz - 89.99999 MHz
• 20 watts PEP and average FM from 90 MHz to 399.99999 MHz
• 20 watts PEP and 10 watts average AM from 90 MHz to 399.99999 MHz
• 10 watts PEP and average FM from 400.00000 MHz - 511.99999 MHz FM
• 10 watts PEP and 4 watts average AM from 400.00000 MHz - 511.99999 MHz FM
• 20 watts PEP in UHF Tactical Satellite (TACSAT)

When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU), the available power levels are increased
due to the addition of a 50 watt power amplifier operation. FM and TCM output power levels range from 5 to 50
watts in 2 dB increments, allowing output settings of 5, 8,13,20,32, or 50 watts. In AM modes, output power is 5
to 20 watts in 2 dB increments of 5, 8,13, or 20 watts.

When programming transmit power, consider that lower output power levels will extend battery life and provide
more signal security.

4.5.1.6 NAME

Enter any name up to 12 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Otherwise, the NET## will default to the number
shown. Net names cannot be repeated in the AN/PRC-117F.

4.5.2 Dedicated UHF SATCOM Net Programming Procedures

To program a SATCOM net preset, follow normal mode programming procedures, except scroll NET TYPE to
SATCOM and then press lENTf The following information must be programmed for a SATCOM net. Table 4-4
and Table 4-5 show the MIL-STD-188-181B available data option codes for SATCOM capability of the
AN/PRC-117F. Refer to Figure 4-2 for menu structure. Forward Error Correction (FEC) is used for some Option
Codes, as shown in the tables.

Select the SATCOM channel to be used and then the applicable COMSEC, in that order, as programming menus are
arranged to only give proper selection when programming in this order.

Table 4-4. 5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options

Modulation Applicable VOICE or

Remarks
Option Code I/O Data Rate COMSEC DATA
Ty p e
KG-84 D A T A 181A/B
Shaped Bipolar
Phase Shift Key
ing (SBPSK)
SBPSK KG-84 D A T A / V O I C E 181A/B
5 kHz Voice

SBPSK A N D V T D ATA / V O I C E 18IA1B

5 kHz Voice

SBPSK A N D V T D A T A

SBPSK A N D V T D A T A

SBPSK A N D V T D A T A
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-4. 5 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options (Continued)

Modulation Applicable VOICE or
Option Code I/O Data Rate Remarks
Ty p e COMSEC DATA

Continuous KG-84 D A T A
Phase Modula
tion (CPM)
KG-84 D A T A FECON

KG-84 D A T A PEC ON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A FECON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A FECON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A

Table 4-5. 25 kHz MIL-STD-188-181B Data Rate Options

Modulation Applicable VOICE or

Option Code I/O Data Rate Remarks
Ty p e COMSEC DATA

KG-84 D A T A 181A/B

KG-84 D A T A

VINSON 181A/B
25 kHz Voice

Fascinator

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A FECON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D ATA FEC ON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A FEC ON

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A

KG-84 D A T A

4.5.2.1 FREQ

Enter the appropriate FREQ CODE of 001 to 249 or 999. Refer to Table B-3 for manual frequency selections, enter
999, then enter non-standard receive and transmit frequencies. The selectable operational range is 225.00000 MHz
to 511.99999 MHz. Freq codes 248 and 249 must be programmed under Configuration (CFIG) programming; refer
to Paragraph 4.10. When using a standard frequency code, any modification to the shown transmit and receive

4-12
ifiRRtS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

frequencies will cause the FREQ CODE to change to 999 to denote that they were modified from their original
values. Refer to Table B-3 for a listing of the UHF SATCOM channel frequency codes.

4.5.2.2 COMSEC

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.2 for COMSEC characteristics. VINSON and FASCINATOR will not be available in 5 kHz
SATCOM channels. Additionally, ANDVT COMSEC becomes available for use in SATCOM channels.

If SATCOM channel is to be operated using HPW modulation, select KG-84 encryption with the transmission
synchronization of REDUNDANT MODE 1 along with the proper COMSEC TEK (01 - 25) and HPW
TRANSEC KEY ID (01 - 25). This must be done first in HPW SATCOM net preset programming. Refer to
Paragraph 3.8.3 for more information on HPW SATCOM operation.

LPC or MELP voice operation can be selected with ANDVT operation. MELP offers superior performance over
LPC with regard to voice recognition and weak-signal audio quality. If there is a possibility that MELP radios will
be communicating with LPC radios, the user can enable the AUTOSWITCH feature, which will detect the received
voice coding and then automatically adjust transmit voice coding to the proper setting. If AUTOSWITCH is
disabled, the received voice coding will still be detected properly, but the radio will transmit with the coding that
was set.

The [CT] position of the function switch enables the programmed COMSEC mode. Selection of NONE for
COMSEC mode and placing the AN/PRC-117F function switch to [PT] defaults the AN/PRC-117F to data-only
operation while active on a SATCOM net preset.

4.5.2.3 D ATA A ^ O C

The AN/PRC-117F can be programmed for either standard 18IB SATCOM mode or optional HPW. The following
paragraphs describe each choice.

4.5.2.3.1 Normal 181B SATCOM DATAA/OC Programming

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.3. SATCOM Modulation of MS181 is selected for normal MIL-STD-188-181B dedicated
5 kHz or 25 kHz SATCOM operation.

If SATCOM DATA operation is intended, menu choices will vary as to the COMSEC mode selected and type of
SATCOM channel (either 25 kHz or 5 kHz). Select the applicable data OPTION by entry of the desired code shown
in Table 4-4 and Table 4-5. Select the desired COMSEC mode first, since the menus that follow are dependent upon
the COMSEC mode. All required selections of SYNC are for use with synchronous data devices, and selections of
ASYNC are for operation with asynchronous data devices. Selection of AS YNC will require data port programming
to properly interface the data device to the AN/PRC-117F data connector. Refer to Paragraph 3.15 for more
information on AN/PRC-117F data operation. Codes marked as 181A in Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 are provided for
backwards compatibility with other SATCOM systems that have only MIL-STD 188-181A capability.
VINSON COMSEC operates at 16 kbps. ANDVT COMSEC has baud rate selections for data operation at 300,600,
1200, and 2400 bps, however, ANDVT voice operates at 2400 bps regardless of the programmed data value. KG-84
COMSEC provides the highest data rate selections for data-only operation. Selection of any data option for KG-84
using CPM allows receive-side autobauding, since the CPM data option is similar for either a 25 kHz or 5 kHz
sender. If only voice operation is intended, data programming elements can be disregarded.

A SATCOM Downlink Monitor on the lower right comer of the main display will show BSY to alert the operator
when the channel is in use.

4-13
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING §fARRgS'
4.5.2.3.2 High Performance Waveform (HPW) DATAA/OC Programming

If HPW operation is intended, COMSEC mode of KG-84 must have been previously selected along with KG-84
transmission synchronization setting of REDUNDANT MODE 1. If this has been accomplished, selection of HPW
modulation is possible. Select the type of satellite being used, either UFO or 25 kHz WB, for 25 kHz channels.
Higher data rates of up to 56 kbps can be achieved by using a UHF Follow On (UFO) 25 kHz channel. 5 kHz HPW
does not have dual data rate menu selection, and operates the same by selecting 5 kHz NB, regardless of the satellite
type. The 5 kHz selection only appears when using HPW from a 5 kHz channel of 129 or above. All stations in an
HPW network must use the same HPW baud rate in order to communicate. Once the SATCOM net preset for HPW
is selected for operation, only Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) connection is possible, using Harris Wireless
Messaging Terminal (WMT) RF-6760W-HPW at J3 DATA connector, or if using IP. Refer to Paragraph 3.8.3 for
more details on HPW setup and operation. For HPW IP, refer to Paragraph 4.15.

4.5.2.4 SQ

SQUELCH programming for SATCOM is Digital Squelch ON or OFF. Squelch programming is unavailable in
either KG-84 or HPW modes. Digital Squelch ON prevents PT Override from occurring.

4.5.2.5 PWR

POWER programming for SATCOM is 2 - 20 Watts for all channels in 1 dBm increments. Refer to
Paragraph 4.5.1.5. When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the VAU, increased power levels become available with
the 50 watt power amplifier allowing power levels from 5 to 50 watts in 2 dB increments, allowing output settings
of 5,8,13, 20,32, or 50 watts.

4.5.2.6 NAME

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.6. Names are 12-digit alphanumeric with no spaces allowed and cannot be repeated.

4-14
, FREQUENCY , CRYPTO MODE , VOICE MODE (3) D I G I TA L S Q U E L C H TX POWER LEVEL • C H A N G E
C O D E - NONE NET NAME
001-249,999 . VINSON (1)
tMELP
■ - LL PP C
C

D A T A / V O I C E
, RECEIVE L ENCRYPTION KEY
F R E Q U E N C Y
« AUTO ON ADF PORT (2)
. TRANSMIT
FREQUENCY
tTEK 01 -25
ANALOG D ATA
^ SYNC/ASYNC SELECT

. R E C E I V E O N LY tNO Y E S tSYNCA S Y N C
I— AUTO ON DATAPORT(2)
. ANDVT

tNO Y E S 1. ENCRYPTION KEY L SYNC/ASYNC SELECT

L TEK 01 - 25
- TRAINING FRAMES tSYNC A S Y N C

l_ 6,9,12,15,20,30,60 ■S Y N C / A S Y N C S E L E C T ( 3 )

^ ANDVT PREAMBLE
tSYNCA S Y N C

tSTANDARD
E N H A N C E D
- OPTION CODE (3), (4)
AUTO SWITCH VA U POWER LEVEL
LREFER TO TABLE 4-4 AND TABLE 4-5
tDS
I ABLED
E N A B L E D
- D ATA ( 4 )

L MODULATION (14)
K G - 8 4
32 WAT T S

hENCRYPTO
INKEY
t TEK 01 - 25
, B A U D R AT E
50 WAT T S
■N E T TELEPHONY
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N

. R ED
DUUNNDI A N T ( M O D E 1 )
U HPWTRANSEC
HPV KEY ID
E
WB U F O

ENABLE
B

TCPIP
ID (9)

L ii 0 1 - 2 5 N O

. REDUNI
^ WIRELESS IP ADDR

ER
ED
UN
DA
NTM
(O
DE2
)
. NNOONN -- R
ON-RE
REEDUNDANT (MODE 3)
. NNON-REDUNDANT (MODE 4) »
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX (7)
SUBNET MASK

X X X . X X X . X X X . X X X
> HPWTRANSEC KEY ID (15) — G AT E WAY A D D R (5)
181 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
FA S C I N ATO R ( I )
Li ENCRYPTION KEY , SYNC / ASYNC SELECT

tTEK 01 -25
ANALOG D ATA tSYNC
A S Y N C

■ OPTION CODE

L REFER TO TABLE 4-4 AND TABLE 4-5

N O T E S :

(1) UNAVAILABLE IF A NARROWBAND SATCOM CHANNEL (5 kHz) IS SELECTED.

(2) IF VINSON COMSEC IS SELECTED.
(3) IF ANDVT COMSEC IS SELECTED.
(4) IF KG-84 COMSEC IS SELECTED.
( 5 ) U S E 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 F O R N O G A T E W A Y.

( 6 ) M E N U I T E M AVA I L A B I L I T Y I S D E P E N D E N T O N FA C T O R S S U C H A S F R E Q U E N C Y A N D C O M S E C C H O I C E S .
(7) USE 000.000.000.000 FOR PPP PORT IP BRIDGING.
(8) REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.17.2.
( 9 ) O N LY AVA I L A B L E I N C T M O D E .
( 1 0 ) S AT C O M H P W P O W E R I S T H E S A M E A S S AT C O M P O W E R .
(11) SQUELCH MENU UNAVAILABLE IN HPW MODULATION.
(12) U N AVA I L A B L E I P FA S C I N AT O R C O M S E C S E L E C T E D .
(13) U N AVA I L A B L E I F C O M S E C N O N E O R K G - 8 4 S E L E C T E D .
(14) A L S O AVA I L A B L E I F C O M S E C N O N E S E L E C T E D .
(15) O N LY I N D ATA M O D E .

Figure 4-2. SATCOM Programming Menu Tree

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.3 STC Programming Procedures

Refer to Paragraph 3.11 for an operational description of STC. Refer to Table 3-19 for definitions of STC
terminology. The user should create a STC configuration preset for each frame and circuit combination. The
programming procedure can be repeated for each desired STC net preset. Ensure that KG-84 crypto keys have been
loaded.

See Figure 4-3 for the STC menu tree. Perform the following procedure to create a STC net preset for the AN/PRC-
11 7 F :

a. Press [FGM] > NORM > NET.

b. For ACTIVATE in LIST?, select YES.

c. For the NET TYPE, select STC.

d. Select FRAME/SLOT from the menu; press [ENT].

e. Select the desired FRAME TYPE; press [ENTJ. Refer to Paragraph 3.11.1.2 for the frame
configuration options available.
f. Select the SLOT TYPE; press [ENT].

g. Select the FREQ from the menu; press [ENTJ.

1. To enter a manual frequency, select a FREQUENCY CODE from 1 - 249 or 999.

2. Ifyou selected 999 for the FREQUENCY CODE:

(a). Enter the RECEIVE FREQUENCY and press (ENT|.

(b). Enter the TRANSMIT FREQUENCY and press (ENT).

3. If you did not select 999 for the FREQUENCY CODE, press [ENT] through the menus.
4 . F o r R E C E I V E O N LY s e l e c t Y E S o r N O .

h. Select COMSEC from the menu; press [ENT].

1. Select a TEK position from 1 - 25; press [ENT].

2. Select the KG-84 mode:

• REDUNDANT MODE 1

• REDUNDANT* MODE 2

• NON-REDUNDANT MODE 3

• NON-REDUNDANT* MODE 4

i. Select TX POWER LEVEL from the menu; press [ENTj.

j. Select the numeric power level; press [ENTj.

k. Select VAU POWER LEVEL from the menu; press [ENT].

1. Select the numeric power level; press [ENT].

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

m. Select NAME from the menu; press lENTJ.

n. Enter the net name; press [ENT|.

A C T I VAT E IN LIST ?

NET TYPE
S T C

FRAME/SLOT

, C RY P TO M O D E i TX POWER LEVEL
FRAME TYPE FREQUENCY CHANGE
C O D E L KG-84 2 WAT T S N A M E
1 : 7 V O I C E N O D ATA ENCRYPTION KEY
C H A N N E L

2 : 5 V O I C E N O T D ATA N U M B E R
(001-249, 999)
L TEK01-25
3 : 3 V O I C E 1 6 K D ATA KG-84 SYNC
RECEIVE
4 : 4 V O I C E 2 . 4 K D ATA ■ V0ICE4 (Frames 1,2.4,5) _ REDUNDANT
FREQUENCY 5 WAT T S
5 : 11 V O I C E N O D ATA • VOICE5 (Frames 1,2,5) (MODE 1)
( 2 2 5 . 0 0 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 —— 6.3 WAT T S
— REDUNDANT
6:3 VOICE NO D ATA > VOICES (Frames 1,5) MHZ)
8 WAT T S
7 : 2 V O I C E 2 . 4 K D ATA > VOICE 7 (Frames 1,5) TRANSMIT (MODE 2)
— NON-REDUNDANT — 10 WAT T S
FREQUENCY
8:2 VOICE NO D ATA ■ VOICE 8 (Frame 5)
( 2 2 5 . 0 0 0 - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 (MODE 3) ^13 WAT T S
9 : 11 V O I C E 2 . 4 K D ATA ' V0ICE9 (Frame 5) MHZ) . NON-REDUNDANT 16 WAT T S
• VOICE10 (Frame 5) (MODE 4)
RECEIVE O N LY 20 WAT T S
. VOICE 11 (Frame 5)
VA U POWER LEVEL
DATA (Frames 3,4)
- 5 WAT T S

- 8 WAT T S

- 13 WAT T S

- 20 WAT T S

(1) REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.17.2.

F-0109-4100-0210

Figure 4-3. STC Programming Menu Tree

4.5.4 Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) Programming Selection

SINCGARS frequency hopping waveform operates in the VHF-Low frequency range (30.000 MHz - 87.975 MHz).
See Figure 4-4 and refer to Table 4-6. SINCGARS net presets require SINCGARS FH Fill data loaded for
programming and operation. If COMSEC operation is desired, VINSON COMSEC fill data will also need to be
loaded.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-6. SINCGARS Capabilities

FH Type Modulation COMSEC I DATAorVOC D ATA R a t e

SINCGARS FH FH FM VINSON VOICE 16 kbps and EDM

30.000 - 87.975 MHz hopping data rates
1 - 10 Watts
FH FM VINSON D ATA 16 kbps and EDM
hopping data rates

FH FM K KYYVV- -5 5 VOICE EDM data rates

hopping
FHFM KKYYVV- 5- 5 D DAATT A EDM data rates
hopping
SINCGARS SC Refer to Table 4-1, LOS Fixed Frequency

4.5.4.1 Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) General Programming Procedures

Perform the following procedure to program GENERAL defaults for all SINCGARS net presets:

a. Press iPGM], select NORM, and press lENTJ.

b. Use the right/left arrow keys to select GENERAL, then scroll to select HOPPING TYPE of
SINCGARS and press [ENT].

NOTE

GENERAL programming data establishes common defaults

that apply to any net programmed for frequency hopping
operation. NET programming data applies only to a specific
net and does not affect any other net.

Perform the following procedure to set up SINCGARS GENERAL configuration parameters:

a. Select CONFIG; press [ENT].

b. At ACTIVATE CUE FREQUENCY, use the up/down arrow keys to select YES; press [ENTj.

c. Enter frequency to be used for the cue frequency. Press |ENT]. The activation and setting of the cue
frequency allows for stations operating on the cue frequency in PT with 150 Hz tone squelch capability
to signal other SINCGARS FH stations using the same cue frequency. The cue frequency range is
30.000 MHz to 87.975 MHz. Refer to Signal Operation Instructions (SOI) database for daily cue
frequency assignments.
d. Use the up/down arrow keys to set the AN/PRC-117F to be either a MASTER or MEMBER, and press
[ENT]. A SINCGARS net can only have one MASTER station and all other radios in net must be set
to MEMBER. Additionally only MASTER stations have the ability to perform transmit COLDSTART
Electronic Remote Fill (ERF) and update ERF.

4.5.4.1.1 To Copy a Hopset

When it is desired to change the SINCGARS Net Identification (ID), a copy function is performed which allows the
operator to change the number of the Net ID of the hopset while copying the hopset to the same or different storage
compartment. Copying to the same compartments is useful for changing the net ID of the compartment or to use a
net ID that can be used in other SINCGARS net presets.

4-18
hfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

See Figure 4-4. Perform the following procedure to program the copy function:

a. Select HOPSET_COPY.
b. Select the HOPSET compartment to copy using the up/down arrow keys on the KDU. Only the
compartments loaded with HOPSETS will be selectable, then press [ENT].
c. Select the new HOPSET location of 01 - 25; press [ENT].
d. At COPY AS HOPSET ID display, press [ENT] to keep same Net ID or change as required (FOOO -
F999) to give the hopset a new Net ID. Press [ENT].
e. Use the copied hopset to program another SINCGARS net preset with the new Net ID or perform a net
update ERF to net members.
4.5.4.2 Frequency Hopping (SINCGARS) NET Preset Programming Procedures

Perform the following procedure to program a specific SINCGARS FH net preset:

a. Press [PGM].

b. Select NORM; press [ENT].

c. Select NET; press [ENT].
d. At SELECT NET TO MODIFY, select net number (00 - 99), and press [ENT].
e. If ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to YES, that net is accessible using the [PRE ±] key in normal
operation. If ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to NO, then the net can only be called up by entering the net
preset number by screen override. Nets can be programmed and held in reserve until needed.
f. After activating the selected net, scroll the NET TYPE, via the up/down key to FREQUENCY
H O P P I N G

g. Use the up/down key to scroll to the HOPPING TYPE to SINCGARS; press [ENT].
The following information must be programmed for a SINCGARS net preset. These parameters only apply to a net
preset being programmed. See Figure 4-4.
4.5.4.2.1 HOPSET

Perform the following procedure to select the HOPSET to be used:

a. Select the required HOPSET COMPARTMENT by entering the HOPSET number of 01 - 25. Only
the loaded HOPSET compartments will display the associated Net ID. HOPSET compartments not
loaded with fill data, will be displayed as empty.

b. Set the LATE NET ENTRY to ON. Late Net Entry (LNE) is only needed by member stations when
time sync with the net Global Time-of-Day (GTOD) is off by more than ± four seconds, but not more
than ± one minute. Master stations do not use the LNE function. Turn to ON when it is anticipated that
HOTSTART technique will be used as the method of entering the already established FH net. LNE
increases the synchronizing window to ± 1 minute.

4.5.4.2.2 COMSEC

Choose NONE for PT operation with external interfaced encryption devices. PT operations should only be used in
agreement with local directives. The function switch must also be placed in [PTJ. SINCGARS operates normally
using VINSON KY-57 secure voice. Select VINSON and the TEK ## of 01 - 25 for CT operations. For ANALOG
DATA, select YES when using devices that contain their own modem to transmit and receive data as an analog
signal. Choose NO for normal voice and digitally interfaced data operation. The [CT] position of the function switch
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

enables the programmed VINSON COMSEC mode. VINSON must be selected for the SDM data rates to appear.
KYV-5 must be selected for EDM data rates to appear.

SELECT NET
TO MODIFY

REFER TO HPW IP REFER TO CTl

HOPPING TYPE
ACTIVATE
"SINCGARS"
IN UST ?

HOPSET COPY

NET TYPE ACTIVATE

' HOPSET
"FREQUENCY HOPPING" CUE FREQ
COMPARTMENT ^
COPY FROM: ## ▼
— NO
HOPPING TYPE 1 HOPSET
— YES
"SINCGARS" C O M PA R T M E N T
COPY TO: ##(01-25) Lcue frequency
##.##### MHz
COPY AS HOPSET ID
30 MHz-87.975 MHz
F# ##(000 - 999)

SINCGARS
RADIO TYPE

, HOPSET i TX POWER ■ CHANGE

DATAA^OICE
C O M PA R T M E N T
L E V E L N A M E
AUTO ON ADF PORT 12 DIGITS

A U T O O N D ATA P O R T
L AT E NET ENCRYPTION 2.5 WAT T S

E N T RY K E Y 3 WAT T S
SYNC/ASYNC SELECT
^TEK 01 -25 4 WAT T S

ANALOG D ATA 5 WAT T S

•NET TELEPHONY
6.3 WAT T S
ID (20 DIGITS)
RECEIVE O N LY

600,1200,1200N, 2400,
ENCRYPTION
2400N, 4800,4800N, 9600N,
K E Y
1 6 K T F, P C K T, R S - 2 3 2 VA U P O W E R L E V E L
^TEK 01 -25 - 5 WAT T S

- 8 WAT T S
ANALOG D ATA
- 13 WAT T S

- 20 WAT T S

- 32 WAT T S

- 50 WAT T S

NOTES:

1. EDM RATE (SHOWN WITH N) ARE ONLY SELECTABLE

W H E N K Y V- 5 I S U S E D . S D M I S O N LY AVA I L A B L E W H E N
VINSON IS SELECTED.

2 . R E F E R TO PA R A G R A P H 4 . 1 7 . 2 .

Figure 4-4. SINCGARS Programming Menu Tree

/fARRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.4.2.3 D ATA ^ O C

The SINCGARS FH nets can be programmed for DATAA/OICE operations with either AUTO ON ADF PORT or
AUTO ON DATA PORT ASYNC or SYNC data operation is available only at 16 kbps data rate. If data operation
is intended, select the port that the data device will be connected to.

4.5.4.2.4 PWR

AN/PRC-117F maximum power is 10 watts, adjustable in 1 dBm increments in SINCGARS operation. Refer to
Paragraph 4.5.1.5.

When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the VAU, the power levels that become available increase with the 50 watt
power amplifier operation. Output power levels with the VAU are from 5 to 50 watts in 2 dB increments, allowing
output settings of 5, 8,13, 20,32, or 50 watts.

4.5.4.2.5 NAME

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.6. Net Names can be any 12-digit alphanumeric, with no spaces allowed, and cannot be
repeated.

4.5.4.2.6 CFG

The Net Telephony ID can be any 20-digit alphanumeric characters, except spaces are not allowed. This ID is used
in Computer Telephony Interface (CTI) by a RF-60I0 to identify a specific telephony capable net.

4.5.4.3 SINCGARS FH Global Time of Day Programming

If programming for operation as the Master station of a SINCGARS net, the GTOD must be set manually from an
accurate ZULU Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) time source, such as a Global Positioning System (GPS) or
Portable Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR) device. The last two digits of the Julian date must be determined and
used for the day component of the time entry. This is required by current joint SINCGARS FH doctrine. Refer to
Table B-1 and Table B-2 for SINCGARS FH Julian Date Calendar. It is the SINCGARS Master station
responsibility to maintain accurate ZULU net GTOD. The GTOD can only be reset after FH operation if the master
station coordinates and performs a Coldstart ERF with all net members.

4.5.5 Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) Programming Selection

HAVEQUICK operates in the 225.000 MHz - 399.975 MHz frequency band using FH for antijam capability. Refer
to Table 4-7. Configure GENERAL programming for global HAVEQUICK FH data and NET programming
information for specific net preset parameters. All HAVEQUICK operations require Time of Day (TOD) and Word
of Day (WOD). HAVEQUICK frequencies are selected from preset frequency tables indexed by a random generator.
HAVEQUICK net numbers determine which frequency table to index. The generator is seeded with the current
WOD and TOD.

After the HAVEQUICK programming is complete, the TOD is initialized using the CALL operation to receive TOD
sync, user manual entry, or by automatic GPS sync with a PLGR interface. Since the TOD is not maintained between
power ups, the TOD must be re-initialized when the AN/PRC-117F is powered up. There is only one TOD used for
all HAVEQUICK net presets in the AN/PRC-117F.

TOD and WOD information must be programmed for all HAVEQUICK operations. These parameters apply to all
HAVEQUICK net presets in the AN/PRC-117F. HAVEQUICK TOD Sync can be sent or received from the
HAVEQUICK Preset. The AN/PRC 117F can send or receive HAVEQUICK TOD INIT from any LOS preset
programmed for any frequency between 90.000 and 511.999 MHz set for AM modulation.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING ifARRiS'
Table 4-7. HAVEQUICK Capabilities
FH Type Modulation COMSEC D ATA V O C D ATA R a t e s

H AV E Q U I C K FH AM VINSON VOICE 16 kbps

225 - 399.975 MHz
FH AM VINSON D A T A 16 kbps
1 - 10 Watts

4.5.5.1 Frequency Hopping (HAVEQUICK) General Programming Procedures

See Figure 4-5, Sheet 2. Perform the following procedure to program the GENERAL defaults for a HAVEQUICK
net preset;

a. Press [PGM].

b. Select NORM; press |ENT].

c. Select GENERAL, scroll to HAVEQUICK, and press [ENT|.

4.5.5.1.1 Single Word of Day (SWOD) Programming

SWOD data programmed to the AN/PRC-117F is used by HAVEQUICK net presets when the TOD has 00/00/80
set as the date portion of the TOD. Hours, minutes, and seconds still uses ZULU UTC. Using 00/00/80 is a
AN/PRC-117F specific setting for HAVEQUICK I. If date is not set to 00/00/80, the AN/PRC-117F display in
HAVEQUICK will indicate Error (ERR) as it will be looking for a loaded Multiple Word of Day (MWOD) instead
of a SWOD.

Perform the following procedure to program a SWOD manually:

a. Select SWOD, then DEFINE.

b. At the SEGMENT 01 (20) prompt, enter the six-digit WOD segment; press [ENT|.
c. Repeat Step b to input SEGMENT 02 (19) through SEGMENT 06 (15). The SWOD is now entered.
Perform the following procedure to erase a SWOD:

a. To erase a SWOD, select ERASE.

b. Using the up/down arrow keys, select YES. The SWOD is now erased. Loading a new SWOD will
overwrite the previously loaded SWOD, Additionally, when the AN/PRC-117F is placed in [Z-ALL]
or [CLR], the SWOD data is erased.

Perform the following procedure to check status of a SWOD:

a. Select STATUS. If a valid SWOD is loaded, the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) displays ***SWOD
FILLED***. If there is no SWOD loaded, the LCD displays ***SWOD EMPTY***.

4.5.5.1.2 MWOD Programming

Load MWOD data is used on the day of month it is designated for. TOD is set to the complete current ZULU UTC
value to enable the AN/PRC-117F to select the required MWOD. Radios with un-initialized TOD will indicate ERR
for TOD and missing MWOD. If MWOD has been programmed and status has been checked to be good, MWOD
error will clear when TOD allows the AN/PRC-117F to find loaded MWOD FH data. Additionally getting the TOD
from GPS will be of ZULU UTC and may or may not match current local calendar day of the month.

4-22
hfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Perform the following procedure to program a MWOD manually:

a. Select MWOD, then DEFINE.

b. Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the appropriate MWOD Day of Month (i.e. press 0,1, lENTJ for
the first of the month, 0, 2, [ENTJ for the second of the month, etc.). The HAVEQUICK MWOD day
of the month comes from segment 14,- 3XX.OOO, where XX indicates the Day of Month (DOM).

c. For each day, program SEGMENT 01 (20) through SEGMENT 06 (15) in the same manner as
programming a SWOD (Paragraph 4.5.5.1.1).
NOTE

Improper entry of HAVEQUICK data will result in no FH

communications. Ensure data is entered correctly before
pressing [ENT].
d. To load the next MWOD, press DEFINE, select the appropriate day, and repeat Step b and Step c.

NOTE

The MWOD Day of Month is linked (through the TOD entry)

to the actual day of the month. In electronic MWOD fills, the
date is encoded in the data to link it to the actual day of the
month.

MWODs no longer needed should be erased when the AN/PRC-117F automatically rolls into the next day of the
month.

Perform the following procedure to erase one or more MWODs:

a. Select ERASE.

b. Use the alphanumeric keypad to select the MWOD Day of Month you wish to erase; press [ENT|.
c. Use the up/down arrow keys to select YES. The selected WOD is erased.
Perform the following procedure to erase all WODs:

a. Select 00 as the MWOD Day of Month; press [ENTl.

b. Select YES. All MWODs are erased.

Perform the following procedure to check status of the electronically filled or manually entered MWODs:
a . S e l e c t S TAT U S .

b. Use the numeric keypad to select the MWOD Day of Month you wish to check. Press [ENT]. If there
is a valid WOD for that day of the month, the LCD displays ***MWOD FILLED***. If there is no
valid WOD for that day of the month, the screen displays ***MWOD EMPTY***.

4.5.5.1.3 FMT_FREQUENCIES

Frequency Management Training (FMT) frequencies are used to perform HAVEQUICK radio training using a set
of 16 authorized training frequencies. All 16 UHF-AM frequencies in the range of 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz
must be utilized in this mode. Selected frequencies must be exact 25 kHz channel spacing assignments. A SWOD
or MWOD, the required FMT HAVEQUICK Net Number, and proper accurate TOD must also be programmed.
 (mm,

A N / P R C - 11 7 F ( V ) ( C ) HARRIS^
PROGRAMMING

FMT Frequencies should be entered in the same order in every FMT HAVEQUICK radio (including AN/PRC-117F)
and remain in memory even if it is cleared. It is still recommended that the FMT frequencies be reloaded if the users
are unsure who reprogrammed or when the frequencies were last programmed. Only a full communications check
with another HAVEQUICK radio in FMT mode can ascertain if programming is valid.
F F

Perform the following procedure to program FMT_FREQS: F F

a . Select FMT_FREQS, then DEFINE. F F

F F
b. At the SEGMENT 01 (20) prompt, enter the six-digit FMT frequency and press the [ENT| key to
accept frequency. F F

c . Repeat Step b to input FREQUENCY 02 (19) through FREQUENCY 16 (05). All 16 frequencies must
be entered. The FMT frequency set is now entered.

Perform the following procedure to erase all the FMT_FREQS:

a . Select ERASE.

b. At ARE YOU SURE?, select YES to erase FMT_FREQS; press [ENTJ.

F F
Perform the following procedure to check status of the FMT_FREQS:
F F

a. Select STATUS and press [ENTJ.

F F

4.5.5.2 H AV E Q U I C K G U A R D R e c e i v e r

The HAVEQUICK MODE has a programmable GUARD receiver to allow a FH user to monitor one (I) UHF-AM
LOS frequency in the band of 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz. From any HAVEQUICK net preset, the operator F F
will be able to monitor the guard frequency for distress calls and/or any stations requiring a TOD sync.
F F

Perform the following to program the HAVEQUICK Guard receiver:

F F

a . Enter programming mode by pressing the [PGM| key on the KDU. F F

b. Select NORM programming and press [ENTj. ^

F F
c . Select GENERAL programming; press (ENTJ.
F F
d. At HOPPING TYPE select HAVEQUICK; press [ENT].

e . Select GRDRCVR and press [ENTJ.

F F

f. At prompt ACTIVATE GUARD RCVR?, select YES; press [ENTJ. F F

g- At GUARD FREQUENCY prompt, enter the desired guard frequency. The valid range for the guard F F

receiver is 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz. Press [ENTJ when the correct frequency is entered. F F

h. At SQUELCH LEVEL, use the left/right arrows on the KDU to set the squelch to the desired level. Do F F

not use too high of a squelch level if communications with weak stations are anticipated.
F F

i. Press [CLR] as many times as necessary to return to normal mode.

F F

1 ^ .

F F

F F

4-24
F F
I^ARRtS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.5.3 HAVEQUiCK NET Preset Programming Procedures

Perform the following procedure to program a HAVEQUICK net preset:

a. Press [PGMl.

b. Select NORM; press [ENTJ.

c. Select NET; press [ENT|.

d. At SELECT NET TO MODIFY, select net preset number (00 - 99), and press (ENT).

e. If ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to YES, that net preset is accessible using the [PRE ± J keys in normal
operation. If ACTIVATE IN LIST? is set to NO, then the net preset can only be called up by entering
the net preset number. Net presets can be programmed and held in reserve until needed.
f. After activating the selected net, scroll the NET TYPE to FREQUENCY HOPPING

g. Scroll the HOPPING TYPE to HAVEQUICK; press [ENTJ.

The following information must be programmed for a HAVEQUICK net preset. These parameters only apply to the
net preset being programmed. See Figure 4-5, Sheet 1.

4.5.5.3.1 HQ_NET NUM

Enter the required HAVEQUICK net number. Designated HAVEQUICK Net numbers are required to place the
AN/PRC-117F in the appropriate HAVEQUICK operating mode such as FMT or HAVEQUICK II. AN/PRC-117F
time requirements for operation in HAVEQUICK mode I or II (outlined in Paragraph 3.23.5) still apply. If Training
MWODs are to be used, FMT Mode Net Numbers must be used, or else radio will report "MWOD not found".

4.5.5.3.2 COMSEC

Select NONE for PT operation to configure AN/PRC-117F for data operation when function switch is set to [PT|.
Select VINSON and the TEK## of 01 - 25 for CT operation. [CT] position of the function switch enables the
programmed COMSEC mode. For ANALOG DATA, select YES when using devices that contain their own modem
to transmit and receive data as an analog signal. Choose NO for normal voice and or digitally interfaced data
operation.

4.5.5.3.3 D ATA / V O C

The HAVEQUICK frequency hopping nets can be programmed for DATAA^OICE operations with either AUTO
ON ADF PORT or AUTO ON DATA PORT. ASYNC or SYNC data operation is available only at 16 kbps data
rate. Select the port where the data device will be connected.

4.5.5.3.4 SQ

SQUELCH programming for HAVEQUICK: Voice = Digital Squelch ON or OFF if using CT VOICE. If Digital
Squelch is off. Analog Squelch Type can be set to OFF or NOISE, with Analog Squelch Levels LOW, LOW-MED,
MED, MED-HIGH, or HIGH. Placing the radio in PT will disable the Digital Squelch. Refer to Paragraph 3.24.2.
Do not use Digital Squelch if the PT override function of VINSON COMSEC is desired.
4.5.5.3.5 PWR

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.5. HAVEQUICK manpack operation has a maximum of 10 watts output power.

When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the VAU, the power levels that become available increase. In AM modes,
output power is 5 to 20 watts in 2 dB increments of 5, 8, 13, or 20 watts.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.5.5.3.6 NAME

Refer to Paragraph 4.5.1.6. Names are 12-digit alphanumeric with no spaces allowed and cannot be repeated.

SELECT NET
TO MODIFY

(1) DIGITAL SQUELCH IS A CHOICE ONLY IF VINSON AND VOICE ARE

A C T I VAT E IN UST ? SELECTED. ANALOG SQUELCH IS THE ONLY CHOICE IF COMSEC °
NONE.

NET TYPE

"FREQUENCY HOPPING"

HOPPING TYPE
• • H AV E Q U I C K "

HQ_NET_NUM

H AV E Q U I C K ■C R Y P T O M O D E ■DIGITAL SQUELCH (1) ' TX POWER LEVEL

D ATA A / O I C E "
NET NUMBER ^ 1 WAT T
A# <1 .### _ AUTO ON — ~ 1 . 3 WAT T S
D ATA PORT
RECEIVE O N LY 1.6 WAT T S
. AUTO ON • A N A L O G — 2 WAT T S
ADF PORT SQUELCH TYPE
— 2.5 WAT T S
ENCRYPTION KEY
— 3 WAT T S
L-TEK 01 -25 SYNC/ASYNC SELECT
—■ 4 WAT T S

■A N A L O G ^ 5 WAT T S
ANALOG D ATA
SQUELCH — 6.3 WAT T S
L E V E L

• LOW-MED"

>MED"

VA U POWER LEVEL

- 5 WAT T S

' SQUELCH BAR mm 8 WAT T S

- 13 WAT T S

(1) REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.17.2.

Figure 4-5. HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

FROM SHEET 1.

REFER TO HPW IP REFER TO CTI

HOPPING TYPE

" H AV E Q U I C K "

FMT FREQS

• A C T I VAT E G U A R D R C V R ( 2 )

^SEGMENT 1 (20) -SEGMENT 6(15)

• M W O O D AY O F M O N T H ( 1 )
I—NO
■— Y E S
E R A S E
LGUARD FREQUENCY
^ARE YOU SURE? SEGMENT 1 (20)-SEGMENT 6 (15)

E R A S E

Lmwod day of month 2t430.00MHz3

()
SQUELCH LEVEL

Loo -99(4) — HIGH

LARE YOU SURE? — MED-HIGH

— MED

— LOW-MED

— LOW

> MWOD DAY OF MONTH

FREQUENCY 1 (20) - FREQUENCY 16 (05)
Loo -99(4) L 225.000 - 399.975 MHz
E R A S E

L ARE YOU SURE?

1 . M W O D D AY O F M O N T H I S C O N TA I N E D I N S E G M E N T 1 4 3 X X . 0 0 0
2 . G U A R D R E C E I V E R A C C E S S I B L E F R O M H A V E Q U I C K M O D E U N D E R C A L L K E Y.
3 . G U A R D R E C E I V E R P R E S E T TA B L E R A N G E I S 9 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z .
4. RADIO WILL ALLOW 99, BUT ONLY 01 - 31 ARE USEABLE.

Figure 4-5. HAVEQUICK Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

4.6 UHF DAMA S AT C O M PROGRAMMING

See Figure 4-6. DAMA SATCOM programming in the AN/PRC-117F is conducteii using one set of menus for all
the parameters necessary for 5 kHz, 25 kHz Alternating Current (AC), and 25 kHz Direct Current (DC) DAMA
operation. In the DAMA mode of operation, the AN/PRC-117F can be configured with ten DAMA net presets that
are used in conjunction with ten port configuration presets to make calls (service requests) to 50 DAMA Destination
presets. Refer to Table 4-8 for all the service configurations possible with the AN/PRC-117F.

Perform the following procedure to begin DAMA programming selection:

a. Press [PGM]. If radio is in a normal mode, select DAMA; press [ENTj. If radio is already in DAMA
mode, going into programming will cause the user to lose the current DAMA network connection.
Choose YES if this is OK before entering into DAMA programming. If operating on a DAMA channel,
terminate any calls and go out of service for 25 kHz DAMA prior to entering programming mode. On
5 kHz DAMA, teardown any existing service and log off the channel. The AN/PRC-117F will retum to
DAMA mode after programming if it is entered from the DAMA mode of operation.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

b. Select DAMA; press [ENT], The DAMA programming menu will appear.
c. Choose PRESETS to access DAMA presets programming; press [ENTl.
d. Select NETS. The KDU displays SELECT NET TO MODIFY (0 - 9). Use the number keys to select
the desired net.

There are three types of DAMA presets:

• Net Presets, 0-9

• Port Configuration Presets, 0-9

• Destination Presets, 00 - 49

Table 4-8. DAMA SATCOM Service Configuration Parameters

DATA
Channel Type MODE COMSEC D ATA R AT E S
VOC

DAMA UHF 5K CKT A N D V T VOICE 2400 MELP orLPC

SATCOM 5 kHz (AC) 5K CKT A N D V T D A T A 300, 600,1200,2400
MIL-STD-188-182
5K CKT KG-84C DATA only 75,300, 600,1200,2400
5K MSG KG-84C DATA only 75, 300, 600,1200,2400
DAMA UHF 2 5 K A C A N D V T VOICE 2400 MELPorLPC
SATCOM 25 kHz (AC) 25KAC A N D V T D A T A 300, 600, 1200, 2400
MIL-STD-188-183
25KAC KG-84C DATA only 75,300, 600,1200,2400
25KAC VINSON VOICE 16 kbps
25KAC VINSON D A T A 16 kbps
DAMA UHF 25K DC A N D V T VOICE 2400 MELP or LPC
S AT C O M 2 5 k H z D C
25K DC A N D V T D ATA 300, 600, 1200, 2400
25K DC KG-84C DATA only 75,300, 600,1200,2400
25K DC VINSON VOICE 16 kbps
25KDC VINSON D A T A 16 kbps
DAMA UHF 25 kHz VINSON VOICE 16 kbps
S AT C O M
25 kHz VINSON D A T A 16 kbps
Dedicated Calls (DASA)
25 kHz KG-84C DATA only 75, 300, 600,1200, 2400,
4800,16kbps
5 kHz A N D V T V O I C E 2400 MELP or LPC

5 kHz A N D V T D A T A 600, 1200, 2400

5 kHz KG-84C DATA only 75, 300, 600, 1200,2400
5 kHz KG-84C DATA only H P W

25 kHz KG-84C DATA only HPW, 25 kHz WB, UFO

5 kHz KG-84C DATA only CPM 181B

25 kHz KG-84C DATA only CPM 181B

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

FROM DAMA MODE

PGM? WILL LOSE NET

N
tO Y E S

SELECT INFO CODE

. AC ##(01 -39)
■ DAMA REV-DASH
L. REPORT
. DAMA REV^
RESPONSE

C O D E

I. AC ##:#####

. DC ##(01 -99)
L. REPORT
RESPONSE
CODE
1_ DC##:#####

OUT OF SERVICE

_ PRECEDENCE

Lm ROUTINE
. PRIORITY

. I M M E D I AT E
. FLASH
_ FLASH OVERRIDE

L EMERGENCYACTION
1 REASON CODE
L##
_ D U R AT I O N

L##

L ADDRESS TO PAGE
L 1:#####
LINK TEST

L LINK TEST RATE

L DURATION
L ####SEC
5 KHz CIRCUIT

DURATION

L ####MIN
CHANNEL TYPE

bSKHz 25 kHz

Figure 4-6. UHF DAMA SATCOM, Overall Programming Menu Tree

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING
I^ARRiS'
4.6.1 DAMA Net Presets Programming Procedures

See Figure 4-7. Net Presets contain all the parameters necessary for acquisition, ranging, and communication to the
satellite.

4.6.1.1 CHANNEL

The following paragraphs pertain to DAMA Channels.

4.6.1.1.1 Channel Number

Enter HOME channel number of 001 to 249 to enter uplink and downlink frequencies. Refer to Table B-3 for a
listing of UHF SATCOM channels and their frequencies. These channels are the same used in dedicated SATCOM
operation. DAMA operation is only possible on channels placed under DAMA control.

Non-standard, or Non-US DAMA Systems must use the RF-6550M Radio Programming Application (RPA) or
RF-6650M Communications Planning Application (CPA) software to configure a custom DAMA Frequency Code
table, that can then be downloaded to the AN/PRC-117F.

4.6.1.1.2 Transmit Capability

Choose FULL for normal operations. If the tactical situation requires transmission suppression, select EMCON to
keep from emitting signals. An additional factor to consider when using Emission Control (EMCON) is that a
preassigned login is required. This precludes the need to range and log in. SILENT is available in 5 kHz DAMA and
only permits the AN/PRC-117F to transmit when the operator chooses to initiate a service request or accept a service
assignment.
4.6.1.1.3 Constant Key Port (25 kHz Only)

Select NO for normal DAMA operations. This gives the channel controller the capability to shut down the
AN/PRC-117F if it transmits for over 17 minutes continuously. Selecting YES when long transmissions are
expected will place the terminal in a transmit-only capable configuration and the radio cannot be used to receive.
This will not affect burst type ARQ data systems, but will affect other ARQ systems and cause a non-response
because of no-receive capability.
4.6.1.1.4 Login Type (5 kHz Only)

This parameter is for 5 kHz DAMA only. Over-The-Air (OTA) is for normal operations. PREASSIGNED is used
for operation where the channel controller logs the station into the network at a designated time so that the terminal
does not have to range and log in to maintain Low Probability of Intercept (LPI)/Low Probability of Detection (LPD)
characteristics due to the tactical situation. If a terminal loses contact with the system without logging out, due to
circumstances such as power failure, second attempts at logging in could be denied by the channel controller. Switch
setting to PREASSIGNED to overcome this problem.
4.6.1.1.5 Default Config

Upon entry into DAMA mode, the AN/PRC-117F immediately begins operation in getting connected to the DAMA
network. DEFAULT CONFIG is the DAMA Port Configuration preset that will be used predominantly in operation
using this DAMA Net Preset. Select the DAMA Port Configuration preset that allows quick operation on the DAMA
net upon becoming DAMA network connected.

4.6.1.2 ADDR

ADDR sets all the parameters concerning the addresses used in the terminal.

4-30
ifARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.6.1.2.1 BASE ADDRESS

Each DAMA Net preset is set with one Terminal Base Address (TBA). TBAs are five digit numbers and range from
00001 to 49999. The 00000 address is reserved for the primary channel controller. Addresses 50000 to 65535 are
presently reserved for network addresses. Program BASE ADDRESS to the authorized TBA. Address must be less
than demarcation address (5 kHz). Each radio in the system must use a different TBA.

4.6.1.2.2 GUARD_LIST

The Guard List is a place to put addresses that the terminal expects to receive services for. Network addresses are
most commonly placed here along with addresses of multiple users sharing a single terminal for operations. Do not
place TBAs in the Guard List; use only network address in the 50000 to 65535 range. ADD places an address to the
GUARD_LIST. Use REVIEW to check the addresses in the GUARD_LIST and/or DELETE addresses from the
GUARD_LIST.

4.6.1.3 Orderwire Encryption

Set EOW to OFF for non-secure orderwire operation or ON for encrypted operation. The DAMA EOW is normally
operated secure. If encrypted orderwire is used, a DAMA Transmission Security Key (TSK) from any of the
SATELLITE storage positions, TSK 01 - 25, can be assigned to KEY LOCATION 0-7. Program the correct EOW
TSK to the position used by the channel controller in the satellite footprint of operation.

4.6.1.4 Transmission Security (TRANSEC)

The DAMA TRANSEC TSK secures the DAMA Engineering Orderwire (EOW) between the AN/PRC-117F
DAMA terminal and the channel controller. The DAMA TRANSEC keys are loaded to the AN/PRC-117F at the
[LDJ position of the function switch under the menu item SATELLITE. After loading, they are assigned to common
positions numbered 0 - 7 to match locations used by the channel controller. Refer to Table 4-9. Select NONE if a
TSK is not required for the position. If the AN/PRC-117F displays a network state of ERROR, then check loading
and programming of these keys. If the AN/PRC-117F will not become network connected, suspect that the \vrong
TSK is being used.
Table 4-9. DAMA TRANSEC Key Positions

Satellite Footprint
Device
CONUS LANT I/O PA G

A N / P R C - 11 7 F 0,1 2,3 0,1 2,3

PSC-5 1,2 3,4 1,2 3,4
Controller 0,1 2,3 0,1 2,3
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

SELECT NET TO

MODIFY

C H A N G E
' RANGING METHOD N A M E
•CHANNEL NUMBER ORDERWIRE ENCRYPTION TX POWER LEVEL

^ 001-249 Im OFF - 1 WAT T S

T R A N S M I T C A PA B I L I T Y -1.3 WAT T S
> FIXED
- 1.6 WAT T S
L RANGE IN CHIPS - 2 WAT T S
KEY L O C AT I O N 0 -7
L nnnnn . aaaaa
CEM CON
SILENT (1)
TSK 01 -25
- CONSTANT KEY PORT (2, 3)

N
tO
- 5 WAT T S

Y E S - 6.3 WAT T S

- 8 WAT T S
■LOGIN TYPE (1)(4)
- 10 WAT T S

O
t VERT
-HEA
-R
I
PREASSIGNED
-

-
13

16
WAT T S

WAT T S

• D E FA U LT C O N F I G ^ 20 WATTS
^ODAMACFG 0-9 BASE.ADDRESS GUARD UST
> VAU POWER LEVEL

— 5 WAT T S
BASE ADDRESS A D D - 8 WAT T S
I" 00001-65535 L- ADDRESS TO ADD - 13 WAT T S

L> 00001-65535 » 20 WAT T S

_ 32 WAT T S

— 50 WAT T S

(1) ONLY AVAILABLE IN 5 kHz UHF DAMA.

(2) ONLY AVAILABLE IN 25 kHz UHF DAMA.
(3) YES SETTING ONLY MAKES TRANSMIT CAPABLE. NO RECEIVE.
( 4 ) N O T AVA I L A B L E W I T H D A M A R E V. A .
(5) REFER TO PARAGRAPH 4.17.2.

Figure 4-7. UHF DAMA SATCOM Net Preset Programming Menu Tree
h^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.6.1.5 POWER

POWER programming for SATCOM is 2 - 20 watts in 1 dB increments (Paragraph 4.5.1.5). When the
AN/PRC-117F is installed in the VAU, increased power levels become available with the 50 watt power amplifier
allowing power levels from 5 to 50 watts in 2 dB increments. Output power settings of 5, 8, 13,20, 32, or 50 watts
can be programmed.

4.6.1.6 NAME

Enter any name, up to 12 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Otherwise, the DAMANET# will default to the
number shown.

4.6.2 DAMA PORT_CONFIG Preset Programming Procedures

See Figure 4-8. Port Configuration presets are used to configure parameters for the DAMA terminal operation.

4.6.2.1 COMSEC

Refer to Paragraph 4,5.1.2. ANDVT COMSEC is available for use in dedicated SATCOM channels and DAMA.
Use KG-84 or ANDVT if 5 kHz message service operation is desired. The recipient of 5 kHz message service must
be using the same COMSEC mode and TEK. ANDVT Voice is the preferred method instead of VINSON due to
bandwidth requirements. VINSON COMSEC for voice and data and KG-84 at 16 kbps data are primarily selected
for use in Demand Assigned Single Access (DASA) operation on 25 kHz channels.

LPC or MELP voice operation can be selected with ANDVT operation. MELP offers superior performance over
LPC with regard to voice recognition and weak-signal audio quality. If there is a possibility that MELP radios will
be communicating with LPC radios, the user can enable AUTOSWITCH, which will detect the voice coding and
then automatically adjust to the proper setting. If AUTOSWITCH is disabled, the received voice coding will still be
detected properly, but the radio will transmit with the coding that was set.

4.6.2.2 D ATA A ^ O i C E

Under programming for DATAA^OICE when using VINSON COMSEC, select AUTO ON ADF PORT or AUTO
ON DATA PORT for the port that will be used during reception of communications so that the AN/PRC-117F can
direct the signal to the appropriate connection. If data is being used, select whether AS YNC or SYNC type is being
used and the applicable data rate for the assigned service.

4.6.2.3 CONFIG_CODE

Set the two digit CONFIG CODE for a 25 kHz DAMA channel and the three digit CONFIG CODE for a 5 kHz
DAMA channel. Refer to Table B-8 for appropriate configuration code. Add a leading zero to the 2-digit code to use
in 5 kHz DAMA. Configuration codes must match the port configuration parameters.

NOTE

PCC will not allow service if codes do not match that of the
intended destination and the slot service level.

4.6.2.4 NAME

Enter any name, up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Otherwise, the DAMACFG# will default to the number shown.

4-33
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

PORT CONFIGS

SELECT PORT
CONFIG

0 • 9, DAMACFG 0 ■ 9

D ATA I VOC CONFIG CODE

CRYPTO MODE VOICE MODE 25 kHz PORT CONRG CODE CHANGE NAME

. NONE Loi -99 ^ DAMACFG 0 - 9

■ VINSON
5 kHz PORT CONFIG CODE
L ENCRYPTION KEY
L 001 - 511
L TEK 01 -25 D ATA A / O t C E ( 1 )
L ANALOG DATA
A
tUTOONADFPORT
N
tO
AUTO ON D ATA PORT

Y E S
SYNC /ASYNC SELECT
. KG-84

L ENCRYPTION KEY
LTEK 01 ■ 25
BAUD RATE (3)
S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N
.REDUNDANT MODE 1 L 7 5

LHPWTRANSECID(5)
L « #
. REDUNDANT MODE 2
. NON-REDUNDANT MODE 3

. NON-REDUNDANT MODE 4

. HPWTRANSEC KEY ID
t4800(3)
16.0K(4)
DATA MODULATION MODE (5)
I. 01 • 25
L MS181
I L DASA OPTION #(6)
ENCRYPTION KEY
L TEK 01 - 25 DASA HPW BAUD RATE (7)
TRAINING FRAME
Li NB
L 6,9,12,15.20,30,60
ANDVT PREAMBLE
( 1 ) O N LY W I T H V I N S O N C O M S E C .

tSTANDARD
E N H A N C E D
( 2 ) O N LY W I T H V I N S O N O R K G - 8 4 C O M S E C .

(3) ONLY WITH KG-84, OR PT.

AUTO SWITCH
(4) KG-84, VINSON, OR PT ONLY.
tENABLED
DISABLED
(5) KG-84 MODE 1 ONLY.

( 6 ) M S 1 8 1 D A S A M O D U L AT I O N O N LY.
( 7 ) H P W D A S A M O D U L AT I O N O N LY.

Figure 4-8. UHF DAMA SATCOM Port Configuration Preset Programming Menu Tree
 AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.6.3 DAMA Destination Preset Programming Procedures

See Figure 4-9. Destination presets are usable in any type UHF DAMA channel or service, if the proper information
required for each is programmed in the preset.

4.6.3.1 5 KHZ

Select the desired TBA for the 5 kHz DAMA destination. The range of acceptable addresses is 0 to 65535.

4.6.3.2 25K_AC

Enter up to five TBAs for the 25 kHz DAMA destination preset by using ADD and REVIEW selected addresses.
Use DELETE to remove any unneeded addresses from the list. The range of acceptable addresses is 0 to 65535.
Enter a single address for point-to-point operation, or enter between 2-5 addresses for conference call capability.

4.6.3.3 25K_DC

If the DAMA channel is to be set to Distributed Control (DC) then enter the 25 kHz circuit number to be used with
the DAMA destination preset.

4.6.3.4 SEARCH

Set option for 5 kHz Multiple HOP Operation (MHO?) by selecting GLOBAL, otherwise choose LOCAL.

4.6.3.5 NAME

Enter any name, up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Otherwise, the DAMADEST## will default to the number
shown.

4.6.3.6 CLEAR

CLEAR is used to erase the DAMA destination preset of all parameters instead of having to access all menu areas
to remove unneeded information.

DESTINATIONS

SELECT

DESTINATION

' [ 00 - 49 [DAMADEST 00 • 49]

DESTINATION A D D CIRCUIT NUMBER SEARCH AREA CHANGE NAME U A RA E

RE YO
Y OUl SURE

L 0-65535 L DESTINATION TO ADD L 10000 - 10999 L DAMADEST 00 - 49 U NO

(UP TO 5)

L 0-65535
REVIEW

L DESTINATION X OF X

Figure 4-9. UHF DAMA SATCOM Destination Preset Programming Menu Tree
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.6.4 DAMA D E FA U LT S

See Figure 4-10. DAMA default parameters speed up terminal operations by setting items to automatically appear
as default in DAMA Call menus. Default parameters can still be changed using the up/down arrows from [CALL]
menu selections, if other settings are desired.

4.6.4.1 OUT-OF-SERVICE

Designate a default out-of-service code along with precedence and duration. Default code schemes are set up by,
and are the responsibility of, the using organization.

4.6.4.2 PA G E

Up to three TBAs for paging service can be default programmed. Paging is only a 25 kHz DAMA capability.

4.6.4.3 LINK_TEST

Set the default rate at which link tests are conducted in 25 kHz DAMA. Link tests are only done in 25 kHz DAMA.
No capacity to perform link test was provided in 5 kHz DAMA.

4.6.4.4 CALL

Set default call duration in units of seconds, minutes, hours, or days. Use 0000 to designate an indefinite period.

4.6.4.5 5 KHZ_CIRCUIT

Select default options for 5 kHz circuit service of dedicated DASA operation by selecting YES, then setting the
duration and channel type to either 25 kHz or 5 kHz. Entering NO gives default calls a normal 5 kHz DAMA circuit

5 kHz CIRCUIT

ADDRESSES TO PA G E LINK TEST R AT E DURATION (1) DEDICATED

PRECEDENCE
. 9.6 K
L ROUTINE
t1: ffffffffff
2: mm . 19.2 K V
tES N O

. 32 K

D U R AT I O N ( 1 )
L.
tFLASHOVERRD
IE
EMERGENCY ACTION LMN
I
REASON CODE

L 00 . 99
CHANNEL TYPE
DURATION MIN (1)
L mm epr

NOTE:

(1) ENTER 0000 FOR INDEFINITE

Figure 4-10. UHF DAMA SATCOM Default Programming Menu Tree

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.6.5 CODE, Information Request

See Figure 4-6. Enter the information response code to any expected information request code. Default report codes
for both 25 kHz AC and DC operation can be programmed. This feature provided easier referencing of the required
codes while operating.

4.6.6 SCO IMAGE (DAMA VERSION OPTION)

Two versions of DAMA are supported in the AN/PRC-117F:

• MIL-STD-188-182/183 for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA Rev.-)

• MIL-STD-188-182A/183A for 5 kHz and 25 kHz channels, respectively (DAMA Rev. A)

See Figure 4-11. When the AN/PRC-117F is equipped with the DAMA Switching option (refer to
Paragraph 1.7.7.1), the user can configure the radio for either DAMA Rev. - or DAMA Rev. A. To choose a DAMA
version, perform the following procedure. If these menu choices do not appear, the radio is not equipped with this
feature.

a. Press [PGMl > DAMA > PRESETS.

Press [Next] and select SCC IMAGE.

b. Use the arrow keys to select either DAMA REV DASH or DAMA REV A.

c. When asked "ARE YOU SURE", select YES to accept the choice.

DAMA REV DASH

L ARE YOU SURE?

hYES
L PROGRAMMING SCC

DAMA REV A

L AREYOU SURE?

hYES
L PROGRAMMING SCC #»

Figure 4-11. DAMA Version Switching

AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.7 SCAN PROGRAMMING

NOTE

Prior to SCAN Programming, normal mode LOS fixed

frequency and Dedicated SATCOM net presets should be
properly programmed and operating satisfactorily.
See Figure 4-12. Perform the following procedure to program the AN/PRC-117F scan fimction:

a. Press [PGM].

b. Select SCAN.

c. Use the left/right arrow keys to select LIST, PRIORITY, or CONFIG

4.7.1 SCAN LIST

See Figure 4-12. Select LIST to ADD, REVIEW, or DELETE nets from the scan list.

PRIORITY TX HANG TIME

SCAN NET

SCAN NET m (NAME)

XX SECONDS
TO ADO

ENABLE RX ENABLE HOLD TIME

PRIORITY SCANNING

SCAN NET ## OF ## a
m [NAME] ▼

DELETE

SCAN NET m OF m A
m [NAME] ▼ PRIORITY RX
.XX SECONDS
SCAN NET
m (NAME)

Figure 4-12. SCAN Programming Menu Tree

4.7.2 SCAN PRIORiTY

Priority transmit and receive net presets can be selected. The AN/PRC-117F transmits using the priority transmit
net, if the Push-To-Talk (PTT) key is pressed during scanning. The priority receive net is the net preset that the
AN/PRC-117F checks most frequently for a signal.

Perform the following procedure to configure a transmit and receive priority. Scan Lists must be added before this
feature can be set; refer to Paragraph 4.7.1:

a. Press iPGMj.

b. Select SCAN.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

c . S e l e c t P R I O R I T Y.

d. Choose the PRIORITY TRANSMIT net name; press [ENTJ.

e. Select YES for ENABLE RX PRIORITY SCANNING?; press [ENT|.

f. Select the PRIORITY RECEIVE net name; press [ENT].

4.7.3 SCAN CONFIG

Scan CONFIG programming allows the operator to configure the AN/PRC-117F's hang time and hold time. Hang
time sets the length of time the radio dwells on a net after a signal ends before returning to scan. Hold time refers to
the length of time the radio dwells on a net before returning to scan even with a signal present.

Perform the following procedure to configure hang time and hold time:

a. Press [PGM|.

b. Select SCAN, CONFIG.

c. Enter the desired HANG TIME in seconds; press [ENTl to set value.

d. Set ENABLE HOLD TIME? to YES, then enter the desired hold time duration in seconds. Press
(ENT| to set value and return to SCAN programming menu.

4.8 PORTS PROGRAMMING

See Figure 4-13. Perform the following procedure to program AN/PRC-117F ports:

a. Press (PGMj.

b. Use the lefl/right arrow keys to select PORTS.

c. Use the left/right arrow keys to choose the desired port selection:
• REMOTE - Refer to Paragraph 4.8.1.

• DATA - Refer to Paragraph 4.8.2.

• AUDIO_LEVELS - Refer to Paragraph 4.8.3.

• PPP - Refer to Paragraph 4.15.2.1.

4.8.1 REMOTE Port Programming

The AN/PRC-117F can be controlled by an optional remote control device (such as a Personal Computer [PC]),
using either the J3 DATA connector, J6 ACCESSORY, or the J9 ACCESSORY connector. The AN/PRC-117F's
Remote port must be configured to match the port parameters of the remote device.

While the KDU can be operated remotely from the radio using the KDU extension cable, it is not considered remote
operation as described above.
The remote port's INTERFACE, PROTOCOL, ASYNC RATE, DATA BITS, PARITY, STOP BITS, FLOW
CONTROL, and ASYNC ECHO can be programmed from the Ports Programming menu. Configure these options
to match the configuration of the remote device connected to the AN/PRC-117F.

4-39
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING tfiRRtS'
4 . 8 . 2 D ATA P o r t P r o g r a m m i n g

When the AN/PRC-117F is connected to a data device, the data port must be programmed to match the data device's
interface parameters. Either J1 ADF connector or J3 DATA connector can be used. Data devices communicate
through either asynchronous or synchronous data transfer and will dictate the programming for the AN/PRC-117Fs
data port. When using UHF SATCOM in HPW mode, or operating the radio in RETRANS mode, the J3 DATA
connector is automatically configured for proper operation.

Perform the following procedure to access the DATA Port programming menu:

a. Press [PGM].

b. Select PORTS.

c . S e l e c t D ATA .

d. Choose ASYNC (Paragraph 4.8.2.1) or GENERAL (Paragraph 4.8.2.2) as required.

4.8.2.1 ASYNC Data Programming

ASYNC programming allows the operator to set the ASYNC RATE, DATA BITS, PARITY, STOP BITS, FLOW
CONTROL, and ASYNC ECHO values for asynchronous data operations. Enabling ASYNC ENHANCED
provides increased data transfer reliability and additional data rate choices in the range of 75 to 115.2 K bps. Program
the AN/PRC-117F to match parameters required by the specific data device.

4.8.2.2 GENERAL Data programming

Access GENERAL programming to set DATA INVERSION of NONE, TX ONLY, RX ONLY, or BOTH. These
four choices allow for all possible conditions that can be encountered in data communications interoperability with
systems other than the AN/PRC-117F. Set TX DATA CLOCK SOURCE and USE CTS-IN to properly interface
synchronous data devices. The default settings used by the radio are normally adequate for use with most MIL-STD-
184 devices and the Harris Synchronous data card.

Set PTT KEYS DATA to ENABLED to allow the PIT keyline input on J3 to control transmission. This feature can
be enabled or disabled from the KDU or by American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) remote
command. PTT Data Keying cannot be used if the Retransmit function is enabled. If both Data Keying and
Retransmit features are enabled at once, the Retransmit function takes precedence and PTT Data Keying will be
disabled. Refer to Paragraph 1.7.16 for more information.

4.8.3 Audio Levels

Depending on the requirements of an external device connected to the AN/PRC-117F, the FIXED AUDIO LEVEL
from the AN/PRC-117F can be set to either 0 dBm or -10 dBm. This fixed audio level is not affected by use of the
(VOL ±1 setting.

4-40
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

FIXED AUDIO LEVEL

SEE FIG0RE4-22.
(J3 AND J9)

CMCPORT(J6.J9)
D ATA P O R T ( J 3 )
' PROTOCOL
•ASYNC R AT E D ATA I N V E R S I O N

bRS-232(AC
l J6J,9)
R S - 2 3 2 / 4 2 2 ( D ATA J 3 )
>75 - 11 5 . 2 K

N
tONE TX O N LY
'ASYNC R AT E

L 75 -115.2 K 5, 6, 7 or 8
■P A R I T Y
• D ATA BITS
— NONE
L.8 0R 7 — EVEN
> T X D ATA C L O C K S O U R C E

, PA R I T Y
— ODD INTERNAL ON CTS

'STOP BITS

^ O D D
L-1 OR 2 RECOVERED
•FLOW CONTROL
, STOP BITS

L. 1 OR 2
FLOW CONTROL 'RTS/CTS

'XON /XOFF

N
tONE XON/XOFF
•ASYNC ECHO
PTT KEYS D ATA

ASYNC ECHO

•ASYNC ENHANCED

•DISABLED
• ENABLED

Figure 4-13. PORTS Programming Menu Tree

4.9 SECURITY AND NETWORK LOCKOUT PROGRAMMING

Security settings are used in the AN/PRC-117F to prevent unauthorized changes to radio parameters. Refer to
Paragraph 3.6 for a complete description of this feature. See Figure 4-14 for the programming menu tree that shows
the security and network lockout menus.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

ENTER PA S S W O R D
NET LOCK RANGE
ENTER PA S S W O R D (XXXXXXXXXXXX) (XX-XX)
8-12 CHARACTERS
(XXXXXXXXXXXX)
8-12 CHARACTERS
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD
SECURITY ACCESS
(XXXXXXXXXXXX)

REENTER NEW
PASSWORD

(XXXXXXXXXXXX)

•NET LOCK UST BEGIN

(XX)
■N E T LOCK UST END

(XX)

Figure 4-14. SECUR Programming Menu Tree

4.9.1 Creating or Changing a Password

Perform the following procedure to create a new security password or change an existing password:

a. Press the [PGM] key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SECUR to access security
programming, and press [ENT],
b. Use the left/right arrow keys to select PASSWORD, and press [ENTl.

c. To change a password, enter the existing password, and press [ENT]. If a password does not exist, skip
this step and proceed to Step e.

d. Enter the new password, and press [ENT]. Password must be 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters.

e. Re-enter the new password to confirm it, and press [ENT].

f. Press [CLR] to exit out of menus. Password is now active.

 HARRIS^ A N / P R C - 1 1 7 PFR O( GVR A)M(MC )
ING

4.9.2 Net Lock Lists

Net lock lists are a range of radio nets protected by password access.

4.9.2.1 Enabling a Net Lock List

To protect a range of radio nets with a password, perform the following procedure:

NOTE

A password must be set before the Net Lock List can be

created. Refer to Paragraph 4.9.1 for setting a password.

a . Press the [PGMl key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SECUR to access security
programming, and press [ENTj.
b. Use the lefl/right arrow keys to select CONFIG, and press [ENTj.
/ *▶,
c . Enter the password, and press [ENTj.
tmrn,
d. Under SECURITY ACCESS, select ENABLE and press [ENTj.

e . Enter the net number of the first net in the range that is to be secured, and press lENTf
iims

- -■s
f. Enter the net number of the last net in the range that is to be secured, and press [ENTj.

1 ^ g. Press [CLRl to exit out of menus. The specified range of nets now requires the deactivation of security
to permit changes.

0 m s
4.9.2.2 Disabling a Net Lock List
To turn off password protection for a range of radio nets, perform the following procedure:
/0m,
a . Press the [PGMl key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SECUR to access security
programming, and press [ENTj.
/ ^ b. Use the left/right arrow keys to select CONFIQ and press [ENTj.
/mty
c . Enter the security password, and press [ENTj.
/ < ^
d. Under SECURITY ACCESS, select DISABLE, and press [ENTj.

e . Press [CLRl to exit out of menus. All nets are now accessible.
4.9.2.3 Viewing a Net Lock List

0 m , To determine the range of nets that are password protected, perform the following procedure:
/ ^
a . Press the [PGMj key on the KDU. Use the lefVright arrow keys to select SECUR to access security
/00\ programming, and press lENTj.
/ ^ b. Use the left/right arrow keys to select REVIEW, and press lENTj.
0ms
c . The Net Lock Range will be displayed.
/ ^
d. Press [CLRj to exit out of menus.
/0m,

/mrns

/ ^

/0ms

4-43
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING t^ARRtS'
4.9.3 Security Level

Perform the following procedure to change the security level:

a. Press the [PGM] key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SECUR to access security
programming, and press [ENTj.
b. Use the left/right arrow keys to select LEVEL, and press [ENTj.

c. For SECURITY LEVEL, enter a number value between 0-3.

d. Enter the new password, and press [ENT]. Password must be 8 to 12 alphanumeric characters.

e. A notification of successful change of the security level will be displayed.

4.10 CFIG PROGRAMMING

See Figure 4-15. Perform the following procedure to select any of the programming options indicated:

a. Press IPGM).

b. Use the right/left arrow keys to select CFIG.

c. Press [ENTj to access the CFIG menus.

4.10.1 General AN/PRC-117F Settings

EXTERNAL TACSAT LNA POWER - When this is set to ON, a Direct Current (DC) voltage of 20 VDC is
supplied to the VHF-HI/UHF antenna connector for use with a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) during DAMA or
SATCOM receive operations. Be sure to tum LNA power to OFF when not using an extemal LNA.

FM TRANSMIT TONE - When this is set to ON, the AN/PRC-117F transmits a 150 Hz squelch tone whenever
the PTT key is pressed in a LOS fixed frequency net preset using FM modulation. Ensure FM transmit tone is set to
ON when operating with other types of FM radios requiring tone squelch, or if CTCSS/CDCSS is being used.

AM TRANSMIT TONE - When set to ON, allows for the transmission of the 150 Hz squelch tone when using
AM. Ensure this is set to ON when communicating with other radio systems requiring this type of receive squelch.
Set to OFF when not using tone squelch, or if CTCSS/CDCSS is being used.

SILENCE ERROR BEEPS? - When set to YES, the AN/PRC-117F will not beep when operator errors occur.

AUTO SAVE OVERRIDES - When set to YES, all operator overrides are immediately saved. Set this to NO if all
overrides are to be temporary. When set to NO, the SAVE command in the Option menu must be used to keep any
overrides.

CONST LIGHT OPTION - If Constant Light Operation is desired in the manpack operation, set this to ON. This
makes the item selectable from the KDU ILTl button. Otherwise, the KDU [LT] button will only allow choice of
OFF or Momentary. This feature is used to conserve battery power for the manpack configured radio.

ANDVT Fade Priority - ANDVT fade occurs when voice is being received and the modem drops sync without
receiving an active End Of Message flag. The fade period is approximately four seconds. In order for the crypto to
maintain sync through the fade, the modem must think the channel is busy, which would normally not allow the user
to key the radio. This menu permits the user to choose whether or not to allow radio keying during a fade. If TX is
selected, the user may key the radio during the fade period. If RX is selected, the display will show "Keyline
Ignored", and the operator cannot key during the fade period.

4-44
I^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

CTCSS/CDCSS Priority - With normal CTCSS/CDCSS operation, the AN/PRC-117F will not transmit if the
channel is busy, and the main KDU display shows BSY in the squelch field. Set CTCSS/CDCSS Priority to TX to
allow transmit even when the channel is busy. Set the priority to RX for normal operation (cannot transmit when
channel is busy).

PA FAILSAFE OVR - PA Failsafe is a radio feature that provides automatic power cutback should the Power
Amplifier (PA) overheat. ENABLE the PA FAILSAFE OVR (Override) setting to command the PA to continue at
full power, even in over-temperature conditions. DISABLE the Override setting to allow automatic power cutback
feature. The override function should be enabled only when necessary, since damage to the PA could result.

VOICE PRIORITY - When Voice Priority Over Data (VPOD) is set to ENABLE, it allows the operator to key the
handset while the radio is transmitting data and immediately (less than two seconds) switch to voice mode. VPOD
is only available when Simultaneous Voice and Data is enabled. Keying the handset drops the data transmission
immediately. After the handset unkeys, data transmission may or may not resume, depending on the type of data,
mode of operation, and connected data device. The net DATA/VOICE setting must be AUTO ON DATA (for nets
set to AUTO ON ADF, VPOD will be ignored).

SIMUL Rx VOC/DAT - When Simultaneous Receive Voice and Data is set to ENABLE, the radio will be
configured to transmit and receive voice and data in the same net. The data/voice can both be transmitted and
received through the handset and J3 Data cormector. This ensures the operator can use voice communications while
in a data net. This feature can be used on any VINSON net, or SATCOM 25 kHz in CT mode (no NB, DAMA, or
ANDVT).

MUTE DATA AUDIO - When Mute Data Audio is set to ENABLE, it mutes data audio noise that comes out of
the handset while Simultaneous Voice and Data is enabled. This ensures the operator will not hear static noise on
the handset while keying data with Simultaneous Voice and Data active. This feature can be used on any net that is
e n a b l e d f o r S i m u l t a n e o u s Vo i c e a n d D a t a .

MUTE SIDE TONES - Side Tones are the effect of sound picked up by the radio microphone being deliberately
introduced (at low level) into the speaker or earpiece. Without side tones, users do not hear their own voice in the
speaker/earpiece and may think their radio is not working. The default setting of DISABLE will allow side tones,
while setting Mute Side Tones to ENABLE will silence this effect.

4.10.2 EXTERNAL DEVICES, VAU Configuration

The AN/PRC-117F Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) can be installed and operated in the VAU as part of the
AN/VRC-103(V)1 Vehicular Radio Set. If the AN/PRC-117F is to be used with the 50 watt amplifier contained in
the VAU, press IPGM] > CFIG > EXT_ DEV > VAU, and set EXTERNAL SOW PA MODE to ON. See
Figure 4-15. Select BYPASS for manpack operation of the AN/PRC-117F, or if the VAU fails but can still power
the R/T. If the AN/PRC-117F is still installed in the VAU when selecting bypass, it will give a reminder message to
reconnect the antennas directly to the R/T. For more information on the VAU, refer to AN/VRC-103(V)1 Vehicular
Radio Communications System Manual (VRCS) (10515-0110-4200).

A CAUTION
Do not BYPASS the VAU and transmit into the VAU. Be sure
to move antennas from VAU back to R/T before transmitting.
Damage to the VAU will result.

After choosing to use the external 50 watt PA, RECEIVE LNA can be set to IN or OUT.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING I^ARRIS'
When the AN/PRC-117F is installed in the optional VAU, ANTENNA configuration programming becomes
available to the user. Programming of the antenna port is done through the KDU and is held in VAU memory. This
allows replacement of R/Ts without affecting operation of the VAU with its antennas.

NOTE

Zeroizing the radio does not change the programming of VAU

antenna ports back to default settings. The antenna port
settings are held in VAU memory. To reset the VAU to default
antenna settings, reprogram the antenna ports by selecting
[PGMJ > CFIG > EXT_DEV > ANTENNA > DEFAULTS,
and choose YES.

If DEFAULT is selected, the antenna configuration is reset in the VAU to use the following standard output band
assignments:
• J4 - 30.00000 MHz to 89.99999 MHz (VHF-LOW)
• J5 - 90.00000 MHz to 224.99999 MHz (VHF-HIGH)
• J6 - 225.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz (UHF)
• J7 - All SATCOM operation, dedicated or DAMA.

An operational test (Ground Air Loopback) can be performed by reversing uplink and downlink frequencies, which
routes the SATCOM signals to J6.

Under [PGMJ > CFIG > EXT_DEV > ANTENNA > USER, the bandwidth of the first antenna port J4 is set with
the upper limit being selectable (the lower limit automatically set to 30 MHz). This upper limit selection must be a
value from 90.00000 MHz to 511.99999 MHz. J5 is then programmed with its low end band selection set to the
upper limit value previously selected for J4. The high end band selection for J5 can be set to a value up to 511.99999
MHz. If the upper limit for J4 is set to 511.9999 MHz, the J6 port will be disabled. If the upper limit for J4 is set to
anything less than 511.9999 MHz, the frequency range for J6 will automatically be set to have the lower value equal
to J5 upper value, and an upper value of 511.9999 MHz. In either case, the values for J6 are not displayed in
programming menus. The frequency range for J7 is not programmable and is set to provide output for all SATCOM
modes.

Any lower value that is selected for J5 is automatically assigned to J6 and not displayed in programming menus. J7
is unprogrammable and always provides output for all SATCOM modes. User antenna configuration follows:

• J4 - 30.00000 MHz to J4 user selected upper frequency limit, which must be between 89.99999 MHz and
5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z .

• J5 - Lower limit (equal to the selected J4 upper frequency limit) to J5 upper frequency limit (up to
511.99999 MHz).
• J6 - Lower limit (equal to the selected J5 upper frequency limit), with the upper limit set to 511.99999 MHz.
This portion of the programming occurs by default as the remainder of operational bandwidth is assigned to
J6 if 511.99999 MHz is not reached on either J4 or J5.

• J7 - All SATCOM operation, dedicated or DAMA.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.10.3 Beacon Mode Preset Programming

Perform the following procedure to preset Beacon Mode:

a. Press [FGM] key on KDU. Use left/right arrow keys to select CFIG to access configuration
programming. Press [ENT].
b. Use left arrow key to select BEACON; press [ENT|.

c. Input the required BEACON FREQUENCY; press [ENT].

d. Select the required BEACON MODULATION (AM or FM); press [ENTj.

e. Select the required BEACON POWER LEVEL; press [ENTj.

f. Exit out of the programming menu.

Beacon power level must be set from the [PGM]>CFIG>BEACON menu before entering BEACON mode. It is
not a screen overridable function. BEACON POWER level is programmable with 1-20 watts for FM in frequency
range of90.00000 MHz to 399.99999 MHz. Only 10 watts is available in the 400.00000 to 511.99999 MHz portion
of the beacon operating band. AM power output is limited to 10 watts in Beacon mode.

Upon entry in the BEACON mode with the AN/PRC-117F, the radio goes into transmit on the preset beacon
frequency and modulation. To override the presets, set BEACON FREQUENCY to any value between 90.00000
MHz to 511.99999 MHz, and then select AM or FM for BEACON MODULATION. Be sure all users are aware of
the programmed beacon frequency to avoid inadvertent operation on normal operating frequencies.

4.10.4 FREQ ID Programming Option

Channel Frequency ID codes for DAMA and Dedicated S ATCOM can be programmed using either of the following
methods.

• MIL-STD 188-181B Frequency codes, as used by US SATCOM operations. Refer to Paragraph 4.10.4.1.
• A Custom Frequency Code table can be created, with user-defined frequencies for each code (Version 5.0
radio firmware or higher). This allows the AN/PRC-117F to communicate over satellites that do not use
standard US Military SATCOM channels. The custom table must be created and downloaded to the radio
using either RF-6550M Radio Programming Application, RF-6650M CPA, or through the ASCII Remote
Control interface. Once the table is loaded in the radio, it can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
Paragraph 4.10.4.2 to enable the custom table in the radio.
4.10.4.1 MIL-STD 188-1818 Frequency Code Programming

This method uses standard codes that are taken from Table B-3. Refer to Paragraph 4.6.1.1.1 for standard
programming of channel codes 1 - 247.

MIL-STD 188-18IB Frequency codes 248 and 249 are variable frequency codes programmable by users for
operation on designated satellites, and are programmed as described in the following procedure. Refer to
Figure 4-15.
a. Press the [PGM] key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select CFIG to access configuration
programming. Press [ENT].
b. Use the left/right arrow key to select FREQ ID; press [ENT].
c. Use the left/right arrow key to select FREQ ID; press [ENT].

4-47
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING t^ARRtS'
d. Select Frequency Code of either 248 or 249 with the up/down arrow keys; press [ENTJ.
e. Input the required RECEIVE FREQUENCY and TRANSMIT FREQUENCY within limits of the
MIL-STD 188-18IB. Refer to Table B-3 for programmable ranges for each FREQ ID.
f. Program any SATCOM net preset with either of these FREQ ID codes to operate on these frequencies.

4.10.4.2 Custom Frequency Code Tables (Optional Feature)

This procedure explains how to enable or disable a custom frequency code table that has been previously loaded into
the AN/PRC-117F. Custom tables are created in the RF-6550M Radio Programming Application or RF-6650M
CPA, and then downloaded to the radio along with other configurable radio parameters. Only one custom table can
be installed in the radio at a time; if another table is downloaded, it will overwrite the old one. Refer to RF-6550M
Radio Programming Application User's Guide or the RF-6650M Communications Planning Application for
complete information on programming radio plans. Custom frequency code tables can have channel codes 1 - 249.
Once the custom table is in the radio, it can be enabled or disabled, as described in the following procedure.

a. Press the [PGM| key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select CFIG to access configuration
programming. Press [ENT].
b. Use the left/right arrow key to select FREQ ID; press [ENTJ.
c. Use the left/right arrow key to select FREQ TABLE; press [ENTJ.
d. Select ENABLE or DISABLE to control the custom table. If DISABLE is selected, the SATCOM
setting will automatically default to using the standard MIL-STD 188-18IB Frequency Code table, as
shown in Table B-3.

e. Custom tables are indicated on the main display by showing a plus sign (+) in front of the CHAN label.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

TO SHEET2

m n
G E N E R A L EXT_DEV B E A C O N

- EXTERNAL TA C S AT L N A POWER 1 — BEACON FREQUENCY

OFF L fm.mm mhz

V A U ANTENNA (1)
9 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z
ON L
— BEACON M O D U L AT I O N
— FM TRANSMIT TONE
■ E X T E R N A L S O W PA M O D E

—
O

OFF
N
— ON F
tM A M

— B Y PA S S — BEACON POWER LEVEL

— AM TRANSMIT TONE

LVRCBYPASSENABLED: ' 1 - 2 0 WAT T S ( 3 )

90 TO 399.99999 MHz
^ O F F MOVE ANTENNAS TO R/T
■1 - 1 0 WAT T S
— RECEIVE LNA
^ O N 4 0 0 T O 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

■■ S I L E N C E ERROR BEEPS
^OUT
WITH VA U AT TA C H E D :

— NO F M - 5 T O 5 0 W A T T S
■I N
A M - 5 TO 2 0 WAT T S

^ Y E S
— AUTO S AV E OVERRIDES

DEFAULTS USER (2)

— ■ Y E S

— NO
— J4 —
• SUCCESS
— C O N S T. UGHT OPTION
DEFAULTSSET 9 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

— J5 — I MHz
— OFF
U P T O 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z

^ ON - J6 —

— ANDVT FADE PRIORITY

L "
■— R X
■C T C S S r t J C S P R I O R I T Y

— TX

R X

• PA FAILSAFEOVR

— ENABLE

— DISABLE

■V O I C E PRIORITY

^ DISABLE

^ ENABLE

■ SIMUL RX V O C / D AT NOTES:

(1) ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN RT IS INSTALLED IN VAU.

■—■D I S A B L E (2) J6 BAND PROGRAMMING NOT A C T U A L LY D I S P L AY E D .
^ ENABLE BEACON POWER IS SHOWN FOR FM.
■ M U T E D ATA A U D I O M A X I M U M A M B E A C O N P O W E R : 1 0 WAT T S ( 2 0 W W I T H VA U ) .

ENABLE

DISABLE

•MUTE SIDE TONE

ENABLE
117F-128(1)K
' DISABLE

Figure 4-15. CFIG Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

FROM SHEET 1

F R E Q TA B L E

USE CUSTOM TABLE ^DEFINE FREQUENCY ID

GPS EXTERNAL DEVICE COMBAT ID

00001 -99999 RECEIVE FREQUENCY

###.##### MHz

TRANSMIT FREQUENCY

N M E A 1 8 3 V 2 . X

I GPS COORDINATE TYPE

SA PA C K E T TYPE
• RECEIVE FREQUENCY

M
tGRS L L - D M S
•
nmrntm

TRANSMIT FREQUENCY
mhz

mHHHM MU9

SA IP ADDRESS

L-XXX.XXXXXX.XXX
L O C A L S A R E P O RT

' SA TRANSMIT

• PER & MOVE

F 11 7 F - 1 2 8 ( 2 ) L

Figure 4-15. CFIG Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

4.11 iNTEGRATED WAVEFORM (iW) PROGRAMMING

This section explains how to program a typical IW Net via the radio front panel. Actual IW Net parameters required
can be found on the organizational SAA message. These steps are intended to guide in the programming of one IW
Net. See Figure 4-16 for the IW menu tree diagrams.

NOTE

Another method of establishing IW presets is to use the

RF-6650M CPA (the older RF-6550M RPA cannot program
IW presets). To make settings from the radio front panel,
follow the steps below.

4.11.1 Pre-Programming Requirements

Before proceeding with IW Net programming, ensure the following:

• All AN/PRC-117F radios being used in an IW Net have v6.0.1.5 or later firmware installed.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

• IW SAA with SATID and Service Number information is available.

• ANDVT, KG-84, and VINSON Communications Security (COMSEC) key types should be loaded in all
radios and set to respective compartment TEKOl. Once loaded, the IW Service automatically sets radio
COMSEC type, data rate and other voice/data mode configurations.
• Load the SATELLITE Transmission Security Key (TSK) and set to the respective compartment TEKOI.

4 . 11 . 2 N e t P r o g r a m m i n g

To program the IW Net configuration settings, follow the steps listed in Table 4-10:

N O T E

See Figure 4-16 for a full listing of IW-related programming

menu choices.

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps

Procedure Information

a . P o w e r o n A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

PGM? WILL LOSE NET warning will display if

b. Press fPGMl and press [ENTj. entering Programming (PGM) Mode from IW Mode. If
this happens, select YES and press Enter [ENT].

c. At the main programming screen, use the

NORM DAMA SCAN
left/right arrow buttons to select IW and
press [ENT]. PORTS SECUR CFIG IW
USE -4^ TO SELECT ITEM

d. From the top-level IW menu, use the

NETS S AT I D TA B L E
left/right arrow buttons to select NETS and
press [ENTj. PORTCFGS
USE TO SELECT ITEM

e. An overview of the NETS Configuration Up to ten IW NETS can be programmed in the radio.
items is provided below. Specific
configuration steps continue in Step f
b e l o w.

NET MENUS

• SELECT NET TO MODIFY

• A C T I VAT E IN LIST?

• S AT E L L I T E ID

• SERVICE

4-51
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps (Continued)

f. Using keypad number buttons, select
desired NET TO MODIFY (0 - 9) and
press [ENTJ.
g. Set the ACTIVATE IN LIST? setting as T h e A C T I VAT E I N L I S T ? f e a t u r e a l l o w s t h e u s e r t o

required. YES is the default. access the IW Net via the Keypad Display Unit (KDU)
front panel [PRE + -J button.
h. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the
required SATELLITE ID and press
[ENTI. S AT E L L I T E ID
N O T E : T h e S AT E L L I T E I D t o s e l e c t i s U 0 4
found in the contents of the SAA message. IWNETO

i. Once the SATELLITE ID setting is

entered, menu will progress to the AUTOCONN SRV NUM
SERVICES sub-menu.
Y 00000
Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll AT TO VIEWTO EDIT
through all assigned Service Numbers.
NOTE: SRV NUM '00000' denotes an available
When '00000' is seen, use the right arrow S e r v i c e N u m b e r.
button to select SRV NUM. The '00000'
Service Number will blink. NOTE: Refer to SAA message for SERVICES. User
can program up to 15 SERVICES per IW Net.

AUTOCONN SRV NUM

Y 24680
j. Type in desired Service Number and press AV TO VIEWTO EDIT
[ENTI once.
NOTE: The first SERVICE number entered defaults to
If additional Services are not being added Y for Auto-Connect {AUTOCONN), but any SERVICE
to this NET, proceed to Step q. number can be set to Auto-Connect if desired. (Refer to
Paragraph 3.10.6.2 for instructions on changing Auto-
Connect settings).

User can still manually connect to programmed

SERVICES via the [I/CALL[ button.

4-52
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps (Continued)

k. If additional Services are being added to
the NET being programmed, use the
up/down arrow buttons to scroll through all
assigned Service Numbers to the NET
being programmed until the first available
Service Number of '00000' is seen and

proceed to Step 1. AUTOCONN SRV NUM

N 00000
NOTE: If a previously programmed
Service is mistakenly changed, enter AT TO VIEW TO EDIT
correct Service Number or overwrite with
'00000' before pressing lENTf Changes
are not saved until you leave the Services
m e n u .

1. Using the right arrow button, select SRV

NUM. The five-digit Service Number will
blink. Type in next Service Number to be
programmed into this NET and press
[ENTf

Repeat Step k and Step 1 until all Service

Numbers have been added for the NET AUTOCONN SRV NUM
being programmed. When all Service N 35790
Numbers have been added, continue to
E N T E R TO S AV E C H A N G E S
Step m.

NOTE: Additional Services can also be

added via [7/OPTl menu once
operationally connected to a Service (refer
to Operation section, Paragraph 3.10.6.1).
m. Using the up/down arrow buttons, select the
SERVICE to which you want to Auto-
Connect.
AUTOCONN SRV NUM
NOTE: Auto-Connect is optional. If N 35790
desired, one Service per IW Net can be
at to view TO EDIT
configured to Auto-Connect.

n. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

A U TO C O N N .

WARNING: If AUTOCONN option is AUTOCONN SRV NUM

used, and the IW Net connection is lost, the N 35790
radio will auto-connect to the Auto-
Connect service even if operating on a AT TO VIEW TO EDIT
different service when the interruption
occurred.

4-53
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps (Continued)

0. Using the up/down arrow buttons, select Y
and press [ENT] once.

AUTOCONN SRV NUM

Y 35790
AT TO VIEW TO EDIT

p. Use the up/down arrow buttons to review

all Services along with the AUTOCONN
setting before proceeding.
q. When done adding Services to this NET,
press [ENT], The SERVICES UPDATE
SUCCESSFUL screen will display. SERVICES U P D AT E

SUCCESSFUL
AT TO VIEW TO EDIT

r A*gjQp** _ completes basic IW Net Remaining parameters (Transmission Security [TSEC],

programming. The Services programming Power, Name, Port Configuration [PCFG]) can be
determines appropriate port configuration changed if required.
settings automatically.

If further changes are required (not

common), proceed to Step t.
s. If IW Net Programming is complete, press
[ PRE + -J or [CLR] repeatedly to exit the
PGM menu and begin IW operations. Refer
to Paragraph 3.10.5.
t. If further changes are required, press (ENT) • FULL - Is the default and is used for normal IW
then use the up/down arrow buttons to operations.
s e l e c t T R A N S M I T C A PA B I L I T Y o f
• EMCON - The Emission Control (EMCON)
either FULL or EMCON. Press |ENT] to
select. setting inhibits transmit. Refer to SAA message to
identify if this parameter is required.
u. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the • ACTIVE - Is the Default and is used for most
required RANGING METHOD setting. instances.
Press [ENTj to select.
• FIXED - Time delay/maintenance use.
• ACTIVE EXP - This item is for advanced users

only, and is used to perform initial ranging prior to

obtaining a complete list of available initial-
ranging services (for situations requiring
expeditious Net entry).

4-54
i^ARRIS AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps (Continued)

V. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the EPOCH Information for vehicle types, maximum miles
required RANGING EPOCH setting. per hour (mph) and approximate Ranging times are
Press [ENTj to select. provided below:

• GROUND/MARITIME - Is the Default (100 mph

- 24 minutes)

• AIR-ROTARY WING - (375 mph - 12 minutes)

• AIR FIXED WING - (900 mph - 6 minutes)
w. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select •

TSEC and press lENTl.

NOTE: The TSEC menu is used to set up TSEC POWER

OW encryption settings. N A M E PCFG
U S E TO SELECT ITEM

X. At the TSEC menu, use the left/right arrow ENCRYPTED is the default and should be used for
buttons to select ENCRYPTED and press operational purposes. Select the required KEY
[ENTl to select. LOCATION and TSK settings.
y. KEY LOCATION 0 - 3 each default to
TSK 01. Press lENTj repeatedly to review
all eight TSK Locations.

Use the up/down arrow keys to select the K E Y L O C AT I O N 0

required TSK for each Key Location and TSK: 01
press (ENTj. IWNETO >

NOTE: Refer to Paragraph 3.10.6.5 for

additional infoiTnation. There are eight slots that can be assigned a TSEC key.
The slot to use is determined by the IW controller and is
After pressing [ENT| at Key Location 7 contained in the SAA message.
proceed to Step z.
z. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select
POWER and press [ENTj.

NOTE: Power Level can also be changed T S E C POWER

via 17/OPTl menu once operationally N A M E P C F G
connected to Service (refer to Operation U S E - <▶ T O S E L E C T I T E M
\

section. Paragraph 3.10.5).

aa. Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the If Vehicular Adapter Unit (VAU) is not is use, press
desired POWER setting between 1 and 20 (ENTl to bypass the VAU POWER LEVEL setting.
watts and press 1ENT|.
ab. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select
NAME and press lENTf

TSEC POWER
N A M E PCFG
U S E TO SELECT ITEM

4-55
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-10. Net Programming Steps (Continued)

ac. Type in the desired Net Name, pressing
[ENT] when completed.

NOTE: It can be helpful to use a Net name CHANGE NAME

that will easily identity a specific IW Net IWNETO
use or organization (for example, MELP IWNETO
VOICENET, DIVISION, COMMAND).
ad. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select
PCFG and press [ENT].

NOTE: The PCFG setting is not typically TSEC POWER

changed. Each IW net will align with its NAME PCFG
PORTCFG (IW NET 1 uses PORTCFGl). USE TO SELECT ITEM

ae. Enter PORTCFG to be associated with the

Net being configured. Press (ENT| when
completed. D E FA U LT CONFIG
0 PORTCFGO
IWNETO

af. When PORTCFG configuration is

complete, press [PRE + -[ or |CLR]
repeatedly to exit the PGM menu and begin
IW operations. Refer to Paragraph 3.10.5.

A CAUTION
Refer to SAA for guidance, consult Department of Defense
(DoD) UHF SATCOM management, or military command
before modifying the default parameters.

4 - 5 6
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4 . 11 . 3 S AT I D TA B L E P r o g r a m m i n g

All pre-assigned SATIDs have 10 inherent downlink frequencies. To modify existing default IW SATIDTABLE
settings, follow the steps in Table 4-11:

ACAUTION I
Default Satellite Identification Table (SATIDTABLE) should
not be changed unless directed by higher authority or by the
organizational SAA message.

Table 4-11. SATIDTABLE Programming Steps

Procedure Information

a . P o w e r o n A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

PGM? WILL LOSE NET warning will display if

b. Press [PGIMI and press [ENT], entering Programming Mode from IW Mode. If this
happens, select YES and press lENTf

c. At the main programming screen, use the

NORM DAMA SCAN
left/right arrow buttons to select IW and
press [ENT|. PORTS SECUR CFIG IW
USE TO SELECT ITEM

d. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select N E T S S AT I D TA B L E

SATIDTABLE and press (ENTj.
PORTCFGS
USE TO SELECT ITEM

e. Select EDIT and press |ENT| once.

NOTE: If an existing pre-assigned SATID

downlink frequency or other parameter is EDIT RESTORE
inadvertently changed, utilize the
R E S T O R E f u n c t i o n . A l l c u s t o m S AT I D
USE TO SELECT ITEM
frequencies will also be defaulted to
original state.
f. Using the up/down arrow buttons, scroll
through all pre-assigned SATIDs.

4-57
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4>11. SATIDTABLE Programming Steps (Continued)

g. When the required SATID has been
displayed, press [ENT] to select.
CHOOSE S AT E L L I T E

F 0 7

h. Use the left/right arrow buttons to select

DOWNLINK and press [ENT].

DL FREQ 01 OF 10 will be flashing. Type S AT N A M E S AT I D

in new DL FREQ and press lENTj. DOWNLINK
USE TO SELECT ITEM
Press [ENT] to access next DL FREQ and
repeat as needed.

DL FREQ 01 OF 10
251.950 MHz
S AT E L L I T E NAME: F07

i. If IW Net Programming is complete, press

[CLR) repeatedly to exit the PGM menu
and begin IW operations. Refer to
Paragraph 3.10.5.

4.11.4 Port Configuration Programming

A CAUTION I
Once Connected to the IW Service number (programmed
earlier in Step j), IW Port Configuration is automatic. Users
wishing to change Data parameters can do so while Connected
to an IW Service using the Options Data (DAT) / Voice (VOC)
m e n u .

To program IW Port Configuration (PORTCFGS) settings, follow the steps in Table 4-12;

N O T E

See Figure 4-16 for a full listing of IW-related Programming

menu choices.

4-58
i^ARRIS AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-12. Port Configuration Programming Steps

Procedure Information

a . P o w e r o n A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

PGM? WILL LOSE NET warning will display if

b. Press [PGM| and press [ENT], entering Programming Mode from IW Mode. If this
happens, select YES and press [ENT).

c. At the main programming screen, use the

NORM DAMA SCAN
left/right arrow buttons to select IW and
press (ENTl. PORTS SECUR CFIG IW
USE TO SELECT ITEM

d. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

PORTCFGS and press [ENT|. NETS S AT I D TA B L E
Up to 10 port configurations can be PORTCFGS
programmed (0 -9). USE TO SELECT ITEM

e. PORT CONFIG will be blinking. Type in

the required number and press 1ENT|. ANDVT TEKOl CT

SELECT PORT CONFIG

NOTE; The PCFG setting is not typically
changed. Port numbers are usually aligned 0 [IWCFGO]
with Net numbers (IW PORT CONFIG 1 is
assigned to NET 1).
f. Select COMSEC and press 1ENT|.

COMSEC D ATA / V O I C E
N A M E
U S E 4▶ TO SELECT ITEM

Use the up/down arrow buttons to select the Available IW COMSEC types and use:
required CRYPTO MODE based upon
contents of the SAA message. • ANDVT - Voice and Data [Default]
• VINSON - Voice and Data
Press lENTl to select.
• KG-84 - Data (Adaptive Radio Data Protocol
[ARDP] / Asynchronous Data Transfer [ADT])
• NONE - Used with extemal encryption devices or
during testing (see NOTE below).
NOTE: For PT communications, Harris recommends
setting the PT / Cipher Text (CT) switch to PT to set
instead of setting CRYPTO MODE to NONE making
PT operation more obvious to the radio operator.

4-59
AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
PROGRAMMING i^ARRIS'
Table 4-12. Port Configuration Programming Steps (Continued)
h. Menus used with each COMSEC type are
listed below:

ANDVT MENUS Select Transmission Encryption Key (TEK) storage 01

to 25, based on the position selected, to COMSEC type
• TEKXX
and store compartment chosen during FILL loading
• TRAINING FRAMES process. Press [ENT] after selection.

• ANDVT RX PRIORITY The ANDVT default settings are typical and should be
correct for most users.
• ANDVT PREAMBLE

VINSON MENUS

• TEK XX
T h e d e f a u l t S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N M O D E o f N O N -
KG-84 MENUS REDUND MODE 3 is the most typical setting and
should be correct for most users.
• TEKXX

• S Y N C H R O N I Z AT I O N MODE

i. Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

DATA/VOICE and press jENTj.
C O M S E C D ATA / V O I C E
N A M E
USE TO SELECT ITEM

j. Select DATAA^OICE and press lENTJ. DATAA'OICE default settings below are based upon
COMSEC type selected earlier.

4-60
h^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-12. Port Configuration Programming Steps (Continued)

k. Menus used with each COMSEC type are
listed below:

ANDVT D ATA / V O I C E MENUS ANDVT default settings are typical and should be
correct for most users.
• VOICE MODE

• VOICE AUTOSWITCH The VOICE MODE default of MELP is the most

typical setting and should be correct for most users.
• OPTION CODE

• BAUD R AT E

VINSON D ATA / V O I C E MENUS

• AUTO ON ADF or AUTO ON D ATA ADF = Audio/Data/Fill (radio connector)

KG-84 SYNC D ATA A ^ O I C E MENUS

• M O D U L AT I O N MODE

• OPTION CODE or High Performance

Waveform (HPW) BAUD RATE

• HPW TRANSEC KEY ID

• I N T E R L E AV I N G

K G - 8 4 A R D P D ATA / V O I C E M E N U S

• M O D U L AT I O N MODE

• OPTION CODE

Using the left/right arrow buttons, select

NAME and press (ENT].
COMSEC D ATA / V O I C E
NAME
U S E TO SELECT ITEM

m. The PORTCFGS Name will be blinking.

Use keypad to enter NAME and press ANDVT TEKOl CT

[ENTj. CHANGE NAME

NOTE: Choose a Name based on Port use, IWCFGO
COMSEC type, Service type or other
recognizable identifier.
n. If IW Net Programming is complete, press
(PRE + -j or [CLR] repeatedly to exit the
PGM menu and begin 1W operations. Refer
to Paragraph 3.10.5.

4-61
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

S AT I D TA B L E PORTCFGS

SELECT NET TO MODIFY SELECT PORTCFG

A C T I VAT E IN LIST?

COMSEC D ATA A / O I C E
R E S T O R E

S AT E L L I T E I D R E S T O R E S AT C H O O S E S AT E L L I T E SYNC/ARDP
I D TA B L E ? — U04
SELECT (2)
U04
— YES •— CHANGE NAME — SYNC
U02 — U02
I— NO I— ENTER 12 •— ARDP
SP2 — SP2

SP1 — SP1 CHAR

D ATA A / O I C E
F07 — F07
CRYPTO MODE (VINSON)
RESERVED — RESERVED
— ANDVT — AUTO ON
(R01-R17) (R01-R17) — VINSON ADF PORT
M 0 4 — M04
— NONE — AUTO ON
M 0 3 — M03
D A T A
— M02 KG-84
M 0 2 PORT
M01 — M01
ENCRYPTION KEY
— U 11 VOICE MODE
U 11 •— TEK01-25
U10 — U10 (ANDVT)
U 0 8 — U08 SYNCHRONIZATION (KG-84)
U 0 7 — U07 — NON-REDUND (MODE 3)
U 0 6 — U06 — REDUNDANT (MODE 2)
U 0 5
•— U05 — REDUNDANT (MODE 1) VOICE
AUTOSWITCH
•— NON-REDUND* (MODE 4) ANDVT
SERVICES S AT N A M E
— ENABLED
AUTOCONN (5) •— EDIT TRAINING FRAMES (ANDVT)
•— DISABLED
— N S AT E L L I T E — 06
L_ Y NAME — 09
M O D U L AT I O N
SVC NUM (6) I— ENTER 3 — 12 MODE (3)
I— ENTER 5 DIGITS CHAR — 15 — MSI 81

x x x x x S AT I D — 20
HPW
— 30
E D I T
T R A N S M I T C A PA B I L I T Y S AT E L L I T E I D I— 60 OPTION CODE
— FULL
I— ENTER 2 (3)
•— EMCON DIGIT ANDVT RX PRIORITY (ANDVT)
I N T E R L E AV I N G
— ENABLED

RANGING METHOD DOWNLINK (1) I— DISABLED (4)

— ACTIVE •— DLFREQ01
— FIXED OF 10 ANDVT PREAMBLE (ANDVT)
— ACTIVE EXP •— ENTER — ENHANCED

M H Z •— STANDARD
RANGING EPOCH
— GROUND/MARITIME
— AIR FIXED WING
I— AIR ROTARY WING (B) TO SHEET 2

— F I X E D R A N G E D E L AY

L- ENTER MSEC
(A) TO SHEET 2 SEE NOTES ON SHEET 2 CL-0109-4100-0001-01B

Figure 4-16. IW Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 1 of 2)

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

FROM SHEET 1

PORTCFGS

D ATA A / O I C E

BAUD R AT E

7 5

300ANDVT
600ANDVT
1200ANDVT
2400ANDVT
4800
6000
7200
8000

9600

1 6 K

19.2
28.8

32 K
38.4
45 K
56 K

POWER

ORDERWiRE MODE TX POWER LEVEL (8) CHANGE NAME D E FA U LT

— 1 0 WAT T S •— ENTER 12 CHAR CONFIG (9)
— ENCRYPTED
— 1 3 WAT T S I— 0-9
I— KEY LOCATION 0-7 — 1 6 WAT T S
— TSK01-25(7)
— 20 WAT T S
I— NONE N O T E S :
— 1 WAT T (1)10 DOWNLINK FREQS ARE REQUIRED. VALID
— UNENCRYPTED — 1 . 3 WAT T S FREQUENCIES ARE 243.000 TO 270.000 MHZ.
— 1 . 6 WAT T S (2) ARDP AVAILABLE ONLY IN KG-84 OR PT, WITH A
TERMINAL SUPPORTING ARDP PROTOCOL.
— 2 WAT T S
(3) ONLY DISPLAYED WHEN ARDP IS DISABLED.
— 2 . 5 WAT T S U S E D F O R S I N G L E - A C C E S S M S I 8 1 S E R V I C E S O N L Y.
— 3 WAT T S (4) USED WITH FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION
— 4 WAT T S (FEC) WITH OPTION CODES 14,15,17,19,138,140
OR 142.
— 5 WAT T S
(5) FIRST SERVICE ADDED TO GUARDLIST IS SET
— 6 . 3 WAT T S
T O A U T O C O N N E C T B Y D E F A U L T. O N L Y O N E
— 8 WAT T S S E R V I C E C A N B E S E T T O A U T O C O N N E C T.
(6) UP TO 15 SERVICES PER IW NET CAN BE SAVED.
— VA U P O W E R L E V E L P R E S S E N T T W I C E T O A C T I VAT E .
(7) PRESS RIGHT ARROW TO ACCESS TSK NUMBER.
LVAU POWER LEVEL (8) LEVELS ABOVE 20 WATTS ONLY AVAILABLE IF
VA U C O N N E C T E D . P R E S S E N T AT 2 0 W AT T S E T T I N G
— 5 WAT T S
TO ACCESS HIGHER POWER OPTIONS (VAU MUST
— 8 WAT T S BE USED).
— 1 3 WAT T S (9) ENTER THE PORT CONFIGURATION TO BE
— 20 WAT T S A S S O C I AT E D W I T H T H E N E T P R E S E T B E I N G
— 32 WAT T S C O N F I G U R E D .

I— 50 WATTS
CL-0109-4100-0001-02B

Figure 4-16. IW Programming Menu Tree (Sheet 2 of 2)

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING i^\RRIS'
4 . 1 2 A N / P R C - 11 7 F A U D I O T O N E S

During AN/PRC-117F operations, certain audio tones are generated to alert the user of operating conditions. Some
audio tones acknowledge a particular action is complete; others indicate an expected action did not occur. Table 4-13
lists the audio tones.

Ta b l e 4 - 1 3 . A u d i o To n e s

Condition To n e Description
Cipher TX Ready Single Beep Occurs after keydown in cipher transmission MODE to indicate
transmission can occur.

Cipher TX Continuous Occurs during beginning of initial keydown in cipher transmission to

Preamble To n e prevent operator from talking during preamble processing. Immediately
Processing followed by the cipher TX ready single beep.
Low Battery Single Beep Occurs every five seconds, if the battery voltage is less than 22 V.
Continuous Beeps once per second in receive if the battery voltage is less than
Beeps 21.5 V (power cutback condition).
Continuous Occurs when AN/PRC-117F is keyed and the battery voltage is less than
To n e 21.5 V (power cutback condition).
BIT - off-line Single Beep Indication for any off-line BIT Failure.
BIT - on-line/ Single Beep Indication for any on-line BIT failure or critical messages for the user.
Critical Message
INFOSEC Initiate Continuous Occurs until Information Security (INFOSEC) board is initialized.
Beeps
PT Receive/CT Single Beep At EOM, AN/PRC-117F receiving message generates a beep.
Receive End of
Message (EOM)
Receiving Plain Continuous Occurs when a PT signal is received in CT or TD. A beep is heard approx
Te x t O v e r r i d e Beeps imately every second while the signal is being received. This will not occur
if using digital squelch.
INFOSEC Alarm Continuous Indicates an INFOSEC alarm that occurs on either of the following two
To n e conditions.
• An internal INFOSEC alarm.

• No valid crypto variable is present when keyed. To clear, change

to a net with a valid crypto variable.
INFOSEC Zeroize Continuous Occurs any time the front panel [MODE) switch enters the [Z-ALL|
Beeps position.
Net Change Single Beep Occurs if the operator changes nets.
Top/Bottom Net Double Beep Occurs if the operator reaches the top or bottom of the net list.
List

SINCGARS Cue Double Beep Indicates tone squelch has been broken on the SINCGARS FH cue
R X channel.

No SINCGARS Fill Continuous Occurs when an empty HOPSET compartment is assigned to a

To n e SINCGARS FH channel.

S A R K , O TA R , a n d 4 Short Beeps Indicates a successful receive rekey.

O T A T 1 Short Beep& Indicates a failed receive rekey.
1 Long Beep
if\RRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Table 4-13. Audio Tones (Continued)

Condition To n e To n e Description
Retrieving a key Continuous Indicates a key requires unwrapping during Key Retrieval from Key
Beeps Management.
HAVEQUICK Continuous Occurs when a HAVEQUICK net is initially activated or when midnight is
MWOD missing Tone reached on an active HAVEQUICK net, and a MWOD is not programmed
for the next DOM.

H AV E Q U I C K Continuous Occurs when a HAVEQUICK net is activated after power-up, but the TOD
T O D u n i n i t i a l i z e d To n e has not been initialized.

HAVEQUICK Double Beep Indicates a call on the programmed HAVEQUICK guard receiver
GUARD RX frequency setting. Press [CALL] from HQ net preset to access guard
receiver preset.
DAMA Call 4 Short Beeps Occurs when a DAMA/DASA call is connected.
Connected

5 kHz MSG Service 4 Short Beeps Occurs in 5 kHz MSG Service when a new message is received and being
New Message held in the buffer.
Received

DAMA Call 1 Long Beep Occurs when a DAMA/DASA call terminates.

Te r m i n a t e d

DAMA Error 2 Short Beeps Occurs when the AN/PRC-117F enters an error state while in DAMA. This
usually means there is a problem with DAMA EOW TSK being used for
the current net.

DAMA Call Continuous Occurs when a DAMA call is pending, queued, or preempted.
Pending Beeps

4.13 SITUATIONAL AWARENESS (SA)

Refer to Paragraph 3.16 for a description of SA. Some considerations when programming SA include the following
items:

• Supports use of PLGR/DAGR in all modes.

• Supports use of NMEA-0183 compliant GPS receiver (except with frequency hopping modes).
• Can use KYV-5 with VINSON keys.
• Can use EDM data (KYV-5) or SDM data types.

A WARNING
Some SA settings can cause the radio to key and transmit
without operator intervention. Failure to plan accordingly
could cause personal injury.

SA can be programmed using the AN/PRC-117F KDU. Refer to Figure 4-17 for the SA menu structure. Alternately,
the AN/PRC-117F can be programmed using the RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M CPA. Refer to the RF-6550M RPA
or RF-6650M CPA documentation for complete information.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING hfARRIS'
Perform the following procedure to program SA:

a. Set the AN/PRC-117F front panel knob to the [FT], [CT], or [TD| position.

b. Press the [PGM] key on the KDU. Use the left/right arrow keys to select CFIG to access configuration
programming, and press lENTJ.
c. Use the left/right arrow keys to select GPS, and press [ENTJ.

d. Use the left/right arrow keys to select SA, and press [ENTl.

e. COMBAT ID (CID) is displayed, showing the radio serial number as default. To keep the default, press
[ENTJ. To configure a custom CID, enter a number that is unique for this radio, and press [ENT].

f. If you wish to return the Combat ID back to its default value (the radio serial number), zeroize the radio.

g. If this radio will not be receiving SA data, make sure that SA RECEIVE is OFF, press [ENTJ, and then
proceed to Step 1.
h. If this radio will be receiving SA data, use the up/down arrow keys to select ON, and press [ENTJ.
When SA RECEIVE is ON, SA reports are sent out the J3 data port (and also the PPP port when PPP
is connected).

i. Use the up/down arrow keys to choose the SA PACKET TYPE. Choices are SINCGARS or HARRIS.
SINCGARS packet format meets all Enhanced SINCGARS Improvement Program (ESIP) standards.
HARRIS packet format meets all ESIP standards while also including radio type and a receive
timestamp. Press [ENT] to continue.

j. Enter the destination SA IP Address, and press [ENTJ. The default of255.255.255.255 (broadcast) can
be kept or changed.

k. Use the up/down arrow keys to turn local SA reports ON or OFF. The term local refers to SA reports
of the radio currently being programmed.

1. Use the up/down arrow keys to choose SA TRANSMIT method. Choices are OFF, PER & MOVE,
MOVE, PER, or AUTO:
• OFF - No SA transmission occurs.

• AUTO - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs (i.e. every time the handset is
keyed). AUTO is not available when using SA over IP; this setting will change to PER for IP nets.
• PER (Periodic) - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs, and transmits on the
programmed time period (1-1440 minute range) if no other transmission occurs. Default setting is
two minutes.

• MOVE - Transmit SA data when any other transmission occurs, or when the radio moves a
specified distance from the last SA transmission. Setting is user programmable from 100 to 1000
meters, or 300 to 1000 meters if radio is installed in a Vehicular Adapter Unit (default settings are
100 meters and 300 meters, respectively). Radio will also transmit SA data when crossing Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) boundaries.
• PER & MOVE - A combination of PER and MOVE. This feature gives the user a way to do both
period and movement SA at the same time.
m. Press the [CLR] button to exit out of the programming menu.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

C O M B AT I D
(00001 - 99999)
SA RECEIVE

S A PA C K E T T Y P E

F— SINCGARS

SA IP ADDRESS
(255.255.255.255)

LOCAL SA REPORTS

SA TRANSMIT

PER

_l PERO
I DN
I MN
I UTES
MOVE (1-''440min.)
I MOVEMENT
(100-1000 METERS)

VRC MOVEMENT
(300-1000 METERS)
PER & MOVE

■ PERIOD IN MINUTES

(1-1440 MIN.)
> MOVEMENT

(100-1000 METERS)
• VRC MOVEMENT

(300-1000 METERS)

Figure 4-17. SA Programming Menu Tree

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.14 EXCLUSION BAND

The AN/PRC-117F supports exclusion band programming for radio use in some host countries. Exclusion Band
prevents the AN/PRC-117F from keying on certain frequencies using LOS or SATCOM. SINCGARS and
HAVEQUICK use their own lockout schemes. See Figure 4-18 for the programming menu. Perform the following
procedure to program Exclusion Band:
a. Press [FGMl, then select NORM and press [ENT|.

b. Go to EXCLBAND menu choice and press [ENT] to select.

c. Select ADD, REVIEW, or DELETE.

d. If adding:

1. Enter start frequency in MHz.

2. Enter stop frequency in MHz. When exclusion band has been entered, EXCLUSION BAND
ADDED is displayed.

e. If reviewing;

1. Press ^ or ▼ to scroll through list. If exclusion band has not been entered, EXCLUSION BAND
DATABASE EMPTY is displayed.

f. If deleting:

1. Press or ▼ to scroll through list.

2. Press [ENT] to delete. When exclusion band has been deleted, EXCLUSION BAND DELETED
is displayed.

• ENTER START FREQUENCY , EXCLUSION BAND 1/7 .EXCLUSION BAND 1/7 a

XXX.XXXXX MHZ XXXJ(XXXX-XXX.XXXXX XXX.XXXXX-XXX.XXXXX ▼

. E N T E R S TO P F R E Q U E N C Y
XXX.XXXXXMHZ

Figure 4-18. Exclusion Band Programming Menu Tree

4.15 INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) FOR HPW

The following paragraphs describe the theory of operation and use of optional IP in the AN/PRC-117F. IP can be
used in SATCOM or in LOS mode. IP parameters can be configured from the AN/PRC-117F KDU or by using the
RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M CPA. This manual explains configuration using the KDU; however, the CPA is
recommended for programming consistency and ease of use. Refer to the RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M CPA
documentation for more information.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

Contact Harris for additional information about IP configuration with Falcon II radios. Harris also offers Network
Planning Application Note (11081-7000), and IP e-Leaming package (10515-0219-7100).

4.15.1 IP Theory of Operation

Radio planners are responsible for choice of channel (frequency) management. In other words, automated channel
selection is not performed by the radio. Figure 4-19 shows a basic network configuration for directed calling and
wireless IP data operation.

The AN/PRC-1I7F offers a wireless IP capability that allows system operators to use IP-based Personal Computer
(PC) software applications. The radio can be fully integrated into a local or wide-area network using the radio's
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) interface. When configured for IP data transfer, the radio will deliver IP data packets
to a remote radio station based on the routing information programmed in the radio. Radio packet processing uses
conglomeration and compression of individual IP data packets to improve the efficiency of the data transfer. Any
application that uses the IP protocol is allowed; however, latency and bandwidth considerations will make some
applications impractical.

IBM C O M PAT I B L E LAPTOP COMPUTER

192.168.1.0 192.168.1.16
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

ROUTER
192.168.1.2
fHHWl
172.16.1.101

172.16.1.103
172.16.1.102

(BQHI)
172.16.1.100

I
LAPTOP COMPUTER LAPTOP COMPUTER

192.168.1.48 192.168.1.32

255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Figure 4-19. Example Network Configuration

4-69
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.15.2 Setup Parameters

The following paragraphs provide setup information for IP.

A
l WARNINGI
Some of the settings can cause the radio to key and transmit
without operator intervention. Failure to plan accordingly
could cause personal injury or death.

4.15.2.1 RPR Port Setup

See Figure 4-20. When used with HPW, setup parameters for the PPP port can be accessed from
[PGM)>PORTS> PPP. The bottom line of the KDU shows the current status of the PPP link and displays either
PPP LINK DOWN or PPP LINK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the current peer address). Parameters are as follows:

• ENABLE PPP PORT - Is the PPP port enabled or not (default is YES).
• IP ADDRESS - The IP address of the radio's PPP port (default is 10.0.0.1).
• PEER ADDRESS - The IP address to offer the peer, if the peer wants a server-assigned IP address.
• DATA RATE - The baud rate of the PPP serial interface.

The RF-6760W-HPW has the following default settings. With radio firmware v4.0.1.7 and above, the settings can
be changed if necessary:

• IP ADDRESS -10.0.0.1

• PEER ADDRESS - 0.0.0.0 (don't offer address to peer)

• D ATA R AT E - 2 3 0 k b a u d

ENABLE PPP PORT

IP ADDRESS
XXX.XXX.XXXJCXX

, PEER IP ADDRESS
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

D ATA R AT E
230 K ^

Figure 4-20. RRR Rort Setup Rrogramming Menu Tree

h^ARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.15.3 HPW IP Displays

See Figure 4-21 for sample HPW displays. The AN/PRC-117F supports IP addressing with LOS and SATCOM
HPW operation. Definitions of operational displays are described in the paragraphs that follow.

Channel access states consist of the following values:

• IDLE - data is not being sent or transmitted.

• WAITING - the radio is waiting for channel access.
• SENDING - the radio is sending data.

• SENDING (waiting) - the radio is ready to send data, but is waiting for channel access.
• RECEIVING - the radio is receiving data.

• CALLING - the radio is attempting to connect with another radio.

• BUSY - traffic on the channel not destined for that radio.

HPW actual transfer rates are based on channel conditions. Typical shift points are as shown in Table 4-14.

Kilobytes transmitted and received are defined by the following letters:

• T - is the number of kilobytes transmitted since going on-net.
• R - is the number of kilobytes received since going on-net.

Message Originator and Destination meanings consist of the following codes:

• GRIG - is the origin HPW address of the most recent message.
• DEST - is the destination HPW address of the most recent message.

The GRIG and DEST codes displayed on the screen are defined as the lower part of the IP Address based on the
subnet mask. For example:

If the subnet mask is 255.255.255.Y, then the HPW ID displayed is Y.

If the subnet mask is 255.255.X.Y, then the HPW ID displayed is X * 256 + Y.

Ta b l e 4 - 1 4 . H P W T r a n s f e r B a u d R a t e s

UFO 25 kHz 5 kHz

L O W 18k 21.33 k 4.3 k

M E D 37 k 42.66 k 8.5 k

H I G H 56 k — —
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

KG-84 TEK01 CT

0 1 - S AT S I M U F O

S AT OFF D AT HPW OFF

TYPE ADF D ATA MODE SQL

HPW IP SCREEN 1
CIRCULAR ARROWS
B U T T O N

KG-84 TEKOi ^

R: 240.20000 SAT 0
T: 294.20000

FREQUENCY

HPW IP SCREEN 2

■: KG-84 TEKOI CT

IDLE 0 ■!
T: 0 0 0 0 1 R:00010
tGE ORIG:00001 D E S T: 1 0 0 0 0

HPW IP SCREEN 3

Figure 4-21. HPW IP Operational Displays

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.15.3.1 HPW IP Routes Setup

See Figure 4-22. When used with HPW, setup parameters for the IP networking can be accessed from
[PGM]> NORM>GENERAL>IP_ROUTES. IP route menu choices consist of the following items.
• ADD IP routes

• REVIEW IP routes

• DELETE IP routes

D E S T I N AT I O N ADDRESS D E S T: 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0
ENTER TO DELETE
XXX.XXXJ(XX.XXX MASK: 000.000.000.000

> SUBNET MASK N E X T: 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 0

000.000.000.000 INTERFACE: WIRELESS OR PPP
, NEXT NODE ADDRESS
000.000.000.000

Figure 4-22. HPW IP Routes Programming Menu Tree

4.15.3.2 IP Network Setup (Only for HPW Nets)

See Figure 4-2. When used with HPW, setup parameters for the IP networking can be accessed from
|PGMi> NORM> NET>DATAA^OC. IP network menu choices consist of the following items.
• ENABLE TCPIP

• WIRELESS IP ADDRESS

• SUBNET MASK

• GATEWAY ADDRESS (000.000.000.000 is for no gateway)

4.16 CTI PROGRAMMING

Refer to Paragraph 3.25 for CTI operation. The CTI functionality can be configured from the AN/PRC-117F KDU
or by using the RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M CPA. This manual explains configuration using the KDU; however,
the CPA is recommended for programming consistency and ease of use. Refer to the RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M
CPA documentation for more information.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

4.16.1 CTI Enablement

The CTI feature can be enabled using the programming menu tree in Figure 4-23.

TELEPHONY INTERFACE

TEL STATION ID (1)

INACTIVITY TIMEOUT
(1) 20 CHARACTER ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY.
DEFAULT: RADIO SERIAL NUMBER WITH PRECEDING ZEROS.

(2) AVAILABLE RANGE (SECS)

0010 • 1800, DEFAULT: OOSO

(3) IF VALUE ENTERED IS OUT OF RANGE, A WARNING

MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED: INACTIVITY TIMEOUT (2,3)

E R R O R
F-0109-410(M)220
" OUT OF RANGE **

Figure 4-23. CTI Programming Menu Tree

4.16.2 CTI Programming for the SATCOM Net

See Figure 4-24. The CTI feature can be configured for the AN/PRC-117F in a SATCOM network.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

SELECT NET TO MODIFY

ACTIVATE IN LIST?

NET TYPE S AT C O M

(1) MENU ITEM AVAILABILITY IS DEPENDENT ON FACTORS

SUCH AS FREQUENCY AND COMSEC CHOICES.

(2) 20 CHARACTER ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY

NET TELEPHONY ID DEFAULT: RADIO SERIAL NUMBER WITH PRECEDING
ZEROS.
F-0109-4100-0230

Figure 4-24. CTI Programming Menu Tree for a SATCOM Net

4.17 POWER SETTING PROGRAMMING

Refer to Paragraph 3.23.3 for a description of the power setting options. The power settings can be changed through
menus from the [OPT] button or from the [FGM] button.

4.17.1 Power Menu from the [OPT] Button

The power menu displayed depends on the current radio state:

a. If the radio is not connected to an extemal device or the Bypass setting is enabled, then the menu
displayed is for TX Power. See Figure 4-25. The values actually displayed vary depending on the
current waveform configuration.

b. If the radio is connected to an extemal device and the Bypass setting is disabled, then the menu
displayed is for VAU Power. See Figure 4-26. The values actually displayed vary depending on the
current waveform configuration.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

TX POWER LEVEL

F-0109-4100-0240

Figure 4-25. TX Power Menu

VA U P O W E R L E V E L

F-0109-4100-0250

Figure 4-26. VAU Power Menu

4.17.2 Power Menu from the [PGM] Button

The power menu displayed from the [PGM] button includes both the TX Power and VAU Power settings. See
Figure 4-27 for the menu provided from the [PGM] button. The values actually displayed vary depending on the
current waveform configuration.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

TX POWER LEVEL

VA U P O W E R L E V E L

F-0109-4100-0260

Figure 4-27. PGM Button Power Menu

4 . 1 8 P R O G R A M M I N G M U T E D ATA A U D I O I N T H E H A N D S E T

Refer to Paragraph 3.26 for the operation of the mute data audio feature. See Figure 4-28 for the mute data audio
programming menu. Perform the following procedure to enable the feature programmatically:
a. Press [PGMl > CFIG > GENERAL > [ENTJ.

b. A series of configuration options will follow as shown in Figure 4-28.

c. Select MUTE DATA AUDIO; press [ENTJ.

d. To enable the feature, select YES and press [ENTj.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PROGRAMMING

- E X T E R N A L TA C S AT L N A P O W E R

-FM TRANSMIT TONE

- AM TRANSMIT TONE

■S I L E N C E E R R O R B E E P S

A U TO S AV E O V E R R I D E S

- C O N S T. L I G H T O P T I O N

•ANDVTFADE PRIORITY

CTCSS/DCS PRIORITY

• PA FA I L S A F E O V R

VOICE PRIORITY

S I M U L R X V O C / D AT

M U T E D ATA A U D I O

Figure 4-28. Mute Data Audio Programming Menu

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 5

PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Preventive maintenance is the systematic, scheduled care, and inspection of equipment to prevent equipment failure
and to reduce downtime.

Preventive maintenance consists of keeping the equipment clean, dry, and dust-free.

Use a soft brush, a moist sponge, and a clean cloth to keep equipment clean.

Table 5-1 contains the checks and services that should be performed either on a daily basis when the equipment is
in use or on a weekly basis when the equipment is in a standby condition. Table 5-2 contains the checks and services
that should be performed on a weekly basis. Table 5-3 contains the checks and services that should be performed on
a yearly basis or sooner if local guidance or mission dictates. Table 5-4 contains maintenance that should be
performed on an as-needed basis.

Table 5-1. Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure

Operation Perform self-test. Refer to Paragraph 3.19.

Battery Box Vent Check to make sure vent does not allow air flow from
the outside of the battery box to the inside of the box.
Communications Check Check net presets for transmit and receive.
Battery Level Perform battery level test.

Table 5-2. Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
1 Antennas Check for breaks or strains; repair or replace as required.
2 Connectors Visually inspect for corrosion, damage, or looseness.
3 Protective Caps Ensure protective caps are in place if connectors are not in

Handles Visually inspect for damage or looseness.

Table 5-3. Yearly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure
1 Hold-Up Battery (HUB) Replace HUB. Refer to Paragraph 5.4.4.
2 AN/PRC-117F performance Refer to AN/PRC-117F Intermediate Maintenance
Manual (10515-0109-4300) for annual AN/PRC-117F
performance checks.
3 R a d i o F i r m w a r e C h e c k fi r m w a r e l e v e l a g a i n s t s e r v i c e c o m m a n d s t a n d a r d ,
or see Harris for updates. Re-program radio if necessary.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Ta b l e 5 - 4 . A s - N e e d e d P r e v e n t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e

Check No. Item to be Inspected Procedure

Battery After exposure to fresh or salt water, detach battery from

the radio. Rinse battery with fresh, clean water and
thoroughly dry with a soft cloth to prevent corrosion. Do
not use heat to dry the battery. In the event corrosion does
occur, clean the battery terminals using a Nylon Mesh
Abrasive Pad (3M Scotchbrite 7447 or Equivalent).

5.2 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Shortcomings and defects found during preventive maintenance, or which appear when the AN/PRC-117F system
is in service, must be corrected.

The following procedures assume that the operator has determined that the AN/PRC-117F is faulty. This could be
determined in three ways:

• The operator has run self-test and a fault has been identified by the AN/PRC-117F.
• A fault message is displayed by the AN/PRC-117F upon power-up or during normal operation.
• The operator has observed degraded operation that suggests the system is faulty.
Whenever the operator believes that the AN/PRC-117F may be faulty, the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter
should be followed to determine the recommended corrective action. If the symptom observed is not covered, report
the problem to a Level III maintainer.

5 . 2 . 1 Tr o u b l e s h o o t i n g P r o c e d u r e s

Faults can be detected by Built-in Test (BIT) or visual observation. Self-test faults are displayed on the Keypad
Display Unit (KDU). The following paragraphs identify probable failure causes, and suggested corrective actions.
Check AN/PRC-117F programming to ensure any AN/PRC-117F with a suspected problem does indeed have a
problem.

5.2.1.1 BIT Faults

BIT faults can be viewed following an operator-executed self-test. For information on performing a BIT test, refer
to Paragraph 3.19.

When the AN/PRC-117F displays a fault message, record all fault code information displayed on the KDU, then
report the fault to a Level III maintainer or Harris Corporation.

5.2.1.2 Non-BIT Faults

Non-BIT faults are operator-observed failures, or cases of degraded operation. Locate the observation in the first
column of Table 5-5 and follow the recommended action. If the recommended action is unsuccessful, report the
problem to a Level III maintainer.

5-2
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table 5-5. Non-BIT Troubleshooting

Observation Action

AN/PRC-117F does not power on. Check batteries, power supply, KDU, or KDU
cable.

No Receive/Transmit audio; AN/PRC-117F Push-to-Talk Use a different handset.

does not key AN/PRC-117F.
Intermittent Receive audio. Clean handset connectors. Replace handset.
♦♦****fault******receiver protection is Move AN/PRC-117F away from source of strong
displayed on front panel. RF signal.
FW VERSION MISMATCH is displayed on front panel. Send AN/PRC-117F to Level III maintenance
facility as soon as possible.
HW VERSION MISMATCH is displayed on front panel. Send AN/PRC-117F to Level III maintenance
facility as soon as possible.
AN/PRC-117F does not hold programmed parameters and Check HUB by running BIT. Replace HUB if
fill data after main batteries are removed and replaced. necessary. Refer to Paragraph 5.4.4.
NV RAM FAILURE is displayed on front panel. (Firmware revision older than 3.6.) This is a normal
event after powering up from [CLRl and the
message should not be displayed on the next power
up if Communications Security (COMSEC) keys
are loaded. If the failure continues, send
AN/PRC-117F to Level III maintenance.

******^ARNING******BLACK data reset is (Firmware revision 3.6 and newer.) This is a normal
displayed on front panel. event after powering up from [CLRJ and the
message should not be displayed on the next power
up. If the failure is displayed on every power up, the
HUB should first be replaced. If the warning
continues, send AN/PRC-117F to Level III
maintenance.

5.3 FIRMWARE AND HARDWARE VERSIONS

The versions of the Printed Wiring Board (PWB) assemblies and firmware in an AN/PRC-117F can be viewed by
pressing [MODE] > TEST > VERSIONS, and then by selecting HARDWARE, FIRMWARE, GYM, or
SERIAL. Within each of these choices, press or ▼ to scroll through the installed features list. The choices are
defined as follows:

• HARDWARE - the hardware revision number of the PWB assemblies.

• FIRMWARE - the radio system firmware version; and the firmware version on each of the boards.
• GYM - Displays the Options Validation Matrix (GYM) features installed in the radio. Refer to
Paragraph 1.5 for further explanation.
• SERIAL - Displays the Receiver/Transmitter (R/T) serial number.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

B AT T E R I E S

The AN/PRC-117F is supplied with Battery Box 10513-4800 that holds two batteries. Use any of the following
battery types, but do not mix types together.
• BA-5590/U lithium non-rechargeable
• BA-5390/U lithium non-rechargeable
• BB-590/U Ni-Cd rechargeable
• BB-390A/U Ni-MH rechargeable
• BB-2590AJ Lithium-Ion rechargeable

Refer to Paragraph 2.3. See Figure 2-2 for information on installing the batteries into the battery box, and how to
installing the battery box onto the transceiver.

WARNN
I GI
Never expose batteries to any amount of water at any time.
This could cause a fire or explosion, causing personal injury.

5.4.1 Battery Life

The chief factor in determining battery life is transmission output power and duty cycle. To maximize battery life;
keep AN/PRC-117F off when not needed, minimize transmissions, and use the lowest transmit power level required
to successfiilly communicate.

Each battery type has specific characteristics and limitations. It is recommended that the user become aware of
proper handling and management of the batteries to ensure maximum life. Consult the battery manufacturer or
Harris for more information.

5.4.2 Disposing of Batteries

WARNING

For batteries containing Lithium and/or Thionyl Chloride, do

not crush, puncture, disassemble, mutilate, short circuit,
incinerate, immerse in water, or expose to temperatures above
130 °F (54 °C); the battery could vent or rupture, releasing
toxic material which may cause injury or death to personnel.

A WARNING
Damaged or depleted multicell lithium batteries must be
processed as hazardous waste. Do not dispose of batteries in
uncontrolled trash as batteries may contain hazardous
materials. Check with local directives for proper disposal.
Failure to comply could cause personnel injury or death.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

A WARNING
Do not activate the Complete Discard Device (CDD) of a
damaged battery. Battery discharging must be performed by
properly trained personnel only.

5.4.3 Power Supplies and Battery Eliminators

When using the AN/PRC-117F from a fixed location with AC power available, use a power source that has been
designed for the AN/PRC-117F or is capable of providing more than 4.8 Amps DC input at the nominal 28 VDC.
Some power supplies have similar form factors and can be attached to the AN/PRC-117F, but were designed for
smaller current load requirements and should not be used.

A WARNING
Do not attempt to recharge a BA-5590/U or BA-5390/U
Lithium Battery. Battery may explode, causing injury or death
to personnel.

i A WARNING I
Do not overcharge, short circuit, incinerate, or mutilate
rechargeable batteries. Charge batteries per manufacturer's
instructions. Failure to comply could cause injury or death.

Harris offers battery chargers that can be used to charge and condition BB-590AJ Ni-Cd, BB-390AAJ Ni-MH, and
BB-2590/U Lithium-Ion rechargeable batteries. Two charger versions are available, and both provide fully
automatic battery charging/conditioning of all three battery types. The RF-5058-CH002 will charge and condition
up to two batteries. The RF-5058-CH006 will charge and condition up to six batteries. Indicators display the status
of each connected battery during operation. The units can be operated on 95-260 VAC, 47-440 Hz, or 12-36 VDC,
and are fully autoranging.

5.4.4 Hold-Up Battery (HUB)

The HUB is used to maintain power for the internal memory when the function switch is in the (OFFl position, or
the main batteries are removed. The HUB maintains the memory that holds the programmed parameters (black data)
and the COMSEC fills (red data). When the main batteries are installed, they provide the memory hold-up even if
the HUB is dead or missing.

The HUB is a 3.6 VDC commercially available lithium battery - B41-0010-004, SAFT # LS 14250C, National Stock
Number (NSN) 6135-01-525-9943.

Replace the HUB annually. Some users and/or units may want to institute a replace prior to mission deployment plan
to ensure maximum HUB readiness. See Figure 5-1. When the AN/PRC-117F is in storage, keep front panel
function switch in the [CLRJ position. This will disconnect the HUB and extend battery life.

A dead HUB is indicated if AN/PRC-117F does not hold programmed parameters and fill data after removing and
replacing main batteries. The HUB can be tested by executing a BIT. If the HUB is bad or low, the AN/PRC-117F
will indicate a minor fault. Refer to Paragraph 3.19 for test mode.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C) H / u m t s '
PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

AWARNING
Do not dispose of batteries in uncontrolled trash as batteries
may contain hazardous materials. Check with local directives
for proper disposal. Failure to comply could cause personnel
injury or death.
Perform the following procedure to replace the HUB to retain AN/PRC-117F programming and configuration
information:

a. Disconnect battery box and leave battery connected to the right rear panel BATTERY connector J10
(facing rear side of radio).
b. Without tuming the radio (OFF], remove and replace the HUB as shown in Figure 5-1.
c. Turn the radio [OFF], install the second battery and battery box.
d. Perform radio self-test to determine if the HUB is installed correctly. The BIT will detect an incorrectly
installed HUB.

NOTE

Ensure HUB is correctly oriented with the battery polarity

aligned with the polarity markings on the AN/PRC-117F.

H O L D U P B AT T E R Y

H O L D U P B AT T E R Y C O V E R

T O P R E V E N T T H E L O S S O F R A D I O C O N F I G U R AT I O N I N F O R M AT I O N A N D
ENCRYPTION KEYS DURING HUB REPLACEMENT, LEAVE A BATTERY CONNECTED TO THE
REAR PANEL BATTERY CONNECTOR J10, AND LEAVE THE RADIO POWERED ON.

Figure 5-1. Replacing Hub

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

APPENDIX A

A . 1 T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S

Table A-1 lists the specifications for the AN/PRC-117F radio set.

Table A-1. AN/PRC-117F Specifications

Function Specification
G E N E R A L

Frequency Range Very High Frequency (VHF)-Low: 30.000 MHz - 89.99999 MHz
VHF-High: 90.000 - 224.99999 MHz
Ultra High Frequency (UHF): 225.000 MHz - 511.99999 MHz
UHF Satellite Communications (SATCOM): 243.000 MHz - 270.000 MHz
and 292.000 MHz - 318.000 MHz

Channel Spacing Resolution: 10 Hz

Nominal: 5 kHz
VHF-Low: 25 kHz
VHF-High / UHF: 12.5, or 25 kHz -FM,
8.33,12.5 kHz, or 25 kHz - AM
Preset Channels 100 fully programmable normal mode presets, 10 Demand Assigned Multiple
Access (DAMA) net presets with 10 DAMA port configuration presets and
50 DAMA destination presets. BEACON mode preset. Single Channel
Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) cue and manual channel.
HAVEQUICK Guard Receiver preset. 10 Integrated Waveform (IW) net
presets and 10 IW Port Presets.
Modulation VHF-Low: FM (5 kHz, 6.5 kHz, or 8 kHz), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)
VHF-High: FM (5 kHz, 6.5 kHz, or 8 kHz); Amplitude Modulation (AM)
(90%), FSK, Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK)
UHF: FM (5 kHz, 6.5 kHz or 8 kHz); AM (90%), FSK, ASK
UHF SATCOM: FSK, Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), Shaped Binary
Phase Shift Keying (SBPSK), Differentially Encoded Quadrature
(DEQPSK), Continuous Phase Modulation (CPM)
Power Supply 28 VDC Nominal, accepts two BA-5590AJ, BA-5390/U, BB-390AAJ,
BB-590, or BB-2590AJ Batteries
Environmental Te s t e d t o M I L - S T D - 8 1 0 E

ShockA^ibration Ground mobile environment

Immersion 3 ft (0.9 m) of water

Operating Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C

Altitude Operate to 15,000 ft (4572 m)

Operate after air drop from 40,000 ft (12192 m)
Displacement Volume 235 in^ (3850 cm^^ (w/o battery case)
375 in^ (6145 cm^^ (w/battery case)
Size (maximum envelope) 3.2 H X 10.5 W X 9.6 D in. (8.1 H x 26.6 W x 24.5 D cm.) - (w/o battery case)
3.2 H X 10.5 W X 13.5 D in. (8.1 H x 26.6 W x 34.2 D cm.) - (w^attery case)
Weight 15.9 lbs (7.2 kg) - (with two BA-5590 batteries and battery case)
9.8 lbs (4.4 kg) - (without batteries or battery case)
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-1. AN/PRC-117F Specifications (Continued)

Function Specification
Vo i c e M o d e s Simplex or Half-Duplex
! Plain Text Analog Voice
SINCGARS Frequency Hopping (FH) Electronic Counter-Counter Measures
(ECCM) (VHF-Low band only, 30.0 - 87.975 MHz)
HAVEQUICK FH ECCM (UHF band, 225.0 - 399.975 MHz)
25 kHz Cipher Text Digital Voice (16 kbps; Continuously Variable Slope
Delta (CVSD);KY-57)
5 kHz Cipher Text Digital Voice (2.4 kbps; Linear Predictive Coding (LPC)
-10, Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction (MELP), Advanced Narrowband
Digital Voice Terminal (ANDVT) / KYV-5)
Data Modes Simplex or Half-Duplex
Asynchronous data (75, 150,300,600, 1200,2400,4800, 9600,19.2 k, 38.4
k, 48 k, 57.6 k, 64 k, 115.2 k bps)
Synchronous (75,150,300, 600,1200, 2400,4800, 9600, 12 k, 16 k, 19.2 k,
38.4 k, 48 k, 56 k, 64 kbps)
SINCGARS FH ECCM (VHF-Low band/16 kbps only)
25 kHz Cipher Text Digital Data (16 kbps; KY-57)
5 kHz Cipher Text Digital Data (2.4 kbps; ANDVT/KYV-5)
KG-84C

SATCOM Compatibility MlL-STD-188-181 (Rev B and Rev C) - Dedicated Channels / KG-84 Voice
MlL-STD-188-182 (Rev - and Rev A) - 5 kHz DAMA

MlL-STD-188-183 (Rev - and Rev A) - 25 kHz AC, DC DAMA

Full DAMA engineer orderwire capability

MlL-STD-188-183 (Rev B) - 5 kHz and 25 kHz

COMSEC Interoperability KY-57 VINSON, ANDVT/KYV-5 (Mode 3), KG-84C, Fascinator
COMSEC Features One Red Key Encryption Key (KEK), One Cryptographic Ignition Key
(CIK), Over the Air Rekey (OTAR), including fiil Savile Advanced Remote
Keying (SARK) capability. Benign Key, Benign Fill, up to 250 black keys of
any combination of Transmission Encryption Key (TEK), KEK, or
Transmission Security Key (TSK)
COMSEC Fill Devices KYK-13, KOl-18, KYX-15, MX-18290 and AN/CYZ-10 Data Transfer
Device (DTD) - supports DS-101 and DS-102 fill formats
TRANSEC Interoperability SINCGARS FH (per JTCCCA 900IC)
TRANSEC Fill Devices MX-18290/VRC; AN/CYZ-10 DTD using FH Fill Mode 1, 2, or 3
Global Positioning System (GPS) External dedicated interface, AN/PSN-11 Portable Lightweight GPS
Capability Receiver (PLGR) and PLGR-11 compatible
Commercial National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) compatible
External Data Interfaces RS-232E, MlL-STD-188-114A, RS-422 compatible
Remote Control Capability RS-232E or RS-422 compatible
Interoperable Radios AN/PRC-117D(V)2; AN/VRC-94D(V)2; AN/PRC-119A/D/E Combat Net
Radio (CNR), AN/PRC-113; AN/PRC-77, PSC-5, LST-5C/D/E,
AN/PRC-148
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-1. AN/PRC-117F Specifications (Continued)

Function S p e c i fi c a t i o n
T R A N S M I T T E R S P E C I F I C AT I O N S

Output Power: VHP-LOW FM / Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM): 1-10 W Peak Envelope Power (PEP)
and Average (Avg.)
Output Power: SINCGARS FM/FH: 1 -10 W PEP and Avg.
Output Power: VHF-HIGH FM/TCM:l-20 W PEP and Avg.
90 MHz - 225 MHz AM: 1-10 W Avg
Output Power: UHF FM/TCM:l-20 W PEP and Avg.
225 MHz - 399.99999 MHz AM: 1-10 W Avg
Output Power: HAVEQUICK AM: 1-10 W Avg.
Output Power: UHF FM/TCM: 1-10 W PEP and Avg.
4 0 0 M H z - 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 M H z AM: 1-10 W PEP (1 - 4 W average).

Output Power: UHF Tactical FM: 2-20 W PEP and Avg.

Satellite (TACSAT)
Output Power: Vehicular Adapter FM/TCM: 5-50 W PEP and Avg.
Unit (VAU) AM: 5-20 W Avg

Output Power Selection, manpack Variable in 1 dB steps over stated range

Output Power Selection, VAU Variable in 2 dB steps over stated range
Harmonic Suppression 40 dB

Frequency Stability 1 X 10"^

R E C E I V E R S P E C I F I C AT I O N S

Sensitivity: VHF-Low FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB Signal to Noise and Distortion (SINAD)
Sensitivity: VHF-High FM: -118 dBm for 10 dB SINAD
AM: -110 dBm for 10 dB SINAD, 70% Modulation

Sensitivity: UHF TACSAT FM: -120 dBm for 10 dB SINAD

Adjacent Channel Rejection 60 dB referenced to 10 dB SINAD (50 kHz channel)

NOTE I Urn

Harris engineers continuously strive to improve all aspects of

Harris equipment, therefore specifications are subject to
change without notice.

A-3
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

A . 2 C H A S S I S C O N N E C TO R P I N O U T D ATA

Table A-2 through Table A-9 provide pinout data for the external and battery connectors mounted on the
A N / P R C - 11 7 F c h a s s i s .

Ta b l e A - 2 . F r o n t P a n e l J 1 A U D I O / D A T A / F I L L C o n n e c t o r

Pin# Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

A N / A Audio Connector Ground Ground Audio and Data

B O 1 . Va r i a b l e A u d i o O u t 1. 3.0 V rms Audio into 1 K 1. Audio Mode

2. Analog Data Out load 2. Analog Data Mode
3. Data Out 2. 220 millivolt (mV) Root- 3. Data Mode
Mean-Squared (RMS)
3 . M 1 L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A
compatible, unbalanced
C 1 Handset Push-To-Talk (PIT) 3.3 V thru 15 k ohm, ground to Audio and Data
activate

D 1/0 1. Microphone Audio In 1. 2.6 mV rms, 150-ohm 1. Handset Audio

2. Data Clock Out 2 . M 1 L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A 2. Digital Data
compatible
3. Analog Data In 3. 220 mV rms 3. Analog Data
E 1 Digital Data Mode Control 3.3 V thru 15 kohm, ground to Selects Digital Data
activate Mode

■
F 1. Analog Data Control 1. 3.3 V thru 15 kohm, ground to 1. Analog Data
activate
2. Data In 2 . M 1 L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A 2. Digital Data
compatible, unbalanced

Table A-3. Front Panel J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL Connector, DS-102 Mode Interface

Pin# Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

A 0 Fill Reference +5.0 V Output DS-102

B 1 Fill Sense/Multiplex Pulled Up, ground to activate DS-102

C 1/0 Fill RTS DS-102

D I/O Fill Data Input/Output (10) DS-102

E I/O
O Fill Clock Fill Clock 10 DS-102

Fill Override Fill Override DS-102

Table A-4. Front Panel J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL Connector, DS-101 Mode Interface

Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

N/A Fill Reference DS-IOID

1/0 Balance (+) RS-485 compatible DS-101D

Not Used

Not Used
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-4. Front Panel J1 AUDIO/DATA/FILL Connector, DS-101 Mode Interface (Continued)
Pin# Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

E I/O Bal(-) RS-485 compatible DS-IOID

F _

Not Used

Ta b l e A - 5 . F r o n t P a n e l J 2 E x t e r n a l G P S C o n n e c t o r

Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

Not connected

1 Precise Positioning Load: 50 ohm Voltage (Reference to Ground);

Service (PPS) Time Pulse Width: 20 usee ± 20% Logic 1: 3 to 5 VDC
Mark Out Rise Time: 50 nsec max Logic 0: 0 to 0.5 VDC
Fall Time: 1 usee max

Serial Data Port Out Load: No less than kohm Voltage (Reference to Ground)
RS-232 Slew rate: 30 volts/usec max Logic 0: +3 to +25 VDC
GPS Receive Data Band rate tolerance: ±1.7% Logic 1:-3 to-25 VDC
Ground Signal Reference
Serial Data Port In Load: No less than 3 kohm in Voltage (Reference to Ground):
RS-232 parallel with No more than Logic 0: +5 to +25 VDC
GPS Transmit Data 2500 pF Logic 1:-5 to-25 VDC
Slew rate: 30 volts/usec max
Baud rate tolerance: ± 1%

HAVEQUICK Out Sink/Source < 0.5 mA Voltage (Reference to Ground):

Data period: 600 ± 2 usee Logic 0: 300 usee at 0 to +0.5 VDC,
followed by 300 usee at + 4.5 to +5.5
VDC

Logic 1: 300 usee at+4.5 to +5.5 VDC,

followed by 300 usee at 0 to +0.5 VDC
Not connected

Ta b l e A - 6 . F r o n t P a n e l J 3 D A T A C o n n e c t o r

Pin# Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

0 T r a n s c e i v e r C l e a r - To - S e n d U n b a l a n c e d MIL-STD-188-114A,
RS-232E compatible
O Transceiver Data Carrier Unbalanced, only MIL-STD-188-114A,
Detect RS-232E compatible
O Transceiver Receive Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
Clock Out RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
Transceiver Receive Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
Clock In RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-6. Front Panel J3 DATA Connector (Continued)

Pin# D I r Description Specs Notes/Modes _

5 N / A Chassis Ground

6 0 Transceiver RX Data (-) 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,

RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
7 O Transceiver RX Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
8 I Remote Control Transmit Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
/mm,
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
9 I Remote Control Transmit Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
10 0 Remote Control Receive Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible /mm,

11 0 Red Fixed Level Audio Out 600 ohm, 0 dBm or -10 dBm Programmable level
12 I Red Fixed Level Audio In 600 ohm, 0 dBm or -10 dBm Programmable level
13 N/A Chassis Ground

14 0 +24 VDC Power Source 19.5-33 VDC @ 100 mA max. Power for external device

15 I R e d P u s h - t o - Ta l k Pulled up (3.3 V thru 15 kohm),

ground closure to activate
1 6 I 1. Transceiver Data Terminal 1. Unbalanced, only MIL-STD-188-114A,
Ready RS-232E compatible

2. Point-To-Point Protocol 2. PPP when in HPW SATCOM HPW S AT C O M

(PPP) Data Input

17 0 Transceiver Receive Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
Clock Out RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
18 I Transceiver Transmit Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
Clock RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
19 I TX Data - 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
20 I TX Data + 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
2. Balanced 2. RS-485 compatible
21 0 Remote Control Receive Data 1. Unbalanced 1 . M I L - S T D - 1 8 8 - 11 4 A ,
RS-232E compatible
Balanced RS-485 compatible
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-6. Front Panel J3 DATA Connector (Continued)

Pin# D i r Description Specs Notes/Modes

22 1 Two Function pin: Unbalanced MIL-STD-188-1 MA,

1. Data Carrier Detect In RS-232E compatible
2. CTSln

23 0 Retransmit Key line Out Open collector 60 VDC, 200 mA max.

24 0 1. Transceiver Data Set Ready 1. Unbalanced, only MIL-STD-188-1 MA,
RS-232E compatible
2. PPP Data Out 2. PPP when Receiver-
Transmitter (RT) is in HPW H P W S AT C O M
S AT C O M

25 1 Indicates Cable Present Pulled up (3.3 V thru 15 kohm),

ground closure to activate
26 1 Transceiver RTS Unbalanced MIL-STD-188-IMA,
RS-232E compatible.
27 1 1. Balanced Pulled up (3.3 V thru 15 kohm), Selects either balanced or
2. Unbalanced ground closure to activate unbalanced Data Terminal
balanced interface Equipment (DTE) interface.

Table A-7. J4 Front Panel Keypad Display Unit (KDU) Connector

Description Specs Notes/Modes

TX Data + from KDU RS-485 Differential

TX Data - from KDU RS-485 Differential

KDU Present Ground = KDU present

N/A Ground Also power return
RXData + to KDU RS-485 Differential

RX Data - to KDU RS-485 Differential

+Battery Power Supply to +26.5 V Nominal

K D U

Ta b l e A - 8 . F r o n t P a n e l J 6 A C C E S S O R Y C o n n e c t o r

Description Notes/Modes

Not connected

Chassis ground
Extemal Power Amplifier 0 V, +5 V differential async control
(PA) Control (-) data, 115.2 kbps
Extemal PA Control (+) 0 V, +5 V differential async control
data, 115.2 kbps
Chassis Ground

Spare
Spare
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-8. Front Panel J6 ACCESSORY Connector (Continued)

Dir Description Specs Notes/Modes

O External Keyline Out Open collector, active low 60 Volts at 200 mA max.
3.3 Volts at 2 mA
maximum when in a
Vehicular Adapter.
O E x t e r n a l PA O n / O f f C o n t r o l O.OV = On
+5.0 V = Off

I RT On/Off Control less than .8 V-off @ max leakage Main switch must be on
current of 18 uA

open- On (main switch on)

O TX Debug Data RS-232E compatible
Not connected

N/A Chassis Ground

I External PA present 19.5-32 VDC, less than 1 mA Not available when in a

Vehicular Adapter

Not connected

N/A Chassis ground

I E x t e r n a l P u s h t o Ta l k Active low

I External PA Feedback (+) +0.5 V min, +4.3 V typical, +6.0 V Differential signal

I External PA Feedback (-) PA feedback ground return Differential signal

0 Frequency Hopping Clock 0 V, 5 V Complementary Metal-
Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS)
levels

1 RX Debug Data RS-232E compatible

Not connected

Not connected

0 Remote Control RX Data RS-232E compatible American Standard Code

for Information
Interchange (ASCII)
Remote Control

1 Remote Control TX Data RS-232E compatible ASCII Remote Control

Not connected

Ta b l e A - 9 . R e a r P a n e l J 9 A C C E S S O R Y C o n n e c t o r

DIr Description Specs Notes/Modes

Spare
Spare
I/O External PA Control (+) 0 V, +5 V differential async control
data, 115 kbps
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-9. Rear Panel J9 ACCESSORY Connector (Continued)

Description Specs Notes/Modes

I/O External PA Control (-) 0 V, +5 V differential async control

data, 115 kbps
External PA Feedback (-) PA Feedback Ground Return Differential signal
External PA Feedback (+) +0.5 V min, +4.3 V typical, +6.0 V Differential signal

Remote Control TX Data RS-232E compatible

Spare
Reserved

External PTT Active Low

Radio Debug Port, Receive RS-232E compatible Radio Debug Port

External DC Power Return DC Retum

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

E x t e r n a l PA O n / O ff C o n t r o l 0.0 V = On;
+5 V = Off

Remote Control RX Data RS-232E compatible

Debug Port Enable Apply 3.3 V to enable Debug port. Debug Port Enable
Leave open for GPS.
Radio Debug Port, Transmit RS-232E compatible Radio Debug Port
E x t e m a l PA P r e s e n t +19.5 VDC to +32 VDC, less than
1 mA

Frequency Hopping Clock 0 V, 5 V levels

Extemal Keyline Out Open collector, active low 60 V at 200 mA max

Extemal RT On/Off less than .8 V-off @ max leakage Recei ver-T ransmitter
current of 18 uA front panel switch must
open- On (main switch on) be On

Ancillary Interface Connector 18.5 VDC to 33.5 VDC at 100 mA Power for extemal
(AlC) Power Output device. Short circuit
protected.
Reserved
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Ta b l e A - 1 0 . R e a r P a n e l J 1 0 / J 1 1 B A T T E R Y C o n n e c t o r s

Pin# D IIr r
D Description Specs Notes/Modes

N/A -DC Input Voltage (Cell A)

N/A -DC Input Voltage (Cell B) Tie to pin 4 for 24 V
I Battery Type Indicator Ground (GND)=Nickel-Cadmium Ground for extemal
(Ni-Cd) or other; power source
Open = Lithium
I +12 VDC Input Voltage (Cell Tie to pin 2 for 24 V
A)
I +12 VDC Input Voltage (Cell + 24V

B)
I/O Charge Status for Smart Bidirectional serial
Battery

A.3 ACCESSORIES

The following paragraphs describe accessories for the AN/PRC-117F.

A.3.1 RF-6760W Wireless Message Terminal (WMT)

RF-6760W Wireless Message Terminal software packages provide the ability to transparently send messages, files,
images, and other data from one network node to another. This software package integrates Harris developed data
transmission techniques with Commercial off-the-Shelf (COTS) software to provide fast and reliable information
transfer. The full version of the RF-6760W WMT provides additional capabilities that are not standard with the
i n c l u d e d R F - 6 7 6 0 W- H P W v e r s i o n .

A.3.2 Cable Assemblies - Audio and Data

The following paragraphs discuss audio and data cable assemblies that can be used with the AN/PRC-117F.

A.3.2.1 10513-0780-A1

This cable is to use X.21 packet data with the Personal Computer Improved Data Modem (PCIDM) router cards.

A . 3 . 2 . 2 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 1 7 - 0 1

Interconnects two AN/PRC-117F units via J3 Data Connector to provide VHF to VHF Retransmission capability
with 50 feet separation. Also used with RF-5800M systems.

A . 3 . 2 . 3 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 7 - A 0 0 6

Generic Audio/Data Cable. Connector (J3) on radio end. Unterminated on opposite end. Six feet.

A.3.2.4 10570-3300-01

VHF VAU Intercom/Speaker Connector to AN/VIC-l/AN/VIC-3 Intercom. Specify length.

A.3.2.5 10012-0714-01

Interconnects Falcon and Falcon II Transceivers to RF-3045 Remote Control.

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

A . 3 . 2 . 6 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 5 - X X

Front Panel Remote Control/Programming Cable Assembly. Available in lengths from 6 to 50 feet in one foot
increments. XX = 06 to 50 (feet).

A . 3 . 2 . 7 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 4 - 0 1 2

Interconnects FALCON II manpack Keypad Display Units with R/T. Six feet. Included with all FALCON II
manpacks.
A.3.2.8 10513-0730-A2

RF-6760W WMT to AN/PRC-117F. This is a Y-cable. A DB-9 connector is used for radio control and async data
and a DB-25 connector is used for synchronous data. Length: 10 feet.

A.3.2.9 10513-0740

Remote control cable for connection to front panel J6 Accessory connector. Used for RF-6550M RPA or RF-6650M
Communications Planning Application (CPA) programming, firmware upgrades, and ASCII remote control.

A.3.2.10 10535-0707-A009

This cable connects the 10181-5180-01 Tactical Amplifier Speaker to the AN/PRC-117F Audio Connector.

A.3.3 Cable Assemblies - DC Power

The following paragraphs discuss the DC cable assemblies that can be used with the AN/PRC-117F.

A.3.3.1 10570-0716-AXXX

Connects RF-5051PS and RF-5055PS Power Supplies or RF-5056PS DC/DC Converter to AN/PRC-117F
Vehicular Adapter Assembly. Specify length XXX, in feet. Maximum is 25 feet (XXX = 025).

A.3.3.2 10535-0708-A009

This cable connects the 10181-5180-01 Tactical Amplifier Speaker to a 26 VDC power source. Has connector to
speaker on one end and open leads for connectors to the DC power source on the other. Length: nine feet.

A.3.4 Cable Assemblies - RF

The following paragraphs discuss the RF Cable Assemblies that can be used with the AN/PRC-117F.

A.3.4.1 10369-7212

M17/74-RG213 cable with Bayonet Neill-Concelman (BNC) male connectors. Connects RF-387, RF-398-02, AS-
3013/VRC, and various other antennas to RF-5800 Transceiver. Specify length in feet.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

A.3.5 Mating Connectors

Table A-11 lists mating connectors that can be used with the AN/PRC-117F.
Table A-11. Mating Connectors

R/T Chassis Connector I Mating Connector Part Number

J3 D ATA J69-0016-001
J09-0039-001 (Backshell)
J6 ACCESSORY J69-0016-002
J09-0039-001 (Backshell)
J1 AUDIO J69-0001-623

J5 or J8 ANTENNA Connector UG-88C/U

(BNC male)
KDU Interface 10075-5001-01

J2 GPS J29-0014-021

J9 ACCESSORY J22-0126-026 (Rear D-Connector)

J55-0I55-515(Hood)

A.3.6 Intercom Set Interconnect Devices for Falcon II Radio Systems

Table A-12 identifies interface cables and devices required for interfacing the AN/PRC-117F to the ANA^IC-1
(RF-294A) and ANA^IC-3 Intercom Sets. Connection to/from the Falcon II Transceiver is via the front panel DATA
connector J3. Since connector J3 carries both audio and data, a Y-cable is required if both audio and data I/O are to
be used.

For intercom operation, the Intercom Interface Unit (IIU), (10564-1660-01), can be used if required. Standard cables
are six-feet long. Special lengths available.

Ta b l e A - 1 2 . I n t e r c o m C a b l e s

Part Number Description

10564-1670-A006 Connects J3 to the IIU. Audio only.
10564-1672-A006 Connects J3 to the IIU. Audio and data.

10564-I673-A006 Connects IIU to AN/VIC-3.

10564-1674-A006 Connects IIU to AN/VIC-1 (RF-294A).

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
tfARRIS' APPENDIX A

A.3.7 VHP UHF Transportable Antennas

The following paragraphs discuss VHFAJHF transportable antennas that can be used with the AN/PRC-117F.
A.3.7.1 RF-289A VHF Low-Band Log-Periodic Antenna 30 to 90 MHz Transportable

The RF-289A is a tactical, portable, log-periodic antenna system for 30 to 90 MHz. The forward gain-over-average
soil condition is 4.5 dBi. This antenna may be configured for vertical or horizontal polarization and can be manually
rotated. The system comes packaged in a canvas bag containing the antenna, a 20-foot (6.1 m) mast, 75 feet (23 m)
of RG-58AAJ Coax Cable, ground stakes, a mounting base, guy ropes, and a hammer. The antenna has a BNC
connector.

A.3.7.2 RF-290 (OE-254)

The RF-290 is an easily erected, transportable, omnidirectional antenna designed for broadband operation from 30
to 88 MHz, usable up to 108 MHz. The system comes packaged in a canvas bag containing the antenna., a 33-foot
(10 m) mast, an 80-foot (24 m) coax cable with BNC connectors, ground stakes, a mounting base, guy assemblies,
and a hammer.

A.3.7.3 R F - 2 9 1 - AT 0 0 1

The RF-291 is an omnidirectional transportable antenna designed for broadband operation from 100 to 511.99999
MHz (usable up to 800 MHz). The 12-lb discone is easily deployed on the sectional 10 m mast. Discone, mast, and
guys stow in a canvas bag for transportability. A 24 m coax cable with BNC connector allows easy connection of
the radio, and the antenna can be deployed in less than 15 minutes.

A.3.7.4 R F - 3 1 8 3 - AT 0 0 1

The RF-3183-AT001 is a VHF/UHF multiband vehicular whip antenna designed for broadband operation from 30
to 511.99999 MHz. Exceptional bandwidth is obtained from distributed passive components along the antenna's
length. The RF-3183-AT001 has equivalent gain to other narrowband antennas, and can be supplied with single or
dual ports to be compatible with both the AN/PRC-117F and vehicular adapters.

A.3.7.5 RF-3080-AT001 UHF SATCOM Antenna Set (240 to 400 MHz)

The RF-3080-AT001 is a rapid deploy, high gain, crossed yagi antenna for SATCOM communications. It folds down
to a compact 18.5" x 6 x 6" package and is 40" x 24" x 24" when deployed. This antenna provides +7.0 to 11 dBic
gain with right hand polarization. The 3 dB beam width is 85 degrees. The RF-3080-AT001 includes the crossed
dipole driven elements, a set of reflectors, two director extension kits, tripod, carrying case, and instructions.
Deployment time is less than one minute with tripod and coaxial cable (BNC connector).

A.3.8 Other Accessories

Ta b l e A - 1 3 l i s t s o t h e r a c c e s s o r i e s f o r t h e A N / P R C - 11 7 F.

Ta b l e A - 1 3 . O t h e r A N / P R C - 1 1 7 F A c c e s s o r i e s

Accessory Connection Part Number Notes

PLGR Interface PLGR to J2 port 12005-0730-A006 Used to interface with an external

Cable GPS receiver (PLGR).
GPS Commercial NMEA cable (DB9 12005-0740-A006 Used to adapt GPS commercial
NMEA-0183 connector) to J2 port NMEA cable to J2 port.
Adapter Cable
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX A

Table A-13. Other AN/PRC-117F Accessories (Continued)

Accessory Connection Part Number Notes

RETRANS Cable DATA/J3 port 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 1 7 - 0 1 50 ft. length

BLUE DOT J6 accessory port 12013-0720-A010 Front Panel Clone Cable (10 ft.
Clone Cable length)
R e m o t e / PA J6 accessory port 10535-0730-Al Y-cable with DB-9 and DB-25
Control Cable connectors (10 ft. length)
BLUE DOT J6 accessory port 10513-0740 RF-6650M CPA, Firmware
Remote Cable upgrade, Black Remote
Sync/Async 10535-0780-A006 DB-25 connector (6 ft. length)
Harris Universal
Image
Tr a n s m i s s i o n
Software
(HUITS) Cable
HPW Data Cable DATA / J3 port to 10513-0710-A006 SA, PPP (6 ft. length)
Computer 9 pin
KDU Extension KDU external 1 0 5 11 - 0 7 0 4 - 0 1 2 Used to operate the KDU remotely
Cable interface from the radio. (6 ft. length)
KDU Wrist Strap 10512-0470-01 Suitable for use with above KDU
Extension cable. Includes carrying
pouch.
VHF-LO (30-90 J5 antenna port 10512-0201 -01 This antenna/base is compatible
MHz) LOS Blade w i t h A N / P R C - 11 9 S I N C G A R S
antenna radio accessories. (3 ft. length)
AS-4266A/PRC J5 antenna port 10512-0240-01 This antenna/base is compatible
VHF-LO (30-90 w i t h A N / P R C - 11 9 S I N C G A R S
MHz) Long Whip radio accessories. (10 ft. length)
antenna

VHF-Hl & UHF J8 antenna port 10369-0205 This VHF-HIAJHF LOS antenna
(90-511.99999 is compatible with 113/PSC-
MHz) LOS Dual 5 / U R C - 2 0 0 / 11 7 D L O S a n t e n n a ' s .
Band Molded SATCOM antennas also connect
Antenna to J8 antenna port.
HUB (Hold Up Under HUB cover B41-0010-004or Located underneath battery two
Battery) NSN 6135-01-525-9943 (J11 power connection) when
battery is installed.
Battery Box Radio chassis 10513-4800-02 Holds two batteries

H-250/U Handset ADF/J1 port 10075-1399 AN/PRC-117F compatible with

standard 5/6 pin audio handset or
headset.

Assault Pack 10512-0465-01

A-14
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

APPENDIX B

8.1 JULIAN D AT E CALENDAR

Table B-1 and Table B-2 provide Single Channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS) Julian Date
Calendars for regular and leap years. Table B-3 is the Satellite Channel Frequency Code List, Table B-8 contains
Demand Assigned Multiple Access (DAMA) Configuration Codes, and Table B-9 shows DAMA System
Information Request Codes and their definitions. DAMA operational codes are subject to change without notice.
Consult US Department of the Navy, Space and Naval Warfare Systems Command for further information regarding
DAMA operational codes.

Table B-10 and Table B-11 contain explanations of DAMA status messages encountered during 5 kHz or 25 kHz
AC DAMA operation.

Table B-1. SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Regular Year

MON
FEB MAR APR M AY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT
DAY

3 2 6 0 91 21 52 8 2 13 4 4 74 05 35
33 61 92 2 2 53 83 14 4 5 75 0 6 36
3 4 62 93 23 54 84 15 4 6 76 0 7 37
35 63 94 2 4 55 85 16 4 7 77 08 38
3 6 6 4 95 25 56 8 6 17 4 8 78 0 9 39
3 7 65 96 2 6 57 87 18 4 9 79 10 4 0
3 8 66 97 2 7 58 88 19 50 80 11 41
39 67 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12 42
4 0 68 99 2 9 6 0 9 0 21 52 82 13 43
41 69 00 30 61 91 22 53 83 14 44
4 2 7 0 01 31 62 9 2 23 54 84 15 45
43 71 02 32 6 3 93 24 55 85 16 46
4 4 72 03 33 6 4 9 4 25 56 86 17 47
4 5 73 04 3 4 6 5 95 26 57 87 18 48
4 6 7 4 05 35 6 6 9 6 27 58 88 19 49
4 7 75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 2 0 50
48 76 07 37 68 98 29 60 90 21 51
4 9 77 08 38 6 9 9 9 30 61 91 2 2 52
50 78 09 39 7 0 0 0 31 62 92 23 53
51 79 10 4 0 71 01 32 63 93 2 4 54
5 2 8 0 11 41 7 2 0 2 33 64 94 25 55
53 81 12 4 2 7 3 03 34 65 95 2 6 56
54 82 13 43 7 4 0 4 35 66 96 2 7 57
5 5 83 14 4 4 7 5 05 36 67 97 2 8 58
56 8 4 15 4 5 76 0 6 37 68 98 2 9 59
57 85 16 4 6 77 0 7 38 69 99 3 0 60
58 8 6 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31 61
59 87 18 4 8 79 0 9 40 71 01 3 2 62
88 19 49 80 10 41 72 02 33 63
8 9 20 50 81 11 42 73 03 3 4 64
9 0 51 12 43 04 65
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-2. SINCGARS Julian Date Calendar, Leap Year, 2000, 2004, 2008

MON
MAR A P R MAY J U N JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV
DAY

61 92 22 53 83
M M 45 75
■ 1
6 2 93 23 54 8 4 4 6 76 H a
63 94 24 55 85 M M 47 77 08
64 95 25 5 6 86 17 4 8 78 09
65 96 26 5 7 87 18 49 79 10
66 97 27 58 88 19 5 0 80 11
6 7 98 28 59 89 20 51 81 12
68 99 29 60 90 21 52 82 13
69 00 30 61 91 2 2 53 83 14
70 01 31 62 92 23 5 4 84 15
71 02 32 63 93 2 4 55 85 16
72 03 33 6 4 94 2 5 5 6 86 17
73 04 34 65 95 2 6 57 87 18
7 4 05 35 6 6 96 2 7 58 88 19
75 06 36 67 97 28 59 89 20
76 07 37 68 98 2 9 6 0 90 21
77 08 38 69 99 3 0 61 91 22
78 09 39 70 00 31 62 92 23
79 10 4 0 71 01 32 63 93 2 4
80 11 41 72 02 33 64 94 25
81 12 42 73 03 3 4 65 95 26
82 13 43 74 04 35 66 96 27
83 14 4 4 75 05 36 67 97 28
84 15 45 76 06 3 7 68 98 29
85 16 46 77 07 38 69 99 30
86 17 47 78 08 39 70 00 31
87 18 48 79 09 4 0 71 01 32
88 19 49 80 10 41 72 0 2 33
89 2 0 5 0 81 11 4 2 73 0 3 34
90 21 51 82 12 43 74 0 4 35
91 52 13 4 4 0 5

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency
Code
 ZIPI

9z

9z

9z

9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

2m 9z

V / N

V/N

i|9P!Mpueg jduueqo apoo

leuueqo o d fl
lauueqo )uasajd Aauanbajd

isn aaoo AONanoayd i3Nnvho 3im3ivs

(panupuoo) \sr\ apoQ Aauanbajj |auuei|o a)!||a;es 'C-g aiqei

g XiGNdddV
(3)(A)dZl.k3gd/NV
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Present
UFO Channel
Code Channel

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present Channel

UFO Channel
Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Bandwidth

295.225 261.625 B23-8 P13 25 kHz

295.250 261.650 B23-9 25 kHz

295.275 261.675 B23-10 25 kHz

295.300 261.700 B 2 3 - 11 25 kHz

295.325 261.725 B23-12 25 kHz

295.350 261.750 B23-13 25 kHz

295.375 261.775 B23-14 25 kHz

295.400 261.800 B23-15 25 kHz

295.425 261.825 B23-16 25 kHz

295.450 261.850 B23-17 25 kHz

295.475 261.875 B23-18 25 kHz

295.500 261.900 B23-19 25 kHz

295.525 261.925 B23-20 25 kHz

295.550 261.950 B23-21 25 kHz

295.650 262.050 C23-1 25 kHz

295.675 262.075 C23-2 25 kHz

295.700 262.100 C23-3 25 kHz

295.725 262.125 C23-4 25 kHz

295.750 262.150 25 kHz

295.775 262.175 25 kHz

295.800 262.200 C23-7 25 kHz

295.825 262.225 C23-8 25 kHz

295.850 262.250 C23-9 25 kHz

295.875 262.275 C23-10 25 kHz

295.900 262.300 C 2 3 - 11 25 kHz

295.925 262.325 C23-12 25 kHz

295.950 262.350 C23-13 25 kHz

295.975 262.375 C23-14 25 kHz

296.000 262.400 C23-15 25 kHz

296.025 262.425 C23-16 25 kHz

296.050 262.450 C23-17 25 kHz

296.075 262.475 C23-18 25 kHz

296.100 262.500 C23-19 25 kHz

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present Channel

UFO Channel
Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Bandwidth

296.125 262.525 C23-20

296.150 262.550

297.150 263.550

297.175 263.575

297.200 263.600

297.225 263.625

297.250 263.650

297.275 263.675

297.300 263.700

297.325 263.725

297.350 263.750

297.375 263.775

297.400 263.800

297.425 263.825

297.450 263.850

297.475 263.875

297.500 263.900

297.525 263.925

297.550 263.950

297.575 263.975

297.600 264.000

297.625 264.025

297.650 264.050

302.445 248.845

302.450 248.850

302.455 248.855

302.465 248.865

302.475 248.875

302.485 248.885

302.495 248.895

302.500 248.900 5 kHz

302.505 248.905 5 kHz

302.515 248.915 5 kHz

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present Channel

UFO Channel
Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Bandwidth

139 302.525 248.925 5 kHz

140 302.535 248.935 5 kHz

141 302.545 248.945 5 kHz

142 302.550 248.950 5 kHz

143 302.555 248.955 5 kHz

144 302.565 248.965 5 kHz

145 302.575 248.975 5 kHz

146 302.585 248.985 5 kHz

147 302.595 248.995 5 kHz

148 302.600 249.000 5 kHz

149 302.605 249.005 5 kHz

150 302.615 249.015 5 kHz

151 302.625 249.025 5 kHz

152 302.635 249.035 5 kHz

153 302.645 249.045 5 kHz

154 302.650 249.050 5 kHz

155 302.655 249.055 5 kHz

156 302.665 249.065 5 kHz

157 302.675 249.075 5 kHz

158 302.685 249.085 5 kHz

159 302.695 249.095 5 kHz

160 302.700 249.100 5 kHz

161 302.705 249.105 5 kHz

162 302.715 2 4 9 . 11 5 5 kHz

163 302.725 249.125 5 kHz

164 302.735 249.135 5 kHz

165 302.745 249.145 5 kHz

166 302.750 249.150 5 kHz

167 302.755 249.155 5 kHz

168 302.765 249.165 5 kHz

169 302.775 249.175 5 kHz

170 302.785 249.185 5 kHz

171 302.795 249.195 5 kHz

B-7
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Upiink Freq. Downlink Present Channel

UFO Channel
Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Bandwidth

249.200 5 kHz

249.205 5 kHz

249.215 5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

25 kHz

25 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

202 317.045 243.945 A l l N22 5 kHz

203 317.055 243.955 A 1 2 N23 5 kHz

204 317.065 243.965 A 1 4 N24 5 kHz

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Channel
UFO Channel
Bandwidth

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

5 kHz

k H

iS
iS

iS

iS
iS
m

iS
5iSz
5 kHz
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-3. Satellite Channel Frequency Code List (Continued)

S AT E L L I T E C H A N N E L F R E Q U E N C Y C O D E L I S T

Frequency Uplink Freq. Downlink Present

UFO Channel
Channel
Code (MHz) Freq. (MHz) Channel Bandwidth

238 317.315 244.215 Q25 5 kHz

239 317.325 244.225 Q26 5 kHz

240 307.550 253.950 N AT O I V B / 25 kHz/25 kHz

S K Y N E T 4 A (UK)
241 307.700 254.100 N ATO I VA 25 kHz

242 3 11 . 0 5 0 257.450 N ATO IVB / 25 kHz/25 kHz

SKYNET4A (UK)
243 3 11 . 2 0 0 257.600 N ATO I VA 25 kHz

244 307.750 254.150 SKYNET4B 25 kHz (UK)

245 3 11 . 2 5 0 257.650 SKYNET 4B 25 kHz (UK)
246 307.650 254.050 SKYNET4C 25 kHz (UK)
247 3 11 . 1 5 0 257.550 SKYNET 4C 25 kHz (UK)
248 294.800 253.650 SKYNET4D 25 kHz (UK)
(Non-Std. to t o

DAMA) 314.800 254.350

249 298.300 257.150 S K Y N E T 4 D 25 kHz (UK)

(Non-Std. t o to
DAMA) 313.300 257.850

999 User Input User Input 5/25 kHz

(Not used with 225.000 225.000
DAMA) t o t o

5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9 5 11 . 9 9 9 9 9

B.2 MARITIME MOBILE SERVICE FREQUENCIES AND CHANNELS, USA

Table B-4 provides channel frequencies and usage for Maritime Mobile Services used in the USA. Table B-5
provides channel frequencies and usage for Maritime Mobile Services used internationally. An asterisk (*) indicates
that the frequency is not allowed within US territorial waters.

Table B-6 provides U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NCAA) weather monitoring channel
frequencies. NCAA weather channels are receive-only and may be programmed in the AN/PRC-117F by entering
the station frequency into a fixed Line-of-Sight (LOS) net.

Table B-4. Maritime Channels, USA

Ship Station Shore Station

Channel Channel Usage
MHz MHz

Tr a n s m i t / R e c e i v e T/R: 156.05 Port Operations and Commercial, Vessel Traffic

(T/R): 156.05 System (VTS). New Orleans/Lower Mississippi area.
T/R: 156.10 T/R: 156.10

T/R: 156.15 T/R: 156.15

B-10
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-4. Maritime Channels, USA (Continued)

Ship Station Shore Station

Channel Channel Usage
MHz MHz

T/R: 156.20 T/R: 156.20

T/R: 156.25 T/R: 156.25 Port Operations or VTS in Houston, New Orleans and
Seattle areas.

156.30 T/R: 156.30 Intership Safety

156.35 T/R: 156.35 Commercial

156.40 T/R: 156.40 Commercial (Intership only)

156.45 T/R: 156.45 Boater Calling. Commercial and Non-Commercial.
156.50 T/R: 156.50 Commercial

156.55 T/R: 156.55 Commercial. VTS in selected areas.

156.60 T/R: 156.60 Port Operations. VTS in selected areas.

156.65 T/R: 156.65 Intership Navigation Safety (Bridge-to-bridge). Ships
>20m length maintain a listening watch on this
channel in US waters.

T/R: 156.70 T/R: 156.70 Port Operations. VTS in selected areas.

T/R: 156.75 T/R: 156.75 Environmental (Receive only). Used by Class C
Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacon
(EPIRB).
T/R: 156.80 T/R: 156.80 International Distress, Safety and Calling. Ships
required to carry radio, US Coast Guard, and most
coast stations maintain a listening watch on this
channel.

17 T/R: 156.85 T/R: 156.85 State Control

18 T/R: 156.90 T/R: 156.90 Commercial

19 T/R: 156.95 T/R: 156.95 Commercial

20 T: 1 5 7 . 0 0 T: 1 6 1 . 6 0 Port Operations (duplex)

R: 161.60 R: 157.00

20A T/R: 157.00 T/R: 157.00 Port Operations

21 T/R: 157.05 T/R: 157.05 U.S. Coast Guard only
22 T/R: 157.10 T/R: 157.10 Coast Guard Liaison and Maritime Safety Information
Broadcasts. Broadcasts announced on channel 16.

23 T/R: 157.15 T/R: 157.15 U.S. Coast Guard only

24 T: 1 5 7 . 2 0 T: 1 6 1 . 8 0 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)
R: 161.80 R: 157.20

25 T: 1 5 7 . 2 5 T: 1 6 1 . 8 5 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R: 161.85 R: 157.25

26 T: 1 5 7 . 3 0 T: 1 6 1 . 9 0 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R: 161.90 R: 157.30

27 T: 1 5 7 . 3 5 T: 1 6 1 . 9 5 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R: 161.95 R: 157.35
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-4. Maritime Channeis, USA (Continued)

Ship Station Shore Station

Channel Channei Usage
MHz MHz

28 T: 57.40 T: 62.00 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R : 162.00 R : 157.40

60 T/R 156.025 T / R 156.025

61 T / R 156.075 T / R 156.075

62 T/R 156.125 T / R 156.125

63 T/R 156.175 T / R 156.175 Port Operations and Commercial, VTS. New

Orleans/Lower Mississippi area.
64 T/R 156.225 T/R 156.225

65 T/R 156.275 T / R 156.275 Port Operations

66 T / R 156.325 T/R 156.325 Port Operations
67 T / R 156.375 T / R 156.375 Commercial. Used for Bridge-to-bridge
communications in lower Miss. River. Intership only.
68 T / R 156.425 T / R 156.425 Non-Commercial

69 T / R 156.475 T/R 156.475 Non-Commercial

70 T/R 156.525 T / R 156.525 Digital Selective Calling (voice communications not

allowed)
71 T / R 156.575 T/R 156.575 Non-Commercial

72 T / R 156.625 T / R 156.625 Non-Commercial (Intership only)

73 T/R 156.675 T / R 156.675 Port Operations
74 T / R 156.725 T / R 156.725 Port Operations
75 T / R 156.775 T / R 156.775

76 T/R 156.825 T/R 156.825

77 T / R 156.875 T/R 156.875 Port Operations (Intership only)

78 T/R 156.925 T / R 156.925 Non-Commercial

79 T/R 156.975 T / R 156.975 Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only

80 T/R 157.025 T / R 157.025 Commercial. Non-Commercial in Great Lakes only
81 T/R 157.075 T / R 157.075 U.S. Govemment only - Environmental protection
operations
82 T / R :: 1 5 7 . 1 2 5 T / R :: 1 5 7 . 1 2 5 U.S. Govemment only
83 T / R :: 1 5 7 . 1 7 5 T / R :: 1 5 7 . 1 7 5 U.S. Coast Guard only
84 T : 1 57.225 T : 1. 6 1 . 8 2 5 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)
R: ]161.825 R: ]1 5 7 . 2 2 5

85 T : 1. 5 7 . 2 7 5 T: 1 61.875 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R : 1161.875 R: ]1 5 7 . 2 7 5
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-4. Maritime Channels, USA (Continued)

Ship Station Shore Station

Channel Channel Usage
MHz MHz

86 T: 157.325 T: 1 6 1 . 9 2 5 Public Correspondence (Marine Operator)

R : 161.925 R: 157.325

87 T: 157.375 T: 1 6 1 . 9 7 5 Automatic Identification System duplex repeater

R : 161.975 R: 157.375

T/R: 157.425 Commercial, Intership only.

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Ta b l e B - 5 . I n t e r n a t i o n a l M a r i t i m e C h a n n e s

Ship Station Shore Station

Channel Usage
MHz MHz

r: 160.65* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

I: 156.05

r: 160.70* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

156.10*

r: 160.75* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

I: 156.15*

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Intership
Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Intership
Intership, Port Operations
Intership, Port Operations
Port Operations
Port Operations
Intership, Port Operations
Port Operations
Intership, Port Operations
DISTRESS, SAFETY and CALLING

Intership, Port Operations

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

Public Correspondence, Port Operations

161.70* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

157.10

161.75* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

157.15

161.80 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

157.20

161.85 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

157.25
t^ARRiS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-5. International Maritime Channels (Continued)

Ship S t a St hi o
o rne S t a t S
ioh
n ore Station ,,,
Channel Mu- MMu "- - Channel Usage

26 T 157.30 161.90 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.90 157.30

7 157.35 161.95 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.95 157.35

7 157.40 162.00 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 162.00 157.40

7 156.025* 160.625* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.625* 156.025*

7 156.075* 160.675* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.675* 156.075*

7 156.125* 160.725* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.725* 156.125*

7 156.175 160.775* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.775* 156.175

7 156.225* 160.825* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.825* 156.225*

7 156.275 160.875* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.875* 156.225

7 156.325 T: 1 6 0 . 9 2 5 * Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 160.925* R: 156.325

T/R: 156.375 T/R: 156.375 Intership, Port Operations

T/R: 156.425 T/R: 156.425 Port Operations
T/R: 156.475 T/R: 156.475 Intership, Port Operations
T/R: 156.525 T/R: 156.525 Digital selective calling for distress, safety and calling
T/R: 156.575 T/R: 156.575 Port Operations
T/R: 156.625

T/R: 156.675 T/R: 156.675 Intership, Port Operations

T/R: 156.725 T/R: 156.725 Port Operations
T/R: 156.775* T/R: 156.775* Port Operations
T/R: 156.825* T/R: 156.825* Port Operations
T/R: 156.875

T 156.925 161.525* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.525* 156.925

7 156.975 161.575* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.575* 156.975

7 157.025 161.625* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.625* 157.025

7 157.075 161.675* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

R 161.675* 157.075
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-5. International Maritime Channels (Continued)

) Station Shore Station ,,,

MHz MHz

7.125 T: 161.725* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

.1.725* R: 157.125

7.175 T: 161.775* Public Correspondence, Port Operations

1I.775* R: 157.175

7.225 T: 161.825 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

1.825 R: 157.225

7.275 T: 161.875 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

1.875 R: 157.275

7.325 T: 161.925 Public Correspondence, Port Operations

1.925 R: 157.325

7 . 3 7 5 * T: 1 6 1 . 9 7 5 P o r t O p e r a t i o n s
1.975 R: 157.375*

7 . 4 2 5 T: 1 6 2 . 0 2 5 P o r t O p e r a t i o n s

Ta b l e B - 6 . N OA A We a th e r R a d i o C h a n n e i s

Channel Frequency
162.550

>A0C2 162.400

162.475

162.425

VTO 162.450

WX6 162.500

162.525

B.3 TRANSMIT POWER SETTINGS

The following paragraphs summarize power levels when the radio is used as a standalone (manpack) radio, or in a
Vehicle Adapter Unit (VAU). Power level choices may be different, depending on whether the radio is programmed
for a VAU or standalone. The radio will automatically adjust the power level to the current operating state. For
example, if the radio is programmed to 1 W as a standalone manpack and then later put into a VAU, power is changed
to 5 W. Another example would be if the radio is programmed in a VAU to 50 W and then removed, it will go to 20
W.

When the radio makes an automatic power level change, the change is made for that net only. The change is
permanently saved as long as the default setting of AUTOSAVE is used. Refer to Table B-7, which defines the power
setting differences between standalone and VAU. The wattage value for LOW/MED/HIGH settings depend on
whether the configuration is standalone or VAU (and in some cases transmit frequency), and are shown in the table.
 AN/PRC-117F{V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-7. Transmit Power Settings

Standalone VA U
VA U P o w e r
Configuration Standalone Power Level Configuration Level
(Watts) (Watts)
LOW-AM (>400 MHz)

H I G H - F M

Table B-8. DAMA Configuration Codes

C o n fi g u r a t i o n Equipment Data Protocol C rypto
Code

NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. Always use codes if provided in the Satellite Access
Authorization. For further assistance in DAMA codes, contact Space and Naval Warfare System
Command (SPAWAR) (US Navy).
Reserved 0 N/A N / A

Network (Prearranged) 75 Network/prearranged Network/Prearranged

Teletype 75 American Standard Code KG-84A/C
for Information Interchange
(ASCII) 8N2
Computer 75 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

PSC-2A 75 PSC-2A KG-84A/C

KL-43C/F ASCII 8N2 KL-43C/F

B-17
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-8. DAMA Configuration Codes (Continued)

C o n fi g u r a t i o n Equipment Data Protocol Crypto
Code

NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. Always use codes if provided in the Satellite Access
Authorization. For further assistance in DAMA codes, contact Space and Naval Warfare System
Command (SPAWAR) (US Navy).

Network (Prearranged) 300 Network/prearranged Network/Prearranged

Teletype 300 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

Computer 300 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

Facsimile 300 Facsimile KG-84A/C

Facsimile 300 Facsimile KYV-5, KY-99A/100

PSC-2A 300 PSC-2A KG-84A/C

PSC-2A 300 PSC-2A KYV-5, KY-99A/100

KL-43C/F 300 ASCII 8N2 KL-43C/F

Computer 300 ASCII 8N2 KYV-5, KY-99A/100

Network (Prearranged) 600 lAW Network/prearranged lAW Network/Prearranged

Teletype 600 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

Teletype 600 ASCII 8N2 KYV-5, KY-99A/100

Facsimile 600 Facsimile KG-84A/C

PSC-2A 600 PSC-2A KG-84A/C

PSC-2A 600 PSC-2A KYV-5, KY-99A/100

KL-43C/F 600 ASCII 8N2 None

Computer 600 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-8. DAMA Configuration Codes (Continued)

Equipment I Data I Protocol I C rypto

NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. Always use codes if provided in the Satellite Access
Authorization. For ftirther assistance in DAMA codes, contact Space and Naval Warfare System
Command (SPAWAR) (US Navy).
38 [Computer
38 Computer 600 [ 6ASCII
00 A S C l8N2
l 8N2 IKYV-5, KY-99A/100
3 99
3 FF a
a ccs s
i mi im
l ei l e 600 600 F a cF asci sm
i mi ill e KYV-5, K Y- 9 9 A / 1 0 0
4 0

41

42

43

44

45 Network (Prearranged) 1200 lAW Netwoi

46 Computer 1200 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

47 Facsimile 1200 Facsimile KYV-5, KY-99 A/100

48 Facsimile 1200 Facsimile KG-84A/C

49 PSC-2A 1200 PSC-2A KG-84A/C

50 PSC-2A 1200 PSC-2A KYV-5, KY-99A/100

51 DMDG 1200 DMDG KG-84A/C

52 D M D G 1200 D M D G KYV-5, KY-99A/100

53 KL-43C/F 1200 ASCII 8N2 KL-43C/F

54 Computer 1200 ASCII 8N2 K Y V- 5 , K Y- 9 9 A / 1 0 0

55

56

57 TEST2 Prear- Prearranged Prearranged

ranged

Network (Prearranged) lAW Network/prearranged lAW Network/Prearranged

Facsimile F aac cs ismii m
F le ile KYV-5, K Y- 9 9 A/100
Facsimile Facsimile KG-84A/C

Hand Set/ANDVT Vo i c e KYV-5, KY-99A/100

Data/ANDVT Prearranged Prearranged

PSC-2A PSC-2A KG-84A/C

PSC-2A PSC-2A KYV-5, KY-99A/100

KL-43C/F ASCII 8N2 KL-43C/F
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-8. DAMA Configuration Codes (Continued)

C o n fi g u r a t i o n Equipment Data Protocol C rypto
Code

NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. Always use codes if provided in the Satellite Access
Authorization. For further assistance in DAMA codes, contact Space and Naval Warfare System
Command (SPAWAR) (US Navy).
^ 9 I C o m p u t e r 2 4 0 0 A S C I I 8 N 2 | K G - 8K G4- A
8 4 /A C
/C

Computer ASCII 8N2 K Y V- 5 , K Y- 9 9 A / I 0 0

Ta c t i c a l I n t e r n e t Ta c t i c a l I n t e r n e t KG-84A/C

PC Prearranged KG-84A/C

TEST I Prear Prearranged Prearranged

ranged

Network (Prearranged) lAW Network/prearranged lAW Network/Prearranged

Facsimile Facsimile K Y V- 5 , K Y- 9 9 A / I 0 0
Facsimile KG-84A/C

K L - 4 3 C / F. KL-43C/F

Ta c t i c a l I n t e r n e t KG-84A/C

Computer
Computer

Facsimile 16000 Facsimile KG-84A/C

Network (Prearranged) 16000 I lAW Network/prearranged lAW Network/Prearranged

Facsimile 16000 Facsimile K Y- 5 7 / 5 8

Hand Set/ANDVT 16000 Voice K Y- 5 7 / 5 8

PSC-2A 16000 PSC-2A KYV-5, KY-99A/100

PSC-2A 16000 PSC-2A KG-84A/C

Ta c t i c a l I n t e r n e t 1 6 0 0 0 Ta c t i c a l I n t e r n e t KG-84A/C

Computer 16000 Prearranged KG-84A/C

Computer 16000 ASCII 8N2 KG-84A/C

hfARRtS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-8. DAMA Configuration Codes (Continued)

Equipment I Data I Protocol I C rypto

NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. Always use codes if provided in the Satellite Access
Authorization. For further assistance in DAMA codes, contact Space and Naval Warfare System
Command (SPAWAR) (US Navy).
98 Demand Assigned Sin- Prear- Prearranged Prearranged
gle Access (DASA) ranged
5kHz

DASA 25kHz Prear- Prearranged Prearranged

ranged

Table B-9. DAMA System Information Request Codes

Information Request Definition
NOTE
This table is subject to change without notice. For further assistance in DAMA codes,
contact US Navy Space and Naval Warfare System Command.
Disconnect - Constant Key Offender (transmit time over 17 minutes continuous)
DASA Requests are reserved for guards only - The requesting user's Configuration Code indicates a
DASA service and the user has requested connection to another user. Configuration Codes 98 and 99
are reserved for DASA services and only Private Guards can be assigned to DASA channels.
Your terminal type cannot be connected to the requested guard - The requested guard number is asso
ciated with terminals built to a different version of the MIL-STD. Check the guard number and try
again. MIL-STD-188-183(-) and MIL-STD-188-183(A) use different channel codes to reference the
uplink/downlink frequencies for a DAMA channel.
Your terminal cannot communicate on the assigned channel - The requested service is assigned on a
channel that a MIL-STD-188-183(-) terminal cannot be connected to. MIL-STD-188-183(-) and MIL-
STD-188-183(A) use different channel codes to reference the uplink/downlink frequencies for a
DAMA channel.

Log Out report must be initiated from port 1 - The Log Out Information Report was sent from a port
other than port 1. Change to port 1 and retry.
Frame Format of requester's Home Channel does not support the requested service. The network re
quires a time slot that is not provided on the channel your terminal is logged in on. This can occur if
something was missed during the planning process, and either a channel was not configured properly,
or the data rate defined for the network was entered in error in the DAMA channel controller database.
It can also occur if the frame format of the channel planned to host this network had to be changed to
meet an emerging, higher priority requirement. Notify your organization's communications planner.
Requesting party's guard list does not contain guard address

B-21
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B ifMZiUS'
Table B-9. DAMA System Information Request Codes (Continued)
Code Information Request Definition
Service Request Access Restriction Violation. The precedence you entered with your request was:
• Higher than the access restriction established for your terminal in the DAMA channel
controller's database. Resend your request at a lower precedence.
OR

• Lower than the channel access restriction. Orderwire traffic on this channel is heavy and is
being controlled by the DAMA channel controller. Only requests above a given precedence
level will be honored. Try again later. (Or, if authorized, try resending your request with a
higher precedence.)
Requesting party already has an outstanding queued request. You have already sent a service request.
That request is in queue at the DAMA channel controller awaiting assignment to a time slot. You can
cancel the previous request and delete it from the queue by sending a Cancel Call orderwire message.
Requesting party is not authorized to activate an AllCall network. You tried to activate network address
16383 or 65535. These are special network addresses and cannot be activated by a user.

Requested party is already connected to a DASA service. The user you are trying to call is currently
participating in a service on a DASA channel.
Request canceled by user.
Queued call canceled - service queue time-out timer expired.
Your terminal does not exist in the database. (The channel controller has no record of the calling party's address
having been assigned by the addressing administrator.)
Request queue is currently full. (The channel controller queue will hold a maximum of 16 call
requests. Requests received after the queue is full are canceled.)
Queued call canceled; connection is no longer possible. (Your call request was in the channel controller queue
but was removed for some reason, such as the request is no longer valid.)
Enter a configuration code and try again. The channel controller has never received a configuration
code from the requesting port since the terminal was powered up or since an out-of-service Retum
Channel Control Orderwire (RCCOW) was sent from the port.
Required data rate can not be supported. (For non-frequency switchable terminals, the channel controller can
celed the request because the frame format in use on the channel does not have a slot to support the baseband data
rate requested. For frequency switchable terminals, no channels on the satellite can support the data rate.)

Requested party unknown. Check the Call Directory and try again. (The called party is not in the channel con
troller database.)
Cannot add users to this guard. (Your port is already connected to an active guard and cannot add another party
to the guard via a two-party or conference call.)
Cannot add a guard to your existing call. (Your port is connected to an existing call and cannot add a guard to the
call.)
Requesting party is not authorized to activate this guard. (A guard can only be activated by a Comm Plan, a chan
nel controller operator, or a net controller for a private guard not contained in the daily Comm Plan.)

Requesting party is not a member of this private guard. (You will not be connected to an active
private guard if you have not been included on the member list.)
Requested party's terminal is unauthorized or zeroized.
DAMA Strategic Air Command (SAC): 5/25kHz Slave Channel is not available from requestor's home channel -

Requesting party's baseband device is not compatible with this guard. (A user's request to enter an active guard
is denied because the configuration code in the requesting port does not match the guard's configuration code.)
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
I^ARRIS APPENDIX B

Table B-9. DAMA System Information Request Codes (Continued)

Code Information Request Definition

Requested party has no compatible baseband device. (The configuration code of the calling port can not be found
in any terminal ports of the called user.)
None of the requested users are available. (This information request is sent in response to a conference call where
no called party is available to be connected.)
Connection would cause contention. Not enough users available. - There are two reasons that this message may
be sent:
a. The connection would cause contention between ports within a terminal.

b. A frequency switchable terminal cannot use the same time slot on different channels.
Not all requested parties could be connected. (The conference call is connected; the caller is notified that not ev
eryone requested was connected.)
Other link test in progress. (In the time interval between authorization of a link test and initiation of the link test,
receipt of a second link test request will result in this cancellation response to the
second request.)
Unable to connect parties from different channels.
DAMA SAC: Frequency switching is required but cannot be accomplished due to one or more of the following
reasons:

a. Terminal(s) which must frequency switch can not perform the switch.

b. Data and Orderwire (OW) channels are not on the same satellite.

c. Data and OW chaimels are not controlled by the same channel controller.

d. No frame segments match.

e. STG is not enabled.

Demand Assigned activation disabled for this guard. The user has requested to join a network service that is not
currently active.
No DASA channel available. (The channel controller database does not contain an available compatible DASA
channel.)
Requesting party is already connected to a DAMA time slot. (A DASA channel connection cannot be assigned
to a terminal if any of the terminal ports have a DAMA slot connection.)
Too many guards specified in this request. (More than one guard number was entered in a conference request for
a DASA channel or DAMA time slot.)
Reserved for TD1271 Home Channel Change at the terminal. At receipt of the first RCCO W or Initial Entry Flag
from a user, the channel controller will automatically send a Home Channel Frequency Change Channel Control
Orderwire (CCOW) to the Fleet Satellite Communications System (FSCS) terminal.

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages

AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Ta b l e B - 1 0 . 5 k H z DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAM A Message Explanation
SYSTEM SERVICE The network channel controller will allow 2400 bps voice or
RESTRICTIONS OFF data services.

NETWORK HAS BEEN The satellite channel has changed from a DAMA channel to a
SHUTDOWN Dedicated channel. If authorized, operator should activate a
new DAMA net.

NETWORK IS Multiple hop services (i.e. across multiple satellite footprints)

I S O L AT E D are hot available in the network.

NETWORK IS Multiple hop services (i.e. across multiple satellite footprints)

CONNECTED are available in the network.

PCC TRANSITIONING A new Primary Channel Controller (PCC) is taking over. No

operator action is required.
NEW VOICE SERVICE A new voice service is assigned between the respective
FROM:##### TO: ##### addresses.

N E W D ATA S E R V I C E A new data service is assigned between the respective

FROM:##### TO: ##### addresses.

REQUEST QUEUED: Your DAMA service request is queued with a local search ar
LOCAL e a .

REQUEST QUEUED: Your DAMA service request is queued with a multiple hop
M U LT I P L E HOP search area.

REQUEST QUEUED: Your Dedicated channel service request is queued at the chan
DEDICATED nel controller.

REQUEST QUEUED Acknowledges your service request which will be sent to the
AT TERMINAL channel controller.

REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because you have too many ser
SERVICE QUEUE FULL vice requests in process. Request the service again after termi
nating an existing service.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because it was at a precedence
TERM ACCESS RESTRICTION exceeding the assigned terminal access restriction. Check the
terminal access restriction precedence.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request was rejected because its precedence
SYS SERVICE RESTRICTION violated the current network system service restriction prece
dence. Check the system service restriction precedence.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because the destination is not
DESTNOT LOGGED IN logged into the network.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because multiple hop channel
N O M U LT I - H O P R E S O U R C E S resources are not available.

REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because the network is out of
N O C A PA C I T Y channel resources. Request your service again, or if autho
rized, request your service with a higher precedence.
REQUEST DENIED: Your circuit request is denied due to an Input/Output (I/O) data
I / O D A T A R A T E I N C O M P A T. rate incompatibility with the destination. Select a new, com
patible port configuration and request the service again.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because the destination is not on
NETWORK I S O L AT E D your satellite and the channel controller does not have access
to the required satellite.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because Dedicated channel re
CHAN NOT AVA I L A B L E sources are not available.

REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because the service is not
NOT ASSIGNABLE assignable. This may be due to inadequate link quality. Check
your link quality. If it is too low, check the terminal's antenna
orientation. If it is high, the destination may not have adequate
link quality.
REQUEST DENIED: Your service request is denied because the destination cannot
FREQ SWITCHING INCOMPAT support automatic frequency switching. A dedicated service
request cannot be sent to the destination. Request a DAMA cir
cuit or message service to the destination.
TEARDOWN MESSAGE Your service teardown request is being transmitted to the Net
S E N T T O N C S Control Station (NCS) channel controller.
SERVICE ERROR: The radio received a full duplex service assignment. Since the
FULL DUPLEX ASSIGNMENT radio supports half-duplex communications, the radio will au
tomatically attempt to teardown the service.
SERVICE ERROR: The radio received a service assignment with a bit rate incom
I / O D ATA R AT E I N C O M PAT patible with the current port configuration. The radio
automatically attempts to teardown the service.
TEARDOWN: A circuit or message service was torn down by the source or
OPERATOR REQUESTED destination operator. Once torn down, there is no information
on the service in the service info menu.

TEARDOWN: A circuit service was torn down because the source or destina
USER NOT LOGGED IN tion is no longer logged into the network.
TEARDOWN: A preempted circuit or message service was torn down because
PREEMPTION TIMEOUT it had been in a preempted state for longer than the time-out du
ration.

TEARDOWN: A service was tom down because it was queued at the channel
QUEUED SERVICE TIMEOUT controller for longer than the time-out duration.
TEARDOWN: A circuit service was tom down because multiple hop channel
MHOP CIRCUIT SETUP FAILED resource set-up failed.
TEARDOWN: A service was tom down due to a higher precedence service re
PRECEDENCE OVERRIDE quiring the channel resources.
TEARDOWN: A circuit service was tom down because data timing was lost
END-TO-END BIT TIMING LOSS between the source and destination terminal occurred during
Built-in Test (BIT).
TEARDOWN: A circuit service was tom down due to an I/O data rate incom
I / O D ATA R AT E I N C O M PAT I B I L I T Y patibility between the source and the destination.
TEARDOWN: A circuit or message was tom down because the designated
UNKNOWN SERVICE source of the service did not request the service.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
TEARDOWN: A circuit or message was tom down because the channel con
NCS REQUESTED troller requested it.
TEARDOWN: A circuit service was tom down because the channel resources
UNUSED CIRCUIT TIMEOUT have been idle for longer than the time-out duration (i.e. no
traffic communication).
TEARDOWN: A message service was tom down without the destination ac
UNACKNOW MESSAGE DELIVERY knowledging message delivery.
TEARDOWN: A multiple hop circuit service was tom down because the chan
L O S S O F PAT H C O N N E C T I V I T Y nel resources are no longer available.
TEARDOWN: A multiple hop circuit service was tom down because the des
DEST NOT FOUND WITHIN MAX HOPS tination could not be found.

TEARDOWN: A multiple hop circuit service was tom down because of mul
M U LT I P L E P R E E M P T I O N S tiple service preemptions.
TEARDOWN DENIED: Your service teardown request was denied because you tried to
S U B N E T D E S T I N AT I O N teardown a service for which you participate as a subnet desti
nation. The source of a subnet is authorized teardown the ser
vice.

TEARDOWN DENIED: Your service teardown request was denied because you are not
PREASSIGNED SERVICE allowed to teardown preassigned circuit services. Only the
channel controller can teardown a preassigned circuit service.
TEARDOWN DENIED: Your service teardown request was denied because the service
UNKNOWN SERVICE is already disabled.
LOGIN MESSAGE Your login Retum Orderwire (ROW) was transmitted to the
SENT TO NCS network channel controller.

L O G I N Your login ROW was acknowledged by the network channel

SUCCESSFUL controller and you are ready to request and receive communi
cation services.

LOGIN DENIED: Your login request was denied by the channel controller due to
N O C A PA C I T Y no capacity. If an altemate channel is authorized, change to
that channel and attempt to login. Otherwise, wait and try
again.
LOGIN DENIED: Your login request was denied by the channel controller since
NOT AUTHORIZED your terminal address is not authorized to participate in the net
work. Check your terminal address and guard addresses.
LOGIN DENIED: Your login request was denied by the channel controller be
ADDR ABOVE D E M A R C AT I O N cause you attempted to login with your terminal address set to
a s u b n e t a d d r e s s v a l u e . Te r m i n a l a d d r e s s e s m u s t b e i n t h e

range of 1 to the demarcation address (usually 16384). Check

your terminal address.
LOGIN DENIED: Your login request was denied by the channel controller be
I N VA L I D A D D R E S S cause your terminal address was invalid. It must be in the range
of 1 to the demarcation address (usually 16384). Check your
terminal address. If your address is valid, this could mean that
your address is already logged in. Try using a preassigned log
in.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

A N / P R C - 11 7 F DAMA Message Explanation
LOGIN FAILURE: Your login request failed because the channel controller is not
NO RESPONSE acknowledging your request. Reactivate the net to reinitiate
login. If still no response from the channel controller, check
antenna, and perform BIT.
MAX RADIO PRECEDENCE IS: Reports the highest precedence the terminal may use for ser
precedence vice requests. The radio will automatically prevent the opera
tor from placing a service request at a higher precedence than
allowed.

SERVICE One of your active circuit or message services was preempted.

PREEMPTED Check your service info menu.
D E M A R C AT I O N A D D R E S S Reports the demarcation address for the network. The demar
m m # cation address designates the highest terminal node address.
Addresses above the demarcation address are subnet address-

L O G G E D O U T: Your terminal was logged out at your request.

TERMINAL REQUESTED
L O G G E D O U T: Your terminal was logged out at the channel controller's
NCS DIRECTED request.
L O G G E D O U T: Your terminal was logged out because you are not authorized
NOT AUTHORIZED to participate in the network.
L O G G E D O U T: Your terminal was logged out because your net has an invalid
I N VA L I D A D D R . I N G U A R D L I S T address in its guard list.
LOGOUT DENIED: Your logout request was denied because you aren't logged in.
NOT LOGGED IN

LOGGED O U T: Your terminal was logged out at your request. However, the
NO NCS RESPONSE channel controller did not acknowledge your logout ROW
even after the ROW was automatically retransmitted.
LOGGED O U T: Your terminal was logged out because it had lost downlink ac
DOWNLINK LOST quisition for 200 consecutive frames.
NEW MESSAGE SERVICE You are assigned channel resources for a message service be
FROM:##### TO:##### tween the designated source and destination.
MESSAGE You were the source of a message service which has been ac
ACKNOWLEDGED knowledged by the destination.
WARNING! BUFFERED One of your incoming buffered messages was overwritten by a
MESSAGE DISCARDED newer, higher precedence incoming message. The radio can
store three incoming messages at a time.
WARNING! Your outgoing message was greater than 14 Kbytes (after en
MESSAGE T R U N C AT E D cryption) so the radio truncated the message and will continue
to process the service.
MESSAGE OUTPUT Your outgoing message has been completely transmitted to the
COMPLETE destination.

MESSAGE DELIVERY The downloading of your buffered, incoming message from

COMPLETE the radio to your data device completed successfully.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
MESSAGE DELIVERY The downloading of your buffered, incoming message from
FAILED the radio to your data device. Check your data device and port
configuration and reattempt download.
NEW MESSAGE BUFFERED An incoming message has been completely received and buff
FROM: address ered in the radio. If the radio is in message mode and config
ured for automatic download, the message will be automatical
ly downloaded to the data device at this time. If the radio is
configured for manual download, the message can be down
loaded by going to the call menu and selecting the download
command.

MESSAGE TRANSFER An outgoing message has been successfully uploaded from the
COMPLETE data device to the radio.

MESSAGE TRANSFER The uploading of an outgoing message from the data device to
FAILED the radio failed. Check your data device and port configuration
and reattempt upload.
ACQUIRING The radio is in the process of synchronizing its receive timing
DOWNLINK with the DAMA channel.

DOWNLINK The radio successfully achieved downlink acquisition (i.e. syn

ACQUIRED chronizing receive timing with the DAMA channel).
DOWNLINK LOST The radio lost downlink acquisition and is automatically at
REACQUIRING tempting reacquisition.
RANGE LOCK LOST The radio lost uplink acquisition and is automatically attempt
ing reacquisition.
RANGING IN PROGRESS The radio is in the process of synchronizing transmit timing
with the DAMA channel.

RANGING COMPLETE The radio successfully achieved uplink acquisition (i.e. syn
chronizing transmit timing with the DAMA channel).
TRANSMIT INHIBITED: When range lock is lost, the radio cannot transmit on the chan
UPLINK LOST nel.

TRANSMIT ENABLED: The radio successfully achieved uplink reacquisition and trans
UPLINK REACQUIRED missions are enabled.

ADDRESS ADDED: The specified address was added to your DAMA net guard list
##### by the channel controller.
ADDRESS DELETED: The specified address was deleted from you DAMA net guard
m m list by the channel controller.
ADDRESSES ADDED: The specified addresses were added to your DAMA net guard
list by the channel controller.
«*.« .f f 1

ADDRESSES DELETED: The specified addresses were deleted from your DAMA net
li 111 / 1 / n n n n n

jTTTTTTTTT
guard list by the channel controller.
U N S U C C E S S F U L G U A R D M O D I F I C AT I O N The channel controller attempted to modify your DAMA net
BY NCS guard list but the radio was unable to comply.
DASA ASSIGNMENT TO You have been assigned to a dedicated channel for the speci
CH###FOR###ww75 fied amount of time.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
DASA ASSIGNMENT TO You have been assigned to a dedicated channel for an indefi
CH ###, INDBFINrrE nite amount of time.

ACQUISITION FAILURE: The radio attempted to reassign to a new DAMA channel but
RETURNING TO CH, ### could not complete acquisition. The radio automatically
returns to the original DAMA channel.
NET ERROR: The radio has not been able to achieve downlink acquisition for
UNABLE TO REACQUIRE DOWNLINK a time-out duration. The radio will continue to attempt down
link acquisition. If the radio continues fail downlink
acquisition, check antenna orientation. Otherwise, if
authorized, activate a different DAMA net. WARNING! In
DAMA mode, the radio may transmit automatically. Do
not stand in front of the antenna while in DAMA mode.

NET ERROR: The radio has not been able to achieve uplink acquisition for a
UNABLE TO ACTIVE RANGE time-out duration. The radio will continue to attempt uplink
acquisition. If the radio continues fail uplink acquisition,
activate a different DAMA net if authorized.

ORDERWIREKEYS The channel controller zeroized the DAMA net orderwire

ZEROIZED keys.
WARNING: You were assigned a circuit with a bit rate different from the
B I T R AT E O V E R R I D D E N T O # # # selected port configuration. Since the assigned bit rate is
compatible with the crypto mode, the radio automatically
overrides to the new rate.

ERROR: You were assigned a service with a crypto mode which is

C R Y P T O M O D E I N C O M PAT I B L E W / S E T U P incompatible with the selected port configuration. The radio
port is not activated. Toggle the Plain Text - Cipher Text
(PT-CT) switch.
ERROR: You were assigned a voice service but the selected port
V O I C E C K T I N C O M PAT I B L E W / S E T U P configuration is for data. The radio port is not activated.
ERROR' You were assigned a data service but the selected port
D ATA C K T I N C O M PAT I B L E W / S E T U P configuration is for voice. The radio port is not activated.
ERROR: You were assigned a service at a bit rate which is incompatible
B I T R AT E I N C O M PAT I B L E W / S E T U P with the selected port configuration. The radio port is not
activated.

ERROR: You attempted to upload an outgoing message or download a

D ATA MSG I N C O M PAT I B L E W/SETUP buffered incoming message using an incompatible port
configuration. The radio port is not activated.
ERROR: You were assigned to a DASA channel which is incompatible
D A S A C H A N N E L I N C O M PAT I B L E W / S E T with the selected port configuration. The radio port is not
U P activated.

SERVICE REQUEST OVERRIDDEN BY AS Warning, you were assigned a message or circuit service which
SIGNMENT you requested. However, one or more of the assignment
parameters was different from your original request.
MISSED The radio missed the last Forward Orderwire (FOW) burst.
F O W
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-10. 5 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
RECEIVED The radio did not successfully decode the last FOW.
CORRUPT FOW

LINK QUALITY UPDATE Reports the latest link quality calculation.

C/NO: ##.# DB-HZ

CHANNEL REASSIGNED You were assigned to a new DAMA channel. The radio
TO CHANNEL ### automatically attempts to acquire the new channel.

Tabie B-11. 25 kHz DAMA Status Messages

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
MINIMUM PRECEDENCE IS: Reports the minimum required RCCOW precedence. Only
precedence RCCOW's with a precedence equal to or greater than this is
allowed to be transmitted on the network.

REQUEST QUEUED Acknowledges your RCCOW request which will be sent to the
AT TERMINAL c h a n n e l c o n t r o l l e r.

REQUEST REJECTED: Your RCCOW request is rejected because the radio is connect
E M C O N ed on a SHE uplink channel. This also occurs if you request a
DC link test when the radio is in a transmit inhibit condition.

REQUEST REJECTED: Your RCCOW request was rejected because its precedence is
PRECEDENCE TOO LOW below the network precedence cutoff. Check precedence
cutoff

REQUEST REJECTED: Your call request has already been transmitted to the channel
CALL ALREADY TXed controller. The radio will automatically send a new RCCOW
to the channel controller to terminate the call request.
REQUEST REJECTED: Your RCCOW request is rejected due to half duplex conten
CONTENTION tion.

REQUEST REJECTED: Your RCCOW request is rejected because you have too many
TRANSMIT QUEUE FULL RCCOW requests in-process. Request the RCCOW again after
in-process RCCOW's are acknowledged by the channel con
t r o l l e r.

S E R V I C E P R E E M P T E D T I M E L E F T: Your active circuit will be preempted in the designated amount

#### units of time.

ACQUIRING The radio is in the process of synchronizing its receive timing

D O W N L I N K with the DAMA channel.

D O W N L I N K The radio successfully achieved downlink acquisition

ACQUIRED (i.e. synchronizing receive timing with the DAMA channel).
DOWNLINK LOST The radio lost downlink acquisition and is automatically
REACQUIRING attempting reacquisition.
PORT DISABLED: The radio traffic port which was active on a circuit was
DOWNLINK LOST disabled because downlink acquisition was lost.
PORT RECONNECTED: The radio traffic port was re-enabled because the downlink
DOWNLINK REACQUIRED was reacquired.
FRAME LOCK The radio successfully received two consecutive CCOW
ACHIEVED bursts.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-11. 25 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

A N / P R C - 11 7 F DAMA Message Explanation
LOSS OF CCOW The radio failed to decode 16 consecutive CCOW bursts.
DECODE

SUCCESSFUL CCOW The radio successfully decoded a CCOW after declaring "loss
DECODE of CCOW" decode.

RANGE LOCK LOST The radio lost uplink acquisition and will automatically at
tempt reacquisition.
RANGING
R A N G I N G IIN
N PPROGRESS
ROGRESS The radio is in the process of synchronizing transmit timing
with the DAMA channel.

RANGING
R ANGING COMPLETE
COMPLETE The radio successfully achieved uplink acquisition (i.e. syn
chronizing transmit timing with the DAMA channel).
T R A N S M I T INHIBITED:
TRANSMIT I N H I B I T E D : When range lock is lost, the radio cannot transmit on the
U P LL IINNKK L O S T L O S T channel.

TRANSMIT
T RANSMIT ENABLED:
ENABLED: The radio successfully achieved uplink reacquisition and
PLLIINNKK RREE
UP AA CU
CQ QIU
RIERDE D t r a n s m i s s i o n s a r e e n a b l e d .

ADDRESS
A D D R E S S AADDED:
DDED: The specified address was added to your DAMA net guard list
#####
H M H i i
T T i r T T t t f T by the channel controller.
ADDRESS
A DELETED:
DDRESS D ELETED: The specified address was deleted from you DAMA net guard
##### list by the channel controller.
ADDRESSES
A ADDED:
DDRESSES A DDED: The specified addresses were added to your DAMA net guard
# # # # # , # # # # # l i s t b y t h e c h a n n e l c o n t r o l l e r.
#####,#####
ADDRESSES
A D D R E S S E S DDELETED: E L E T E D : The specified addresses were deleted from your DAMA net
I I Im
m I I I, I I I I ,m #m# # # # g u a r d l i s t b y t h e c h a n n e l c o n t r o l l e r.
UNSUCCESSFUL GUARD MODIFICATION The channel controller attempted to modify your DAMA net
BY NCS guard list but the radio was unable to comply.
DASA ASSIGNMENT TO You have been assigned to a dedicated channel for the
CH###FOR###Mm75 specified amount of time.
DASA ASSIGNMENT TO You have been assigned to a dedicated channel for an indefi
CH ###, INDEFINITE nite amount of time.

ACQUISITION FAILURE: The radio attempted to reassign to a new DAMA channel but
RETURNING TO CH. ### could not complete acquisition. The radio automatically
returns to the original DAMA channel.
NET ERROR: The radio has not been able to achieve downlink acquisition for
UNABLE TO REACQUIRE DOWNLINK a time-out duration. The radio will continue to attempt
downlink acquisition. If the radio continues fail downlink
acquisition, check antenna orientation. Otherwise, if
authorized, activate a different DAMA net.
NET ERROR: The radio has not been able to achieve uplink acquisition for a
UNABLE TO ACTIVE RANGE time-out duration. The radio will continue to attempt uplink
acquisition. If the radio continues fail uplink acquisition,
activate a different DAMA net if authorized.

F R A M E F O R M AT C H A N G E Reports the frame format for the A, B, and C traffic segment of

A:#B:#C:# the DAMA frame.

C A L L T E R M I N AT E D Your active circuit was terminated.

B-31
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Ta b l e B - 1 1 . 2 5 k H z DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
R X O N LY C A L L S E T U P You are assigned a receive only circuit for the specified
FORM units duration.

RX/TX CALL SET UP You are assigned a receive and transmit capable circuit for the
FOR ## time units specified duration.
R X O N LY C A L L S E T U P You are assigned a receive only circuit for an indefinite
INDEFINITELY duration.

RX/TX CALL SET UP You are assigned a receive and transmit capable circuit for an
INDEFINITELY i n d e fi n i t e d u r a t i o n .

CALL REQUEST Your service request was cancelled.

CANCELLED

CALL WAITING You have a call waiting from the specified source at the
FROM address precedence specified precedence.
CALL WAITING You have a call waiting to the specified destination at the
TO address precedence specified precedence.
CALL REQUEST QUEUED Your call request was queued by the channel controller for the
FOR ## time units specified duration.
CALL REQUEST QUEUED Your call request was queued by the channel controller
INDEFINITELY indefinitely.
CALL REJECTED: Your call request was rejected because you are already active
ALREADY CONNECTED on a circuit.

CALL REJECTED: Your call request was rejected because the destination address)
I N VA L I D A D D R E S S E S is invalid.

CALL REJECTED: Your call request was cancelled while queued at the terminal.
DELETED BY USER

CALL REJECTED: Your call request was disabled because it was queued for
SERVICE TIMEOUT longer than a time-out duration.
LINK TEST REJECTED: Your link test request was rejected because the link test slot
SLOT IN USE was in use.

LINK TEST The radio is starting a link test.

INITIATED

LINK TEST The link test was aborted.

A B O R T E D

ra/eLINK TEST Reports the resulting number of bit error for the link test.
ERRORS #####/#####

rate LINK TEST Reports the resulting number of missed acquisitions for the
MISSED ACQS: ###/### link test.

PA R T Y O U T- O F - S E R V I C E The destination of your call request is out of service for the

FOR ## time units specified duration. Your call request has therefore failed and
should be reattempted later.
PA RT Y OUT-OF-SERVICE The destination of you call request is out of service for an
INDEFINITELY unspecified duration. Your call request has therefore failed and
should be reattempted later.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-11. 25 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
C O N S TA N T K E Y A L A R M The radio sent a constant key alarm RCCOW to the channel
SENT TO NCS controller because the radio has been keyed continuously for
17 minutes.

ORDERWIRE KEYS The channel controller zeroized the DAMA net orderwire
ZEROIZED keys.
CIRCUIT DISCONNECTED Your active circuit was terminated. The radio port is no longer
active.

TX HAS BEEN The channel controller disabled transmissions on the network.

DISABLED BY THE PCC

TX HAS BEEN The channel controller enabled transmissions on the network.

ENABLED BY THE PCC

RCCOW TRANSMITTED Your RCCOW was transmitted to the channel controller.

RCCOW NOT Your RCCOW was not acknowledged by the channel

ACKNOWLEDGED c o n t r o l l e r.

RCCOW ACKNOWLEDGED: Your RCCOW was acknowledged by the channel controller

NOT PROCESSED but the controller was too busy to process the request.
RCCOW ACKNOWLEDGED: Your RCCOW was acknowledged and queued by the channel
REQUEST QUEUED c o n t r o l l e r.

RCCOW ACKNOWLEDGED: Your out-of-service RCCOW was acknowledged by the

RADIO OUT-OF-SERVICE c h a n n e l c o n t r o l l e r.

RCCOW ACKNOWLEDGED: Your RCCOW was acknowledged and processed by the

REQUEST COMPLETE channel controller.

RCCOW ASSIGNMENT ERROR: A radio error occurred with your RCCOW request. Reinitiate
D U P L I C AT E I D your request.
RETRYING The first attempt to send your RCCOW failed. The radio will
RCCOW TRANSMISSION automatically attempt a single retry.
U N A B L E T O F I N D A D E D I C AT E D R A N G E Warning that the radio was unable to conduct its automatic,
SLOT active ranging measurement because there were no channel
r e s o u r c e s .

SLOT CONNECT Your DC mode circuit request was successful.

SUCCESSFUL

SLOT CONNECT You received a circuit assignment which was ignored because
IGNORED the radio port is already in use.
I N VA L I D SLOT NUMBER: You placed a DC circuit request to an invalid slot number.
TTTiTTTTTT Check your frame format and DC circuit number for compati
bility.
SLOT REJECTED: You placed a DC voice circuit request but the circuit number
NOT VOICE SLOT you specified is not for 2400 or 16000 bps.
SLOT REJECTED: You placed a DC circuit request which is not compatible with
FRAME F O R M AT M I S M AT C H the current frame format.

SLOT DISCONNECT ERROR: You placed a DC circuit disconnect, but the radio is not active
NOT CONNECTED on a circuit.

B-33
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
APPENDIX B

Table B-11. 25 kHz DAMA Status Messages (Continued)

AN/PRC-117F DAMA Message Explanation
INFORMATION REQUEST RECEIVED: You received the specified information request code from the
CODE=### channel controller. You will be prompted to respond to this
CCOW with an Information Report code. You must respond
before any other RCCOW's can be transmitted by the radio.
D ATA R X F R O M : The radio received a data transfer from the specified source.
address: precedence ########
C O M P D ATA R E C E I V E D : The radio received a computer data transfer from the specified
address: precedence ######## s o u r c e .

NEW SUBMODE: Reports the DAMA network is operating in Automatic Control

A C mode.

NEW SUBMODE: Reports that the DAMA network is operating in Distributed

D C Control mode.

ERROR: You were assigned to a DAS A channel which is incompatible

DAS A CHANNEL INCOMPATIBLE W/SET- with the selected port configuration.
UP

CHANNEL REASSIGNED You were assigned to a new DAMA channel. The radio
TO CHANNEL ### automatically attempts to acquire the new channel.
RCCOW INHIBITED: Your RCCOW request was inhibited because the radio is in
UNIT IN EMCON MODE EMCON mode. The RCCOW is automatically queued and
transmitted when the radio's transmit capability changes to
FULL.

B-34
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

APPENDIX C

C.1 GLOSSARY

Listed below is the Glossary of Terms used in this manual.

Airborne

Automatic Control, Alternating Current

AC DAMA Automatic Control DAMA

ADF Port Audio Data Fill Connector J1

Asynchronous Data Transfer

Ancillary Interface Connector J9/6

Automatic Keying

Amplitude Modulation

ANCD Automated Net Control Device, ARMY common name

for the AN/CYZ-IODTD.

A N D V T Advanced Narrowband Digital Voice Terminal, 2400 bps

maximum data rate. LPC-10 KY-99/99A, KYV-5
compatible encryption.
A R D P Adaptive Radio Data Protocol
Automatic Repeat ReQuest

A S C I I American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Amplitude Shift Keying

ASYNC Asynchronous
A i r Tr a f fi c C o n t r o l

A V G Average

Bits Per Second

Bit error rate

B u i l t - i n Te s t

Black Data Non-COMSEC programmed parameters such as the net

presets and configuration settings.

Bayonet Neill-Concelman (Connector Type)

C-1
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-B- - Continued

BPSK Binary Phase Shift Keying

Celsius

C2PC Command and Control Personal Computer

Controlled Cryptographic Item

C C O W Channel Control Orderwire. The data path from primary

channel controller to DAMA terminal in 25 kHz DAMA
operation.
CDCSS Continuous Digital Coded Squelch System. An EI A
standard set of digital codes used to break squelch on a
radio.

Complete Discharge Device. Device built into some

lithium batteries to remove any remaining voltage charge
prior to disposal.
Common Fill Device, KYK-13, KYX-15, KOI-18 and
MX-18290 type fill devices. Use DS-102 protocol to
transfer keys.

CFIG, CFG Configuration

Combat ID

Crypto Ignition Key, removal of the KDU from unit

disables use and access to other loaded COMSEC keys.

Centimeter

centimeters squared

CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor

Combat Net Radio

Cold Start Method used by the master radio to initially open a net of
member radios by transmitting frequency hopping data
and time of day over a single line of sight fixed frequency
channel. This is done over the manual channel frequency.

COMSEC Communications Security

Configuration (CONFIG) The process of setting parameter values that define the
current hardware setup and/or operational modes. Also, a
collection of all such values.

C O T S Commercial off-the-shelf

Communications Planning Application

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-C- - Continued

Continuous Phase Modulation. A Modulation mode

added by MIL-STD 188-18IB that allow to have
receiving station automatically match that rate of the
sender.

Consolidated Single-Channel Radio Electronic

Counter-Countermeasure Package, a DTD application
software for SINCGARS and HAVEQUICK capable
radios. Uses DS-102 interface.

Cipher Text, encrypted voice or data

Common Tier 3

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System. An EIA

standard set of subaudible tone frequencies used to break
squelch on a radio.

Computer Telephony Interface

Clear-to-Send

A designated LOS fixed frequency net that enables a

radio not in a SINCGARS frequency hopping net to
contact the NCS or other members of the SINCGARS net.

Continuously Variable Slope Delta, 16 kbps in VINSON

encryption and 12 kbps in Fascinator encryption. A
method of digitizing voice to be encrypted.

Depth
D A G R Defense Advanced GPS Receiver

D A M A Demand Assigned Multiple Access UHF SATCOM. The

process of using an automated channel controller to setup
a timing frame on a SATCOM channel and controlling
access according to demand for service through forward
and return orderwires.

DAMA EOW TSK COM SEC Key used in DAMA operations to encrypt the
forward and return Engineering Orderwires used in the
DAMA waveform.

D A S A Demand Assigned Single Access. A process only

available from DAMA operation of granting service on
dedicated SATCOM channels using frequency agile
terminals that switch automatically upon service
assignment by the channel controller.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-D- - Continued

Decibel

Decibel level referenced to 1 milliwatt (.001 watt) power

level

Direct Current and Distributed Control

DC DAMA Distributed Control DAMA, 25 kHz form of DAMA

operation, more similar to time division multiplexing
used prior to development of AC DAMA. Service is
preassigned on a time basis and not on demand as in AC
D A M A .

DEQPSK Differentially Encoded Quadrature

Down

Department of Defense
D O M Day of Month. HAVEQUICKII mode of operation use
DOM from calendar date in TOD to determine which
loaded MWOD to utilize.

DS-101 Asynchronous COMSEC key transfer protocol used by

AN/CYZ-10 DTD FILL and CT3 user application
software. DS-102 uses other CFDs.

Data Transfer Device AN/CYZ-10, also known as the

Automated Net Controllers Device (ANCD) in
SINCGARS operation.

Data Terminal Equipment

Dial-up Networking

ECCM Electronic Counter-Counter Measures, anti-jam modes of

either SINCGARS or HAVEQUICK frequency hopping.

E D M Enhanced Data Mode

Electronics Industries Alliance

E I R P Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. It includes the

actual transmitter power and the receiving anterma gain.
EIRP is measured in decibels referenced to watts (dBW).

E M C O N Emission Control, UHF DAMA SATCOM and IW

operating mode to prevent radio from transmitting
independently without operator intervention. Used in
tactical situations to counter hostile radio direction
finding and interception efforts.
 f fi R i U S ' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-E- - Continued

E O M End-of-Message

EOW Engineering Orderwire, the control signal link between a

DAMA channel controller and a DAMA terminal. Uses a
TSK to secure data.

E P I R B Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacon

E R F Electronic Remote Fill. Relates to ESET.

E R R Error, HAVEQUICK display indication for uninitialized

TOD or missing SWOD or MWOD.

ESET Electronic Set. Contains SINCGARS frequency hopping

data, transmission security key and Net ID.

ESIP Enhanced SINCGARS Improvement Program

E T I Elapsed Time Indicator

/ • ^
- F -

FA S C I N AT O R Voice only encryption using CVSD at a 12 kbps rate,

FED-STD 1023.

FEC Forward Error Correction, a process use in transmitting

data in that error can be detected and corrected in the
receiving radio without having the data resent.
/<i«^ FED STD Federal Standard

F H Frequency Hopping, an electronic counter-counter

measure providing an antijam capability.

FLTSATCOM Older generation of UHF communications satellite and

being replaced by UHF Follow On constellation.
F M Frequency Modulation. Varying the frequency of the RF
carrier in proportion to the modulating signal.

F M T Frequency Management Training. HAVEQUICK FH

mode to allow training on a set of 16 selected UHF-AM
frequency assignments.
F O W Forward Orderwire, the control data path from primary
channel controller to DAMA terminal in 5 kHz DAMA
operation.
/ « ^
FREQ Frequency

Frequency Hopping Sync Time The TOD is used by SINCGARS to synchronize

SINCGARS frequency hopping communications. By
standard this comes from GPS system and is ZULU time.
Also known as Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

C-5
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-F- - Continued

FSCS Fleet Satellite Communications System

Frequency Shift Keying

Foot or Feet

Ground

Global Positioning System. A system using satellites to

provide position location and Time-of-Day used with
SINCGARS, HAVEQUICK, DAMA, and HPW.

GTOD Global Time-Of-Day. Also called Frequency Hopping

Sync Time.

Height

Hang Time The length of time the radio dwells on a net after a signal
ends before returning to scan.

H AV E Q U I C K m i ECCM Frequency Hopping methods operating in the

UHF band.

Hold Time The length of time the radio dwells on a net before
returning to scan, even with a signal present.

Hopset The set of frequencies on which a SINCGARS radio

hops.
H P W High Performance Waveform
HPW TRANSEC Transmission Security Key used in HPW SATCOM data
operation. This is needed in addition to the KG-84 TEK.

Hold-Up Battery. The radio's backup battery that

maintains programming and keys when main battery
power is not furnished.

H U I T S Harris Universal Image Transmission Software

ICOM Integrated COMSEC

Information Security (INFOSEC) Control Processor

I d e n t i fi c a t i o n

Intercom Interface Unit

 HfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-1- - Continued

\r? inches squared

INFOSEC Information Security

I / O Input/Output
I P Internet Protocol

I W Integrated Waveform

-J-

J I T C Joint Interoperability Test Command

-K-

k Kilo

/ « > kbps Kilobits per second

i « y K D U Keypad Display Unit

K E K Key Encryption Key, key used to wrap a TEK for
/ ( * \
transmission in AK OTAR process.

/OT^ K E Y M A T Keying Material

kg kilogram(s)

k H z Kilohertz

.1 -

/ W k Late Net Entry Mode (LNE) A receive function which permits a radio to enter a
SINCGARS net when its TOD clock has drifted away
from the net TOD or when a radio must join an existing
net. The entering transceiver must be loaded with the
proper TEK (not necessary in FT mode) and FH Fill data.

1 ^ lbs pounds

LCD Liquid Crystal Display

L D Load

Li-ION Lithium Ion

^mm^

/ * y
L N A Low Noise Amplifier. In-line receive system amplifier
used in SATCOM systems to improve performance. They
are usually placed near the antenna and powered by a bias
DC voltage sent by the transceiver through the
transmission line.

L N E Late Net Entry

C-7
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY §f\RR/S'
-L- - Continued

Loadset A set of up to five TEKs and one KEK, six ESETs and any
applicable lockout sets for one step loading by an
AN/CYZ-10 into a standard SINCGARS radio. This type
of SINCGARS fill is referred to as Mode 2.

Local Fill The procedure used to load hopset and lockout set /mm,

information from the front panel.

/mm,

Lockout Set A set of frequencies that are excluded during frequency

hopping operations. A lockout set effects all loaded
hopsets in the radio.

LOGIN Process in 5 kHz DAMA SATCOM to gain access to

network.

L O G O U T Process in 5 kHz DAMA SATCOM to leave the network.

LOS Line-of-Sight
LOUT Lockout

LPC Linear Predictive Coding - A method of digitizing analog S

voice signals.

L P D Low Probability of Detection

L P ! Low Probability of Intercept

-M-

M Meter
/mm,

Manual Channel Channel used in SINCGARS operations to perform Cold

Start Net Openings.
/mm,

M E L P Mixed Excitation Linear Prediction - method of digitizing

analog voice signals. Speech is more recognizable than
LPC and works well in poor signals strengths.

MGRS Military Grid Reference System

MHOP Multi-Hop Operation, 5 kHz DAMA operation involving

automatic retransmission from one satellite footprint the
channel control stations to reach the called terminal in a
different footprint

M H z Abbreviation for megahertz, or millions of cycles per

second.

mic microphone
M I L - S T D Military Standard

MIL-STD-188-181A Military Standard for 5kHz and 25 kHz channels.

D e d i c a t e d U H F S AT C O M

/mm,
C-8
 hfARRIS' AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-M- - Continued

MIL-STD-188-181B The current Military Standard for 5 kHz and 25 kHz

channels, Dedicated UHF SATCOM. Has provisions and
standards for increased data rates.

MIL-STD-188-182A Military Standard for 5 kHz UHF DAMA SATCOM.

MIL-STD-188-183 Military Standard for 25 kHz UHF DAMA SATCOM.

M K Manual Keying

M P H Miles Per Hour

m s Milliseconds

MSG Message

m V millivolt

m W milliwatt
/ ^

M W O D Multiple Word of Day. Up to 31 MWODs can be loaded

into the radio. The MWOD elements are entered into
«<^
memory locations 1-31. The MWOD is only valid on the
date assigned to it.

MWOD Mode HAVEQUICKII frequency hopping mode that has the

identical capabilities as the SWOD mode, and provides
multiple day operation.
-N-

N/A Not Applicable

N B Narrowband (5 kHz satellite channel)

N C D Net Control Device KYX-15 or AN/CYZ-IO DTD

N C S Net Control Station

Net A group of radios that share common communications

parameters, such as frequencies, etc.
Net Master In SINCGARS operations, the station responsible for
establishing and maintaining a net. Only one can exists in
a net as it maintains net time.

Net Member In SINCGARS operations, the name used for net

members who are not the Net Master.

Net Numbers A five digit code that programs the entry point in the
WOD frequency hopping pattern allowing for multiple
radio net operations using a common WOD and TOD.

Ni-Cd Nickel-Cadmium, Composition of the BB-590 type

battery.

C-9
/ • ^
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-N- - Continued

N i - M H Nickel Metal-hydride, Composition of the BB-390 type

battery.

N M E A National Marine Electronics Association

N C A A National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

National Stock Number

Operational Date The TOD message includes the operational date. This
information allows the radio to select the MWOD
assigned to the current date.
Over-the-Air

O T A R Over-the-Air Rekeying. The ability to transmit a

COMSEC key securely to automatically or manually
rekey the receiving radio set.
O T A T Over-the-Air Transfer. The process of transmitting a
COMSEC key to a receiving radio and downloading it to
a fill device.

O V M Options Validation Matrix

Orderwire

Power Amplifier

Personal Computer

Primary Channel Controller

PCFG Port Configuration

P C I D M Personal Computer Improved Data Modem

P C K T Packet (data transmission)

Peak Envelope Power

Period or periodic

P L G R Portable Lightweight GPS Receiver AN/PSN-11

PGM Program

P O RT C F G S Port Configurations

POST P o w e r - O n S e l f - Te s t

P o i n t - To - P o i n t P r o t o c o l
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-P- - Continued

Precise Positioning Service

Priority Receive Channel The AN/PRC-117F can scan a designated priority receive
net. The receiver scans all preset scan nets on the first
pass. During all subsequent passes, it samples the priority
receive net every other net in scan list.

Priority Transmit Channel The net on which the radio transmits if the Push-To-Talk
(PTT) button is pressed when the radio is actively
scanning.
Phase shift Keying. The varying of the phase of a signal
in accordance with the modulating signal. Each phase
shift represents a different bit value.

P l a i n Te x t

Point to Point

P u s h - t o - Ta l k

P U F O W Planned Update Forward Order Wire

P W B Printed Wiring Board

Radio Presets A predefined set of radio parameters including frequency,

modulation, COMSEC, and data parameters.

Ranging A process in UHF DAM A SATCOM where the radio

determines its distance from the satellite by actively
transmitting and receiving timing signals provided in the
DAMA waveform.

Ranging Epoch A method by which a determination is made concerning

how often ranging is re-done. Generally, faster moving
units perform ranging more often than stationary radios.

RBECS Revised Battlefield Electronic System

R C C O W Return Channel Control Orderwire

RBECS DTD Software. Application software for

AN/CYZ-10 that supports SINCGARS and
HAVEQUICK FH data loading.
Radio Frequency

Root-Mean-Squared (Power Measurement)

C - 11
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-R- - Continued

R O W Return Orderwire

Radio Programming Application

Receive Signal Strength Indicator

R T, R / T Recei ver-T ransmitter

Request To Send
R e c e i v e Va r i a b l e

Receive

R X A K Receive Automatic Rekey

R X M K Receive Manual Rekey

Situational Awareness

Satellite Access Authorization

Strategic Air Command (also called Air Combat

Command, US Air Force)

Satellite Authorization Request

S A R K Saville Advanced Remote Keying

SATCOM Satellite Communications

S AT I D S a t e l l i t e I d e n t i fi c a t i o n

S B P S K Shaped Bipolar Phase Shift Keying

SINCGARS Data Mode

SFOW System Forward Orderwire

Super High Frequency (3 - 30 GHz)

SINAD Signal to Noise and Distortion
SINCGARS Single Channel Ground and Airbome Radio System
SINCGARS TSK A COMSEC Key that determines the pseudo-random
hopping pattem of the SINCGARS waveform.

System Improvement Program

Simple Key Loader

Sub-Miniature B (Connector Type)

Signal Operations Instructions

 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
hfARmS' GLOSSARY

-S- - Continued

SOPs Standard Operating Procedures

SOQPSK Shaped Offset Quadrature

/ « s SPAWAR Space and Naval Warfare System Command (US Navy)

Squelch, SQL The ability to mute the receive audio until the radio
receives the appropriate signal. Can be either digital
squelch, tone squelch, or noise squelch.
STC Satellite TDMA Capability - a waveform

STD Standard

S W O D Single Word of Day

SWOD Mode HAVEQUICK I frequency hopping mode that allows
radios with identical TOD, WOD, and net number to
synchronize and communicate. The TOD with date
00/00/80 is used in the AN/PRC-117F to place it in
HAVEQUICK I.
SYNC Synchronous
1 ^

-T-
i*m,

TACSAT Tactical Satellite

/ « ^
T E A Terminal Base Address, DAMA address system (00001 -
65535)

T C M Tr e l l i s C o d e d M o d u l a t i o n

. « S
T D Time Delay

T D M A Time Division Multiple Access

T E K Traffic Encryption Key

T F Ta c F i r e

T F O M Time Figure of Merit. A relative number from the PLGR

indicating time accuracy.
T O D Time-of-Day. Allows for synchronization of all radios in
a HAVEQUICK frequency hopping net.

- « y T / R Tr a n s m i t / R e c e i v e

TRANSEC, TSEC Transmission Security

T R K E K Transfer KEK. A COMSEC key used to unwrap black

TEKs loaded to the radio set. The TRKEK must be loaded

prior to attempting to load a black TEK. Only used with

theAN/CYZ-lODTD.
> « ^

C-13
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

-T--Continued

Transmission Security Key. A key used to encrypt some

aspect of the communications system other than the
t r a f fi c i n f o r m a t i o n .

Time Signal Station. A beacon station setup to

continuously transmit HAVEQUICK TOD to stations
requiring the sync. A fixed frequency UHF-AM channel
is used to receive this signal.

Transmit

TX AK Transmit Automatic Rekey

T X M K Transmit Manual Rekey

User Application Software

UCOM User Communications

User Datagram Protocol

UHF Follow On Satellite. Newer generation of US

Military UHF geosynchronous communications
satellites.

Ultra High Frequency

United Kingdom

United States

Universal Time Coordinated, same as time zone ZULU or

G M T.

U T M Universal Transverse Mercator

Vo l t ( s )

Volts Alternating Current

Vehicular Adapter Unit

Volts Direct Current

Vo i c e / D a t a P r o c e s s o r

Variable Generate

Very High Frequency

V I N S O N 16 kbps data rate encryption using CVSD, KY-57
compatible for voice or data.
 AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

- V- - C o n t i n u e d

Vo i c e

Voice Priority Over Data

Vehicular Radio Communications System

Vessel Traffic System

Variable Update

Watts, Weight

Wideband 25 kHz satellite channel

World Geodetic Standard 1984. Common worldwide

military map datum developed for the GPS system.
Word of Day. Configures the frequency hopping pattern
and rate. WODs may vary in length from one to six
segments.

Wireless Messaging Transfer

Tr a n s m i t

A command sequence which erases all programmed

channel parameters, option settings, frequency hopping
data and COM SEC keys.

Time zone indicator for Universal Time used in

synchronizing frequency hopping modes.
AN/PRC-117F(V)(C)
GLOSSARY

This page intentionally left blank.

 NAME: D AT E :

COMPANY:

ADDRESS:

CITY: STATE:

COUNTRY:

PHONE NUMBER (INCLUDE AREA CODE):

NOTE

U . S . P O S TA L R E G U L AT I O N S N O L O N G E R P E R M I T T H E U S E O F S TA P L E S . P L E A S E S E A L T H I S F O R M W I T H TA P E .

MAKE FIRST FOLD HERE

P O S TA G E W I L L B E PA I D B Y A D D R E S S E E

H A R R I S C O R P O R AT I O N
R F C O M M U N I C AT I O N S D I V I S I O N
1 6 8 0 U N I V E R S I T Y AV E N U E
ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14610-1887

AT T N : T E C H N I C A L S E R V I C E S
 RF Communications Division | 1680 University Ave | Rochester, NY USA 14610
assuredcommunications" Te l ! 585-244-5830. Fax! 585-242-4755 www.harrls.com